Okuma Manuals 391

8/15/2019 Okuma Manuals 391

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/okuma-manuals-391 1/397

CNC SYSTEMS

OSP-U100M

OSP-U10M

SPECIAL FUNCTION MANUAL

(No. 1)

(2nd Edition)

Pub. No.

4202-E-R1

(ME51-197-R2)

October

1999

KUMA



ME00-001-R1

P-(i)

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

SAFETY

PRECAUTIONS

The

machine is

equipped

with

safety

devices

which

serve

to

protect

personnel

and

the machine

itself

from hazards arising

from unforeseen accidents.

However,

operators

must

not

rely exclusively

on these

safety devices: they

must also

become

fully

familiar

with the

safety guidelines

presented

below to

ensure

accident-free

operation.

This

instruction manual and

the

warning signs

attached

to

the machine

cover

only

those

hazards which

Okuma can predict.

Be aware

that

they

do

not

cover

al l

possible

hazards.

1. Precautions Relating

to Machine Installation

(1) Install

the machine at

a

site where the following conditions

(the

conditions

for

achievement

of

the

guaranteed accuracy) apply.

-

Ambient

temperature:

1

7

to 25

C

(62.6

to

77

T)

40 %

to

75%

at

20*0

(68°F)

(no

condensation)

Ambient

humidity:

-

Site

not

subject

to direct

sunlight

or

excessive vibration; environment as

free of

dust,

acid,

corrosive

gases, and

salt

spray

as

possible.

(2)

Prepare

a

primary power supply

that

complies

with the following

requirements.

-

Voltage:

-

Voltage fluctuation:

-

Power

supply

frequency:

50/60

Hz

-

Do not

draw the primary

power

supply

from a

distribution

panel

that

also

supplies

a

major

noise

source

(for

example

an

electric

welder

or

electric discharge

machine)

since

this

could

cause

malfunction

of

the

CNC unit.

-

If

possible

connect

the

machine

to

a

ground

not

used by

any

other

equipment.

If there

is

no choice

but to use

a common ground,

the other equipment must not

generate a large

amount

of noise

(such

as

an electric welder or electric

discharge

machine).

(3)

Installation

Environment

Observe

the following

points

when installing

the

control enclosure.

-

Make sure that the

CNC unit

will

not

be

subject

to direct

sunlight.

-

Make sure that the control enclosure will not be splashed

with

chips, water, or

oil.

-

Make

sure

that the control

enclosure and

operation

panel are

no t

subject

to

excessive

vibrations

or shock.

-

The permissible

ambient

temperature range

for

the control enclosure is

0

to

40°C

(32

to

104°F).

-

The

permissible

ambient

humidity

rangefor

the control enclosure is

30 to

95 %

(nocondensation).

-

The

maximum

alt itude at which the

control enclosure

can

be

used

is 1

000

m

(3281

ft.).

200

V

± 10 % max.



ME00-001-R1

P-(ii)

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

2.

Points

to Check before

Turning

on the Power

(1)

Close al l the doors of

the

control enclosure

and

operation

panel

to

prevent

the

entry

of

water,

chips,

and dust.

(2)

Make

absolutely

sure

that

there

is

nobody

near

the

moving parts

of

the

machine,

and

that

there

are no

obstacles

around

the

machine,

before

starting

machine

operation.

(3)

When

turning on

the

power, turn on

the main

power

disconnect switch

first,

then

the

CONTROL

ON switch on the operation panel.

3. Precautions

Relating

to

Operation

(1)

After turning on

the

power,

carry out

inspection and

adjustment in accordance

with the

daily

inspection procedure described

in this instruction

manual.

(2)

Use tools whose

dimensions

and type are

appropriate

for

the

work

undertaken

and

the

machine

specifications.

Do

not

use

badly worn

tools

since they

can cause

accidents.

(3) Do not for any reason touch

the

spindle or tool while spindle

indexing

is

in progress

since the

spindle could rotate: this is

dangerous.

(4)

Check that the workpiece and tool are

properly

secured.

(5)

Never

touch a workpiece or tool

while it

is

rotating:

this

is

extremely

dangerous.

(6)

Do

not remove

chips by

hand while

machining

is

in

progress since this is

dangerous. Always

stop the

machine first, then

remove

the

chips with

a brush or

broom.

(7)

Do not

operate

the machine

with

an y of

the

safety

devices removed. Do not

operate

the

machine with

a ny of

the covers removed

unless

it

is

necessary

to

do so .

(8) Always

stop

the

machine

before mounting or removing a tool.

(9)

Do not

approach

or

touch

any moving part of the machine while it is operating.

(10) Do not touch

any

switch or

button

with

wet

hands. This is

extremely dangerous.

(11)

Before using

any

switch or button on the

operation panel,

check

that

it

is

the one

intended.



ME00-001-R1

P-(iii)

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

4.

Precautions Relating to the ATC

(1)

The tool

clamps

of the

magazine,

spindle,

etc.,

are

designed

for

reliability,

bu t it is

possible

that

a

tool

could

be

released and

fall

in

the event of an unforeseen

accident,

exposing you

to

danger:

do not

touch

or

approach

the ATC

mechanism during

ATC

operation.

(2)

Always

inspect

and

change

tools

in

the

magazine

in

the

manual

magazine

interrupt

mode.

(3)

Remove

chips

adhering to the

magazine

at

appropriate

intervals

since

they

can cause

misoperation.

Do

not

use compressed

air

to remove these

chips

since

it

will

only

push

the

chips

further

in.

(4)

If

the ATC

stops

during

operation

for

some

reason

and

it

has to be

inspected

without

turning

the

power off, do not touch the

ATC

since it

may

start

moving suddenly.

5.

On

Finishing

Work

(1)

On

finishing work, clean

the vicinity of the

machine.

(2)

Return the

ATC,

AP C

and other

equipment

to

the predetermined

retraction

position.

(3) Always turn

off

the

power

to

the machine before leaving it.

(4)

To

turn off the

power,

turn off the

CONTROL

ON

switch

on

the

operation panel

first,

then the

main power disconnect switch.



ME00-001-R1

P-(iv)

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

6. Precautions during Maintenance

Inspection

and When Trouble

Occurs

In

order to

prevent

unforeseen

accidents, damage

to the

machine, etc., it

is essential to

observe the

following points

when

performing

maintenance

inspections

or

during

checking when

trouble

has

occurred.

(1)

When

trouble

occurs, press the emergency

stop

button on

the

operation panel to

stop

the

machine.

(2)

Consult the person

responsible for maintenance to

determine

what corrective measures

need

to

be taken.

(3) If two or

more

persons

must work together,

establish

signals

so

that

they

can communicate to

confirm

safety

before

proceeding

to

each

new

step.

(4)

Use

only

the

specified replacement

parts

an d

fuses.

(5)

Always

turn

the

power off

before

starting

inspection

or

changing

parts.

(6)

When

parts

are removed

during

inspection or repair

work, always

replace

them as

they

were

and

secure

them

properly with

their

screws,

etc.

(7)

When

carrying

out

inspections

in

which

measuring

instruments

are used

for

example

voltage

checks

make

sure

the

instrument

is

properly

calibrated.

(8)

Do

not

keep

combustible

materials or metals

inside the

control enclosure

or

terminal

box.

(9)

Check

that

cables and

wires

are

free

of

damage:

damaged cables and

wires

will

cause

current

leakage

and electric

shocks.

(10)

Maintenance inside the Control Enclosure

a)

Switch

the

main

power

disconnect

switch

OFF before

opening

the control enclosure

door.

b)

Even when the main

power

disconnect switch is

OFF,

there

may

some residual

charge in

the

servo

amplifier

and

spindle

drive

unit,

and for this reason

only

service

personnel

are

permitted

to

perform

any

work

on these

units. Even then,

they must observe the following

precautions.

-

Servo

amplifier

Discharge the residual voltage

one minute after

turning

off

the

breaker inside the unit.

-

Spindle

drive

unit

Discharge

the residual

voltage

one minute after

turning

off the main

power

disconnect switch.

c)

The control enclosure contains the NC

unit,

and the NC

unit

ha s

a

printed

circuit board

whose memory

stores the

machining programs,

parameters,

etc.

In

order to

ensure

that

the

contents of this

memory

will

be

retained

even when the

power

is switched

off,

the

memory

is

supplied

with

power

by

a

battery.

Depending

on

how

the

printed circuit

boards

are

handled,

the

contents of

the

memory

may

be destroyed and for this

reason

only

service

personnel

should handle

these

boards.



ME00-001-R1

P-(v)

SAFETY

PRECAUTIONS

(11) Periodic Inspection of the Control Enclosure

a) Cleaning the

cooling

unit

The

cooling

unit

in

the

door

of the control enclosure serves to prevent excessive temperature

rise inside

the control enclosure

and

increase the

reliability

of theNCunit.

Inspect

the

following

points every

three

months.

-

Is the

fan motor

inside the

cooling

unit working?

The

motor is

normal

if

there

is

a

strong draft from the unit.

-

Is

the external

air

inlet

blocked?

If

it is

blocked,

clean it with

compressed

air.

7.

General Precautions

(1)

Keep

the

vicinity

of the machine

clean and

tidy.

(2)

Wear

appropriate

clothing

while

working,

and

follow

the

instructions

of

someone with sufficient

training.

(3) Make

sure that

your clothes

and hai r

cannot

become

entangled in

the

machine. Machine

operators

must

wear

safety

equipment

such as

safety

shoes and safety

goggles.

(4) Machine

operators

must

read

the

instruction manual

carefully

an d make sure

of

the

correct

procedure

before operating

the machine.

(5)

Memorize the

position

of

the

emergency

stop

button

so that

you

can

press

it immediately

at

any

time

and from

an y

position.

(6)

Do

not

access

the inside

of

the control

panel,

transformer, motor,

etc.,

since

they

contain

high-voltage

terminals and

other

components which are

extremely dangerous.

(7) If two

or more

persons must work together, establish

signals

so

that they can communicate

to

confirm

safety

before

proceeding to

each

new

step.



ME00-001-R1

P-(vi)

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

8. Symbols Used in This

Manual

The

following

warning

indications are

used in

this manual to draw attention to information of

particular

importance.

Read the

instructions

marked

with these

symbols

carefully

and

follow them.

ADANGER

:

Indicates

an

imminent

hazard

which,

if

not

avoided,

will

result

in

death

or

serious

injury.

|AMiG|

|

:

Indicates hazards

which, if

not

avoided,

could result in

death

or

serious

injury.

ACAUTION

:

lnclicates

hazards which,

if

not

avoided,

could

result

in

minor

injuries

or

damage

to

devices

'

or

equipment.

NOTICE

:

Indicates precautions

relating

to

operation

or use.



4202-E

P-(i)

INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTION

This

special

function

manual

contains instructions for

the

OSR

A

careful

reading

of the manual will be of

great

assistance

in obtaining

the full benefit

of al l

the

superior

functions the machine ha s to offer. For the

most

complete

understanding,

this manual should be

read in

conjunction with

the

“Operation Manual

for

OSP”, as

the two

manuals

are

very

closely

related.



A.

ANIMATION FUNCTION

TOOL

PATH

DISPLAY FUNCTION

.

C.

NC OPERATION

MONITOR

Hi2-NC

FUNCTION

(HIGH-SPEED

NC).

E.

SYNCHRONIZED

TAPPING

FUNCTION

TOOL MANAGEMENT

FUNCTION.

G. TOOL

LIFE

MANAGEMENT

FUNCTION

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)

FOR

HORIZONTAL

MC MULTI-PLANE

APC

(FOR

MX

SERIES)

H.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)

FOR

HORIZONTAL

MC MULTI-STATION

APC

(FOR

MC

SERIES)

I

SPINDLE

THERMAL

DEVIATION

COMPENSATION

SYSTEM

v2

(FOR

STANDARD

AND

ATTACHMENT

MOUNTABLE SPINDLES)

J.

READ/WRITE

AND

GET/PUT

FUNCTIONS

(WITH FILE

INPUT/OUTPUT

FUNCTION)

K.

L.

Hi-CUT

Since this operation manual describes the special specifications

(optional specifications) of

OSP,

some

portions

may

not

apply

to

your

machine. Refer to

your

machine’s

Final

Specifications

to

check the

specifications

before

reading

this

manual.



4202-E

P-(i)

TABLE OF

CONTENTS

TABLE

OF CONTENTS

PAGE

A.

ANIMATION FUNCTION

SECTION 1

GENERAL A-1

Special

Features

A-1

.

2. Main Functions

A-1

3.

Screen

Layout

4.

Animation

Screen,

Explanation

of

Terminology

A-5

A-6

SECTION

2

TYPES OF ANIMATION

A-12

1

.

Graphic

Display

Coordinate

System

2.

Explanation

of

Animation Related Functions . .

2-1.

Trace/Animation

2-2.

Tool Kind

2-3.

Material

2-4.

Graphic Erase

2-5. Data

ON/OFF

2-6. High Draw

Graphic

Data

2-8.

Auto Scale

2-9. Area

Change

2-10.

Angle Change

2-11.

Blank

Definition

Function (Blank Define) .

2-12.

Tool Shape Setting

3.

Explanation

of

Animation Related NC

Program

4.

Rotary

Axis, Parallel Axis, 5-Face

Cutting

A-12

A-1

6

A-18

A-20

A-22

A-22

A-23

A-23

A-23

-7.

A-40

A-41

A-44

A-46

A-78

A-82

A-91

SECTION

3 ANIMATION DISPLAY METHOD A-94



4202-E

P-(ii)

TABLE OF

CONTENTS

PAGE

B. TOOL PATH DISPLAY FUNCTION

SECTION

1

OVERVIEW

B-1

1.

Features

B-1

2.

Major

Functions B-1

SECTION

2

SETTING OF

DISPLAY

DATA

B-3

1

.

Data

Setting in

the

Graphic

Data

Mode

2. Graphic Data Setting Parameters

3. Data Setting in the

Plane Chance

Mode

B-3

B-4

B-1

2

SECTION 3 TOOL PATH DRAWING B-14

1.

Operations

2. Contents

of

Display

3.

Restart

and

Sequence

Restart

Operations

B-14

B-1

4

B-1

5

SECTION

4

PARAMETERS

B-1

7

C.

NC

OPERATION

MONITOR

SECTION 1 OVERVIEW

C-1

SECTION

2 NC

HOUR

METER C-2

1

.

Contents

of

Display

C-2

2.

Count

Data

and

Set

Data

C-3

3. Alarm

C-3



4202-E

P-(iii)

TABLE OF

CONTENTS

PAGE

SECTION 3

NC

WORK COUNTER C-4

1.

Content

of

Display

C-4

2. Count

Data

and

Set

Data C-4

3.

Alarm

C-5

D.

Hi2-NC

FUNCTION (HIGH-SPEED

NC)

SECTION

1

OVERVIEW

D-1

SECTION

2 HIGH-SPEED NC

INTERPOLATION

FUNCTION D-2

SECTION

3 TOLERANCE

CONTROL

FUNCTION D-3

1. Designating

Tolerance Control

Mode

D-3

2.

Tolerance

Control Parameters

D-4

3.

Tolerance

Control Mode

Designation D-7

4.

Tolerance

Control Guide

D-1

3

5.

Alarm

D-1

5

E.

SYNCHRONIZED TAPPING FUNCTION

SECTION 1 OVERVIEW

E-1

SECTION

2

COMMANDS

E-2

SECTION 3 TAPPING CYCLE OPERATIONS

E-5

SECTION

4

PRECAUTIONS

E-7



4202-E

P-(iv)

TABLE OF

CONTENTS

PAGE

SECTION 5

TORQUE

MONITORING

FUNCTION

DURING SYNCHRONIZED TAPPING

E-8

SECTION

6 PARAMETERS E-13

F.

TOOL MANAGEMENT

FUNCTION

SECTION 1 OVERVIEW F-1

1

.

Overview

F-1

SECTION

2

DESCRIPTION OF MANAGEMENT

FOR

EACH TOOL

NUMBER ...

F-2

1

. Tool Offset

Number

F-2

2.

Group

Number

(optional) F-4

3. Tool

Management

Mode

(optional)

F-4

4.

OK/NG

Evaluation

(optional)

5.

Tool

Life

Management

Data

(optional)

6.

Distinction between Commanded Tool and Spare

Tool

(optional)

F-5

F-6

F-6

SECTION 3

CHANGEOVER

OF

SPARE TOOL

(OPTIONAL) F-7

1

.

Selection of

Spare

Tool

2.

Changeover

of

Tool Offset

Number

F-7

F-7

SECTION

4

E NTRY A ND

DISPLAY OF TOOL

MANAGEMENT

DATA

F-8

Tool

Length

Offset

and

Cutter

Radius

Compensation F-8

.

2. ATC

Tool

Set F-10

3.

Tool

Management

Function F-1

1

4.

Tool

Group

F-1

2



4202-E

P-(v)

TABLE OF

CONTENTS

PAGE

SECTION 5 RESETTING DEFECTIVE TOOL

DATA

F-13

SECTION

6

MANAGEMENT OF

TOOLS FOR WHICH ATC IS NOT USED F-14

1

.

Command Format

F-14

2.

Tool

Data

Setting

3. Supplements

F-15

F-15

SECTION

7

ALARM

LIST

F-16

G. TOOL

LIFE

MANAGEMENT FUNCTION

SECTION

1

OVERVIEW

G-1

SECTION

2 ENTRY

OF TOOL

LIFE

MANAGEMENT

DATA G-2

1

.

Setting

Tool No.

for

Pot No

1 -1

. Setting Tool No. for P ot N o

2.

Setting

Tool

Life

Management

Data

Setting

Tool

Group

2-2.

Setting Management

Mode

2-3.

Setting SE T TIME

and

LEFT

TIME

Data

G-4

G-4

G-6

G-6

-1.

G-8

G-10

SECTION

3

COMMAND FOR ACTIVATING TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT

G-1

2

SECTION

4

RESETTING

TOOL

LIFE DATA

G-1

4

1

.

Fo r Usable Tools G-1

4

2. Changing

a Life-expired Tool

with

New

One G-15

3.

Setting

LEFT

TIME Data

to

the

Same

Value

as SET

TIME

Data for

All

Tools G-1

5



4202-E

P-(vi)

TABLE OF

CONTENTS

PAGE

SECTION 5 PROGRAM EXAMPLES G-16

1.

Tool

Life

Management by

Tool Used

Time

Data

2.

Tool

Life

Management

by

Count

Data

of

Machining

Cycles

G-16

G-17

SECTION

6

ALARM

LIST G-18

H.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)

FOR

HORIZONTAL MC

MULTI-PLANE

APC

SECTION

1

PREFACE

H-1

SECTION

2

PPC

CYCLE

OPERATION

PROCEDURES H-3

SECTION

3

CREATING

THE

MACHINING PROGRAM

FO R

PPC

CYCLE OPERATION

H-4

1

.

Creating

the

Pallet Exchange Machining Program

2. Creating

the PPC

Cycle

Operation

Machining Program

H-4

H-4

SECTION

4

PPC

PANEL OPERATION

H-5

1

.

Touch

Panel

H-6

Status

transition

using

the MENU and PAGE

Keys

on

the

Touch Panel

Pallet

Carry-in

Screen

Pallet Carry-out Screen

Machining

Schedule

Display

Screen

Manual

Operation

Screen

H-6

-1.

H-8-2.

H-10-3.

H-1

2-4.

1-5.

H-1

4

2.

PPC

Mode Switch

H-17

3.

Schedule

Switch

H-17

Automatic Schedule-1.

H-17

3-2.

Waiting

Schedule

3-3.

Interrupt

Schedule

3-4.

WAITING SCHEDULE STOP Switch

H-17

H-17

H-1

8



4202-E

P-(vii)

TABLE OF

CONTENTS

PAGE

4.

EMPTY

PALLET Carry-in Switch H-18

5.

IN

Switch

H-18

6. OUT

Switch

H-18

7. PPC

CYCLE

START

Switch/CYCLE

START Switch

7-1

.

PPC

CYCLE

START

Switch

on

the PPC Panel and the CYCLE

START Switch

on

the Machine

Operation

Panel in the PPC ON

(CONT,

ONE

CYCLE

7-2.

PPC CYCLE

START Switch

on

the

PP C

Panel and

the CYCLE

START Switch

on the Machine

Operation

Panel

in

the PP C OFF State

H-19

H-19

H-20

8.

EMG. STOP Switch

H-20

9. RESTART Switch H-20

SECTION 5 CARRYING

IN

PALLETS

H-21

1

. Carry-in by

the Automatic and

Waiting Schedules

2.

Carry-in

by

the

Interrupt

Schedule

2-1. Machining

Schedule

in the

Interrupt Schedule Mode

on

PP C Panel

3.

Carring in

the

Empty

Pallet

4. Carry-in While

the

PPC

is

Off

H-22

H-24

H-26

H-28

H-30

SECTION

6 CARRYING OUT PALLETS H-32

1.

Carry-out while the

PPC is

On

or Off

2. Automatic

Carrying-out

of

Processed

Pallet when

Only

Tw o

Pallets Are

Used

H-33

H-35

SECTION

7

ASSIGNING PPC CYCLE

OPERATION

MACHINING PROGRAMS

TO

PALLET NUMBERS

H-36

1.

Assigning Procedures H-36

SECTION

8

EDTING

MACHINING

SCHEDULE

H-39

SECTION

9 MACHINING PROGRAM

AND

SYSTEM VARIABLES H-43

1. VPLDT

[1] to

VPLDT [1

2J/VPPCP

H-43

2.

VPLNO H-46



4202-E

P-(viii)

TABLE OF

CONTENTS

PAGE

SECTION 10 SETTING SYSTEM MAINTENANCE PARAMETERS

H-47

1. Setting

Data on

the

SETUP.WAITING

ST/MAC.CIR

PNO.

SE T

Screen

H-47

2.

Setting Data on the

[Pallet

Station

No.-Pallet

No.

Table

Screen]

3.

Communication Interface between the Touch Panel

and

NC

(RS232C

Communication

Parameters)

H-48

H-49

SECTION

11

CHECKING

THE PPC

SYSTEM CONDITION

H-50

SECTION 12

NP

COMMAND H-51

SECTION 13

ERRORS

DISPLAYED

ON

THE

PPC

PANEL

H-52

1.

Error at

Carry-in

Operation

. .

2.

Errors

at

Carry-out

Operation

H-52

H-52

3.

Other Errors

H-53

SECTION

14

GENERATED ALARMS H-54

I.

PP C

(PALLETE POOL

LINE

CONTROL) FOR HORIZONTAL MC

MULTI-STATION

APC

SECTION

1

PREFACE

1-1

SECTION

2

PPC CYCLE

OPERATION

PROCEDURES I-3

SECTION

3 CREATING

THE MACHINING PROGRAM

FO R

PPC

CYCLE

OPERATION

I-4

1

.

Creating

the

Pallet

Exchange Machining Program

2. Creating the

PPC

Cycle Operation

Machining Program

I-4

I-4



4202-E

P-(ix)

TABLE OF

CONTENTS

PAGE

SECTION

4

PPC

PANEL

OPERATION 1-5

1.

Touch

Panel

I

-6

Status

transition

using

the

MENU and PAGE

Keys

on the

Touch

Panel

Pallet Carry-in

Screen

Pallet

Carry-out Screen

Machining

Schedule

Display

Screen

Manual

Operation

Screen

I

-6

-1.

I-7-2.

I-9

-3.

1-11

-4.

1-5.

1-13

2. PPC

Mode

Switch

1-15

3.

Schedule Switch

1-15

3-1.

Automatic Schedule

1-15

3-2.

Waiting

Schedule

3-3.

Interrupt

Schedule

3-4.

WAITING

SCHEDULE

STOP

Switch

1-15

1-16

1-16

4.

EMPTY

PALLET

Carry-in

Switch

1-16

5. IN Switch 1-16

6.

OUT Switch

1-16

7.

PPC

CYCLE

START

Switch/CYCLE

START

Switch

7-1

.

PPC

CYCLE START

Switch on the PPC Panel and the CYCLE

START

Switch

on

the Machine

Operation

Panel in

the

PPC

ON

(CONT,

ONE CYCLE

7-2.

PPC CYCLE START

Switch

on

the PP C

Panel and

the CYCLE

START

Switch

on

the

Machine

Operation

Panel

in

the PP C OFF State

1-16

1-17

1-18

8.

EMG. STOP Switch 1-18

9. RESTART Switch 1-18

SECTION

5

CARRYING

IN

PALLETS

1-19

1.

Carry-in

by

the Automatic and

Waiting

Schedules

2.

Carry-in

by

the

Interrupt

Schedule

2-1.

Machining

Schedule

in the

Interrupt

Schedule Mode on PP C Panel

3.

Carring in

the

Empty

Pallet

4.

Carry-in

While the

PPC

is Off

I-20

I-22

I-24

I-26

I-28



4202-E

P-(x)

TABLE OF

CONTENTS

PAGE

SECTION 6 CARRYING OUT PALLETS 1-30

5.

Carry-out

while

the PPC is

On

or

Off

1-31

SECTION

7

ASSIGNING PPC CYCLE

OPERATION MACHINING

PROGRAMS

TO

PALLET

NUMBERS

I-33

6.

Assigning

Procedures I-33

SECTION 8 EDTING MACHINING SCHEDULE I-36

SECTION 9 MACHINING PROGRAM

AND

SYSTEM VARIABLES I-39

1

. VPLDT

[1]

to

VPLDT

[1

2J/VPPCP

I-39

2. VPLNO I-42

SECTION

10

SETTING SYSTEM

MAINTENANCE

PARAMETERS

I-43

1

. Setting

Data

on

the

SETUP,

MAC-INT. PNO. SET Screen

2. Setting Data on

the

PALLET CARRIER

NO.-PALLET

NO. TABLE Screen

I-43

I-44

3. Communication Interface between the Touch Panel and NC

(RS232C

Communication

Parameters)

I-45

SECTION

11

CHECKING

THE

PPC SYSTEM CONDITION

I-46

SECTION

12

EXCHANGING PALLETS

WITH

THE

PPC

FUNCTION

OFF

I-47

SECTION

13

DNC-B

AND DNC-DT

OPERATION

I-48

1.

Parameter Setting Screen

2.

DNC-B

Operation

from the

PPC .

3.

DNC-DT

Operation

from the

PP C

i-48

I-49

I-50



4202-E

P-(xi)

TABLE OF

CONTENTS

PAGE

SECTION

14

ERRORS DISPLAYED ON

THE

PPC

PANEL

1-51

1.

Error

at

Carry-in Operation

. .

2. Errors at

Carry-out

Operation

1-51

1-51

3.

Other

Errors

I-52

4.

AP C Interlock Error

I-53

SECTION

15 GENERATED

ALARMS

I-54

J.

SPINDLE

THERMAL

DEVIATION COMPENSATION SYSTEM

v2

(FOR

STANDARD

AND

ATTACHMENT MOUNTABLE

SPINDLES)

SECTION

1

OUTLINE

J-1

SECTION

2

COMPENSATION

SYSTEM

CONFIGURATION

J-2

SECTION 3 SYSTEM

I

J-3

1

.

Screen for

Checking

Thermal Deviation

Compensation Data

1-1.

A/D

SAMPLING

1-2.

A/DAVE

TIMES

1-3.

TEMPERATURE

1-4.

ESTIMATE

1-5.

COMP.

1-6.

OVERALL

VALUE

1-7. AXIS

(Thermal Deviation)

1/2/3

1-8.

ROTARY DEV.

J-3

J-3

J-3

J-3

J-3

J-3

J-3

J-4

J-4

2. Alarm

Message

3.

Precaution Regarding Thermal Deviation

Compensation

Parameters

3-1. Screen Transition

J-5

J-8

J-8

4.

Thermal Deviation

Comp.

Common Parameter

Screen

1 (Page

1)

4-1.

COMPENSATION SW

(No.1)

J-9

J-10



4202-E

P-(xii)

TABLE OF

CONTENTS

PAGE

4-2.

SENSOR

(CH1

to

CH8)

(No.2 to

9)

4-3.

SCREEN SWITCH

(No.10 )

4-4.

TEMP

SAMPLING

(No.11)

4-5. AVERAGING TIMES

(No.12)

4-6.

TRAVERSE

(X),

(Y),

(Z)

(No.

13

to 15)

4-7. M CODE

COMP.

(NO.

16)

5.

Thermal

Deviation

Comp.

Common

Parameter

Screen

1 (Page

2)

5-1.

QUIT

VALUE

(No.1)

5-2.

ROTARY

FACTOR

(No.2,

3)

5-3.

PROCESS SWITCH

(No.4)

5-4. COMPENSATE

SE C (No.5)

5-5. JUDGING TIMING

(No.6)

5-6. SIDE

STEPS

(X3)

(Y3,

Z1

,

Z2 , Z3) (No. 7

to

11)

6.

Thermal

Deviation

Comp.

Common

Parameter

Screen

1 (Page

3)

6-1. OVERALL LIMIT

(X), (Y), (Z)

(NO.

12

to14)

6-2. ROTARY

DEV.

LIMIT (NO.

15)

6-3. ROTARY

DEV.

FACTOR

1, 2, 3, 4

(NO.

1

6 to

1

9)

6-4.

ROTARY

DEV.

FACTOR

5 (NO. 20)

7. Thermal Deviation Compensation Parameter Screen 2

(Page

1)

7-1.

HOT

SENSOR

(No.1)

7-2.

BASE

TEMP

SENSOR

(No.2)

7-3.

TM P ZERO

ADJUST

(No.3)

7-4. CONVERSION

TABLE

(No.4)

7-5. CORRECT

FACTOR

(No.5)

7-6.

TM P TIME

CONST (No.6)

7-7. FIXED TIME

CONST

(No.7)

7-8.

TEMP

RISE

LIMIT (No.8)

8. Thermal Deviation Compensation Parameter Screen

2

(Page

2)

8-1. RISE

PARAMETER 1,

RISE

PARAMETER 2,

RISE BASE

MIN

(No. 9 to

11)

8-2. DROP

PARAMETER 1,

DROP

PARAMETER

2,

DROP

BASE

MIN (No.12

to

14)

8-3.

QUIT FACTOR

1,

QUIT FACTOR

2

(No. 15, 16 )

8-4.

STOP

RATIO

(NO.

17)

9.

Thermal Deviation Compensation Parameter Screen 3

(Page 1)

9-1. Thermal Deviation Compensation Amount

J-10

J-10

J-10

J-11

J-11

J-11

J-12

J-13

J-13

J-13

J-13

J-13

J-13

J-14

J-14

J-14

J-14

J-14

J-15

J-16

J-16

J-16

J-16

J-16

J-16

J-16

J-16

J-17

J-18

J-18

J-18

J-18

J-19

J-19



4202-E

P-(xiii)

TABLE OF

CONTENTS

PAGE

SECTION

4

SYSTEM

II

J-20

1.

Screen for

Checking

Thermal Deviation

Compensation

Data

1-1.

A/D

SAMPLING

1-2.

A/DAVE

TIMES

1-3.

TEMPERATURE

1-4.

ESTIMATE

1-5.

COMP.

1-6.

OVERALL

VALUE

1-7.

AXIS

(Thermal Deviation)

1/2/3

1-8.

ROTARY

DEV.

AT.

SPNDL

J-20

J-20

J-20

J-20

J-20

J-20

J-21

J-21

J-21

J-21-9.

2.

Alarm

Message

3.

Precaution

Regarding

Thermal Deviation Compensation Parameters

3-1.

Screen

Transition

J-22

J-25

J-26

4.

Thermal Deviation

Comp.

Common Parameter Screen

1 (Page 1)

4-1.

COMPENSATION

SW (No.1)

4-2. SENSOR

(CH1

to

CH8) (No.2

to

9)

4-3.

SCREEN SWITCH

(No.

10)

4-4.

TEMP

SAMPLING

(No.11)

4-5.

AVERAGING

TIMES

(No.12)

4-6. TRAVERSE

(X),

(Y),

(Z) (No.

13 to

15)

4-7. M

CODE

COMP.

(NO.16 )

5.

Thermal

Deviation

Comp.

Common Parameter Screen

1 (Page

2)

5-1.

QUIT

VALUE

(No.

1)

5-2. PROCESS SWITCH

(No.2)

5-3.

COMPENSATE SEC

(No.3)

5-4.

JUDGING TIMING (No.4)

5-5.

SIDE

STEPS (Z1,

Z2 ) (No.

5 to

6)

6. Thermal Deviation Comp. Common Parameter Screen

1

(Page 3)

6-1.

OVERALL

LIMIT

(X),

(Y),

(Z)

(NO.

7

to

9)

7.

Thermal Deviation Compensation Parameter Screen

2 (Page

1)

. .

7-1.

HOT SENSOR

(No.1)

7-2.

BASE

TEMP

SENSOR

(No.2)

7-3.

TM P

ZERO

ADJUST

(No.3)

J-27

J-28

J-28

J-28

J-28

J-28

J-29

J-29

J-30

J-31

J-31

J-31

J-31

J-31

J-32

J-32

J-33

J-34

J-34

J-34



4202-E

P-(xiv)

TABLE OF

CONTENTS

PAGE

7-4.

CONVERSION TABLE

(No.4)

7-5.

CORRECT

FACTOR (No.5)

7-6.

TM P

TIME

CONST

(No.

6)

7-7. FIXED TIME

CONST

(No.7)

7-8.

TEMP

RISE

LIMIT (No.8)

8.

Thermal

Deviation

Compensation

Parameter

Screen 2 (Page 2)

8-1.

RISE

PARAMETER

1,

RISE

PARAMETER 2,

RISE

BASE MIN

(No.

9

to

11)

8-2.

DROP

PARAMETER 1,

DROP

PARAMETER

2,

DROP

BASE MIN

(No.12 to 14)

8-3.

QUIT

FACTOR

1

,

QUIT FACTOR 2

(No.

15,

16)

8-4.

STOP

RATIO

(NO.

17)

J-34

J-34

J-34

J-34

J-34

J-35

J-36

J-36

J-36

J-36

9.

Thermal

Deviation

Compensation

AT.

Parameter Screen

3

(Page

1)

1

0.

Thermal

Deviation

Compensation

AT.

Parameter

Screen 3

(Page

2)

J-37

J-38

11 .

Thermal Deviation

Compensation

AT.

Parameter Screen

3

(Page 3)

11-1.

SIDE STEPS (X3,

Y3 ,

Z3 , AT.

SPNDL)

(NO.18)

11-2. ROTARY

FACTOR

1, 2 (AT. SPNDL) (NO.19, 20)

12.

Thermal

Deviation AT-No.

and AT-PARAM.

No .

Screen

4

(Page

1) .

12-1.

AT.PARAM.NO

12-2. B

AXIS

ANG.,

C AXIS ANG

1

3.

Thermal Deviation

Compensation

Parameter

Screen

5

(Page

1

) . . .

13-1

. Thermal Deviation

Compensation Amount

J-39

J-39

J-39

J-40

J-40

J-40

J-41

J-41

SECTION

5

ALARM

MESSAGE

J-42

SECTION

6

PRECAUTION REGARDING

THERMAL

DEVIATION

COMPENSATION PARAMETERS J-44

1.

Screen Transition J-44

SECTION

7 THERMAL

DEVIATION COMPENSATION

PARAMETER

SCREEN

1

(PAGE 1)

J-45

1. COMPENSATION

SW (No.

1)

....

2.

SENSOR

(CH1

to

CH8) (No.2

to

9)

3.

SCREEN

SWITCH

(No.

10)

J-46

J-46

J-47



4202-E

P-(xv)

TABLE OF

CONTENTS

PAGE

4. TEMP SAMPLING

(No.11)

5. AVERAGING TIMES

(No.

12)

6. TRAVERSE (X), (Y),

(Z)

(No.

13

to 15)

J-47

J-47

J-47

SECTION 8 THERMAL DEVIATION

COMPENSATION

PARAMETER

SCREEN

1 (PAGE 2)

J-48

1.

QUIT VALUE

(No.1)

2.

ROTARY

FACTOR

(No.2,

3)

3.

PROCESS SWITCH (No.4)

4.

COMPENSATE

SE C

(No.

5)

5. JUDGING TIMING

(No.6)

6.

SIDE STEPS

(X) (Y, Z1

,

Z2 , Z 3) (No.

7

to

11

)

J-49

J-49

J-49

J-49

J-49

J-49

SECTION

9

THERMAL


PARAMETER

SCREEN

1 (PAGE 2)

J-50

1.

HOT

SENSOR

(No.1

2)

2.

BASE

TEMP

SENSOR

(No.13)

3.

TM P

ZERO

ADJUST

(No.1

4)

. .

4. CONVERSION TABLE

(No.

15 )

5.

CORRECT

FACTOR

(No.16 ) . .

6. TM P TIME

CONST

(No.17) .. .

7. FIXED TIME

CONST

(No.

18)

.

8.

TEMP

RISE

LIMIT

(No.1

9)

....

J-51

J-51

J-51

J-51

J-51

J-51

J-51

J-51

SECTION

10 THERMAL


PARAMETER

SCREEN

2

(PAGE 2)

J-52

1.

RISE

PARAMETER 1,

RISE

PARAMETER

2, RISE BASE

MIN

(No.

20

to

22 )

J-53

2.

DROP

PARAMETER 1

,

DROP

PARAMETER

2,

DROP

BASE

MIN (No.23

to

25 )

3.

QUIT

FACTOR

1, QUIT

FACTOR

2

(No.

26,

27)

J-53

J-53



4202-E

P-(xvi)

TABLE OF

CONTENTS

PAGE

SECTION

11 THERMAL


PARAMETER

SCREEN

3

(PAGE

1)

J-54

Thermal Deviation

Compensation Amount

J-54

.

K.

READ/WRITE

AND

GET/PUT

FUNCTIONS

(WITH FILE

INPUT/OUTPUT

FUNCTION)

SECTION 1

GENERAL

K-1

SECTION

2

CONFIGURATION K-2

1. Configuration 1

2.

Configuration 2

K-2

K-2

SECTION 3 FUNCTION

I

K-3

1. READ

Function K-3

2.

WRITE

Function

K-3

3. GET

Function K-4

4. PUT

Function

K-5

SECTION

4

FUNCTION

II(FILE

INPUT/OUTPUT

FUNCTION)

K-7

1.

FOPENA

(FOPENB)

Function

K-7

2.

FWRITC

Function

K-7

3.

READ

Function

K-8

4. WRITE

Function K-8

5.

GET Function

K-9

6. PUT

Function K-9

7.

CLOSE Function K-9

8.

Supplements

K-9



4202-E

P-(xvii)

TABLE OF

CONTENTS

PAGE

SECTION 5

EXAMPLE

PROGRAMI K-10

1.

Data

Input

Using READ

and

GET Commands

.

.

2.

Data

Output

Using

PUT

and

WRITE

Commands

K-10

K-11

SECTION

6

EXAMPLE

PROGRAM

II

(FILE

INPUT/OUTPUT

FUNCTION)

K-12

1.

Data Input

by

FOPNEA(B),

READ,

and GET Commands

2. Data

Output

by FWRITC,

PUT,

and WRITE

Commands

.

K-12

K-13

SECTION

7

PARAMETERS

K-14

1

.

NC

Optional

Parameter

(Word)

2. NC

Optional

Parameter (Bit)

.

K-14

K-15

SECTION

8

ALARM K-17

SECTION 9

APPENDIX

K-20

L.

Hi-CUT

SECTION

1

OVERVIEW OF Hi-CUT

L-1

SECTION

2

Hi-CUT CONTROL FUNCTION

L-2

Designating

Hi-Cut

Control Mode

L-2

.

2. Hi

-Cut

Control

Parameters

L-2

3.

Hi-Cut

Control

Mode

Designation

L-4

4.

Hi-Cut Control

Guide L-6



A. ANIMATION

FUNCTION



4202-E

A-1

A. ANIMATION FUNCTION

SECTION

1

GENERAL

9.

Special

Features

The animation func tion makes it

possible

to monitor the blank

machining

conditions such

as tool

movement, cutt ing depth etc.,

by simulation

(drawing).

High-speed drawing

is

possible

while

in

Machine

Lock condition.

Graphic display

consists

of a SPLIT

VIEW

and

a SOLID VIEW, with

switching possible

between

the

two

at

any

time.

10. Main Functions

(1) Display Mode

SPLIT

VIEW

mode

(Fig. 1-1),

and

SOLID

VIEW

mode

(Fig.

1-2),

with

switching

between the two

possible

at

any

time.

HUTO OPERATION GR°1

.MIN

0

N

73

97,'04,'0i

2:

18:08

tilliH

t

SPLIT

VIEW*

106

a-

$

ACTUAL

P05I.

300.000

300.000

560.000

~T?

e

z

I

0.0

-100

5

1000

H= 0 D=

0

SCALE

91.152

CUTTING

TINE

0: 1:15

0

-203

&

PROGRAM ACTUAL

PART

I

SELECT POSIT. PROGRAM]

BLOCK

DATA SEARCH

ATC/APC

CHECK

DATA

[EXTENDI

Fig.

1-1

SPLIT

VIEW



4202-E

A-2

A.

ANIMATION

FUNCTION

AUTO

OPERATION

GRPi .MIN

0

N

73

97/04/01

2 r

18:34

ESSs

_SQ3i9

V

*SOLID

VIEW*

ACTUAL

POSI.

X

3G0.000

V 300.000

2

560.000

JL

o

,

B

0.0

S 1000

H=

0

D=

0

SCALE

69. 120

CUTTING TIME

0:

1:15

z

PROGRAM

ACTUAL

PART BLOCK

T

SELECT

POSIT,

PROGRAM

DATA

SEARCH

ATC/APC

CHECK

E'ATA

[

EXTEND]

I

F

1

IfTTK

F

3)rF7»4fF~5l(T~6lfF~7ÿrF~Bl

Fig.

1-2

SOLID

VIEW

(2)

Projection Anglo Change

In

the SOLI

D

VI

EW mode,

the

TlL angle

and

PA N

angle

can

be

freely

changed

so that the

object can

be viewed from

the

desired direction

(Fig.

1-3).

Al~0

OPERATION

GRPI.

MEN

0

1

97/04/01 1:29:41

WANGLE CHANGE*

PAN

60

TILT

43

z

CURSOR

t

: ECvJH

CURSOR : UP

1

URSOR*-:

RIGHT

|

CURSOR-*:LEFT

S'

=

GS

>Q

—

GA

QUIT

(

F 1

)(7T1I

F

13(ZZ3(Z 13(Z 13CEzI)CElD

Fig.

1

-3

Projection Angle

Change

(3) Display

Area Change

Th e

display

area

settings

can be

changed for

both the SPLIT an d SOLID

VIEW

modes

(Fig. 1-4).



4202-E

A-3

A.

ANIMATION

FUNCTION

(4) Painting

Display

of the cut

pattern

changes according

to the

cutting

depth

of the machined area.

AUTO

OPERATION

GRFi.MIN 0

N 1

S7V04/Q1

1:15:07

•

REDUCE

AREA CHANGE*

100

CENTER

0.

000

0.000

—

20.

000

+

-

-1-30

H

AGEt

:

MAGNI

.

Im -

PAGEI:REDUCE

0

91

.

152

=EX

-GS

-103

—

T*

-200

0

200

MARKER QUIT

(

F

1

IfTTK

p

3lf F7l'

}rF~5~irÿ60rÿ70fF~Bl

Fig. 1

-4

Display

Area

Change

(5)

Blank

Definition

Settings can

be

made

for

the

blank

contour and

position

(Fig.

1-5).

PROGRAM OPERATION

B LA NK B EF

97/04/01.

1:27:07

No =01

Cz

= 0G

-4

1-

ajDIREC- V

IND=*

MESH

=

10mrn

SELECT

SYMBOL

’

No.=

0

go

i

.Am..

0

12b x

a

4-

m

T

il

S T T

pfgl

:

>EN

>-

:

120

M

SYMBOL

SELECT

REATE

DELETE

AMEND

QUIT

fFTirFÿrrT)rFTTirrTirETirrTirF~B~)

Fig. 1-5 Blank Definition



4202-E

A-4


(6) Automatic

Setting for

Display

Size

Appropriate

display

size

can

be

automatically

determined

according

to blank size.

(7)

Setting

of

Cutting

Tool Shape

Setting

ca n be made for the

cutting

tool shape.

(8)

Selection

of

Drawing

Speed

Display is possible

for actual

cutting

speed

or

high

speed.

(9) Cutting

Time

Calculation

Cutting

time calculation

function

is available.

(10)

Compatible

for

Rotary

Axis and

Five-face

Machining

Rotary axis,

five-face

machining

is

possible.

(11)

Intervention

for

Return

Operation

Return

search,

sequence

return

operation

intervention is

possible.



4202-E

A-5

A.

ANIMATION

FUNCTION

11.

Screen

Layout

For

color

graphic display,

the screen layout

is

as

follows:

64 columns

i

-s'

Title

display

area

Alarm

display area

-I

Graphic

data

display area

S

8

*

51

=

408

dots

8

*

64

=

51 2

dots

§

2

vt

k

5

raphic

display

area

§

M

O

£

S

Console display

area

*r.

4

Function

display

area

S

13(0.51)

51

(2.01)

Fig.

1-6

Graphic

Display

Screen

Layout

(1)

On color

graphic

screens,

a

moving trace

line

and

blank

contour are

displayed in the

graphic

display

area.

(2)

If

a graphic

display and

a

character

display

overlap, the character

display

ha s

priority.

(3)

Th e

graphic display

area

can

be switched as

follows:

408

(Horiz.)

x

320

(Vert.)

dots

512 (Horiz.)

x

320

(Vert.)

dots



4202-E A-6-R1

A.

ANIMATION

FUNCTION

12. Animation

Screen, Explanation

of

Terminology

73

RPl.MIh

AUTO OPERATION

97/04/01

2:18:03

iT3»/

Situm

«S°LIT

VIEW*

&

$ ÿ']

M

1*0

F—

JL

CTUAL

C'05I.

330

.

003

300.000

Z

580.000

1

f

A

0.0

r;<

O

130

* •

1000

H=

0

D=

0

9CALE

100

r

«i.152

CUTTING

TINE

3:

1:15

:

/

s

/

-100

/

/

200

-200

CHECK

DATA

[

EXTENT'

BLOCK

|

DATA

|

SEARCH |

ATO'APC

ROC-fÿpl

ACTUAL

PART

POSIT.

I

PROGRAM

/

FTT1lTÿfFÿlT~73(T~5T(Tÿ(Tÿ(Z8D

Either SPLIT

or

SOLID

view

mode

will

be

displayed on

the

graphic

screen.

*

SPLIT

VIEW

*

ACTUAL

POS.I

300.000

300.000

560.000

Actual

position

is

displayed

using

blank

coordinates.

During

'Mirror Image’

operation,

a minus

(-) mark

is

displayed before

the

axis

name.

When 5 or

more

axes are

used,

change

occurs

when axis

is

switched.

X

Y

Z

0.0

0

_

Feed

command

value

(override

added)

When teed occurs

with

each

rotation,

Fr

is

displayed.

D=

0

=

SCALE

Spindle

rpm

command

value

(min'1

override added)

80.016

CUTTING

TIME

0:34:40

Ft: Tool

length compensation

No.

D:

Cutter radius

compensation

No.

Displays

the screen

scale.

Displays

the

cutting

time.

Cutting

t ime varies for

‘Machine Lock’

and

‘Non-Machine

Lock1.

At

the

completion of

one

program

block,

time

necessary

for

axis

motion in

that block is

calculated and

totaled

a1 the

completion

of the

program.

Machine lock

mode:

In this

calculation,

time

required

for the execution of

M

S,

T

an d G04 commands

is nof

included.

Cutting

time is calculated

using 1he feedrate

obtained by

multiplying programmed

l=

value by

feedrate

override

setting

(the

setting

at

the

start of fhe block).

Axis

feed time in the

rapid

feed

mode is

calculated

assuming

the

override

setting

of

i

00

%.

Non-machine

lock

mode:

Actual

time

during

operation is

counted.

Cutting

time

is

not

cleared until

the

initial START button

of

the

program

is

pressed.

Th e

information

in the

graphic

data display

area

changes

according

to the

function ke y

which

is pressed.



4202-E

A-

7

A.

ANIMATION

FUNCTION

PUT0

OPERATION

GRPi.MIN

0 N

1

97/04/01

1:31:

02

1/

RAO

lANIM.IEW#

100

V

ACTUAL F03I.

300.000

3E0.

030

560.030

>:

mr

0

\mwi

2

2

0

.0

*10®

S

0

0 D=

0

=

10®

SCALE

91

.

152

CUTTING

TINE

0: 0: 2

a

-100

-200

0

2®0

CHECK

DPTP

PROGRAM

ACTUAL-

PART

SELECT

POSIT.

PROGRAM

ELOCK

DATA

I

SEARCH

ATC/APC

[EXTEND]

i

F

1

ifFTK

f

3if~FTiTrFinrF~6]fF~7](Tir)

The

(A )

area

displays

the tool

presently being used,

which will henceforth be referred to

as

the “Tool Kind .



4202-E A-8

A.

ANIMATION

FUNCTION

The

animation

display consists of

drawings of the trace

line

(locus), envelope

line,

envelope

figure,

blank,

and

animated

tool.

SOLID VIEW

Animated

tool

(2)

Envelope

line

(3)

Blank

Trace

line

(locus)

(1)

SPLIT

VIEW

(Plane

View)

\

\

\

\

\

\

szzzzzzzzz

/J//

////// / r

\

\

niiiiiiniiiiiiiiiiiiiin

Blank

1

/

m

7

y

VT)

(3

/

/ /

/

Trace

line

(locus)

(1)

\

Animated

tool

(2)

Envelope

figure (4)

\

\

Envelope

line

(3)

\

i

V//////////////////////7

/////////

(Side

View)



4202-E

A-9


(1 )

Trace Line

Displays

the tool locus.

(a) The trace

display

type

varies

according

to the feed

type

as follows:

Positioning

Cutting feed

Manual

rapid traverse

:

dashed

line

Manual cutting

feed

:

dashed

line

(b) The

trace l ine has a

single

color

(multi-color

is

impossible)

which is

designated by

the GRAPH

DATA

setting.

(c)

Drawing

(EXIST/NONE)

of

positioning, cutting,

an d manual

(rapid,

cutting)

feed can

be

designated by the

GRAPH

DATA setting.

(2 )

Animated

Tool

Tool

position

is

displayed.

(a)

The

simulated

likeness

of

the

tool

in that

position

will

be

displayed.

(b)

Animated tool is

set

by

graphic system

variables

and by the

tool

number which is in

use.

(c)

Animated tool color

can

be

designated by

the

GRAPH

DATA setting.

:

broken line

:

solid

line

(d) Drawing (EXIST/NONE)

is

also

designated

by

the GRAPH

DATA

setting.

(e) If

the simulation

magnification

is

large,

or the tool diameter is

large,

part

of the

display may

be

cut off

(see figure

below).

A

Cut o ff

L

A

(f)

Because

the animated

tool has priori ty

over the

workpiece

blank, if

the

tool

is

positioned

behind

the

workpiece

blank, it

will appear

in

front

of

the

workpiece

blank on the

display (see

figure

below).



4202-E

A-

10


(3) Envelope Line

The

image

line of the tool

passage space

which

is

defined

at

each block of the NO

part program is

displayed.

This

drawing occurs

only

for the

cutting

mode

(cutting feed,

manual

cutting

feed).

(a)

The

envelope

line consists of tool

passage

width indicated

by

the width

line,

and the

tool

circle

indicated

at

each

block

change.

The

width

and

tool circle

configurations are

set

by

the

tool

number

in use,

and

by

the

graphic

system

variables.

Width

line

Tool

circle

Setting

made

by graphic

system

variables,

tool

diameter.

Q

Setting

made by graphic

system

variablesp)

(tool dia.,

nose

angle, point dia.)

*0

ool

Dia. *0

*0

Same as left

ose

Angle 180

e

>0,

<180

•

Point Dia.

Any

0 *0

Cycle Cone

Truncated

cone

(b)

During

manual

cutting feed,

the

tool circle

drawing

is

displayed

periodically.

JO G feed

S

E

C

) ( )

Envelope

l ine color

and

drawing (EXIST/NONE)

is

designated by

the

GRAPH

DATA

setting.

[Supplement]

Graphic system

variables can be

freely

set

within

the

range

given

on

Section

2, 3,

and

are not

dependent

on

the

tool

classification

number.

However, the

tool

shape

selection

may

be m ade

automatically

by

the

tool classification

number.



4202-E

A-

11


(c) Plane envelope line

drawing occurs

as follows:

Tool

circle

drawing occurs

on

the

normal

plane

of the

cutting

axis.

The width line

drawing for

arc

cutting

occurs on

the

plane

designated

by

commands G 1

7 - G1

9.

For non-arc

cutting, drawing

is the same as for

the

tool

circle.

(See

figure

below.)

I

%

Tool circle

Widlh lir>e

Tool circle

S

(4)

Envelope Figure

The workpiece blank

area

where

tool

cutting has occurred is

displayed.

(a) Depending

on

the machining height, 42 gradation

patterns are available.

Workpiece

blank area

is also

changeable.

This simulation occurs

only in

the

cutting

mode

(cutting

feed,

JOG

feed),

and is not available for SOLID

VIEW,

or for

the

side

face

only

SPLIT

VIEW

display.

Furthermore,

for

two-plane

SPLIT

VIEW, drawing

movement

is restricted

to

the

plane

drawing

range.

(b)

Side face

drawing

uses a fixed

gradation

pattern

regardless

of

the

cutting height.

(c) The shape of

the

envelope figure is determined

by

graphic system

variable of the tool number

in

use.

(d)

The

envelope

figure

is

ineffective

when

3

or

more axes

are moved

simultaneously.



4202-E

A-

12


SECTION 2 TYPES

OF

ANIMATION

Graphic

Display Coordinate

System

.

The graphic coordinate

system

varies depending

on whether

the

machine is a vertical or

horizontal

model.

Coordinate

system

(or

verlicaJ

models:

A

coordinate system

is

assumed in

which

the

vertical axis is the

Z-axis.

Coordinate

system

(or

horizontal

models:

A

coordinate

system

is

assumed

in

which the

vertical

axis

is

the Y-axis.

Spindiehead

Spindle

head

Rotary

table

/Table

/ /

Saddle

+

fo)

Y-axis]

8-axis'

tip

Z-axis

Table

—

Y-axis

-

X-axis

(Z-axis

_T

:X-axis

Saddle

Z

Y

i

I

I

X

X

z

SPLIT

VIEW

selections

~l

x

z

r

z

J

L

I

I

Dotted

line

area

indicates two-surlace SPLIT

VIEW.

The

following

SPLIT

VIEWs are

possible

depending

on the

cutting

axis

direction

(indicated by arrow).

Broken

line

areas

indicate

two-plane

SPLIT

VIEW.



Vertical

axis

(V)

orizontal axis

[front]

(HF)

\

\l

N

V

N

X XI

X

X

x

sj

X

<

H

X

M

r

N

fsi

X

X

X

Xv

X

N

fsl

N

X

X

N

X

rx

xT

x

l

X

I

N

X

I

1*

NOIlONHd

NOI1VIAIINV

'V

SkV

3-ZOZV



Horizontal

axis

[left]

(HL)

orizontal

axis

[back]

(HB)

-<

-<

T

XX.

N1

NJ

X

X

X

M

<

H

(D

N

X

X

fx

N

T

INI

N

N

N

N

lx

X

XX

x

Nl

|Ni

INI

N

X X

X

X

N

fNJ

N

x

X

INI

I

IN

I

l

x

X

I

I

NOLLONHd

NOIIVWINV

V

U-V

3-20217



Horizontal

axis

[right]

(HR)

X

i

\

N

X

X

-<

<

NJ

X

M

M

INJ

i

X

X

X

NJ

X

X

;g

N

NJ

X

X

X

N

NJ

I

NOLLONRd

NOIIVWINV

V

QkV

3-20217



4202-E A-

16

A.

ANIMATION

FUNCTION

Explanation

of

Animation

Related

Functions

.

AUTO

OPERATION

TRACE

/ANIMATE

TOOL

KIND

GRAPHIC

ERASE

HIGH

DRAW

DATA

ON/OFF

RAPHIC

MATERIAL [EXTEND]

GRAPHIC

DATA

AUTO

SCALE

AREA

CHANGE

ANGLE

CHANGE

RAPHIC

[EXTEND]

MDI

OPERATION

TRACE

/ANIMATE

TOOL

KIND

GRAPHIC

ERASE

DATA

ON/OFF

HIGH

DRAW

RAPHIC

MATERIAL [EXTEND]

GRAPHIC

DATA

AUTO

SCALE

AREA

CHANGE

ANGLE

CHANGE

RAPHIC

[EXTEND]

MANUAL OPERATION

TRACE

/ANIMATE

TOOL

KIND

GRAPHIC

ERASE

DATA

ON/OFF

HIGH

DRAW

RAPHIC

MATERIAL

[EXTEND]

AUTO

SCALE

GRAPHIC

DATA

AREA

CHANGE

ANGLE

CHANGE

RAPHIC

[EXTEND]



4202-E

A-

17


Except for

the [F1]

(GRAPFIIC) function, all

graphic

related functions are

ineffective during non-graphic

display.

F1

GRAPHIC

Fo r

graphic display

TRACE/

ANIMATE

2

For

trace/animation

switchover

TOOL

KIND

3

Fo r

tool kind

display

ON/OFF

F4 MATERIAL

Fo r

blank

drawing

GRAPHIC

ERASE

5

Erases

graphic display

DATA

ON/OFF

ON/OFF

switch

for

graphic

data

area

6

HIGH

DRAW

7

ON/OFF

switch

for

high-speed drawing

(Not

effective

in

manual

mode.)

F8

[EXTEND]

F1

GRAPHIC

Fo r

graphic display

GRAPHIC

DATA

2

Establishes the

Graph

Data Set mode.

AUTO

SCALE

Automatic

setting

of the

drawing

area

3

F4

AREA

CHANGE

F5

Establishes the area

change (display size)

mode.

ANGLE

CHANGE

6 Establishes the

projection angle change

mode.

F7

F8

[EXTEND]



4202-E A-

18

A.

ANIMATION

FUNCTION

2-1.

Trace/Animation

Each time

this

function

key

is

pressed,

the

display

at

the

upper

right of

the screen

changes

as

follows:

>

TRACE

>

TRACE

/

ANIMATION

TRACE

/

ANIMATION

ANIMATION

(C)

A)

(B )

The

graphic

display changes

as follows:

(A): Only

the trace line

is

displayed.

(B): Only

the animation

(blank, envelope

figure,

envelope

line, animated tool) is

displayed.

(C):

Both the

trace

l ine and animation are

displayed.

This

function

is used

only

for

switching

as

shown

above,

and

cannot

be used to

erase,

or

stop

drawing.

This

function

is

effective for SOLID

VIEW

and

SPLIT

VIEW

modes.

AUTO OPERATION

GRP:.

MIN

0

N

73

97/04701

_

2;

19:26

pnih-

*

SPLIT

VIEW*

13Q

z

CTUAL

POSI.

X

300.000

Y

30G.0G 0

Z 560.000

ill

H it

III/

B

0.0

-

0

1GB

r

S 1000

H=

0 D=

SCALE

F

91.152

CUTTING

TIME

0: 1:15

0

-100

-200

0

206

PROGRAM ACTUAL

PART

SELECT

POSIT. PROGRAM

BLOCK

DATA

SEARCH

ATC-'APC

CHECK

DATA

[EXTENDI

rrTirrFirÿiÿÿrÿrFÿrr7irF~Bi

(A )

Screen



4202-E

A-19

A.

ANIMATION

FUNCTION

o

N

73

UTO OPERATION

GRP1.MIN

97X04/01

2:70:27

y

TRACE.'

ANIN .

SPLIT

VIEW*

100

O

O

o

JL

CTUAL POSI.

300

.

000

300

.

000

560

.

000

X

lBBf

0

\1V/

p)

I

.

0.0

D- '

-les

3

1000

H-

0 D=

0

SCALE

O

o

o

X

100

*

91

.

152

CUTTING

TIME

0;

1i

15

0

-100

20020 0

0

CHECK

DATA

FROGR

AN ACT UAL FART

BLOCK

SELECT

POSIT. PROGRAM-

EATA

SEARCH

ATC/APC

I

EXTENDI

i

F

1

)fm(

f

3)rFTi']rr5i(T~6ifF~7irF~Bi

(B )

Screen



4202-E A-20


2-2.

Tool

Kind

(1)

On

the

screen where

the main program

under execution is

overlapped

with tool

animation

(a)

With

pressure

on

this

function key,

the screen

changes

its

display by

turns

among

the three

patterns

at the

upper

right

of

the

screen:

Animation

of

the tool

in

use

(tool kind) Nondisplay

of the tool

in

use

Status indication

(which is

usually shown on

the

right of

the

screen in normal programs)

(b) If

the GRAPH

DATA

does

not

include tool

position and tool animation

data,

pressure

of

the

ke y

allows

to

choose

between non-display mode and status indication.

(c)

This

function

can be

commonly

used

for both

SOLID VIEW

and

SPLIT

VIEW.

AUTO

OPERATION

05454X.

MIN

05454

N

97-'04/ei

1:33:02

1

PROGRAM

W553B4

Ml

<*PRC*

1 MCVJ

N2

t*MCN* OKLIMft.

MCN)

N3

<#MAT*

SC

N4

<

»<TLN*

CDA--3.00 3.00

Ml)

N5

Efl

NS

G30P10

N7

has

MS

T

33

N 9 G 15 H1

)

/

-5Q

X

V z

ACT POSIT

fkOPK;

300.000

300.000

560.000

-100

“ie6 &

PROGRPh

ACTUAL PART

SELECT POSH

.

PRCCRAM

BLOCK

DATA

SEARCH

ATC/flPC

CHECK

DATA

[EXTEND]

(F

i

)(Fiÿro](7ÿ(TT)rFT)rÿ7‘)rF~B4

Fig. 2-1

The Screen where the Main

Program

Under Execution is Overlapped with Tool Animation

(Tool

Kind)



4202-E

A-21


(2 )

On

the screen where

only

the

main

program

under execution

is displayed

(a) Pressure of this function

key

allows the

screen

to

display

or

stop displaying

animation of the

tool in

us e

(tool

kind)

at the

upper

right

of the screen.

(b) The

key

is

invalid

if the

GRAPH DATA does not include tool position and tool animation data.

(c) This

function can

be

commonly

used for both SOLID

VIEW

and SPLIT

VIEW.

Refer to

2-5,

“Data

ON/OFF”

for

the main

program

under execution and

animation

overlapping

screen.

AUTO

OPERATION

05454X.I1IN

C54

54

M

97

04.- 01

1

;

34

;

SB

1

PRQGFftM

HI

(

fcPRC*

1 M

CV)

N2

OKLMA.MCN)

N3

':*MHT* SC

J

N4 i.

*TLM* CDA—3 .00 3 .00

MM)

M5

t*=- G30P1G

rr 1*06

HS

7

38

N9 G15H1

MS X

0.000

0.000

0.000

Y

Z

Co

0

0

5454

-

0.0

N

S

e

H=

0

0.000

0.000

=

0

-50

Y

z

AC T

POSIT

(WORK)

300.000

300.000

560.000

103

PROGRAM ACTUAL

PART

BLOCK I

SELECT

P0SI“.

PROGRAM

DATA

SEARCH

ATC/APcI

CHECK

DATA

[EXTENDI

rÿ fTÿ(Tÿ(TTT7fFT1(TT) fTÿrF~r i

Fig.

2-2

The

Screen

where Only the Main Program

Under

Execution is Displayed (Status)



4202-E

A-22


2-3. Material

(1)

When

the

material

drawing

function

is

activated,

a

search

is

conducted

for

the

registered

blank

(beginning with

the

lowest number)

which

matches the spindle

direct ion and rotary

axis

conditions of the

GRAPH

DATA

setting.

Drawing of

this blank

is executed

after

the graphic

screen

is erased.

GRAPH DATA

SPINDLE

DIRECTION

HL

ROTARY

AXIS

CO

REGISTERED

BLANK

No.

DIREC.

INDEX

V

C10

C20

Search

HR

CO

HR

C5

HF

*

HB

C25

y

HL

C90

HL

CO

V CO

Drawing

of

blank No. 8 is

displayed.

10

HL

CO

No.

10

and

No.

8

have

the

same

conditions,

but

drawing

of No.

8

is

not

displayed

because it ha s

a

lower

registration

number.

(2)

This

function is

not

effective

under

the

following

conditions.

-

There are

no registered

blanks with

conditions matching those

of the GRAPH

DATA setting.

-

Animation

speed

override

is

active.

-

GRAPH

DATA setting

is

in

the material

non-drawing

mode.

(3)

This function is effective for SOLID

VIEW

and SPLIT

VIEW.

2-4.

Graphic Erase

(1 )

This

function

erases the

graphic

screen.

(2 ) If

the

animation

speed

override is active,

this

function

will release it.

(3)

This function also

erases

trace,

blank,

envelope

l ine, and

envelope

figure.

(4)

This

function

is

effective for SOLID

VIEW

an d

SPLIT

VIEW.



4202-E A-23


2-5. Data

ON/OFF

(1) With pressure on

this function

key, the screen changes

its

display

on

its left side by

turns

among

the three patterns:

Display of the

characters

in the graphic

data,

Nondisplay of

them,

and

Display of the

program under

execution

(2) However,

if

the graphic display

area is

limited, pressing

this

key

alternatively changes

the

display

patterns between

the characters

in

the

graphic

data

an d the

program

under execution.

(3)

This

function

is effective

for both

SOLID

VIEW and

SPLIT

VIEW.

2-6.

High

Draw

This function enables high-speed

drawing.

(1)

High-speed drawing

mode

ON/OFF

occurs

each time

this

function

key is

pressed

in

the

auto,

and manual modes

with

machine lock established.

(2)

With riigh

speed

drawing mode,

animation

occurs at

each block.

Drawing occurs in

the

following

order:

trace,

envelope

line,

an d

envelope

figure.

Animated tool

drawing

does not

occur

at this

time.

(3)

The

high-speed drawing

mode is released

by

NO reset or

program

end.

[Supplement]

1. In

the

high-speed drawing mode,

both the GOO and

G01

commands

designate

straight

line

interpolation

to

the designated

value.

Therefore,

the actual trace

(locus) wih

be different.

2.

During h igh-speed drawing, d isplay occurs

at the upper center portion of the

screen.

3.

The line

connecting

the start and en d

point

of the arc is

displayed

for the

3-dimensional

arc

(including

3-dimensional

coordinate

shift;

G02

and

G03) in

the

high-speed

drawing

mode or on the

cycle

start with

the

return search.

2-7.

Graphic

Data

This is

the function for setting

the graphic drawing

conditions.

(1)

The GRAPH

DATA sett ing mode

can be

entered

f rom either the SPLIT

VIEW

or the SOLID

VIEW. If

entered from SPLIT

VIEW display,

setting data

will

be available

which

applies to

the

SPLIT

VIEW only,

as

well

as

data which

applies

to both

the SPLIT

VIEW

and

SOLID

VIEW

displays.

If the

GRAPH

DATA

setting

mode is

entered

from

the

SOLID

VIEW display,

the

reverse

applies.

(2)

Setting data

which

applies

only to the

SPLIT

VIEW

display

is

called ‘SPLIT

VIEW

setting

data’,

setting data which

applies

only to the

SOLID

VIEW display

is

called

‘SOLID

VIEW setting

data’,

and

setting

data which applies to both

is

called 'common

data’.

(3)

The

GRAPH

DATA settings

consist

of

7

pages. Pages

5

through 7

are

reserved

for

data where

infrequent

settings

are

made,

and access to these pages

is restricted

unless

the

PAGE

LIMIT

setting

on

page

3

is set to

NONE

(no page

limit).

If

this

setting

is

EXIST, the

system

will

not

proceed

beyond page 4.



4202-E

A-24-R1

A.

ANIMATION

FUNCTION

GRAPH DATA

Setting

- List of Data

Setting

an d

Setting

Range

(1)

Function

Data

Setting

Item

Data

an d

Area Setting

[F1]

[F2] [F3]

age

SET

ADD SELECT

SPINDLE

DIRECTION

Oommon x

0

-

4

(0:V,

1:HF,

2:HL,

3:HB,

4:HR)

ROTARY

*

(not designated)

(A,

B,

C)

angle

0

angle

359

(°)

O

x

AXIS

GRAPHIC

COORDINATE

NUMBER

O

x

0

to

max.

value

used

GRAPHIC

AREA

O

X

PART AL L

DIREC.

0

-

4 (0:V

(automatic),

1:HF,

2:HL,

3:HB, 4:HR)

O

x

SPLIT

VIEW

PLANE

Menu

No. 1

-

4

O

x

X

DIVIDING

RATIO

30

-

70

(%)

O

x

X

2

PAN

0 - 359 (°)

OLID

VIEW

O o

x

TITLE

89

-

89 (°)

O

o

x

CENTER CX

PLIT

VIEW

-9999.999

-

9999.999

(mm)

O

O

x

CENTER

CY -9999.999

-

9999.999

(mm)

O O

x

CENTER CZ

-9999.999

-

9999.999

(mm)

O o

x

UNIT

EXC.

RATE

0.010

-

99.999

(0.573R

- 5729.

577R)

[mm/°]

O

x

X

PAGE

LIMIT

EXIST NONE

O

X

3

AX

OLID

VIEW

O o

.000

-

999.999

(mm)

x

AY

O

O

.000

-

999.999

(mm)

x

AZ

O o

.000

-

999.999

(mm)

x

UNIT EXC.

RATE

0.010 - 99.999 (0.573R -

5729.

577R)

[mm/°]

O

x

PAGE

LIMIT

EXIST NONE

O

X

MASTER

ommon

X-DIR. Y-DIR.

Z-DIR.

O

X

MASTER

X

U

Rotary

axis*

Y V

Rotary

z

w

Rotary

axis*

o

x

axis*

SLAVE AXIS

X-DIR. Y-DIR. Z-DIR.

O

X

4

o

ONE EXIST NONE EXIST NONE

EXIST

X

X

SLAVE

STANDARD

COOR.VALUE

O

o

x

-99999.999

-

99999.999

(mm)

*

Used

by

the

cylinder

face

machining

function

(option).

Set the axis address which

is

set for the basic axis

of

rotary

axis

parameters.



4202-E

A-25

A.

ANIMATION

FUNCTION

GRAPH DATA

Setting

- List of Data

Setting

an d

Setting

Range

(2)

Function

Page

Data

Setting

Item Data

and

Area Setting

[F

1] [F2]

[F3]

SE T

ADD SELECT

Common

MANUAL

FEED

TRACE

DRAW

EXIST

NONE

O

x

RAPID FEED

TRACE

DRAW

EXIST

NONE

O

x

CUTTING

FEED

TRACE

DRAW

EXIST

NONE

O

X

5

ENVELOP LINE DRAW

EXIST

NONE

O

x

BLANK D RAW

EXIST

NONE

O

x

TOOL

DRAW

EXIST

NONE

O

x

ENVELOP

FIGURE

PAINT

EXIST NONE

O

x

Common TRACE

COLOR

1

-

7

O

x X

1:

BLUE

2:

GREEN

3: CYAN

4:

RED

5: MAGENTA

6:

YELLOW

7: WHITE

ENVELOP

LINE

COLOR

O

x x

BLACK COLOR

O

x x

ANIMATION TOOL

COLOR

O

x X

6

GUIDANCE TOOL

COLOR

O

x X

SCALE

LINE

COLOR

O

x X

Common

FRAME

MOVING UNIT

IN AREA CHANGE (dot)

1

-

16

n

o o

X

ANIMATION

COMMAND

OUTPUT

INTERVAL

1

-

4(°)

O o

x

(dot)

7

0-100 (%)

ATIO

OF ROOM

AREA

IN

AUTO SCALE (%)

O O

x

ANGEL

CHANGE PITCH

[JITLE

PAN 1 -30

(°)

O

O

x

1

-

30

n

o O

x



4202-E

A-27


(4) Page 1

GRP1.MIH

0

N s

UTO

OPERATION

97/04/01

2:08:27

*

GRAPH

DATA

*

REGISTERED

BLANKPINDLE DIRECTION

0 : V

1

:HF 2:HL

3:

HE

4;HR

DIREC.

_V-

o.

1

*

OTARY

AXIS 2

4

GRAPHIC COORDINATE

NUMBER

5

b

7

PART

_8

RAPHIC

AREA

9

10.

TOOL

DIRECTION

0;V(AUTO)

1 :

HF

£';HL

3:HB

4:

HR

V

=GD

SET

ADD

SELECT

GUIT

(T~T)

(Tÿl

fTTl

fF~T)(Tÿ

(T~6l fF~7~)

f?~Bl

(a)

SPINDLE DIRECTION

Set

the

spindle direction used

for animation

by

entering a

numeric

value

0

- 4.

Function key

to use: [F1]

(SET)

(b)

ROTARY

AXIS

Set the

axis

name

and

angle

of the

rotary

axis

for

which

animation

occurs. If

a

(>]<)

setting

is

made,

the rotary

axis is ignored.

Input example: A230

Animation

occurs

only

when A-axis

is

at

2300 position.

Function

key

to

use:

[F1]

(SET)

Note: When there is no

rotary

axis,

the

cursor

does notmove.

(c)

GRAPHIC

COORDINATE

NUMBER

The

graphic

coordinate

system’s

zero

point

offset value is

designated by

the blank coordinate

system’s

offset value number.

Function

key

to

use:

[F1]

(SET)

(d)

GRAPHIC

AREA

Designate whether the

graphic display

area on

the

screen

is

to consist

of

ALL

or

PART

of

the

data

display

column.

Function

ke y

to

use: [F3]

(SELECT)

PART

LL



4202-E

A-28

A.

ANIMATION

FUNCTION

ALL

(includes

graphic

data

display

area)

AUTO

OPERATION

G.RP1.

MIN 0 H 7.3

97/04

.-'01

2:24:04

a/

SFLfT

VIEW*

TRACI

ANIM.

100

©-

W

CTU-

_

POSI.

300

.

000

.300-000

560.000

>:

B

mr

o

wav

\

0.0

£2/

f

S

10

DB

0- Q

€*

H= e

n

91.152

MG TIME

0:

1:14

CUTIS

-16®

3G0

336

0

BLOCK

DATA

SEARCH

CHECK

DATA

[EXTEND]

PROGRAM ACTUAL

PART

SELECT POSIT

.

PROGRAM

AT

C/

AR C

i

F

1

ifTTii

f

3)f~FTt']rFTnrF~6]fF~7]rFTn

PART

(graphic display

area

only)

GPP

1 . MIN 0 N

73

UTO OPERATION

97/04/01

2: 18:03

a

RACI

ANIM.

ÿSPLIT

VIEW*

100

7

&

&

CTUAL

POSI.

300.000

300.000

560. GOO

fa

L

2

7T 7

mr

i

war

I

F

0.0

-100

S 1000

0

D= 0

0:

©-ÿ

H=

100

r

CALE

r

*

91.152

CUTTING

TIME

0: 1:15

e

-

;

-100

200

200 0

CHECK

4TC/APC L'ATA

PROGRAM ACTUAL

PART

i

SELECT

POSIT. PROGRAM

BLOCK

DATA

SEARCH

[EXTENDI

rFÿfTÿrÿfFÿrÿfÿrÿ7ifF~T)

[Supplement]

If the

graphic

area has been

designated

as PART data

ON/OFF

will

not

be effective.



4202-E

A-29


(5) Page 2

SPLIT

VIEW Setting

Data

AUTO

OPERATION

05454X.

MIN

05454

N

97/04/01

2:57:57

0

*

PLANE SELECT

*

PLANE

V

7

DIVIDING

RATIO

50

• K

-

-EX

-GR

=GD

BET ADD

SELECT

QUIT

(F

1

i fFTi(TÿfTTrirr5ÿiT~6nrF7n(TBi

(a) PLANE

The plane to be displayed is designated by the menu

number.

The

following

displays are possible:

Front face, plane, side

face

1-plane

display,

and 2-plane

display.

(b)

DIVIDING RATIO

When

the

2-plane display

is

designated

as

the PLANE

(item a)),

the

relative proportions

of

the

display areas

for

the 2 planes

must be

designated. This setting value will be the vert ical plane

display

ratio for

the

spindle position

in

relation to the entire

display

area.

The

graphic plane

menu

diagrams

are dilferentforthe

‘H type’ and ‘V type’ models.

For

both models, there are

5

types

of

diagrams depending

on

the page

1 SPINDLE

DIRECTION

setting.

On

the following pages,

all

10

of these

diagrams

are shown.

[Supplement]



Horizontal

axis

[front]

(HF)

Vertical

axis

(V)

X

XN

y

x xl

N

Nl

x

Nl

-<

<

H

-§

o

-<

Jl

J Nl

NJ

X

-<

X

X

X

X

X

x

Nl

Nl

NJ

X

o

NJ

Nl

NJ

X

Nl

X

X

N

X

X

X

NOLLONDd

NOI1VNINV

V

OS-V

3-20217



4202-E A -32

A.

ANIMATION

FUNCTION

X

I

M

X

INI

NI

<D

o_

X

X

INJ

X

N

X

N

M

CD

CL

>>

>

X

X

X

t

X

(HH) Uÿ\A SIXB

[EIUOZUOH



4202-E A-33


SOLID

VIEW Display Setting

Data

AUTO OPERATION

G5454X.

MIN

05454

H

97/04,

2

;

53

;

56

a

PROJECT

IO H

ANGLE DATA

*

AP

lEsl

AN

AT

40

ILT

Z

/

/

>:-:T

X

;

-GA

>Q

=GD

ADD SELECT

QUIT

ET

The

direction

of the line of vision for

parallel

projection

is

designated by the PAN and TILT

settings.

(a)

PA N

Indicates the angle

from

the X-axis, above the horizontal plane.

0°- 359°

(b)

TILT

Indicates the angle

from

the horizontal

plane.

-89°-89°



4202-E A-35


(7)

Page

4

AUTO OPERATION

05454X.MIN

06454

N

=7/04/01

3:01:00

0

*

GRAPH

DATA

*

-DIR.

1m m

V-DIR.

Z-DIR.

MASTER X

V

z

SLAVE NONE

NONE

NONE

SLAVE

STANDARD

COGR.

VALUE

0.000 0. 000

0.000

xa

-GD

>SL

SET SELECT

DD

QUIT

(TT>(TTirÿiÿnrFTirÿr i rF~T)(TT)

(a)

MASTER

When

the

machine

is

equipped

with an

additional

parallel axis,

or

when

the

optional cylinder

face

machining

function

is

used,

the

axis

where animation

drawing

should be executed

must

be set.

The

axis

set

for animation is

treated

as

the

master axis

and the

other axis is

the slave

axis.

For

example,

if

the W-axis

is

selected

for

the additional

parallel axis,

selection

can

be m ad e

whether the Z-axis coord inate values

or

the W-axis coo rd inate values should be u se d for

animation

drawing in

the Z-axis direction.

Similarly, if

the

A-axis

is

selected

forthe additional

rotary

axis, and

when

the

cylindrical

face

machining

function is

used,

selection

can

be

made

between

the

A-axis and

the

corresponding

basic

axis for animation

drawing.

The cursor does not move to

the

axis address of the

parallel

axis

not

selected or the

axis

not

set

for

the

corresponding basic axis using

the rotary

axis

parameters.

The

axis address changes each time

function

ke y

[F3]

(SELECT) is pressed.

Example

1

:

When additional rotary

axis,

A-axis, is selected

and the

optional

cylindrical

face

machining

function

is used.

If

Y-axis selected

for

the

corresponding

basic

axis,

axis selection

by

function

key operat ion

is:

Y direction

A

Example 2:

When

parallel

axes

U,

V,

and

Z

are

used,

axis

selection

by

function

ke y

operation

is:

X

direction

U

Y

direction

V

Z

direction

W



4202-E

A-36


(b) SLAVE

AXIS

To incorporate the coordinate values of both axes (when

an

additional parallel axis exists) into the

animation

coordinates,

the EXIST

setting

is

designated.

If

this is not

desired,

the

NONE setting is

designated.

For directional data

with no

additional

parallel axis,

the cursor does not move.

Each time the [F3]

(SELECT)

function

ke y

is pressed, the

setting

will

change

for

X,

Y,

an d

Z

directions

as follows:

1+

EXIT

ONE

(c)

SLAVE

STANDARD

COOR.

VALUE

When

the

master/slave

axis combination

designation

is

EXIST,

the standard coordinate value

for

the

slave axis

must

be set. For directional data

with

no additional

parallel

axis, the

cursor does not

move.

(8)

Page

5

AUTO

OPERATION

05454X.

MIN 05454

N

97/04/01

3:01:45

0

»

GRAPH DATA

*

MANUAL FEED TRACE DRAW

RAPID

FEED

TRACE DRAW

EXIST

CUTTING

FEED TRACE

DRAW EXIST

EXIST

NVELOP

LINE

DRAW

BLANK DRAW

EXIST

EXIST

OOL

DRAW

ENVELOP

FIGURE

PAINT

EXIST

xa

=GD

:>s_

ADD SELECT

QUIT

ET

[~F~I

K

F

2~H

F~3

n

F

tnÿrFÿrrTiprr)

(a)

MANUAL

FEED

TRACE

DRAW

Manual

cutting

feed and manual

rapid

feed trace

drawing

EXIST/NONE

designation

is

made.

EXIST:

A

dashed line

(

---

will

be

displayed.



4202-E

A-37


(b)

RAPID FEED

TRACE

DRAW

Rapid feed trace

drawing

EXIST/NONE

designation

is made.

EXIST:

A

dotted line {

(c) CUTTING

FEED

TRACE DRAW

Cutting

feed

trace

drawing

EXIST/NONE

designation

is

made.

EXIST:

A solid

line

{

) will be

displayed.

Function

key

to

use: [F3]

(SELECT)

)

will be

displayed.

NONEXIST

(d) ENVELOP LINE

DRAW

Envelope line

drawing

EXIST

designation

is

made.

EXIST:

A

solid

line

{

)

is

displayed.

Tool

circle

Envelope

line

M

Envelope

line

Tool

trace line

Tool

circle

i

i

N

/

\

\

Tool

trace line

(locus)

Tool

circle

Tool

circle

If

the

drawing designation

is

EXIST,

a

solid line

is

displayed.

(e) BLANK DRAW

Drawing

EXIST/NONE

designation is

made

for

the

material which has been defined.

(f) TOOL

DRAW

Animated

tool

and

tool kind drawing

EXIST

designation

are

made.

EXIST:

The animated tool

will

be

drawn at the graphic animation display

area,

and the tool kind

will be

drawn

at tool kind

display

area

of

the screen.

(g)

ENVELOP FIGURE

PAINT

Envelope figure

paint

drawing

EXIST

designation

is

made.

The

envelope

figure

will

be

drawn

when the

animated tool

passes

across the area of the

blank

which is drawn. Fo r

the

area

of

the

material

not

drawn,

envelope

line

(item c))

drawing

will

occur.

EXIST:

i

l



4202-E

A-38

A.

ANIMATION

FUNCTION

(9)

Page

6

AUTO

OPERATION 05454M.

MIN

05454 N

97/04/01 3:02:53

G

:*

GRAPH

DATA

*

MAGENTA

RACE COLOR

BLUE

1 .

BLUE

2.

GREEN

3. CYAN

4. RED

5

.

MAGENTA

6. YELLOW

7.

WHITE

ENVELOP

LK C 3- FIGURE

COLOR

'YELLOW

LANK

COLOR

ANIMATION

TOOL COLOR

CYAN

CYAN

UIDANCE

TOOL

COLOR

SCALE

LINE

COLOR

WHITE

>G

=GD

>S L

>

QUIT

ELECTDD

ET

i

F

1

ifTTK

E

3)fÿ4rFinrF~6irF~7ifFir)

(a)

TRACE COLOR

(b)

ENVELOP

LINE

&

FIGURE COLOR

(c)

BLANK

COLOR

(d)

ANIMATION

TOOL COLOR

(e)

GUIDANCE

TOOL

COLOR

(f)

SCALE

LINE

COLOR

Each

of

the

above colors

must

be

designated.

Function

key

to use:

[F1]

(SET)

Select

the

color

by

entering a

numeric

value

1

-

7.



4202-E A-40


2-8. Auto

Scale

The auto scale function determines the

graphic

area in which

the

blank is drawn automatically.

The auto scale function is as follows:

(1) A registered

blank search

occurs (beginning with lowest registered

number)

for

the

blank with

conditions

which

match the

spindle direction

and

rotary axis

settings

of

the

GRAPH

DATA.

When the blank

is

found,

the

graph

area is automatically

calculated

according

to

the blank

data.

Graph

area

setting is

made

after the

graphic screen

is erased. At

this

time,

a GRAPH

DATA

setting

can be

made for

the surplus

area

aroundthe blank. This

setting

is

made as a

percentage

of the

blank

area.

(2)

The auto

scale

function is

only

effective

fo r the data which

is displayed

while

auto

scale

is

being

executed.

(3)

If no

registered blanks with

the

appropriate

settings

are

found,

a no

blank

data

ERROR

will

occur.



4202-E

A-41


2-9. Area

Change

(1)

Area

change for the

Graph

Data

area is

determined while

viewing

the

graphic

display.

(2)

The

area change

mode can

be

entered from either the SPLIT

VIEW

or

SOLID VIEW

displays.

If

entered

from

the SOLID

VIEW

display,

the SOLID

VIEW display area will

be

determined. If

entered

from the

SPLIT VIEW

display,

the

SPLIT

VIEW display

area

will

be

determined.

(3) SPLIT VIEW

Area

Change

Area

change

is executed

by

using

the

page keys

and

the cursor

keys

to

move

the

scale

frame

(

)

and the marker

(+).

AUTO OPERATION

05454X.I1IM

05454 h

97.

E'4-01

3:04:60

H'ftREh

CHANGE*

100

CENTER

X

0.000

Y 0.000

Z

-20.000

0

+

-100

PAGEt

:MAGNI.

100

FAGE1:REDUCE

91.152

>EL

-109

>0

=»;s

4

-20S 3

20Q

MARKER

QUIT

(TTÿrrF)frT)(TTrirrÿrrÿrFÿrF~Bi

(a) Page key

(SB)

:

-»

Magnify (screen

format

range is enlarged)

Page key

(Eg)

:

-* Reduce

(screen

format

range

is

reduced)

With the marker

(+)

as the

center

point,

the scale frame will be

magnified

or

reduced each time the

respective page

key

is

pressed. If the

page

key is

pressed continuously, magnification or reduction

will

be continuous.

[Supplement]

Th e

existing area can

be enlarged by

up

to

10

times,

bu t

drawing will not occur

below

4.000

mm.

The

existing

area canbereduced to

1/1

Oth,

bu t

drawing

will not occur above

9999.999

mm.

(b)

Cursor keys

©

©

© ©

These

keys

are

used to determine the center of the

graph

format.

When a

cursor

ke y is pressed,

the scale frame

will

move

(with

the marker

(+)

as its

center

point)

in

the direction indicated

by

the

arrow

on

the

key.

If

the

key

is

pressed

continuously,

movement

will

be continuous.

Note: The

distance

which

the

scale

frame

moves

each time

the cursor

key

is

pressed

is

designated by

the

GRAPH DATA

setting

(FRAME

MOVING UNIT

IN AREA

CHANGE

(dot)).



4202-E

A-42


(c) Function

ke y

[F5] (MARKER)

[View point

maker]

For 2-plane SPLIT

VIEW display,

area

change

occurs between planes

XY*>XZ,

or between

planes

ZY«-»XY

by

using

this function key. If

the marker is

at the

side

face,

it

will move

to

the

flat

face

(plane),

and

if

it

is at the flat face

(plane),

it

will

move

to the side face.

(d)

Reduction to

1/1

Oth

05454

N

97/04/01

3

:

05 ;

35

MAGNI

. zHMMi

0

UTO

OPERATION

05454X.MIN

*AREA CHANGE*

1000

CENTER

X

0.G00

0.000

Z

-20.000

m

0

-am

PAGEt

:

MAGNI

.

1000

PAGEl

i

REDUCE

o

911.520

>3 L

>:«

-GS

-1000

-2000

-ÿ

28O0

MARKER

QUIT

rrT)f7ÿrÿrFTT)rÿ5irÿ6~)rFÿ~)rF~r)

(e) Function key [F7]

(SET QUIT)

Area change

is

completed by

pressing

this

key.

With

the

marker as th e

center

point,

the

area

enclosed

by

the scale frame

will

be

the designated graph

data area.



4202-E A -43

A.

ANIMATION

FUNCTION

(4)

SOLID VIEW

Area

Change

SOLID VIEW

area

change

is identical to SPLIT

VIEW

area

change

except

that function

key

[F5]

(MARKER)

is ineffective.

AUTO

OPERATION

05454.*:.

MIN 05454 N

97/04/01

3:06:23

0

*AREA

CHANGE* -

U/

REDLICS

CENTER

X 0.000

0.000

0.000

V

z

PHGE

T

:MAGNI

.

+

PAGE :

REDUCE

2

61.920

=G S

\

V

>Q

H

=GS

>

Ql

IT

ARKER

03

)(FSCOT(Xÿ(ÿ31(T~6TrF~7ArF~Bl

A-JTO OPERATION 05454X.MIN

05454

N

97/04/01

3:06:53

MAGNI.

/

gJSSE

0

*AREA

CHANGE*

CENTER

X

0.000

0.000

0.0G0

PAGET:MAGNI .

PAGET

:

REDUCE

z

619.200

=GS

\

>Q

\

«GS V

>

MARKER

QUIT

(

F 1

)(

F

2

It

F

3

][

F A

)(T

5irF~6l(

F~7

If

FBI



4202-E

A-44


2-10.

Angle Change

The

direction

setting

for the

projection

angle is made while

viewing

the

graphic display

of

the SOLID

VIEW

model . Rotate

the

model

until the

desired

projection

angle is

achieved. This function is not effective

during

SPLIT

VIEW drawing.

AL~0 OPERATION

GRPl.l'-IN

i

97.-134/31 1:29:41

WANGLE

CHANGE*

PAN

63

TILT

43

L

OJRSORT

: CCv

IN

.

.»

CURSOR

4 : UP

CURSOR-:

RIGHT

CURSOR-*:LEFT

\

-GS

>0.

-G A

QUIT

(1)

Use the

cursor

keys

,

(ÿ)

to

change

the PAN

angle (angle

from

X-axis

positive

direction).

+Z

+Y

©

+Z

©

Y

V

<3

x

©

+x

X-Y-Z SOLID

VIEW

Z-X-Y SOLID

VIEW



4202-E A-45


(2 )

Use

the

cursor

keys

{ÿ)

,

(ÿ)

to

change

the

TIL angle (angle

from horizontal plane).

@

@

© ©

\

+Y

''ÿCl

x

+x

X-Y-Z

SOLID

VIEW

Z-X-Y

SOLID

VIEW

(3)

Use

cursor

keys

to

move the projection

angle

model.

©

©

(

©

©

(4)

Function Key

[F7]

(SET QUIT)

When

this function

key

is

pressed,

the

projection angle change

is

completed.

The

amount

of

angle

increase/decrease

each tim e the cursor ke y

is

pressed

is

determined

by

the GRAPH DATA

sett ing (ANGLE

CHANGE

PITCH).

[Supplement]



4202-E

A-46

A.

ANIMATION

FUNCTION

2-11. Blank Definition

Function

(Blank Define)

(1)

Function

Summary

This function defines

the

blank contour which is

used

for

animation,

and creates

ne w

part

program

files

for th e U GC

command

configuration.

(2)

Condition Transition Chart

)

rogram Operation

F5 F7

DC

BLANK

v

DEFINE

QUIT

V

D

lank

Definition Selection

h

i

,

a

i

•

.

F3

F1

F2 F4

F5 F6

r

BLANK

v

SHIFT

r

FILE

„

CREATE

SYMBOL

,

DEFINE

D

REGIS.

NUMBER

D

) )

D

BLANK

.

ENVLP.

)

OOR.

F7

F7 F7 F7

F7

c

c

c

UIT QUIT QUIT QUIT

QUIT

BLANK

NO.

SELECT

COORD.

SYS. NO .

BLANK

SHIFT

BLANK

SIZE

File

Creation

c

)

ymbol

Definition

i

.

F1

F2

F3

F5

)

)

D

SYMBOL

s

SELECT

REATE DELETE

AMEND

F5.

F6

F5,

F6

REGIS.

S

CANCEL

,

c

c

EGIS.

CANCEL

Symbol

Deletion

Symbol

Creation

Symbol

Amend

Symbol

Update

Fig.

2-3

Blank

Definition Condition Transition Chart



4202-E

A-47


(3) Explanation of Each Function

When function

key

[F5] (BLANK DEFINE) is

pressed

while

in the

PROGRAM

OPERATION

mode,

the on-screen display will

be

as

shown

in Fig.

2-4.

PROGRAM

OPERATION

B LA NK D EF

3:

0S: 11

~i

Ho

=01

Co-

00

I

__

DIREC-

V

_

IND=*

F'flRfjlTjO ::E..E

MESH

I -50

=E

SYMBOL

DEFINE

irtr

CREATE

REGIS.

NUMBER

COOR.

BLANK

SHIFT

BLANK

EHVLP.

QUIT

Fig.

2-4 Initial

Display

for Black Definition

The following pages

will

explain the

us e

of each function

key (shown

below) which

is

used

in

the

blank definition

proCess.

J

FILE

CREATE]

QUIT

SYMBOL BLANK

BLANK

DEFINE

SHIFT

ENV1P.

REGIS.

I

NUMBER]

COOR.

rrÿrrÿrrTifrx]fTÿ(Tÿ(TÿrF~8i



4202-E

A-48


(4)

Register

No. Selection

When function

key [F1]

(REGIS.

NUMBER) is

pressed,

the on-screen

display will

be as shown

in

Fig.

2-5.

PROGRAM

OFERATICN

BLANK

DEF

97/04ÿ01

3:08:55

F'AGE 1/1

-flXIS;*

BLANK

No. SELECTION

**

NDEX

COORDINATE:

SYSTEM

NO .

o. BIREC

00

V

00

*

00

V

*

00

_

00

V

*

_6_

00

7

V_

00

*

-ÿn

_v_

V 00

_

*

0

00

=NB

>EN

Select

a

registration

number

SYMBOL

BLANK

BLANK FILE

ENVLP.

CREATE

REGIS.

QUIT

UMBER

COOR. DEFINE

Shi

FT

rrrirrTirFTi(TÿrFTirF~6irF~y)fF~Bi

Fig.

2-5

Register

No. Selection

Display

(a)

Function

Selection

of blank

register

number and setting

of blank conditions.

(b )

Setting

procedure

As the initial values

for

blank

conditions,

the following

have been

set

for register

No. 1-10.

DIREC: V

INDEX:

*

1)

Use

the cursor

keys

{ÿ)

,

(JO)

to

move the cursor to

the

selected

register

No.

position,

and

then

press

the WRITE

key.

2)

The

following

data

will

be

displayed

on

the

console

line:

0:VI_J

1

:HFLJ

2:HL

3:HB4:HR

I_I

LJ

0:V

Enter the numeric

values

for

the desired spindle direction.

[Supplement]

If

the

present settings

for

the

spindle

direction

are to be

used without

changes,

press the

WRITE key.



4202-E

A-49


3) Next, the

following message will be displayed on

the console line:

T:

No specified index Index

At

this

point,

enter the

cutting

face

angle setting,

then

press

the

WRITE key. Setting

data ca n be

either [> <], or

[0

- 359] face

angle

num-eric

value.

(If

there are multiple

rotary

axes,

enter

the

axis

name at

the

beginning

of

the face

angle sett ing.

Ex.:

B190)

[Supplement] 1

.

If the present

setting

for

the face

angle

is

to

be used without

changes,

press

the

only WRITE key.

2. If

there

is

no rotary

axis,

message

is not

displayed.

4)

On-screen

display

returns to that shown

in Fig.

2-10.

(5)

Coordinate

System

When

function

key

[F2]

(COOR.)

is

pressed,

the on-screen display

will

be

as shown

in

Fig. 2-12.

*

FROGRAM OPERATION

BLANK

LCE

97,

''04/01

3:10:07

**

CORD.

SYS.

DE-SIC.

**

Ho: 01 DIREC: V IND:

*

PAGE

1/1

COORD.

SYS.Ho.

=EX

>C0

CORY

DELETE

QUIT

ET

Fig.

2-6

Coordinate

System

Selection

Display

(a)

Function

Coordinate

system

number

setting

and selection

l

J

OPY

DELETE

QUIT

ET

m ~i

(~F~2i

rr~3i

rFm

rF~6i

rm

fF~8i

SET:

The coordinate

system

number

is

set at the

position

the selection cursor indicates.



4202-E A-50


(b)

Setting

procedure

for

coordinate

system

number

1)

Setting

a

new coordinate

system

number

Setting

example:

Coordinate System No.

=

1


=

2

Selection

cursor

election

cursor

i

if

u

J

Fig.

2-7 Blank Symbol

Register

(Ex.

1)

- The selection cursor is located

at

coordinate system No .

1

where the

symbol

for

a

cylindrical

blank is

registered

(left

diagram

above).

-

A

new selection is desired at

coordinate

system

No. 2.

- Press the

cursor

key

(5)

to move

the

selection

cursor

to

the next

setting

area

(right

diagram above).

-

Press function

ke y

[F1]

(SET),

enter the

numeral ‘2’, and press

the

WRITE key

to make

the

coordinate

system

No .

2 setting.

-

With the selection cursor still at

this

position,

press

function

key

[F7]

(QUIT)

to complete

the coordinate

system sett ing.

2)

Selecting

from

previously

set

coordinate

system numbers.

Setting

example:

Coordinate

System

No.

=

01

The

symbol

for a

cylindrical

blank

is registered

at

coordinate

system

No .

1.

The

symbol

for a

triangular

blank is

registered

at

coordinate

system

No . 2.

Coordinate

system

No.

2

setting

is

desired.

If

the selection

cursor

location

is

as

shown in

Fig.

2-8,

press

the

cursor

key

(ÿ)

to

move

the

selection cursor

to

the coordinate

system

No.

2

position.

Press function

key

[F7]

(QUIT)

to

designate the

coordinate

system

No.2

setting.

Selection

cursor

°*J

A

Fig.

2-8

Blank

Symbol Register (Ex.

2)



4202-E A-52


Procedure:

Copying the

blank

register

data from coordinate

system

No.

1

to coordinate

system

No. 2

1) Press function

ke y

[F5] (COPY).

2) Enter

the

numeral ‘1 ’.

3) Enter

a

comma

(,).

4)

Enter

the

numeral

‘2’.

5)

Press the

WRITE key.

Coordinate System

No.

=

01

Coordinate

System

No .

= 01

J

H.

J

2

n

n

j

Fig.

2-10

Example

of

COPY

Function

Amaximum

of

32

blank

symbols

can

be

registered

for

each register

number.

If the

number

of blank

symbols

exceeds

32,

copying

cannot occur. The

copy

function will overwrite

any

blank

symbols

previously

registered for that coordinate

system

No.,

and the

copied symbol

will be

effective.

DELETE:

The

delete

function

is

designated by

function

key

[F6]

(DELETE).

When

this key

is

pressed,

the blank data

of the coordinate

system

No.

indicated by

the

selection cursor will

be deleted.

Although

the blank

data is deleted,

the

coordinate

system

No. remains

unchanged.

Coordinate

System

No.

=

01

Selection cursor


=

01

02j

if.

J

n

j

u

(Before

Deletion)

(After

Deletion)

Fig.

2-1

1

Example of

DELETE

Function



4202-E A-53


Procedure:

To delete

the

blank

symbol

data

registered

at coordinate

system

No.

1

, us e the cursor

key

to

move

the selection cursor

to

the

coordinate

system

No . 1

lo ca tio n. T hen

press

function

ke y [F6]

(DELETE).

At

this

time,

the

following

message

will

be

displayed.

Blank data delete OK

(Y/N)

[Y]

Deletes

the

blank

symbol

data.

[N]

Does

not delete the blank

symbol

data.

Press

function

key

[F7]

(QUIT).

When

this

key

is

pressed,

the coordinate

system

ind icated by the selection cursor

will

be

designated as

the blank

shape (symbol)

definition coordinate

system

No.,

and setting

is completed.

QUIT:

(6)

Symbol

Definition

When function

key [F3]

(SYMBOL DEFINE)

is

pressed,

the

on-screen

display will

be

as shown in

Fig.

2-12.

PROGRAM OPERATION BLANK

EE*7

37704ÿ01

3:13:35

Ho -0 1

Co- 00

___

DIREC-

V

____

ND-*

3

r

'I TtF

;

MESH -10mm

SELECT SYfiBOL

.

No.

=LAST

1

a

4-

-

[ -ÿ-

SYMBOL

SELECT

REATE DELETE

AMEND

QUIT

CETTI

(~F~ÿ

(T31

fF~6~)

fF~T) rp~6~)

Fig.

2-12

Initial

Display

for SYMBOL

DEFINE

(a)

Function

This

is the

function

for

symbol

definition.

The

blank

shape

is defined

by

combinations of

these

symbols.

I

J

YMBX

SELECT

REATE DELETE AMEND

QUIT

(TTirFÿ(Tÿ{TÿrF~5~i(~F~6irFTirF~8i

Fig.

2-13

Initial Function

fo r SYMBOL

DEFINE

Setting

Procedure



4202-E A-54


(b)

Setting

procedure

1) At the

initial

display

for SYMBOL

DEFINE (Fig.

2-12),

press

function

ke y

[F5]

(SYMBOL

SELECT).

Function

ke y [F5] (SYMBOL SELECT) moves

the

pointer

through

the

symbol

register sequence.

Each time this

ke y is

pressed,

the

pointer

proceeds

to

the

next

symbol,

and that

symbol

is

highlighted. Normally

the

pointer

is located at

the

en d

of the

register

sequence.

Register

sequence

No.

No. 1 No.

2

No.

3

I

i

Function

ke y

[F5]

(SYMBOL

SELECT)

is

pressed.

No. 1

highlight ends,

an d No.

2

is

high¬

lighted.

If

function

ke y

[FI]

(CREATE)

is

pressed

at

this

point,

the

symbol

to be created

will

be inserted between

No.

2

and No.

3.

Function

ke y

[F5]

(SYMBOL

SELECT)

is

pressed.

No. 2

highlight

ends,

and

No.

3 is

highlighted.



4202-E A-55


2) At the initial

display

for SYMBOL

DEFINE (Fig.

2-18),

press

function

ke y [F1]

(CREATE).

Fig. 2-14

shows the

symbol

select

display.

First,

the symbol

shape

is

determined. Use the

cursor

ke y

to

move the

pointer

to the desired

pattern,

selected from

among

the

8

patterns

displayed

at

the left side of the

screen. ‘With

the

pointer

at the desired

pattern, press

the

WRITE

key,

and this

pattern

is selected.

i

_

m

j

YMBOL

SELECT

QUIT

ELETE WEND

(T~Tÿ (~F~3~)

fF~4~) fÿ~5l

f~F~6~l

(~F~T1

(~F~B~)

PROGRAM

OPERATION

B LA NK DEE

97V04/01

3*

14:

TO

No

=01

Co®

00

—DIREC® V

___

ND-*

'oTl

*4

SY IBOL

DtFtNI

dip

MESH

*

10

mm

I®

SELECT

SYMBOL

.

No.

-LAST

0

T0

• FT

E

1

=

KD_

SYMBOL

SELEET

REfiTE

j

DELETE

AMEND

QUIT

fFÿrrT)(TÿrÿiTÿnÿ6irF~T)rF~8i

Fig. 2-14

SYMBOL

CREATE Function of

Symbol

Select

Display



4202-E A-56


[Supplement]

The blank

symbol

patterns shown

at

the left side of the

Fig.

2-19 are

as

follows:

The left column

represents

the

‘plus’

area.

The

right

column represents the ‘minus’ area.

From

top

to

bottom,

the

right

column

patterns

are:

minus

cylinder,

minus

triangular

pole,

minus

quadrilateral,

minus

arbitrary

quadrilateral,

and

the left column patterns area: cylinder,

triangular

pole, quadri lateral,

arbitrary

quadrilateral.

Q

fill

few

a

y

&

H

s

Fig.

2-15 Blank

Symbol

Patterns

Th e

'plus’

area

is the

area

which has actual

existence.

The ‘minus’ area

does

not

have

actual existence. For

example,

if

a blank definition

consisting

of a

cylinder

shaped

opening

in

the

center of the

rectangular parallelopiped

shown below is

desired,

a

quadrilateral

pattern

is combined with a

minus

cylinder

pattern.

CM

i*:<

+

/

o

Minus

Cylinder

ectangle



4202-E A-57


3) With the blank shape

determined,

the next

step

is to determine the blank position and size.

PROGRPtf

OPERATION

BLPN-:

DEF

97/04/01

3:15:26

|

ME'SH

=

l@mm

__

>HIFT=lGmm

.

VERTEX

__

Xa=|

__

Va= -10

__

Xb =

__

Yb«

__

HEIGHT

__

Za=

-10

2 lx

Zl:i

=

'MflOll

$TRIJ'|:TI

JH

I

*

0

0

0

E<I'r

SE

04 ÿ

IKA3E.T

hUriER

.

REGIS.

CANCEL

[EXTEND]

SET

(TT>(TT]rFT]rFTnrFTirÿ6]rF~7](TT)

Fig.

2-16 Symbol

Creation, Position,

Size Sett ing

Display

J

IMAGE/

KJMER.

[EXTENDI

REGIS.

|

CANC£L|

ET

fFÿnfF~2l[

F

3

i

(~F~4~1

(

F

5

l

pF~6 )

[

F 7

)(

F

8

j

J

OSIT.

VERTEX

SHIFT

I/

SHAPE

SELECT

SELECT

REGIS.

I

CANCEL

[EXTEND]

rrT)(TÿrrrifrT)CFÿrrwirFÿrrm

Fig.

2-17 Symbole Creation,

Position,

Size Setting Functions

After the

pattern

has been determined

(item 2),

the

on-screen

display wi ll change

to that

shown in Fig.

2-16. The

blank

position

and size setting method consists

of

two formats:

numeric

input,

and image

input.



4202-E

A-58


(a) Numeric input format

Press

function key [F2]

(IMAGE/NUMBER.)

until INPUT

NAME

is

displayed in

the lower

right

portion

of the

display

shown

in Fig.

2-16.

At

the

right

side of

the

display

shown

in

Fig.

2-14,

there

are coordinate values which

apply

to each

symbol

item. Press

function

ke y

[F1]

(SET),

enter the

numeric

value

and

press

the WRITE key.

This

sets

the

desired coordinate values

which

determine

the

symbol

position

an d

size.

(b)

Image

input

format

Press

the

[F2] (IMAGE/NUMBER.)

function ke y

until

INPUT IMAGE is displayed in the lower

right

portion

of

the

display

shown

in Fig. 2-16.

Image input

consists

of two

modes:

1)

Position

determine

mode

Determines

the

symbol

position.

2) Shape determine mode

Determines the

symbol

size.

(c)

Position determine mode

Press

function ke y [F2]

(POSIT./SHAPE)

shown

in

Fig. 2-17

until

POSITION

is

displayed in

the

lower

right

portion

of the

display

shown

in

Fig.

2-17.

Use

the cursor to move

the

symbol

to the

desired

position.

(d)

Shape

determine mode

Press function

ke y

[F2] (POSIT./SHAPE) shown

in

Fig.

2-1

7 until

SHAPE is

displayed in

the lower

right

portion of

the display

shown

in Fig.

2-16.

The desired shape can be determined

by

using

the

cursor key.

The

page

key

is used for

magnification/reduction.

The blank

symbol

pattern

changes

which

occur by

using

the

page

and

cursor

keys

are

shown

in

Fig.

2-19

to

Fig.

2-21

.



4202-E

A-59


Actual

Size

{Plane)

Page

Key

for

Reduction

Page Key

for

Magnification

\

i

i

i

t

I

I

/

\

/

(Cylinder)

s'

.A

i

i

.1

i

i

i

i

(Triangular)

---

-P

Q j

i

i

(Quadrilateral)

---

1

---

dJ

i

i

i

(Arbitrary

Quadrilateral)

Fig.

2-18

Use

of PAGE

Key for

Blank Symbole

Magnify/Reduce



4202-E A-61


Cursor Keys

©

©

A

i

©

Fig.

2-21

Arbitrary

Quadrilateral

Change by Using

Cursor

ke y



4202-E A-62


Explanation of function

keys

[F3]

(VERTEX

SELECT)

Changes the vertex which is indicated

by

the marker.

Example:

When

function

key

[F3]

(VERTEX

SELECT)

is

pressed, the

vertex

which is indicated

by the

market

is

changed.

[F4]

(SHIFT

SELECT)

Determines

the

movement amount

each

time the marker

is

moved.

The

desired

amount

should

be entered

at

the upper

right

portion

of

the screen where SHIFT

=

is

displayed.

The blank

symbol

shape, position

and size which have been determined

in

items

2)

and

3),

are

registered at the designated

coordinate

system

No .

by pressing

function

ke y

[F5] (REGIS.).

—

Precautions regarding blank definition

1

)

Shapes which have no area

cannot

be defined.

2) Arbitrary quadrilateral shapes

with

plane indentions ( )

cannot

be

defined.

3) If the symbol item’s coordinate

value

is

no t

within

a

-9999

mm

to 9999

mm

(-999.9

inch

to 999.9

inch)

range,

it cannot

be defined.

4)

The minimum unit

designation

for the

coordinate value is

1 mm

(0.1

inch).



4202-E A-64


(10) Blank Shift

When function

ke y

[F4] (BLANK

SFIIFT)

is

pressed, the on-screen

display will

be

as

shown

in Fig.

2-22.

PROGRAM

OPERATION

BLANK DEF

97x34/131 3:

16:25

rn ho

=01

Co*

00

___

DIREC

v

IND«*

IQrr

:r

MESH

=

1

0mm

MARKER POSI.

’

X=

-10.000

.

Y-

-10.000

—10.000

2

Z-

x

SHIFT POSI.

=1

Y=

Z=

’

jl±

I

*Z-

•

PLANE

MARKER

SHE

MARKERET EXECUTE

QUIT

rrrirrTirFTi(TÿrFTirF~6irF~7~)fF~Bi

Fig.

2-22

Blank

Shift Display

(a)

Function

The

blank

position

is moved.

(b )

Function

key

J

PLANE

j

SIDE

j

MARKER

j

MARKER]

EXECUTE

QUIT

SE T

f?~T1

(T~ÿ

f~Fÿ3~)

(~F~4~)

g~F~5~)

(~F~6~I

(

F

7)(~F~8l

Fig.

2-23

Blank Shift

Function Key



4202-E A-65


(c) Procedure

1) The reference

point

(zero point)

is

moved to

the pattern by using

function

ke y

[F3]

(PLANE

MARKER)

for the

(

)

cursor, and

function

key

[F4]

(SIDE MARKER)

for the

( =g= )

cursor.

2)

The setting

for

the

position

to

which

the zero

point

is

moved is made

at

the

‘X

=,

Y

=,

Z

='

display, located at the lower

right

portion of

the screen shown

in Fig.

2-22. To make the

setting,

move the cursor to the

position

where

setting

is desired, press

function

ke y

[F1]

(SET),

enter

the

numeric

value,

an d

press the WRITE key.

3)

When

function ke y [F5]

(EXECUTE)

shown in Fig . 2-22

is

pressed,

the

(

—

) cursor

will

move

to the

X, Y, Z

position

designated

in

item 2)

above.

400

400-

-4

-

0

m

-400-

-400

-400

0

400

800

1

200

X

40 1

800

12 00 1 60 0

2000

X

z

z

0

£

200-

-200

400

800

1200

1600

2000

X

-400

0

400 800

1200

X

(Before

Movement)

(After Movement)

Fig. 2-24

Example of

Blank

Movement

In

the

example

given

in

Fig. 2-24,

the

following movement

procedure

occurs:

-

In

the left

side

diagram

(before

movement)

, the cursor

position (zero point) X,

Y,

Z

setting

is

(1200,0, -100).

-

A

movement destination

setting

of

X

=

800, Y

=

0, Z

= -

100,

is

made.

-

Function

key

[F5]

(EXECUTE) is

pressed,

andthe cursor

moves

to

the (X

=

800,

Y

=

0,

Z

=

-100)

position

shown in the

right

side diagram

at

the

right

(after movement).



4202-E A-66


(11) Blank Size

When function

key

[F5] (BLANK ENVLP.) is pressed, the on-screen

display will

be

as

shown

in

Fig.

2-25.

PROGRAM OPERATION

B LA NK DEF

97/04/01

4:15:49

_

No =01 Co = 00

___

DIREC=

V

____

ND-*

**

BLANK

$IIE

MESH -101mm

j£HIFT«4dot

CEfTTER

=1

Y“

j

i

Z=

1WIDTH

X-

Y-

Z=

INPUT NUME.

_

_

,

S

MARKER SHIFT

SELECT

IMAGE.'

SET

NUMER.

SELECT EcECLTE

Cl

JIT

Fig.

2-25 Blank Size

Display

(a)

Function

Blank display size setting

is made.

(b )

Function

key

J

IMAGE/

MARKER

SHIFT

NJMER.

SELECT

SELECT EXECUTEET

QUIT

rrri(TÿrFÿrrÿrFÿiTÿ(T~7irF~8i

Fig.

2-26

Blank Size

Function Keys

(c)

Procedure

The

setting method

consists

of two formats:

1)

Display

center,

display

size

setting

made

by

‘numeric input’.

2) Display

center, display size

made

using

a marker

(+),

and frame

(

format is referred to as

‘image

input’.

)

respectively.

This



4202-E

A-67


Numeric input:

1) Press function

ke y

[F2]

(IMAGE/NUMER.)

shown

in

Fig.

2-26 until INPUT NUME.

is

displayed

at the lower

right

portion

of the

screen.

2)

At the

right

side of the

screen,

the

X, Y,

Z

setting area

is

displayed

for

display

center

and

display

size

(width).

Press function

ke y [F1]

(SET)

to

make these

settings.

Example:

Th e

blank

display

size

will

be

as

shown in the figure below

if

the

following settings

are

made:

CENTER: X=100 Y=100

Z

=

0

WIDTH

: X

=

200

Y

=

10 0

Z

=

50

Y

200.000

100.000

0.000

X

z

50.000

0.000

T

-50.000

X

-100.000

0.000

100.000

200.000

300.000

3)

When function key

[F5]

(EXECUTE)

is

pressed,

the

designated display

size

will

be

established.



4202-E

A-68


Image

input:

1) Press function

ke y

[F2]

(IMAGE/NUMBER.)

shown

in Fig.

2-26

until

INPUT IMAG.

is

displayed

at the lower

right

portion

of the

screen.

2)

Determine

the

display

center

by using

the cursor ke y to

move

the marker

(

-

[- ).

3)

Determine

the

display

width

by using

the

page keys

to

increase or

reduce

the frame

(

) width.

Note:

By

using

function

key

[F3]

(MARKER SELECT),

plane

marker

or side

marker

can

be selected. Function

key

[F4]

(SHIFT SELECT) canbe used

to

select

the

movement

amount fo r each frame

and

marker movement.

©

:

Increases the frame

width.

:

Reduces the frame

width.

4) Press function

key [F5] (EXECUTE)

to establish

the designated

display

size. Press

function

ke y [F7]

(QUIT)

to

complete

the

BLANK

SIZE

setting.

(12)

File

Create

(a) Function

Blank

shape

data is converted to UGC commands to create

a

part

program

file.

Al l register

numbers

which define

the

blank

shape

are

converted.

(b)

Procedure

1)

Press

function

key

[F6]

(FILE CREATE).

2) Enter the

following:

«main

file name». «extension name»

Note:

It is recommended to

fix

the

extension

name

to

“ADT”.

3) Press the

WRITE

key.

Default values:

<

<main

file name» A

ADT

extension»

(13)

Quit

(a)

Function

Completes the blank definition.

[Supplement]

If

the QUIT function occurs before the

[F6]

(FILE CREATE)

function has been

executed,

the

following message

will

be

displayed

on the console l ine:

File noncreation

END

OK

(Y/N)

[Y] [WRITE]

Executes

the

QUIT function.

[N]

[WRITE]

Cancels

the

QUIT function.



4202-E

A-69


(14) Example of B lank

Definition

The

following

example illustrates the blank definition function.

[Blank

to be

defined]

z

y

y

/

X

y

[mm]

10 0

0

-100

-150

0

150

[mm] x

z

[mm]

0

-40

-150

0 150

[mm]

x

(a)

Machine

specifications

- Vertical

type

-

No swivel head

specification

-

No rotary axis specification

(b)

Other

Blank defined at

coordinate

system

No.

1



4202-E A -70

A.

ANIMATION

FUNCTION

(c) Definition

procedure

1) Select the PROGRAM OPERATION mode

is

selected.

2) Press function

ke y

[F8] (EXTEND)

until the

functions shown below are

displayed.

J

RU N

(BLANK

INIT

I

DELETEIRENAME

I

DEFINE

GUIDE

I

[

EXTEND

]

TIME

rFTirr2irF3irFÿ~)rF~5irF~6irFÿifF~8i

3)

Press function

ke y

[F5]

(BLANK

DEFINE),

and the

display

will be as

shown in the

figure

below.

PR0GRPI1 CFEfMTICN

ELHH-< DEF

97.-04.-31

3:05:11

Ho

=01

Co-

00

I

__

DIREC-

v

IMD=+

V

-H-ft

OPERATION

SELECT

MESH

-10mir

-ilk

-E 0

a.

e_

=3 0

J1

TEF.

£L

REGIS.

HUMBER

SYMBOL

COOR.

BERIME

BLANK

SHIFT

BLANK

ENVLP .

FILE

CREATE

QUIT

(

F

1

)(F

2

|(

F

3)fFTll(

F

5)(T~6lf

F

7)(Tb1

Initial

Display

for

Blank

Definition



4202-E

A-71


4) At this

time, press function ke y [F1]

(REGIS.

NUMBER).

The display will

change

to that

shown

below.

PROGRAM

OPERATION

BLANK

DEF

97K04K01

3:08:55

R-flXIS:

>

F'AGE

1/1

**

BLANK

HO.

SELECTION

**

COORDINATE

SYSTEM Ho.

NDEX

o

. DIREC

so

_

v’

00V

,-lT

V

*

5

V

00

00

_

V

7

00

V_

00

V

00

_

V

00

0

V

-EX

=MB

>EN

Select

r

eg

istra.t

ion

number

SYMBOL BLANK

BLANK

FILE

DEFINE SHIFT

ENVLP.

CREATE

REGIS.

NUMBER

COOR.

QUIT

rrTirrrirFT)(TÿrFTirF~6irF~73fF~r)

Register

Number Selection

Display

5)

To define the blank at

register

No. 1

:

-

Use

the

(ÿ)

, (5)

keys

to

move

the selection cursor to the

|||||

position.

- Press

the

WRITE key.

-

The

following will

be

displayed

on

the console

line:

4:HR

:V

1 :HF

2:HL 3:HB

Spindle direction

When

this

display

appears, press

the WRITE key.

-

The following

will

be displayed on the

console line:

T:

No

specified

index

*

When this

display appears, press

the

WRITE key.

At this

point, the display page

returns to

that shown in

item

3) .

V

:

Index



4202-E A-73


BLANK

DE F

ROGRAM

OPERATION

97/34/01

4:19:05

:

No -01 Co=

00

__

DIREC-

V

IND-*

i

iLffrNij:

'siiiE

MESH

-10mm

SHIFT-4dot

CENTER

-|

_

V=

Ji

Z*

1NIBTH

X-

V-

z=

INPUT

NUME.

D_

m

IMAGE./

SE T NJMER.

MARKER

SELECT

SHIFT

SELECT

EXECUTE QUIT

(TT>(TTirFTirFGri(TTirÿTirF~7i(TT)

Blank Size

Display Page

10)

Press function

key

[F7]

(QUIT).

11)

The

display

page will

return to that shown

in

item

3).

Press function

ke y [F3]

(SYMBOL

DEFINE),

an d

the

display page

will

change

to that shown below.

PROGRAM

OPERATION

BLANK DE F

97VE4-T31

3:13:35

No-01 Co -

00

___

DIREO

V

____

IHD-*

**

SVitlBJiL

DtFtNE

If*

.MESH

-10mm

’SELECT

SYMBOL

.

No. -LAST

zE

=

M

D_

_

JQ

SYMBOL

SELECT

REATE

|

DELETE

AMEND

QUIT

iTAi(TTirFÿ(TTrirr inrr~6irF~7)(TTri

Symbol

Define

Display Page



4202-E

A-74


1

2)

As this is

the initial

registration

for

this blank,

there

is

no

register

sequence. Press function

ke y [F1]

(CREATE),

and

the

display page

will

change

to

that shown

below.

PROGRAM CPZFHTK'H

ELHNK

DEF

97.

3:14:10

—

FT

No

-01

Co-

00

___

jDIREC- V

IND=»

I

;;vr

iB-;

'L

DfrjNiE

/c=v

a

SP

_MESH

=10rnm

.SELECT

SYMBOL

.

Mo

.=LRST

0

(W

a

a

zt

~

;

-)

hr

SYMBOL

SELECT

REATE

DELETE AMEND

QUIT

rTÿfrÿrÿirÿrÿ5irÿ6~)fFÿi(T~Bi

Pattern

Selection Display Page

13)

Use the

cursor

keys

to

move

the selection marker

to

the

rectangle

position,

and

press

the

WRITE

key. The

display

page

wil l change

to that shown below.

PROGRAM

OPERATION BLGM<

DEF

97 /0 4'0 1 3:1 5:2 6

FT~

MESH

=10mm

__

I

FT

=

10mm

VERTEX

_

INT

x«-|

Ya«

Xb«

-10

0

Yb“ 0

_

HEIGHT

_

Za- -10

jx

Zb-

0

L a

• L

,

..

a

>S0F

h

=

pe

.t*

rt

ir-flSE/

NJMER,

ET

REGIS. CANCEL

C

EXTEND]

nmrrÿrÿrFTÿrr5)rÿ6~)rrT)rF~Bi

Symbol Size,

Position

Display

Page



4202-E A-76


15) For

size,

position

designation

using image

input:

a) Press function

ke y

[F2]

(IMAGE/NUMER.)

until INPUT IMAG. is

displayed

at the lower

right

portion

of

the screen.

b) Press function

ke y

[F8]

(EXTEND).

The functions shown below

will

be available.

I

J

OSIT.

VERTEX

SHIFT

/SHAPE

SELECT

SELECT

REGIS.

CANSEL

[EXTEND]

c)

Press

function

key

[F2]

(POSIT./SHAPE)

until

SHAPE

is

displayed

at

the

lower

right

portion

of the screen.

d)

Use

the

page keys and

the cursor

keys

to determine

the

blank

size.

Example:

Xa~0

Ya

=

100

y

(mm]

Xb

=

150

Yb= 100

Xc =

150

Yc

=

0

100

0

xd

-m

-100

Yd

-

0

-150

0

150

[mm]

x

[mm]

2a

=

0

Zd

=

—40

150

[mm]

x

150 0

With the

marker

and cursor

positioned

as shown above,

us e

the

cursor

key

to

move the

marker

to the

appropriate position,

as shown

in

the

following

figure.

Xa

• =

—150

Ya

=

100

Xb

=

150

Xb

= 100

Xc

=

150

Yc

=

0

Xd

=

-150

Yd

= 0

[mm]

100

0

-100

150

[mm]

x

150



4202-E

A-77


16) Press function

key [F5]

(REGIS.).

This will

register

the blank at coordinate

system

No. 1

of

register

No. 1 .

At

this

time,

the

display

page will

be

as

shown below.

B LA NK B EF

ROGRflM

OPERATION

97/04/01

4:26:

5f

No

=01 Co-

00

___

|DIRD;=

v

____

ND-*

CrffFt

I

ESI

j- t

.MESH

-10mm

.

Si

'.

1

E_ANK

SHIFT

SYMBOL

DEFINE

BLANK

ENVLP.

FILE

CREATE

REGIS,

HUMBER COOF.

QUIT

rrrirrTirFTi(TÿrFTirF~6irF~y)fF~Bi

1

7)

For

part program

file creation of the blank

data

which has been

defined,

press function

ke y

[F6] (FILE

CREATE).

The file

name will

be

registered as “A.DAT”

.

After

pressing function

ke y [F6]

above,

press the WRITE

key.

18) Press function

key

[F7]

(QUIT).

This completes

the

blank

definition

procedure.



4202-E

A-80

A.

ANIMATION

FUNCTION

(b)

Registering

a tool at a

designated

tool No.

1)

Press function

ke y

[F3]

(TOOL NAME).

The

display page

shown below

will

appear.

DOL DATA

SET

S7V04/-01 4:29:12

*

TOOL

NAME

SELECTION

*

TOOL

NO. 1

1.

CENTER

DRILL 2. DRILL 3.

TAP

4.

REAMER

5

H

®

t

6. END MILL

.

BORING BAR 7. FACE MILL 8.

I

5

-TN

Select a number of tool name.

TOOL

ADD MANE SEARCH

IÿEMT

ITEMI

[EXTENDI

ET

(F

1

Ifmif

3

)

\~F~A

}

rF~5~l

TF~6T fF~7T

fF~ET)

2)

Use the

page keys

to select tool

1

to

8

or

9

to

16,

enter

the number

of

the tool to be

set,

and

press

the

WRITE

key.

3)

With the tool

registered,

the

system

returns to the

item

1

display page

where

the

necessary

items

for

tool

shape

data

setting are

displayed.

These items

are as

shown

below:

CENTER

DRILL

BORING FACE

ND

Tool

DRILL TA P REAMER

BAR

MILL MILL

D IAM. D

O O O O O O 0

NOSE

ANGLE

A

O

0

O O

O Note 3 Note

3

TOP

Note 1

Note

1

O O O

DIAM.ND

Note 2 Note 2 Note

2



4202-E A-81


[Supplement]

Fo r center drill and

dril l, ND

=

0.

.

If nose angle sett ing

is

A

=

180

degrees,

this data

will

not be referenced.

Fo r

end mill and fflce

mill,

nose

angle sett ing

is

A

=

180

degrees.

The permissible

input

at

this time

is as

follows:

numeric

character

(1

-

16),

an

asterisk

(>i<)

or

the

WRITE

key.

If

a

numeric

character (1 -

16 )

is

entered for a

too l which is no t

displayed,

an

error

will

occur,

and

input

will be impossible.

If

an

asterisk

(T)

is

entered, a

“tool

no t registered’’

undefinition status is

established

at the

tool

number

which was

designated.

If the

WRITE

key is

pressed,

the tool

which is

registered

at

the designated tool

number will

remain as

is, and the display

page

will

return

to

that w hic h w as

displayed before

function

key [F3] (TOOL NAME)

was

pressed.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.



4202-E A-82


3.

Explanation of

Animation

Related NC

Program

Table for

NC Codes Related to

Graphic

Display

NC Code Function

Remarks

DEF WORK

[n ] Blank

“start”

declaration

“end” declaration

The

shape

of the blank which is

defined

between

the

‘start’

an d

“end”

declarations is

registered

at

the

number indicated

by

the asterisk

(T).

A

new

NC

program

is registered

following the

deletion of

the previously

registered

NC

program.

[n ]

is an

integer

from

1-10.

)

If

[n] is

omitted,

the

system

will

adopt

[1]

as the

setting. The

NC codes

which are effective between

the

‘start’

an d ‘end’ declarations are:

CYLNDR,

CYLNDRI, ORIGIN,

DIREC

INDEX

END

DELET

WORK

[n ]

The blank

definition

data

at the

register

No. indicated

by

the

asterisk

(A)

,

is

deleted.

[n ]

is

an integer

from 1

-

10.

If

[n]

is omitted,

the

system will

adopt [1]

as

the

setting.

SAVE A

backup PBU file

is

created

for

the

blank definition

data.

DRAW Blank

drawing occurs

after the

graphic

display

is erased.

(Blank

drawing

will

not occur when a

blank has not been

registered.)

CLEAR

The graphic display

is

erased.

Table for NC Codes

Which

are Effective between

‘DEF

WORK

[n]’

an d

‘END’

NC Code

Function Remarks

ORIGIN

Hn The

work

coordinate

system

No.

which defines the blank is

designated

by [n],

[n ]

is the work coordinate

system.

INDEX

A

INDEX B

INDEX

C

Angle

Designates

the

rotary

axis name

an d

angle when

cutting occurs for the

defined blank.

If

there is no

rotary

axis

specification,

this

NC

code should

not be entered.

Angle

is

an integer

from 0

-

359

degrees.

DIREC

V

DIREC

HL

DIREC

HR

DIREC

HB

DIREC

HF

Designates

the tool

rotary

axis

direction

(cutting

direction)

when

cutting occurs

for

the defined

blank.

V:

Vertical

axis

HL: Horizontal axis

(left)

HR :

Horizontal axis

(right)

HB:

Horizontal

axis

(back)

HF: Horizontal

axis

(front)

CYLNDR

For cylinder,

triangular

pole

quadrilateral

registration.

Absolute coordinate

CYLNDRI For

cylinder,

triangular pole

quadrilateral registration.

Relative

coordinate



4202-E A-83


(1)

DEF

WORK [n] -

END

[Format]

[Explanation]

DEF

WORK [n ]

-

END, 1

2

n 1

0

The blank

shape

is

registered.

Between the

start

(DEF WORK[n])

declaration

and

the

“END”

declaration,

the

appropriate shape

command string

and

procedure

statement

(refer

to

the

INDEX, DIREC

items

in

the

following pages)

are

registered.

A cylindrical

blank

will be registered as fol lows:

When

registering

a

cylindrical

blank

of

the

bottom center

(250, 0),

bottom

diameter (226),

bottom

height

(0)

andtopface height (81)

with

cutting

direction

(V)

and no

rotary

axis

spec,

at

register

No.

1

,

the

data

input

is a s follows:

DEF

WORK[1]

DIRECV

ORIGINH1

CYLNDR

OP,

[250,0],

226,0,

81

END

(1):

Blank definition “start”

declaration

(2):

Register procedure

statement

(3):

Shape

command

string

(4):

Shape command

string

(5):

“end” declaration

The coordinate

system

which

is

used when blank definition

occurs,

is thatwhich is used

for the NO

program.

The unit is fixed at

1 mm

(0.1

inch).

A

total of 32

blanks

can be

registered

for CYLNDR

and

CYLNDRI

(combined).

A

total of

32

blanks

can be

registered

for ORIGIN.

(2)

CYLNDR and CYLNDRI

These coordinates

vary according

to the

spindle

direction.

Henceforth,

all

explanations

will assume

a

spindle

direction

setting

of

(V:

vertical

axis).

The

coordinates for

the

other

settings

are

as

follows:

HL

(horiz.

left)

HR (horiz. right)

HF (horiz. front)

HB

(horiz.

back)

Example:

Blank

shape command;

CYLNDR

OP

[-250, 0],

226, 0,

81

.

. Cylinder

[Example]

(1)

(2)

(3 )

(4 )

(5)

[Supplement]

XÿZ,

Y-*X,

Z-»Y

XÿZ,

Y-*X,

Z-»Y

X-*Y,

Y-»Z,

Z ÿX

X-*Y,

Y-»Z,

Z ÿX

Top,

bottom

heights

Dia.

Center



4202-E A-84


If

the above

cylinder definition is given, the axes

which

apply

to the center and

height

values

according

to

the

procedure

statement

(DIREC.)

data will be as

the

following

table.

Center

[-250, 0]

Height

[0, 81]

IREC

V X, Y

Z

HF

Y,Z X

HL

Z,X

Y

HB

Y, Z X

HR Z,X

Y

(3)

DELETE

WORK

[Format]

DELETE (WORK,

WORK

[n]), 1 n 1

0

[Explanation]

The blank

definition

data

at the

register

No. indicated

by n,

is

deleted.

[Example] DELETE (WORK,

WORK

[1]):

Blank definition

data

at

register

No.

1

is deleted.

(4)

ORIGIN

[Format]

[Abbreviation]

OR

[Explanation]

The

work

coordinate

system

No . is

designated by

[n].

This coordinate

system

No.

will

be effective until the

next

“ORIGIN”,

or

the

“END”. If

no

designation

is

made,

the

system

will

adopt

‘HO’

as

the

designation.

The

maximum

value

for

[n]

varies depending

on specifications.

LP

(Last

Reference

Point)

will

designate

a

new coordinate

system

value, but absolute

coordinates

do

not

change.

ORIGIN

Hn

n:

Work coordinate

system

No.

(5)

DIREC

[Format]

DIREC (V, HL ,

HR, HB,

HF)

[Explanation]

This

designates the

tool rotation

axis

direction

(cutting direction)

when

cutting

of the

defined blank occurs.

If

there

is

no

swivel head

specification,

this setting

must

be “DIREC V”. With the spindlehead direction as

a

reference point, the

following

are the horizontal axis directions:

HL

....

Horiz. axis

(left)

HR . . .

HB

...

HF

....

Horiz.

axis

(front)

0

~

Horiz.

axis

(right)

Horiz.

axis

(back)

(HR)

HL)

Compensation

reference

point

(V

direction)



4202-E A-85


(6)

INDEX

[Format]

[Explanation]

Designates

the

rotary

axis

name and angle

when

cutting

of the defined blank

occurs.

Rotary

axis

names

:

A , B ,

C

Angle

: An

integer

from

0

-

359

degrees

INDEX

(A,B,C),

angle

(7)

CYLNDR

[Format]

CYLNDR (0,

OP,

OH),

[bottom

center

Xc ,

Yc],

bottom

dia. D,

bottom

height Z1

,

top

face

height

Z2

[Abbreviation]

CY

[Explanation]

Designates either

cylinder

or cylindrical hole

shape (absolute

value).

0 or

OP

Cylinder

Cylindrical hole

H

—

Z2:

Bottom height

Z2

z

--

Z1:

Bottom

height Z1

(Xc,

Yc) :

Bottom center

x.

y

i

x

D

D :

Bottom

dia.

(8) CYLNDR

[Format]

CYLNDR

(3,

3P,

3H),

[bottom

coordinates

X1 ,

VI], [bottom

coordinates X2,

Y2],

[bottom

coordinates

X3 ,

Y3],

bottom height Z1 ,

top face

height 22

[Abbreviation] CY

[Explanation]

Designates

either triangular pole or triangular hole shape (absolute

value).

Triangular

pole

Triangular

hole

3 or 3P

3H

i

z

-

-

Z2

:

To p

face

height

—

(XI,

Y1 )

I

A~

\

y

\

- -

Z1 :

Bottom

height

(X3, Y3)

x

(X2,

Y2)



4202-E A-86


(9)

CYLNDR

[Format]

CYLNDR

(4 ,

4P,

4H),

[bottom

coordinates

X1,

Y1], [bottom coordinates

X2,

Y2], [bottom

coordinates

X4,

Y4],

bottom

height

21

,

top

face

height

22

[Abbreviation] CY

[Explanation] Designates

either

quadri lateral pole

or

quadrilateral

hole

shape

(absolute

value).

4

or 4P

Quadrilateral

pole

Quadrilateral

hole

H

i

i

l

i

Z2 :

Bottom

height

i

/

/

(X4, Y4 )

M-

\

/

\

Z1

:

Bottom

height

(X3,

Y3)

x

(XI,

Y1)

(X2,

Y2)

This

is

a shape

which

allows the

segments

for

the

bottom of

the

quadrilateral pole (X1,

Y1

),

(X2,Y2), (X3,

Y3),

(X4,

Y4 )

to be

connected

in

order. If

these

segments are changed,

or

the

quadrilateral

has an

indention,

this command will

not

be

effective.



4202-E

A-87


(10)

CYLNDRI

[Format] CYLNDRI (0,0P, OH), [reference

point X,

Y],

[relative bottom center

AXc,

AYc],

bottom dia.

D, reference

point

Z,

relative bottom

height AZ1

,

relative

top

face

height AZ2

[Abbreviation]

CYI

[Explanation]

Designates either

quadrilateral

or

quadrilateral

hole

shape (relative value).

Cylinder

Cylinder

hole

Oor OP

OH

D:

Bottom

dia.

Reference

point

(X ,

Y, Z)

-U

Aye

P

r

T

X

I

AXC

Relative

bottom

center

AZ2:

Relative

top

face

height

__1

AZ1:

Relative

bottom

height

Reference

point

(X,

Y,

Z)

z

IT



4202-E

A-88


(11)

CYLNDRI

[Format]

CYLNDRI

(3,

3P,

3H), [reference point

X,

Y],

[relative

bottom coordinates

AX1

,

AY1],

[relative

bottom coordinates

AX2,

AY2],

[relative bottom coordinates

AX3,

AY3],

reference

point

Z,

relative bottom

height

AZ1

,

relative

top

face

height AZ2

[Abbreviation]

CYI

[Explanation]

Designates

either

triangular pole

or

t riangular hole shape

(relative

value).

3

or

3P

. .

Triangular

pole

Triangular

hole

H

Ay1

1x1

Ay2

1

Ay 3

i

x2

y

AX3

“1

r

eference

point

(X,

Y.

Z)

AZ2

__J_

Az1

z

FT

eference point

(X,

Y,

Z)

x



4202-E

A-89


(12)

CYLNDRI

[Format] CYLNDRI (4,4P, 4H), [reference

point X,

Y],

[relative bottom coordinates

AX1

, AY1],

[relative

bottom coordinates

AX2,

AY2],

[relative

bottom

coordinates

AX3,

AY3],

[relative

bottom

coordinates

AX4,

AY4],

reference

point

2, relative bottom

height

AZ1,

relative

top

face

height AZ2

[Abbreviation]

CYI

[Explanation]

Designates

either

quadrilateral

or quadrilateral

hole

shape (relative value).

4

or

4P . .

Quadrilateral

pole

Quadrilateral

hole

H

Ay3

L

x3

__

I

&y2

Ay1

Ay4

_L

1

_

x4

AX2_

T T T T

AX l

Reference

point

(X ,

Y,

Z)

AZ2

Az1

z

T“T

eference

point

x

This

is a shape

which allows

the

segments

fo r

the bottom

of the quadrilateral

(X

+

AX 1,

Y

+

AY1

),

(X

+

AX2,

Y

+

AY2),

(X

+

AX3,

Y

+

AY3),

(X

+

AX4, Y

+

AY4)

to

be connected

in

order.

If

these

segments

are changed,

or

the

quadrilateral

has

an

indention,

this command

will

not be

effective.



4202-E A-90


(13)

System Variables

(Note 1)

The tool

dia.,

tool nose

angle,

tool

nose dia.,

and tool classification

No.

appear

in

the NO

program

as shown

in

the table

below.

Variable Name

Description

Data

Range

VTLTD

[I]

Tool

Dia.

0.000<

+

<

9999.999

Supplement

2

VTLNA

[I]

Tool

nose angle 0.000<

+

<

180.000

VTLND

[I] Tool

nose

Dia.

0.000

<

+

<9999.999

Supplement

3

TLIN

[I]

(Supplement

4)

Tool

classification No.

1

<

+

<

7

[Supplement]

1.

Direct

setting

can

be made at TOOL SHAPE

DEFINITION

of the TOOL DATA

SET

mode.

2.

Used at

position

tool,

envelope line,

an d

envelope figure drawing.

3.

Although

16

are available,

only

1

-

7

tools are presently registered.

Therefore

the

maximum range is

7.

The

tool classification No. and tool name

relationship,

and the

animated

tool and

tool

classification

relationship

is

as

shown

in

the

table

below.

Tool

Clarification

6

7

3

4 5

No,

Boring

bar End

mill

Face

mill

ap

Reamer

ool

Name

Center

drill

Drill

Tool

Kind

M

JL

casÿ

Animated

Tool

§

17

4.

The system

variable

permits

the

setting

of

separate

service li fe

management

groups. To

accomplish

this,

the

VTL++[I]

setting

is

changed

to VGR++[G].

[G]

indicates the group number.



4202-E A-91


4. Rotary

Axis,

Parallel Axis, 5-Face

Cutting

(1)

Rotary

Axis

By designating

the rotary

axis

name (A, B, C) and

angle

for

which animation is to

occur,

it

is

possible

to execute

animation

only

when at the

designated angle.

Animation is not

possible

for

cutting

which

occurs

during

rotation.

Example

1

:

Animated

tool

z

y

X

Conditions:

-

[V]

type

machine

with

no swivel head

specification.

-

Rotary axis

B

-

Angle

With

these

conditions,

the animation

procedure

fo r the blank

shown in

the

figure

at

left,

is as follows.

(a)

At

the

BLANK

DEFINE page,

set the

spindle

direction to

V,

and the

cutting

face

angle

to BO.

(b)

At

the

BLANK

DEFINE page,

the

X-Y,

X-Z

coordinate

axes

will

be

displayed.

Define

the blank

shape

as shown in the figure

at

below.

0

degree

z

X

(c)

At

the

GRAPH

DATA page,

set

the

spindle

direction

to [V],

and the

rotary

axis

to

[BO].

Animation

can now

be executed.

If

the

spindle

direction is set to

other than

[V],

or

if

the

rotary

axis is

set to other

than

[BO],

animation

will

not

occur.



4202-E A-92


Example

2:

Conditions:

- Using

the

same

blank as

in Example

1, with a [V]

type

machine with no swivel head specification.

- Rotary

axis

B

axis

- Angle

180

degrees

With these

conditions,

the

animation procedure

will

be

as follows:

z

2

X

y

With

the

rotary

axis angle set at

180

degrees,

the

blank will

be

positioned

as

shown in

the

figure

above.

(a)

At

the

BLANK

DEFINE page,

set

the

spindle direction

to

[V],

and

the

cutting face angle

to

[B180].

(b)

At

the

BLANK

DEFINE page,

the X-Y,

X-Z coordinate

axes

will

be

displayed. Define

the

blank

shape

as

shown

in

the

figure

below.

V

x

z

(c)

Animation will occur

only

when the

GRAPFI

DATA

page settings

are as fol lows:

Spindle

direction

V

Angle

1

80

degrees

If there

is a rotary

axis

specification for the above animation,

the

blank which

corresponds

to the

cutting

angle

must be defined, and the

rotary

axis name and cutting

angle

must

be

set

at the

GRAPH

DATA page.



4202-E A-93


(2 )

5-face Cutting

With swivelhead specification, the spindle direction

setting

where animation is desired

in

the

same

manner

as

the

rotary

axis, must be

set

when defining the blank.

For animation to

occur,

the

spindle direction, rotary

axis

name,

and

cutting angle settings

which are

made

at

the

BLANK

DEFINE

page

must

match

the

spindle

position

and

rotary

axis

designations

made

at the GRAPFI DATA

page.

If

animation is to occur

from various

angles

depending

on

the

spindle

direction

and

cutting angle,

each

spindle direction

and

cutting angle setting

which determines the blank

shape

must be defined.

Furthermore,

the

GRAPH

DATA

designations

must match these

settings

for animation to

occur.

(3)

Parallel Axis

The

parallel

axis

(U ,

V, W)

applies

only

to

the

NO

axis. The

following

3

master/slave

axis selections

are

possible

at the GRAPH DATA page:

-

Master axis

only

-

Slave axis

only

-

Master

axis

+

slave axis



4202-E A-94


SECTION 3 ANIMATION DISPLAY METHOD

(1)

Blank

Definition

(a)

Select the PROGRAM OPERATION mode.

(b)

Press

function

key

[F8]

(EXTEND)

until function

keys

shown

in

the figure below

are

displayed.

I

J

LANK

INIT

DELETE

RENAME

DEFINE

RUN

GUIDE

[EXTEND]

IKE

fTÿirÿrFÿrFÿ~irF~5l(~F~6lfT~7irF~8l

(c)

Press

function

key

[F5]

(BLANK

DEFINE),

and

define

the

blank.

(2)

Animation Data Setting Required

at

GRAPH

DATA

(a)

Select the

AUTO

mode.

(b)

Press

function

key

[F8]

(EXTEND)

until

function keys

shown

in

the figure

below

are

displayed.

AREA

ANCLE

CHANGE CHANGE

GRAPHIC

AUTO

GRAPHIC

DATA

SCALE

[EXTEND]

ITT1(TinfT3l(Tÿ(TTnfT~6 l(TTirFiri

(c) Press function

ke y

[F2]

(GRAPHIC

DATA), and make the data

settings.

(3)

Registration

of

Animation

Blank Data

The NO

automatically

select the animation data

file having

the extension

code AD T

following the

same name as

the part program

selected with the PROGRAM

SELECT key.

(a) Select the part

program

using

the PROGRAM SELECT

key.

Operation example:

1

) Select

ABC. MIN

using

the

PROGRAM SELECT

key.

=

PS

ABC. MIN

2)

Then,

search

ABC. ADT

(animation data

file registered

under

the same

name

with the main

file

name).

After

finding

it,

the

NO

registers

the

animation

blank data

while

displaying

“Animation datafile read”

on the console line of

the

screen.

If

an error

occurs

at this

time,

the

blank

data

is

not

registered

and

the previous

registration

remains effective.



4202-E A-95


(4) Determining

Blank

Display

Area

(a) Select the AUTO mode.

(b) Press function

ke y

[F8]

(EXTEND)

until

the

function

keys

shown

in

the

figure

below are

displayed.

I

J

RAPHIC

AUTO

GRAPHIC

DATA

SCALE

AREA

ANGLE

CHANGE

CHANGE

[EXTEND]

(c)

Press

function

key [F3]

(AUTO

SCALE).

It is

also possible

to

press function key [F5]

(AREA

CHANGE),

and use the area

change

function to

determine the

display

area.

(d)

For SOLID

VIEW display,

function

ke y

[F6]

(ANGLE CHANGE)

can be pressed

to

change

the

projection angle

if

necessary.

(5)

Blank

Display

(a) Press function

ke y

[F1]

(GRAPHIC).

(b)

Press function

ke y

[F4] (MATERIAL) to

display

the blank.

I

J

OOL

j

MATE:-

|

GRAPHIC

DATA I HIGH I

KIND

RIAL

ERASE

OrVCFTj

DRAW

I

C

EXTEND]

I TRACE/

I

GRAPHIC

ANIMATE

f~Fin

jT~4l (~F~5l fF~6~)

f~F~8~l

(6)

Start

the

cutting

program.

[Supplement]

There are

cases where

the animation

processing speed can

not

keep

up

with

rapid

axis

movement, in magnification,

etc.

In

such cases, ANIM.

SPEED OVER

will be

displayed

at the upper lef t

of the

screen, and

the

animation control

is

stopped and divided

into

3

steps

as shown

below.

Drawing:

ye s

Drawing:

no

O

x

Envelope

Figure

Envelope

Line

Animated

Tool

race Line

Normal

O o o o

Speed

over

1

O O

o

Speed

over

2

O

x x

X

Speed

over

3

x

x x

X

Blank

drawing

cannot occur

during

the animation speed-over condition. This condit ion

is

released

by

pressing lunction

key [F5]

(GRAPHIC

ERASE).



B.

TOOL

PATH DISPLAY

FUNCTION



4202-E

B-1

B.

TOOL

PATH DISPLAY FUNCTION

SECTION

1 OVERVIEW

Features

.

Programmed

tool paths an d workpiece shape

are

drawn

on

the

graphic screen on

the

operation

panel.

Major Functions

.

0)

Display

modes can be

selected

from

the following two modes.

- Split

(2-view)

-

3-D

(Fig.

1-1)

(Fig.

1-2)

AUTO OPERATION GRP2.MIN

0

N01

6

97/04/01

6:49:04

LOCUS GRAPHIC

i

on .

coo

ACTUAL

VALUE

0.000

0

.

000

-0.01?

TARGET

VALUE

X

K/

O.flDO

0.000

-100.000

0.000

“0.017

X

Y

Z

-SOB-

QUO

X

0.0

s

0

0

IDO-ODD

-

H- 0 D=

0.000

0.000

-100.000

X

i00.000

n.ooo

iDC.QDD

PROGRAM

ACTUAL PART

SELECT

POSIT.

PROGRAM

BLOCK

BATA

SEARCH

CHECK

E'ATA

TC/APC

[EXTEND]

(

F

1

)(F

2

|(

F

3)[ FT»'

It

F

5)(T~6T(

F

7)fTB)

Fig.

1-1

AUTO

OPERATION GRP2.MIN

O

N01

6

97/04/01

6:50:33

LOCUS

GRAPHIC

ACTUAL

VALUE

0.000

0

.00O

-0.017

TARGET

VALUE

0

.

000

0.000

-0.017

X

V

z

X

Y

mm

Z

wBrn

0.0

/C

s

0

z

H= 0

P=

0

«

9

93.54G

...ÿ*ÿ

Y

PROGRAM

ACTUAL

PART

BLOCK

SELECT POSIT. PROGRAM DATA SEARCH

ATC/APC

CHECK

DATA

[EXTEND:

I

F

1

)fF~~2T(

f

3)f FT»')fF~5l(T~6:rF~7:rFTl

Fig. 1-2



4202-E

B-2


(2 )

Drawing

speed

can

be selected from the

following

two modes.

- Programmed

feedrate

-

High drawing

speed

(3)

Display

position and scale can be

changed

while

looking

at tlte tool paths

being

drawn.

(4)

Programmed

shape

display

without actual axis

movements

is possible.

(5)

With 3-D

display mode,

view

angle (elevation

and rotation angles)

can

be

changed

as

required

so that

the

operator

can

check the

programmed

shape

in any angle from any height

level.

(Fig.

1-3)

I

AUTO

OPERATION GRP3.UIN

_0

JL

6_

|

97/07/15

UTTOTOO'

PLANE CHANGE

HEIGHT

25

OIREC.

45

CENTER

X

0.

000

Y

0.

000

Z 200.000

+X

-X

+Y

-Y

+Z

-Z

96.999

>Q

=G A

>GV

>

ANGLE

CHANGE

AREA

PLANE

C

CHANGE

QUIT

rÿT)rTTi (TÿrFÿ(TT)(TÿrF~T)rF~ei

Fig.

1-3

(6)

Restart and

sequence

restart

operations

are both

possible.

(7)

Zero

offset,

cutter

radius offset and

3-D

offset data

are al l added

to draw

the

programmed

tool

paths.



4202-E B-3


SECTION 2 SETTING

OF

DISPLAY

DATA

Set

the data

necessary

for drawing the programmed

tool

paths,

as

required.

Data

Setting

in

the

Graphic

Data

Mode

.

Operation

procedure:

(1)

Select

any

of

the following

operation

modes:

-

AUTO

- MDI

-

MANUAL

(2) Press function

key [F8] (EXTEND)

until the

screen displays

the function

key names

indicated

below.

• EX

-EX

CAflPHIC

ERASE

GRAPHIC PLANE

GRAPHIC]

DATA

OPNGE

t

EXTENDI

rFTl

fF~5l

fF~6n

fF~7l

r~F~8~l

(3)

Press

function

ke y

[F1]

(GRAPHIC).

(4)

Press function

ke y [F2] (GRAPHIC DATA).

AUTO

OPERATION

GRP3.I1IN

0

6

97/04/01

2; 52 ;

09

GRAPH DATA lrnm

PLANE

SELECT

Q

C0:Not draw

1:XY

2:

YZ

3:XZ

4

;

XY-XZ

5:ZY“XY

6:XYZ

7;ZXY)

(0:Do

not-

l:Do)

APID P. DRAW

1

GRAPHIC ZERO

X

0.000

0.000

0.000

I

'GRAPH.

COOR

.

0

;

IHVAL

.

/I

:

VAL .

0

Y

Z

|

GRAPH. COOR.

NUMBER

1

GRAPHIC

AREA

X

350.000

Y

350.000

Z 353.000

V ANGLE DIREC 45

HIGH 25

>;

Angle -from axis

X)

(Angle

from

horizontal

leL'el)

=GD

>

GR.

SET

QUIT

ET

COD

CODCOD

COD

CODCODCOD

CfJL)

(5)

Press the cursor keys (ff)

,

(ZP)

to locate

the cursor

on the desired data

position.

For the data displayed

on

the screen,

refer

to 2, “Graphic data Display Parameters”.



4202-E

B-4


(6) Press function

key [F1]

(SET)

and

key in the data through

the

keyboard.

(7)

Press the

WRITE key.

(8)

Make

sure that

the

data has been

correctly

entered on

the

screen.

(9)

Repeat the

steps

(5)

through

(8)

to

enter

all data.

After

all data has been

set,

press

function

ke y

[F7]

(GR.

SET

QUIT).

2.

Graphic

Data

Setting

Parameters

(1)

Parameter:

PLANE

SELECT

This

parameter selects the

plane(s)

on

which

tool

paths

are to be

drawn.

0:

Not draw

Tool

path

is

not drawn.

Tool

path

is drawn on the

XY

plane.

Tool

path

is

drawn

on

the

YZ

plane.

Tool

path

is drawn on the

XZ

plane.

4: XY

-

XZ

Split

display

of

XY

and

XZ

planes

5: ZY

-

XY

Split

display

of

ZY

an d

XY

planes

3D

display

of

X-Y-Z

space

3D

display

of

Z-X-Y

space

Examples

of

graphics

drawn

for each selection are

given

on

the

following pages.

1: XY

2:

YZ

3:

XZ

6: XYZ

7: ZX Y

1: XY

AUTO

OPERATION

GRP3.MIH

0

N

1

97/04/01

2:53:29

LOCUS

GRAPHIC

ACTUAL

VALUE

0.0SO

0.000

0.000

TARGET

VALUE

0.000

0.000

0.000

on

X

V

z

X

V

z

F

0.0

5

• J

H=

0

D»

0

0.000

/

B.ND

PROGRAMI ACTUAL

PART

BLOCK

SELECT)

POSIT.

PROGRAM

DATA

SEARCH

ATC/APC

CHECK

DATA

C

EXTEND]

rrTifrÿrrrinÿnHrinHnfTÿiTT')



4202-E B-5

B.

TOOL

PATH

DISPLAY FUNCTION

2: YZ

AUTO OPERATION

GRP3.MIN

0

N 1

97/04/01

2:54:24

LOCUS

GRAPHIC

z

ACTUAL

VAJJE

0.000

0,000

0

.000

TARGET

VALUE

0.000

0.000

0.000

X

Y

—y

X

Y

Z

O.CDO-

F

0.0

0

0 D-

0

=

0,000

V

-SOD.

00Q

.COD

—

PROGRAM ACTUAL

PART

SELECT

PC S

IT . PROGRAM

BLOCK

DATA

CHECK

DATA

EARCH

ATC/APC

[EXTENDI

i

F

1

)fm(

E

3)rÿTnr5ifT~6irF~7irFTi

3:

XZ

AUTO

OPERATION

GRP3.MIN 0 N

1

97/04/01 2:

97 ;

53

LOCUS

GRAPHIC

ACTUAL

VALUE

0.G00

0

.

000

0.

000

TARGET

VALUE

0.000

0.000

0.000

X

V

z

X

V

z

0.0

DC

0.0

e

H«

0

D=

0

-i

0.000

X

-EDS. ODD

o.oas

PROGRAM

ACTUAL

PART

SELECT

POSIT. PROGRAM,

BLOCK

DATA SEARCH

ATC/APC

CHECK

DATA

[EXTEND]

(TT]rF2]rF3)(FÿrFTurFT]rF~7irF~Bi



4202-E

B-6

B.

TOOL

PATH

DISPLAY FUNCTION

4:

XY-XZ

AUTO OPERATION GRP3.MIN

0

N

1

97/04/01

2:59:08

LOCUS GRAPHIC

Y

ACTUAL

VALLE

0.000

0. 000

0.000

TARGET

VALUE

0.000

0

.

000

0

.

000

X

Y

D.dDO

X

Y

Z

-2D

D.DDO

0.0

S

0

IOD.DDD

H=

0

D

=

0

*-

D.DOD

0.000

• I DE .ODD

X

-3ED. DUD

D.DDD

300.

ODD

PROGRAM

I

ACTUAL

SELECT

PART

POSIT.

I

PROGRAM

BLOCK

BATA

CHECK

I

DATA

I

CEXTENDI

EARCH

ATC/'APC

I

F

1

IfTTll

F

3

}rF~5~irP60rÿ70(TBl

5:

ZY-XY

AUTO

OPERATION

GRP3.NIH

0

H

1

97/04/01

0:00:12

LOCUS GRAPHIC

v

ACTUAL

VALUE

0 . 000

0

.

000

0

.

000

TARGET VALUE

3.000

0.000

0.000

300.DEC

V

z

Y

—

a. BAD

F

0.0

0

0

=

0

D=

0. 000

-3DD.ID0

£

X

-IDD.DDD

D.DDD

IDO.

DEC

-2DD.DDD D.DCD EDD.DDD

PROGRAM ACTUAL

PART

SELECT

POSIT,

PROGRAM,

BLOCK

DATA

SEARCH

ATC/APC,

CHECK

DATA

[EXTEND]

(FTirrÿrÿ(Fÿ(Fÿrÿrr7irF~Bi



4202-E

B-7

B.

TOOL

PATH

DISPLAY FUNCTION

6:

XY Z

AUTO

OPERATION

GRP3.MIN

0 N

1

97/04/01

0:00:59

LOCUS

GRAPHIC

ACTUAL

VALLE

0 .

000

0.

000

0.000

TARGET

VALUE

0

.

000

0.000

0.000

X

V

X

Y

z

0.0

s

0

H= 0 D= 0

103.914

<;

PROGRAM

ACTUAL PART

SELECT

POSIT

.

PROGRAM

BLOCK

DATA

CHECK

DATA

EARCH PTC/

ARC

[EXTEND:

I

F

1

imnt

F

3

1

f~p~4

}rF~5~irÿ6Trÿ7T(TeT

7:

ZX Y

ALTO

OPERATION

GRP3.rr'i 0

N

1

37/04/01

0:01:40

LOCUS GRAPHIC

ACT UAL VAL UE

Q

,

0G 0

0/000

0.

000

TARGET VALUE

0.

300

0,000

0

.

000

X

Y

Z

X

Y

2

F 0.0

0

3

B= 0

=

z...

GJ.S14

>

PROGRAM ACTUAL

PART

SELECT POSIT. PROGRAM

BLOCK

I

DATA

SEARCH

I

ATC/APC

CHECK

DATA

[EXTENDI

(TTirF2irF3)(FFrirFÿrFT:rF~TÿrF~Bi



4 20 2-E B -8

B.

TOOL

PATH DISPLAY FUNCTION

(2) Parameter:

RAPID F. DRAW

This

parameter

sets

whether

the tool

paths

controlled

under

the GOO rapid feed mode

are

to be

drawn or not.

0:

Do not

1

:

Do

. . .

GOO

mode tool

paths

are

not drawn.

GOO

mode tool

paths

are

drawn.

(3)

Parameter: GRAPHIC ZERO

The center

of

the

display

area is called

graphic

zero”,

an d should be set

in

terms of the coordinate

values of the

work

coordinate

system.

(4)

Parameter: GRAPHIC

AREA

This parameter sets

the area

in

which the tool

paths

should be

drawn.

Example:

This

example

show s h ow the

same

rectangle

shown at the

right

is

drawn on the screen

depending

on

the

setting

of

the

GRAPHIC

ZERO

and GRAPHIC

AREA.

300

--

200

--

(a)

GRAPHIC ZERO

X=100

Y=

100

10 0

--

I

100 200

300

40 0

RAPHIC

AREA X

=

40 0

Y

=

200

400

200.000

200

00.000

0.000

X

100.000

200.000

100.000

0.000

(b) GRAPHIC ZERO X

=

200

Y

=

150

20 0

200.000

GRAPHIC

AREA X

=

200

Y

=

100

150.000

100

100.000

150.000 200.000 250.000



4202-E

B-9


(5) Parameter:

V

ANGLE

This

parameter

sets the view

angle in

the 3-D mode

drawing.

For the split

display mode, sett ing

of this

parameter

is

unnecessary.

(a) DIREC

(Angle

from

axis X)

This

parameter sets

the

view

angle

referenced to the positive direction

of

X-axis in units

of

5

degrees.

+Y

Z

%

Y

+Y

8 8

+X

X

Z-X-Y

3D

-Y-Z

3D

The

plus

or

minus sign

of

the angle

is

determined by

viewing

the

plane

from the

top.

An angle measured

in the counterclockwise direction

has

a

positive

value and an

angle

measured

in

the clockwise

direction has a

negative

value.

+

X

Viewing

from

the Top



4202-E B-10


(b) HIGH

(Angle

from horizontal level)

This

parameter

sets the view

angle

referenced to

the

horizontal plane

in units

of

1

degree.

+Z

+Y

V

Y

e

6

+Y

-d

+X'

+x

X-Y-Z

3D

Z-X-Y

3D

The

plus

or minus

sign

of the

angle is

determined

by

viewing

the vertical plane from

the

side.

An

angle

measured

in

the counterclockwise direction has

a

positive

value and an

angle

measured

in

the

clockwise

direction

has

a

negative

value.

+

Horizontal

plane

X

Viewing

from

the

Side



4202-E

B-11


(6) Parameter:

GRAPH.

COOR.

The work coordinate

system

solely used

for

drawing can

be

registered as

the

graphic

coordinate

system. This

coordinate

system

is very

convenient for

drawing

the

programmed tool

paths

and

cutting

processes

on the screen

screen, using

a

single

coordinate

system independent

of the work

coordinate

systems

used in

a

part

program.

This

parameter

sets whether the

graphic

coordinate

system

is

made

effective

or

ineffective.

0: To make the

graphic

coordinate

system

ineffective.

Drawing

is conducted sothat

the

origin

of

the

work coordinate

system

in

a

part

program

is set

at

the center of

the

graphic display

((X, Y, Z)

=

(0,

0,

0)).

1: To

make

the

graphic

coordinate

system

effective.

Drawing

is conducted so that

the origin

of

the graphic coordinate

system

is

set

at the

center of

the

graphic display

((X, Y,

Z)

=

(0.

0, 0)).

Note: Whether the

graphic

coordinate

system

is

made

effective or

not

when

power supply

to the

control

is

turned

on or

when

it

is

reset,

can be

determined

by

the

setting

ofNC optional

parameter

(bit)

No .

33

bit 0.

(7)

Parameter: GRAPH. COOR.

NUMBER

Th e

number

for

the work coordinate

system solely

used

fo r graphic drawing can

be set

as

the

graphic

coordinate

system

number.

Setting

range: 0-100

Machine coordinate

system

Work

coordinate

system

number

Note

1:

Once

set,

the

graphic

coordinate

system

number is not cleared when the controlis reset

or

power

supply

to

the

control

is

turned

off.

0

1-100

Note

2:

Setting range

is

0

-

100 as stated

above.

If

a

value

greater

than the

maximum

number

of

work coordinate

system

sets is

set, drawing

is made on

the machine coordinate

system

depending

on

the

specification.



4202-E

B-12


3. Data Setting in the Plane Chance Mode

The color

graphic display

function

permits

the

set data

-

GRAPHIC

ZERO,

GRAPHIC

AREA, and V

ANGLE

-

to be

changed

while the operator is

looking

at

the tool

paths

being

drawn.

(1)

Changing

GRAPHIC

ZERO

Data

Operation procedure:

(a)

Select

any

of

the

following

operation

modes:

AUTO

-

MDI

-

MANUAL

(b)

Press function

key

[F8] (EXTEND) until the

screen displays

the set of function

key

names

shown below.

• EX

• EX

1

RAPHI

OWPHZq

DATA

PLATE

|

OANGEl

GRAPHIC

ERASE I L

EXTENDS

fTÿfTTi(TÿiTÿrpÿrF~6irrTirF~8i

(c)

Press function

key

[F1]

(GRAPHIC).

(d)

Press

function

key

[F3]

(PLANE CHANGE).

AUTO OPERATION

GRP3.MIN

0

N

1

97/04/01 0:03:06

REDUCER

LANE

CHANGE

CENTER

X

0.000

0.000

0.000

V

z

*

.DH0

0.000

=EX

-ÿ4

GA

-290.0110

0.010

ANGLE

CHANGE

PLANE C

QUIT

AREA

CHANGE

nmrrÿrÿrFGÿrr5)rÿ6irr7irF~ri

(e)

Locate the marker

at

the

point

where the

graphic

zero is to

be

established.

Use

the cursor

keys

(0)

,

(5)

,

@ )

,

@

for

moving

the

marker.

(f)

After

locating

the

marker at

the desired

point,

press

function

key [F7]

(PLANE

C

QUIT).



4202-

E

B-13


(2 )

Changing

GRAPHIC

AREA

Data

Follow the

steps

(a)

through

(d )

in

(1).

Operation procedure:

This

operation

is effective

only

when the 3-D

display

mode

is

selected.

(e) Locate the

display

area

indicating

frames at the required

display

area.

Use

the

page

keys

(fg)

,

(23)

for

this

operation.

(f)

Press

function

ke y

[F7]

(PLANE

C

QUIT).

(3)

Changing

V

ANGLE Data

Follow the

steps

(a)

through (d) in

(1).

Operation

procedure:

This

operation

is

effective

only

when the 3-D

display

mode

is

selected.

(e)

Press function key [F4]

(ANGLE

CHANGE).

I

AUTO

OPERATION

GHP3.MIN

J).

JL

ii

I

97/07/1

5 1

4MO:00

PLANE CHANGE

HEIGHT

25

DIREC.

45

CENTER

X

0.

000

Y

0.

000

Z 200.000

+X

-X

+Y

-Y

+z

-z

«a--

—

96.999

>0

=G A

>GV

>

ANGLE

CHANGE

AREA

PLANE

C

CHANGE

QUIT

rrrÿrrÿ(Tÿ(TTTirr5~)rF~6i(T~TirÿBi

(f) Rotate the

angle

cube to the desired

angle

(from

X-axis)

by pressing

the cursor

keys

@)

,

(c$)

.

(g)

Rotate the

angle

cube to the desired

angle

(from plane)

by pressing

the cursor

keys .

(h)

Press function

ke y

[F7] (PLANE C

QUIT).



4202-E

B-14


SECTION 3

TOOL PATH

DRAWING

Operations

.

To draw the programmed

tool

paths

on

the

screen,

follow

the

procedure

indicated

below:

(1)

Select

the

AUTO mode.

(2)

Select

the program

for which

tool paths are

to

be

drawn.

(3)

Press function

key

[F8]

(EXTEND)

three

times.

(4) Press

function ke y

[F1]

(GRAPHIC).

(5)

To

erase

the tool paths already drawn on

the

screen, press

function

key

[F6]

(GRAPHIC

ERASE).

(6)

Press

the

CYCLE

START button. The tool

paths

are

drawn on

the screen

in synchronization

with

the

execution of

the

program.

[Supplement]

1

. If the

operation is

attempted

in

the

MACHINE LOCK

mode, the

tool

paths will be

drawn while actual axis movements do not

occur.

2. If “0 (Not

draw)” is set at

parameter

PLANE

SELECT on

the

GRAPH

DATA page,

tool

path

drawing

does not occur.

2.

Contents

of

Display

(1)

The programmed

tool

paths

are differentiated

by the

types

of

lines

as indicated below:

Rapid

feed

.

Cutting

feed

Jog

feed

. . .

(2)

Even when

the machining

face

is changed due

to

the indexing

or rotation

of the

rotary

axis, the

tool paths are drawn

assuming

the

same

face. Therefore, it

is

recommended to erase the tool

paths

drawn

for

the

previous

face.

(3) The tool paths are drawn

taking

the manual shift

amount,

work

zero

offset

amount,

and tool

offset

amount

into

account.

broken lines

solid

lines

dots

( )

(

)



4202-E B-15


3.

Restart

and

Sequence

Restart

Operations

(1)

The

restart

operation

called

by

the pressing

of

function ke y [F2] (RESTART)

draws the tool

paths

at a

high

speed up

to the

specified

block.

Th e point

corresponding

to the actual

position

will

blink

during

this

high-speed drawing.

rjRpa.MTN

0

UTO OPERATION

W

1

97/04ÿ01

0:10:46

LOCUS

GRAPHIC

ACTUAL VALUE

300.003

-50.003

100.000

TARGET

VALUE

300.000

100.000

100.000

m.

HDD

X

Z

A

Y

100. COD

En d of tne

specified sequence

z

F

0.0

0

H= 0 D- 0

Q.OOQ

0.030

-GE

Actual position

=RS 6

K

IDO. ODD 2DD.BDE

3BD.0DU

PROGRAM

ACTUAL FART

BLOCK

SELECT

POSIT.

PROGRAM DATA SEARCH ATC/APC

CHECK

DATA C

EXTEND]

(TT]rrr i rÿ(Txn(TÿrF~ÿrF~7-)rF~B]

(2) When the SEQUENCE

RESTART

button

is

pressed, the axes are returned to

the

restart

point

at

a manual

cutting feedrate.

The tool paths

are

drawn

in

dots.

The blinking point

is shifted

from

the

actual

position

to

the

restart

point.

AUTO

OPERATION GFP3.MIN

0

IN

6

97/04/01 0:11:

EE

LOCUS GRAPHIC

ACTUAL VALUE

300.000

100.000

100.000

TARGET VALUE

300.000

100.000

100.000

sno.Don

V

:

x

Y

m.m

-

Restart point

z

F

0.0

S

1000

H=

0 D=

0

l-POII

0.000

inn.DUD

2an.ncn

m.m

PROGRAM

ACTUAL

PART

BLOCK

SELECT

POSIT'. PROGRAM

DATA

SEARCH

ATC/APC

CHECK

DATA

[EXTENDI

rrrirrT)rÿ(TÿrFÿrF~6TrF~7~)rF~BT



4202-E

B-1 7


SECTION 4 PARAMETERS

NO

optional parameter (bit)

No.

33 bi t 0

Effective/ineffective

of

graphic

coordinate

system

0:

Graphic

coordinate

system

is

made

ineffective when

power

supply

is

turned

on or

the

control is

reset.

1 :

Graphic

coordinate

system

is

made

effective when

power supply

is turned

on

or

the control

is

reset.



4202-E

C-1

C. NC

OPERATION

MONITOR

SECTION

1 OVERVIEW

This

function

has

two

sub

functions as

N C H OU R

METER

and NC WORK

COUNTER.

The

NC HOUR

METER

function:

Accumulates

the

following

hours and

displays

them on the

screen.

P OW ER O N

TIME

NC RUNNING

TIME

SPINDLE REVOLUTION

TIME

CUTTING

TIME

EXTERNAL

INPUT

TIME

The

NC WORK C OUN TER function: Has four work

counters

an d

counter

data

of individual

counters

is

displayed

on the screen. These four counters can be

used

as

required.

In addition,

data

can be

preset

for each t imer and counter. When

the COUNT

dataexceeds

the

SE T

value,

alarm

signal

is

output.



4202 -E C-2

C. NC OPERATION MONITOR

SECTION 2

NC

HOUR

METER

Contents

of

Display.

Press

function

ke y

[F6]

(ITEM

f)

or

[F7]

(ITEM

1)

after selecting the PARAMETER SET

mode,

then the NC

HOUR

METER screen will be

displayed.

I

PARAMETER SET

97/07/15

14:f0l00

*

NC

HOUR

METER

*

COUNT

SET

99999

:

59:59

0

:

0: 0

1

;«s

0

:

0

:

0

22222

:

22

:

22

99999

:

59

:

59

0

:

0

:

0

1.

POWER

ON

TIME

2.

NC

RUNNING TIME

3.

SPINDLE REVOLUTION

TIME

4.

CUTTING

TIME

5.

EXTERNAL

INPUT

TIME

Y Z

B

AC T POSIT

(WORK)

2288.000 2288.000 240.000

0.000

ITEM

t

[EXTEND]

EARCH

ITEM

]

ET

ADD

(T~F1

fTTH

rF~ÿ~|

fF~6l

fF~7ÿ

f?~Bl

Details

of

the

display

contents

are

explained

below:

The units of

displayed

data

are “hours:minutes:seconds”.

(1)

POWER ON

TIME

This accumulates duration of time

in

which

power supply

to the NC is

on .

(2)

NC

RUNNING

TIME

This

accumulates duration of

time

in

which NC

is

operating.

Note

that

operation

time

in

the

machine

lock

mode is

not

accumulated.

(3) SPINDLE

REVOLUTION

TIME

This

accumulates

duration of

time

in

which

the

spindle

has

been

rotat ing. However,

the time in

which

the

control

is

placed

in

the machine

lock

mode is

not

accumulated

since the

spindle

is

not

rotating in

this mode.

(4)

CUTTING

TIME

This accumulates duration of

time

in

which

axes are

fed in cutting

feedrates.

However,

the time

in

which the control is p laced in

the

machine

lock

mode

is

not accumulated.

(5)

EXTERNAL

INPUT

TIME

This accumulates duration of

time

in which

the

external

input

signal

is ON.



4202-E C-3


2.

Count

Data

and

Set Data

(1)

Setting

of

both

the COUNT

(accumulated)

and SET

(not accumulated)

data is

possible

by

locating

the cursor

at

the

required

data

position.

(2)

If

the

COUNT

data exceeds the value

set

at

SET,

alarm

signal

is

output.

(3)

When

output

of the alarm

signal

is not

required,

set

“0:0:0”

at the SET column.

(4)

The

maximum

setting

values for both COUNT and

SET are

99999:59:59.

(5)

Setting format is

“hours:minutes:seconds” and omission

is not al lowed.

Example:

S

0:28:59

Be sure to

place

a colon.

3. Alarm

If

any

on e of

the COUNT

values exceeds

the SE T

value,

the following

alarm

occurs and

cycle

start of

the NC is

disabled.

3239

ALARM-C

Running

hour over

X

[Index] None

[Character-string]

None

[Code]

X= 1 Alarm with power on time

timer

Alarm with

NC

on

time

timer

Alarm

with

spindle on time t imer

Alarm with cutting time timer

Alarm

with

external

input

time

t imer

2

3

4

5

To reset the

alarm,

(1)

Set COUNT value smaller than SET value.

(2)

Set

SET

value

larger than COUNT value.

(3)

Set

SET

value

at 0:0:0.

Reset

the

NC

after

taking

any

of

the

above indicated

measures.

Note that simple NC reset

operation

cannot reset this alarm.

Note:

if

measure

3

is

taken,

alarm check

is

not conducted.



4202 -E C-4


SECTION 3

NC

WORK COUNTER

1.

Content of

Display

(1)

Switching

the display

screens between NC HOUR

METER

and NC WORK COUNTER is made

by

pressing

the

PAGE

key.

PARAMETER

SET

I

97/07/15

14:10:00

*

NC

WORK

COUNTER

*

COUNT

SET

0

99999999

. WORK

COUNTER

A

2.

WORK COUNTER

B

3. WORK

COUNTER

C

4. WORK COUNTER D

87654321

19620720

7721780

0

98765432

18360000

X

Z

B

AC T

POSIT

(WORK)

2288.000 2288.000 240.000

0.000

ITEM

t

ITEM

i

[EXTEND]

EARCH

ET

AD D

(TlirFTÿ('TT1(TTÿ(TÿfFÿfF~T)fF~Bl

(2)

The count data is

displayed at

the

COUNT

column.

(a) The

units

of indication are pieces.

(b) Work counters

A,

B,

C and D is incremented

each time M02 or M30 is

executed.

This

Counts

the number of

workpieces

which have been machined.

(c)

Count up condition

of the

work counters are

identical to al l of these

counters. Counting does

not occur

during

machine lock mode of

operation.

(d)

Users

ca n us e these

four

counters for individual

purposes.

2.

Count

Data and Set

Data

(1 )

Setting

of both the COUNT

(accumulated)

and

SET

(not

accumulated)

data is

possible

by

locating

the cursor

at

the

required

data

position.

(2 )

If

the COUNT data exceeds the value set at

SET,

alarm

signal

is

output.

(3)

When

output of

the

alarm

signal

is not

required,

set

“0 ” at

SE T column.

(4)

The maximum setting values for both

COUNT

and

SE T are 99999999.



4202-E

C-5

C. NC

OPERATION

MONITOR

3. Alarm

If an y

one of

the

COUNT

values exceeds

the SET

value,

the

following

alarm occurs and

cycle

start

of

the

NC

is disabled.

Work counter over240

The active

work

counter data has exceeded the full

count value.

[Code]

X

=

1

Alarm

with work

counter

A

Alarm

with

work counter

B

Alarm with work counter

C

Alarm with work

counter

D

2

3

4

[Measures

to

Take]

1)

Designate

a count value which

is

smaller than the

setting

value.

2) Designate

a

setting

value

which

is

larger

than the count

value.

3) Designate

a

setting

of

“0”.

To

reset

the

alarm,

(1)

Se t

COUNT

value

smaller

than

SE T value.

(2) Se t

SET

value

larger than COUNT

value.

(3)

Set SET value at

0.

Reset

the

NC

after

taking

any of the above

indicated

measures.

Note

that s imple NC reset operation

cannot reset

this

alarm.

Note:

ff

measure

3

is

taken,

alarm check is not conducted.



D.

Hi2-NC FUNCTION

(HIGH-SPEED NC)



4202-E

D-1

D.

Hi2-NC

FUNCTION

(HIGH-SPEED

NC)

SECTION

1

OVERVIEW

(1)

Th e Hi2-NC function

consists

of the

following

functions:

(a)

High-speed

NC

interpolation

function

which

makes

high

cutting

feedrate for continuous minute

motion blocks

possible.

(b)

Quick response,

high-accuracy

servo

function and tolerance control function which

ensure

high

machining accuracy

on

sculptured surface and

edges.

(2)

The

high-speed

NC

interpolation

function allows

high

cutting feedrate for

cutting

sculptured

surface.

(3)

The

part

program

used

to cut sculptured surface

consists

of

continuous minute

motion blocks

which are created

by

dividing

the sculptured

surface

into

proper

segments

and arcs. The

high-speed

NC

interpolation

function has the

capability

to

read these

minute motion command

blocks and

carries

out

interpolation

at a high speed

to

provide improved high

cutting

feedrate.

The

quick

response, high

accuracy servo

function

and

the

tolerance

control function

greatly

improve

the machined

shape accuracy on

sculptured

surface and

edges. Especially,

the

tolerance

control

function controls

axis feedrates so that the error

on

the machined

shape

is

always

limited within

the

designated

tolerance

while

cutting

sculptured

surface

and edges

at

a

high speed.

With

this

function,

consistently high machining accuracy

is

ensured.

(4)



4202-E

D-2

D.

Hi2-NC

FUNCTION

(HIGH-SPEED

NC)

SECTION 2 HIGH-SPEED

NC

INTERPOLATION

FUNCTION

(1)

Th e

high-speed

NC interpolation function

is

developed

by

increasing

the NC interpolation speed

of

the

NC

itse lf . This

means

that;

(a)

high

cutting

feedrate for

continuous minute motion

blocks

is

achieved

using

the

same

program

format

as applied

for conventional

programs,

and

(b)

the same

NC

operations,

such as the sequence

restart,

manual intervention, etc.,

as

available

with the

conventional NC

can be used.

(2)

The high-speed

NC

function reads

more than 9 blocks of commands into the buffer

automatically

when minute motion

blocks

are continued

in

the

part program

so

that the stable

high-speed

NC

interpolation

is

possible.



4202-E

D-3

D.

Hi2-NC

FUNCTION

(HIGH-SPEED

NC)

SECTION 3 TOLERANCE CONTROL FUNCTION

The tolerance control

function

guarantees machining

accuracy for any

type

of

workpiece shape

by

the ‘‘automatic control

of

cutting

feedrate

meeting

the

shape being

machined”,

the

technology

realized

on

the

base

of

quick-response,

high-accuracy

servo

function.

To obtain

required

accuracy,

only

the

designation

of allowable

tolerance is necessary in the

program.

Modification

of

feedrates

corresponding to

the

shape to

be cut

is not necessary any

more.

(1)

(2)

(3)

By designating

the upper

limit

of

the cutting

feedrate,

which

is

determined

according to cutting

conditions

(workpiece

material,

tool

type,

spindle speed, etc.), the maximum

value

of

feedrate

is

clamped

at this upper

limit.

Therefore,

automatic feedrate

control

which meets the

cutting

conditions

is enabled.

(4)

Furthermore,

the

tolerance control

function

‘‘automatically

determines

the

optimum servo control

parameters

best

fitting

to

cutting” based

on

the

upper

limit

of

feedrate which

is

determined

according

to the

cutting

conditions.

Therefore, high-speed, high-accuracy machining

is

always

possible regardless

of

cutting

conditions.

Because automatic

cutting

feedrate control

in

the tolerance control

function

is carried out while

actual

tool

position

is

monitored, machining

accuracy

is

consistently high.

In addit ion,

the

consistently high

accuracy

machining

is realized

in high

feedrates

through

the

feed forward

control which

secures

the

machining accuracy

without

lowering

feedrates

excessively,.

(5)

1.

Designating

Tolerance

Control

Mode

To turn

on

the

tolerance

control

function, designate

the “TOLERANCE

CONTROL ON”.

(1

)

Set

the

following

tolerance control

parameters

according

to the

type

of

machining:

(a)

CONTROL AXIS

(b) HIGH-SPEED MODE

(c) MAXIMUM FEEDRATE

(d) WORK TOLERANCE

(e) FILTER

VALUE

(f)

FILTER MODE

(g)

SMOOTHING MODE

(h)

SMOOTHING

LENGTH

(i)

SMOOTHING

FILTER

VALUE

(2)

Designation

of the tolerance control mode

is

made

in the

following two methods:

(a)

Parameter setting

(b)

Program

command



4202-E

D-4

D.

Hi2-NC

FUNCTION

(HIGH-SPEED

NC)

(3) The tolerance control is effective

only

to the

cutting

feed commands

in

the “feed per minutes”

mode

programmed in

the

tolerance control

mode.

In

other

words,

the tolerance

control

is not

effective to the

rapid

feed commands and

the

feed/rev.

commands

programmed in

the tolerance

control mode.

(4)

Concerning

the

axes,

the

tolerance control is effective

only

to

the

basic three

axes

(X ,

Y,

Z)

and

their

parallel

axes

(U,

V,

W).

Fo r

the

rotating

axes

(A,

B,

C),


is not

effective.

2.

Tolerance

Control

Parameters

(1)

CONTROL

AXIS

(a)

This

parameter selects

the

axes

for which the tolerance control is

made

effective.

(b)

Selection

of the

axis names

is possible between

the

basic

axes

(X, Y, Z) and

linear additional

axes (U,

V,

W).

That

is,

theaxis

names can

be

selected

for

each

Cartesian

coordinate

system

axis

independently:

-

X

direction:

X (basic)

/

U

(additional)

-

Y direction: Y (basic)

/V

(additional)

-

Z

direction:

Z

(basic)

/

W (additional)

(2)

HIGH-SPEED MODE

(a)

The tolerance control function

provides

the following

four control modes and

it

is

possible

to

select

any

of

these modes

to

carry out machining.

-

Normal mode

-

High-speed

mode

1

-

High-speed mode 2

-

High-speed

mode

3

(b) With the tolerance control

function, feedrates are

automatically

controlled

by

the combination

of

the

closed loop

control,

in

which

consistently high accuracy is

secured

for any

workpiece

shape, and

the feed forward control,

in

which

high

accuracy is

secured

without lowering

feedrates

excessively by

estimating machining

error

in

advance.

The feed forward

control,

due to its characteristic that

it

estimates

machining

error

in

advance,

an

error

greater

than

the

preset

tolerance

might be

generated

if slide

hold or other

operation

is

attempted, (positioning

error

in

this

case)

(c)

Therefore,

the

tolerance control

function

permits

the

selection of

control

mode

so

that

the

control best fitting

to

user’s

requirements

is selected between the normal mode, which does

not

include

the feed

forward

control,

and the high-speed

mode,

which

includes the feed

forward control to allow

high-speed cutting.

(d)

The features

of the

high-speed

mode

are

briefly stated

below:

1)

Cutting

time

Cutting

time differs

as

shown below

according

to the selection of the control mode.

Normal mode

>

High-speed

mode 1

>

High-speed

mode

2

>

High-speed

mode 3



4202-E D-5

D.

Hi2-NC

FUNCTION

(HIGH-SPEED

NC)

2)

Cutting accuracy

During

normal

cutting

In

the

high-speed

mode 1,

high-speed

mode

2 and high-speed

mode

3,

workpiece

is

finished

within

the set

tolerance

as in the

normal mode.

Slide

hold

button is

pressed

during

cutting

Positioning

error

as

indicated below is

generated

when

cutting

is

being

carried

ou t on curved

surface with small

curvature.

Positioning

error is not

generated.

High-speed

mode

1 . . .

Less than

the

set

tolerance

High-speed mode 2

. . .

Less than

3 t imes the

set

tolerance

High-speed mode

3

. . .

Less than

5

times

the

set tolerance

(3)

MAXIMUM

FEEDRATE

(a)

Feedrate upper limit sets the maximum value of feedrate which is applicable when

cutting

is

carried

out

using

the

tolerance control.

Feedrate

upper limit

=

Maximum value of feedrate command

Normal mode

(b) Because the tolerance control function determines

automatically

the

optimum

servo control

parameters using

the feedrate

upper

limit

value,

consistently

high

accuracy

with

high

speed

is

guaranteed

for

any type

of

machining. Therefore,

if

the

maximum

feedrate

changes

due

to

the

change

in the

type

of machining,

it

is

recommended

to

change the

setting

for

this

parameter.

(c) The

maximum

value of feedrate

designated

in

“per

minute

mode

is

limited

by

this

value.

(4)

WORK TOLERANCE

(a) This

parameter

sets the allowable

machining

error when

the workpiece

is machined

using

the

tolerance control

function.

Tolerance

=

Allowable

machining

error

By

setting

this

parameter,

the

workpiece

is finished within

allowable

error.

(b)

Because

the

tolerance control

function controls

cutting

feedrate

based

on

the

set

tolerance, it

is

recommended to

set

a

large

value

within

allowable

error

so that a

workpiece

is

machined

by

high

feedrates.

Due to the control characteristic that diameter reduction

in

arc

cutting

and

dulling

at corners

will

become

greater

as

higher

feedrate

is

used,

although

smaller tolerance

reduces error,

feedrate

is

lowered at

the same

elongating

total

cutting

time.

When

cutting

free-formed

curve,

which is

approximated

with minute motion blocks of line and arc

command

(programmed

shape):

0)



4202-E D-6

D.

Hi2-NC

FUNCTION

(HIGH-SPEED

NC)

(c)

In this

case, actual

cutting

error is determined

by

the

following

factors:

- Program

tolerance

.....

rror

between the

original

surface and the surface approximated

using

line

segments

-

Machining

toleranc

....

Error between

programmed

shape

and tool

paths

Tool

shape

error

If

the

relationship

between

the

program

tolerance and

machining

tolerance

is

Program

tolerance

<

Machining

tolerance

(2)

actual

cutting

error is

as

indicated below.

Allowable

machining

error

>

Actual

machining

error

=

Machining

tolerance

+

Tool

shape

error

If

the tool

shape

error

is

small

and

can

be

neglected, designation

of

the

machining

tolerance

as

in

expression

(1), actual machining error is

within

allowable machining

error.

However,

if

precise

setting is

necessary,

the

tolerance

must

be set

as

indicated

below.

Tolerance

(machining

tolerance)

=

Allowable machining

error -

Tool shape

error

If

the relationship as indicated

in

expression

(2)

is

not

satisfied,

i.e.,

if

the

program

tolerance

is

greater than

the

machining

tolerance, actual

machining

error

is

generally

expressed with the

following formula.

Allowable

machining

error

>

Actual

machining

error

=

Program

tolerance

+

Tool

shape error

From this,

it

will

be understood that

if

the program tolerance is

greater

than the allowable

machining error, actual machining

error

is always greater

than

the

allowable

machining

error

even

if the machining

error is

set

to a

small value.

Therefore,

to machine a

workpiece

within

the

allowable

machining error,

it is

necessary

to set a

smaller value

to

the program

tolerance

than

the

allowable

machining

error. To

obtain smooth

surface,

setting

of further smaller

program

tolerance is

necessary.

From this

point

of view, the

program

tolerance should

be

set

to meet

the

following.

Program

tolerance

<

1/2

x

(Allowable

machining

error)

That

is,

Program

tolerance

<

1/2

x

(Machining tolerance)

(5)

FILTER

VALUE

(a)

This

parameter

sets the

filtering

amount of the

filtering

function

in

the tolerance control mode.

A

value smaller than 30

|im

(1200

pin.) is effective.

(b)

Usually, the filtering function

is

activated automatically,

setting

should be :

Filtering

amount

=

0

(c) Filtering

function

Since

the tolerance

control function

controls

cutting

feedrates

in

response

to

the

programmed

shape,

satisfactory

effect cannot be

expected

if an error

is

included in the

programmed shape.

For

example,

the

tree-form curved surface

proximate

using

line

segments

and

arcs

will

include

an

error

at

each

command

point due

to calculation or

rounding

off.

For

example,

the

command

value

at each command

point

includes

a

maximum

of 1

0

pm

(400 pdn.)

error if the command value unit

is

1

0 urn (400 pin.). This means

that

satisfactory

machining accuracy will

not be obtained

even if

the

workpiece shape

is

commanded

correctly.

Due to this

reason,

if

an error inevitable at

each

command

point

is set

as

the

filtering amount,

the

commanded

shape

can be evaluated

by excluding

the

error

at

each

command

point, permitting

the

optimum

tolerance control.

This

is

the filtering function.



4202-E

D-7

D.

Hi2-NC

FUNCTION

(HIGH-SPEED

NC)

(d)

With the tolerance control, the

filter

function becomes

effective automatically

for the error due

to rounding off of command values based

on

the filtering

amount which

is set

for

the

programming

unit

system.

However,

if calculation

error

generated by

the automatic

programming

software, etc. is

greater

than

the error caused

by rounding

off

of

command

values,

set the calculation error for the

filtering amount.

(6)

FILTER

MODE

(a)

The filter mode includes

Filter mode

ineffective, and

Fil ter mode

effective.

This

parameter

sets either of the filter mode to be used for

machining.

(b)

Filter mode

ineffective

Although

dull at the

very

small

stepped

corners

are

reduced,

cutting

speed

is slow.

This

mode

should be

used

for

machining

based

on

the CAD data.

(c)

Filter mode

effective

Parameter

set filter value or

the filter

value

specified

in

a

program

is

used.

In

this

mode, although

corners with

very

small

step

amount

may

be

dulled, cutting speed

is fast. This mode should be

used

for

machining

based

on

the

digitized

data.

3. Tolerance

Control

Mode Designation

(1 ) Tolerance Control Mode

Designation by

Parameters

Operation:

(a)

Select

the

parameter

setting mode.

(b)

Display

the

tolerance control

parameter

setting

screen

by pressing

function

key

[F6]

(ITEMf)

or [F7]

(ITEMj ).

(c)

Place

the

cursor at the

required data column

of

theparameter

for

which

the setting is to

be

changed

by using

the cursor control

keys.

(ÿ)

,

(d)

Set the data for

the

parameter after

pressing

function

key [F1] (SET)

or function

key

[F2]

(ADD).

1) Function

ke y

[F1]

(SET)

After

pressing

[F1],

input

the

required data.

2)

Function

key

[F2]

(ADD)

After

pressing

[F2], input

an

increment

value

in

reference to

the

currently

se t

da ta. T he

unit for

setting

conforms

to

the

unit designated

for data setting.



4202-E D-9

D.

Hi2-NC

FUNCTION

(HIGH-SPEED

NC)

1 .

TOLERANCE CONTROL

[1]

:

Tolerance control mode ON

[2]

:

Tolerance

control

mode

OFF

The data

set

below is

effective

when the tolerance control m ode is

on ,

that

is

setting

for

TOLERANCE

CONTROL

is

“1”.

2.

CONTROL

AXIS

Select the

three

axes for

which


function

becomes effective.

[0] :

Basic

axis (X,

Y,

Z)

[1]

:

Additional

linear

axis

(U,

V.

W)

For the axis, for which the additional linear axis

specification

is not

supported,

the

cursor does not

move

to the additional

axis name

position.

That

is,

selection of the

additional

linear

axis

is

possible

only

when the additional

linear

axis

specification

is

supported.

3.

HIGH-SPEED

MODE

Select the tolerance control mode.

[0]

:

Normal mode

[1]:

High-speed mode 1

[2]

: High-speed

mode

2

[3] :

High-speed

mode

3

4.

MAXIMUM FEEDRATE

Set the upper limit of the feedrate which is

applied

in

the

tolerance

control mode.

5.

WORK TOLERANCE

Set the

tolerance

which is

applied

in


mode.

Setting

of

a

value

smaller

than 0.003

mm

is

not

allowed.

6.

FILTER

VALUE

Se t the

filtering

amount for

the filter

function which

becomes effective in the tolerance control

mode.

Fo r details of the filtering

function,

refer to “Filtering

function”.

Usually, the filtering function

is

activated automatically, therefore,

setting

should

be :

FILTER

VALUE

=

0

Setting

range of

filtering

amount:

0

-

0.03 mm

7. FILTER

MODE

Set

the filter

mode.

[1]:

Filter

mode

effective

[2]

:

Filter

mode

ineffective

8.

SMOOTHING MODE

Set

the

shape

correction

interpolation (smoothing processing)

mode which

becomes

effective

if

a

high-speed

mode tolerance control

is

selected.

The

smoothing

processing

automatically

replaces

linear motion

commands

into

curved

line commands

in

the

NC.

By

making

the

smoothing

processing

effective, sharp

edge generated at joints

of two

linear motion

blocks

can

be

eliminated,

thereby providing

improved

surface

quality.

[0] :

Smoothing processing

ineffective

[1]

:

Smoothing

processing

effective



4202-E D-10

D.

Hi2-NC

FUNCTION

(HIGH-SPEED

NC)

9.

SMOOTHING

LENGTH

Set the

length

of linear motion distance to determine

if

the

smoothing processing

is applied.

Smoothing processing

is

applied

to blocks which call

linear

motion for

the

distance

longer

than

the

set

value.

Setting

range:

0.001

to

100.00

mm

10.

SMOOTHING

FILTER

VALUE

Due

to

smoothing processing,

an error is

generated

between the

curved l ine commands

and

the

linear motion commands

as

shown below. Set

the

allowable amount of error

caused

by

smoothing

processing as the smoothing

filter value.

If the amount

of error

between the

curved

line commands,

obtained as

the resul t

of

smoothing

processing,

and the

specified

linear

motion

commandsbecomes

larger than

the

set filter value, the

linear motion commands

are not

replaced

with curved line commands.

In

this

case,

the

specified

linear

motion command blocks are executed

as

they

are.

Filter

value

1=

ax.

distance

Linear

motion command

block

Curved

line

commands obtained

by smoothing processing_



4202-E

D-11

D.

Hi2-NC

FUNCTION

(HIGH-SPEED

NC)

(2) Tolerance Control Mode

Designation

by

Program

(a) To conduct the tolerance control for

only

a

required

part in

the

program

or to

change

the

tolerance control

parameter

setting according

to the

part

to be

machined,


mode

designation in

a

program

is convenient.

(b)

To

carry

out

or

cancel the tolerance control

mode, designate

the

following

G

codes.

G187

(I

_

J

_

K

_

)

(H

_

)

F

_

E

_

(D

_

)(P

_

)

Tolerance

control mode

ON

Tolerance control mode

OFF

(Cancellation

of

G187)

186

Follow the

program

unit

system

for

the unit o f command

(c)

Designate

the

G187

an d

G186

blocks

at

the

beginning

and at the end

of

blocks

for

which the

tolerance control mode

is

required.

These

G codes must be

designated in

individual blocks

and

other

commands must not be written

in

the same block.

(d)

When the tolerance Control mode called

by

the

programmed

G code is

ON,

the tolerance

control mode

designated by

the

setting

of the

parameter

becomes

all ineffective.

(e)

When the tolerance control mode called

by

the

programmed

G code

is

OFF,

i.e.,

after the

designation

of

G186 or

resetting

the

control,

the

tolerance control

mode

ON/OFF

status is

determined

by

the

setting

of the

parameter.

(f) Designate

the

following

address characters and data words

following

the

G187

code.

Although they

ca n

de

designated in

any

order,

both

E

and

F

commands

must

always

be

designated.

1)

I,

J,

K (a xis

selection)

I:

X (basic axis)

/

U

(additional

linear

axis)

J:

Y (basic axis)

/

V

(additional

linear

axis)

K: Z

(basic axis)

/

W (additional

linear

axis)

0: Basic

axis

1

:

Additional

l inear axis

For the

axis for

which

an

address character is

not

used,

or

for

the

axis

for whichthe

linear

additional

axis specification is

not

supported,

the basic axis is

selected

automatically.

If

“1” is

set

fo r axis fo r

which

the additional linear axis specif ication is

not supported,

an alarm

occurs an d the

following message

is

displayed

on the screen.

Alarm

message:

2262 Data word:

‘spec

code’ 31



4202-E

D-12

D.

Hi2-NC

FUNCTION

(HIGH-SPEED

NC)

2)

H (high-speed

mode)

Select any

of the

normal, high-speed mode 1

, and

high-speed

mode

2.

0:

Normal mode

1: High-speed

mode

1

2:

High-speed

mode

2

3:

High-speed

mode

3

When setting is not

made

for

“H”,

the

normal mode is selected

automatically.

If

a

value greater

than “3” or a

negative

value

is

set,

an

alarm

occurs

and the

following message is

displayed

on the screen.

Alarm

message:

2245 Data word:

‘H’

3)

F

(maximum

feedrate)

Designate

the upper limit feedrate

applied

in

the

tolerance control

mode.

An

F

command

in

the

G187 block

does

not

specify

a

linear

cutting

feedrate.

Designate

the actual

feedrate

in a

block

other

than

the

G187

block.

If

no

F

command

is

designated

in the

G187

block, an

alarm

occurs and

the

following message is

displayed on

the screen.

Alarm

message:

2243

Dataword:

'F'

4)

E

(work

tolerance)

Designate

the

machining

tolerance amount used

in

the tolerance control mode.

If

no

E

command is

designated

in the G1

87

block,

an

alarm

occurs

an d

the

following

message

is

displayed

on

the

screen.

Alarm

message:

2388 Data

word:

‘E’

Designation

of

a

value smaller than 0.003 mm for this

parameter is ignored

and is replaced with

0.003

mm automatically.

5)

D

(filter

value)

Designate

the filtering

amount

for the f il ter function which becomes effective

in

the tolerance

control m ode. F or details of

the filtering function,

refer to “Filter function”.

Usually,

the

filtering

function

is

activated

automatically,

setting should be:

FILTER

VALUE

=

0

Filtering

amount

range:

0-30

Aim

If a

value

greater

than 0.03

mm is designated, it

is replaced with 0.03

mm.

Designation

of a

negative

value

causes an

a la rm and the

following message

is

displayed

on the

screen.

Alarm

message:

2243 Data word:

‘D ’

6)

P

(filter

mode)

Designate

the filter

mode.

If

designation

for is omitted,

P1 is regarded.

Selection

should

be

made

by “1

” or

“2”. If

any

value other

these

is

designated,

it causes

an

alarm

and the

following

message

is

displayed

on

the

screen.

Alarm message:

2247

Data

word:

‘P’

(hex.

of

designated

value)



4202-E D-13

D.

Hi2-NC

FUNCTION

(HIGH-SPEED

NC)

4.

Tolerance Control

Guide

In

the

Check Data

pages

accessible

in

the

automatic

operation

mode,

the TOLERANCE

CONTROL

GUIDE

page

is

contained.

Using

this

display

page,


setting

and state

can

be monitored.

To

display

the

TOLERANCE

CONTROL GUIDE

page,

follow the

any

of the

procedure

indicated below:

(1)

After

pressing

function

key

[F7]

(CHECK

DATA),

press

the

PAGE

ke y

repeatedly

until

the

TOLERANCE

CONTROL GUIDE

page is

displayed.

(2)

Press function

key

[F5] (SEARCH)

and

the

WRITE

key

to

display

the CHECK

DATA

DIRECTORY page. Using this page, key in the

number

corresponding

to

the

TOLERANCE

CONTROL GUIDE

page

to

directly display

the

required

page.

AUTO

OPERATION TEST.

MIN

0100

N2148

38

’

97/07/1

5 14:10:00

*

TOLERANCE GUIDE

*

PAGE

78

1mm

TOLERANCE

CONTROL

EXECUTE

PROGRAM

G

1

8 7

I

J

K

PARAMETER

TOLERANCE CONTROL

CONTROL AXIS

HIGH-SPEED MODE

M A X IM U M F E E DR A T E

WORK TOLERANCE

FILTER

VALUE

FILTER

MODE

CONDITION

EXIST

(X

Y

Z)

0

F

6000.

000

0.010

0.010

E

D

p

1

S-Mtd

ACTUAL

PART

BLOCK

POSIT.

I

PROGRAM

I

DATA

PROGRAM

SELECT

CHECK

[EXTEND]

SEARCH

DATA

(Tji(Tÿ(Tÿ(TÿrFT)frÿrFÿrrr)



4202-E

D-14

D. Hi2-NC

FUNCTION

(HIGH-SPEED

NC)

1

.

TOLERANCE CONTROL

NONE E XE CUTE Indicates that the

tolerance control

is

not

effective.

Indicates that the tolerance control

is

effective.XECUTE

2.

PROGRAM,

PARAMETER

Indicates which

of

the

settings

is

effective

to

activate

the

tolerance

control; currently

used

setting

is

indicated

by

the reverse

display.

3. G187

TOLERANCE

CONTROL

Indicates the current tolerance mode

on/off

state.

OFF The tolerance control mode

is

off.

ON The tolerance

control

mode

is

on.

The

following

data

is effective

only when the

tolerance

control mode

is

on.

4.

UK CONTROL AXIS

Indicates the three axes

for which the

tolerance control mode is

effective.

5.

H HIGH-SPEED MODE

Indicates

the

currently effective high-speed

mode.

‘0’

Normal mode

T

High

speed

No.

1 mode

‘2’

High

speed

No .

2

mode

'3 '

High

speed

No . 3

mode

6.

F

MAXIMUM FEEDRATE

Indicates

the currently

effective

maximum

feedrate.

7.

E

WORK TOLERANCE

Indicates the

currently

effective

machining

tolerance amount.

8.

D FILTER

VALUE

Indicates the currently effective

filtering

amount.

9.

P

FILTER

MODE

Indicates the currently selected

filter

mode.

'

1

’

Filter mode

effective

‘2’

Filter

mode

ineffective



4202-E D-15

D.

Hi2-NC

FUNCTION

(HIGH-SPEED

NC)

5. Alarm

Alarm A

1

266 Tolerance

control error

The

tolerance control could

not

be

executed due

to

an

error

in

the NC control software processing.

Note: This alarm

is

not related

with

operators error.

[Code]

1->

Writing

to the

GD

buffer was not

successful

while the tolerance control

module

was

executed

under

the

condition that the

tolerance

control mode was selected and that the

high-speed

mode

setting

was

not “0”.

Or,

reading fro m the G D

buffer was

not

successful while

the interpolation

module

was

executed.

1

00->Though

it

computing

centrum

by smoothing

processing

of

tolerance control

mode,

it failed.

[Probable

Faulty

Locations]

Problem

with software

[Measures

to

Take]

Inform us.



E.

SYNCHRONIZED TAPPING FUNCTION



4202-E

E-1-R1

E. SYNCHRONIZED

TAPPING

FUNCTION

SECTION

1

OVERVIEW

This

function carries

out

tapping by synchronizing

axis feedrate

and

spindle speed.



4202-E E-3

E. SYNCHRONIZED TAPPING FUNCTION

(2 )

Details of Commands

(a) G code

call ing tapping cycle

(G84, G284)

The

G84 code

calls either

the

conventional

float

tapping mode

or

synchronized tapping

mode

depending

on

the

setting

at bit

7

of

optional

parameter

(bit)

No.

17. If

the

synchronized

tapping

specification

is not

selected,

the float

tapping

mode

is

called

regardless

of the parameter

setting.

(b) G code

calling

reverse

tapping cycle

(G74, G274)

The

tapping

mode called

by the

G74 code is

determined also by the setting at bit 7 at

optional

parameter

(bit)

No. 17. The

G274

code

is

same as the G284.

Synchronized

tapping

loat

tapping

G84,

G74

O O

G284,

G274

O

(c)

Tapping

position

(X,

Y)

These coordinate values determine the

tapping position.

If

these

are not designated,

the X

or

Y coordinate value

effective

in

the

previous block becomes

effective.

(d)

Bottom level

of

tapping cycle

(Z)

The bottom

level

is

designated in

the coordinate

system

in

the

G90

mode or

as

the distance

from

the

R-point

level

in

the

G91

mode.

Thiscommand can be omitted.

In

this

case, the

general

rule for f ixed

cycles

applies.

For

general

rule,

refer to

the

Programming Manual.

(e)

R-point level

(R)

This designates the

R-point

level.

This command

can be omitted.

In

this

case,

the

general

rule

for

fixed

cycles

applies.

(f)

Spindle

start

position

at

R-point

level

(E)

This

designates

the

tapping starting

position

(spindle

index

position

-

absolute

position).

This

command is effective

only in

the


mode and is

ignored in

the f loat

tapping

mode

(This

does

not

cause

an

alarm.)

This

command

can

be omitted.

In

this

case,

the

general

rule

for

hole

machining

data

in

the

fixed

cycle

applies.

That

is,

in

the

fixed

cycle mode,

this command

is treated

as

the

modalcommand. If

this command

is

omitted,

and no

E

command has been

designated up

to

the

previous block

after

the

entry

to

the fixed cycle

mode, thestart position control is

not carried ou t

and the

cutting begins

from

the

actual

position.

(g)

Dwell

period

at

the bottom level (P)

This

designates the

dwell

period

at the bottom

leve l. Dwell

period

can

be

designated in

the

same

manner as

designated

using the

GQ4

code.

This command

can

be omitted.

In

this

case,

the

general

rule for fixed

cycles applies.

(h)

Dwell

period

at

the

R-point

level

in

the return

cycle (Q)

This

designates the

dwell

period at the

R-point

level.

It

is

designated in

the same manner

as

a

P

command.

This command can

be

omitted.

In

this

case,

the

general

rule for fixed

cycles applies.



4202-E E-5


SECTION 3

TAPPING

CYCLE

OPERATIONS

(1)

Tapping

Cycle Commands

{G84, G284)

Rapid

feed

Cutting

feed

(synchronized feed)

Operations

a)

b)

U-

t

O

Return-point

o

Operations

c)

d)

Operation

i)

Operation

h)

R-point

Operation

e)

Operations

g)

Operation

f)

1

-point

(a) Positioning

of

X

and

Y

axes at

the rapid

feedrate,

and

at

the

same time.

(b)

The spindle

gear is selected according to

the

programmed

S

command,

an d

the spindle is

stopped.

However,

if an M code

is

designated in the same block,

gear

is

selected after

the

completion

of

positioning

and

the

designation

of

M

code.

(c)

Positioning

of

Z-axis

to the

R-point

level at the

rapid

feedrate,

and

at the

same

time

(d) If

an

E

command

is

designated,

the spindle is

positioned (angular position) at

the

programmed

position

in

the

spindle

rotation direction

for

tapping.

(e)

Synchronized

control of the spindle/Z-axis

is

carried out in

the

forward spindle rotation

direction

up

to

the

Z-point

level.

(f)

At the Z-point

level,

dwell

is

executed for

P

seconds

if

a

P

command is

designated.

(g) Synchronized

control of the

spindle/Z-axis

is carried out

in

the

reverse

spindle rotation

direction

up

to the

R-point

level.

(h)

At

the R-point

level,

dwell is executed

for

Q

seconds

if

a Q command

is

designated.

(i) Positioning

is carried

out

at

the

return

point

level at the

rapid

feedrate.

Note

1: In the cycles

5,

6

and

7,

the

setting

of

the

feedrate and

spindle speedoverride

and

“100%

”

setting

is assumed.

Note

2:

The

dry

run

is

ineffective

while

cycles

5,

6

and

7

are

being

executed.



4202-E E-6


(2 )

Reverse

Tapping

Cycle Commands

(G74,

G274)

Compared

to the

cycles

explained

in (1),

the

spindle

rotating

direction for the

cycles

4,

5

and

7 is

reversed.

Other

operations

are

completely

the same as explained

in

(1).

1. In the tapping cycle using

the

floating

tapper,

the sPindle is rotating

at the

completion

of

the

cycle.

However,

in

the


cycle,

the

spindle

stops

at the

completion

of the

cycle.

2. If the

control

is

reset

during synchronized

tapping

cycle,

the

gear

remains

as

selected

for the


operation.

However,

the

gear is selected

according

to the S

command

value when the

spindle

rotation command

(M03,

M04),

spindle

orientation command

(M19, M118, M119),

S

command,

or

manual

spindle operation

is executed after that.

[Supplement]

(3)

Slide Hold

(a)

When

the

SLIDE

HOLD

button

is

pressed

during

the

execution of step 5, the spindle stops

immediately.

The Z-axis

is

fed

to

the

R-point level while being controlled

in

synchronization

with

spindle

reverse rotation. When the

Z-axis

has

reached

the R-point

level,

it stops.

(b)

When the

SLIDE

HOLD button is pressed

during

the

execution

of

step

5, the Z-axis is

decelerated.

However,

the distance up to the R-point

level is

larger

than the

distance up to the

Z-point level,

the

tapping cycle is

continued while

ignoring

the slide hold command. The Zaxis

stops

when it has

reached

the

R-point

level.

(c)

When the

SLIDE

HOLD button is

pressed

during

the execution of

step

6

or

7,

the Z-axis

stops

after it

has reached the

R-point

level.

(d)

When the CYCLE

START

button

is

pressed

while

the

Z-axis is

temporari ly stopped

at

the

R-point

level, synchronized

control of the

spindle/Z-axis

is

carried out

up

to the

Z-point

level.

[Supplement]

The

MID

AUTO MANUAL

key

is not

operative

when

the

Z-axis is

temporarily

stopped

at

the

R-point

level.



4202-E

E-7


SECTION 4

PRECAUTIONS

The G284

and

G274

codes

call

the

fixed

cycle. The

fixed

cycle

mode

is canceled by

designating any

of

G80,

GOO,

G01

, G02,

and

G03.

Before

designating the

G284 or G274

code

after

turning

on

the

power,

resetting

the

control, or

canceling

a

fixed

cycle,

always

designate

an

F

command.

The fixed cycle

mode is not canceled

when

other fixed

cycle

is

designated.

Before

designating

the

G284

or G274 code after

turning

on

the

power

or

resetting

the

control,

always

designate

an S command.

Designate the S command in

a block

preceding

the

G284/G274

block.

Example:

S320

(1)

(2)

(3)

;

G284

(4)

While spindle rotation and

axis

feed

are

synchronized,

setting

of

feedrate

override and spindle

speed override are al l

ignored.

Whether

or not the

Z-axis stops at

the

R-point

level

in

the

single

block

mode is

determined

by

the

setting

for

the parameter.

NC optional parameter

(bit)

No.

34,

bit

0

0:

Does not

stop

1

: Stops

In

the

synchronized tapping mode,

gear

is

changed

before

the

mode enters

to

use

the

gear for

synchronized tapping.

The

mid-block sequence restart

is

not

possible

for the block which is

governed

under

the

synchronized

axis feed mode.

Stop

is not

possible

until the axis reaches the

R-point

level.

The

synchronized

feedrate

during

the

ST M lock

or

machine lock

state is the

programmed

feedrate

(F

command

value).

The control

assumes

that the

spindle

is

rotating.

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

NOTICE

:

(1) To

carry

out the

sequence restart

from

the block in

the

synchronized

tapping mode,

pay

attention so that the restart

operation

will

not be associated

with

the

synchronized

feed.

(There may

be cases

in which

the

gear is not changed correctly precluding

synchronized

feed.)

(2)

Do

not

change the STM

lock state

during the synchronized tapping mode. If changed,

gear change an d

spindle

rotation

control may not be carr ied

out

correctly.



4202-E E-8-R1

E. SYNCHRONIZED

TAPPING

FUNCTION

SECTION 5

TORQUE

MONITORING FUNCTION

DURING SYNCHRONIZED TAPPING

(1)

Overview

This

functions monitors the

spindle

load

torque

during synchronized tapping,

an d generates

an

alarm

of

level B and suspends

spindle

rotation when

the set

torque

limi t value has been

exceeded.

(2) Torque

Monitoring

ON/OFF

Control

The

following

M

codes are

used

to turn

on/off

the

torque

monitoring

function.

M326 Torque

monitoring

function

during synchronized

tapping OFF

M327

Torque

monitoring

function

during synchronized tapping

ON

[Supplement]

M326 is

effective

when the

power

has

been

turned on or the control has been reset.

(3)

Parameters

The

torque

to

be monitored

is

set

in

units

of

N*m

on

the

TAPPING

TORQUE

MONITOR

PARAMETER

screen

in

the parameter

set

mode.

Since

five

sets

of

parameters

are

used,

the

parameter

number used for

torque

monitoring

must be

designated using

system

variable VTMNO.

An

asterisk

is displayed

for

the

parameter

currently

selected.

I

PARAMETER

SE T

97/07/15

14:i0:00

*

TAPING

TORQUE

MONITOR

PARAMETER

*

MONITOR

TORQUE [N*m]

O.

'00

*

1

2

15

3

0

5-

127

X

v

z

ACT

POSIT

(WORK)

0.001

A-Mtd

0.001 0.001

ITEM

T

ITEM

i

[EXTEND]

ET ADO

[~F~I

if

F

2

H

F~

3

)

[

F zi

lrrinrFnrmrm

Set a

torque

value within the

torque range recommended

by

tool manufacturers

(torque range in

which

the tap

ca n be used).

[Supplement]

1

.

To

protect the

tap,

set

a

lower

torque value.

Note however

this lowers

cutting

performance

of the

tap.

2.

The selected parameter

number

is

not

erased

even when

the

power

has been

turned off.

3. When

the

parameter

whose

torque

value

is

“0 ”

is

selected,

torque

is

not monitored.



4202-E

E-9

E.

SYNCHRONIZED TAPPING

FUNCTION

(4 )

Ignoring

of

Spindle

Motor

Starting

Current

When the

spindle

is

started from

a

complete

stop,

starting current of the

spindle

motor

flows.

This

might cause

the maximum

allowable

load to be exceeded.

This

overload is

prevented

by the

following

two

steps.

(a)

Overload

is ignored

until

the

actual

spindle speed reaches “A”%

of

the

spindle

speed

designated by

an

S command.

(b)

After

the

actual

spindle speed

has

reached “A”%

of the

commanded spindle

speed,

the

system

waits

for

T

(100

msec)

until

the spindle

is put in

the

stationary condition.

Then, torque

monitoring

is

started.

Starting current

T:

Spindle

overload

is

not

checked

since

the

spindle

has

not reached

the constant

speed

range.

13

t

3

<-

o

t

spindle

overload

is not

checked

to r

the

*Y

duration.

(set by

the

parameter)

M

.

—

:

—

Monitored

torque

value

Spindle

stationary

condition

Time

The

spindle

is

recognized

to be

in the

constant

speed

range.

S

command

1

O.

c

n

©

A%

100%

CO

Time

NC Optional

Parameter

(Word)

Unit

Recommended

Value

No.

61 Torque

monitored

spindle speed

(A)

%

90

No.

62

Torque

monitoring wait time

(t) 1

00

msec

2

(=

200

msec)



4202-E

E-10


(5) Torque

Monitoring

Method

If the spindle load

torque

exceeds the set value for about

10;Tn

(msec)

continuously,

the

following

alarm is

displayed

and the

spindle stops immediately.

The

Z-axis

is

fed

to the

point-R

level

in

the

synchronization

with

spindle

reverse

rotation. When the Z-axis has reached the

R-point

level,

it

stops.

Alarm

B 2447 Synchronous

tap’s torque

low

The

torque

is monitored until deceleration

is started.

A value for “n” is set

at

NC

optional parameter (word)

No.

21

.

NC optional

parameter

(word)

No. 21

Allowable number

(n)

for

torque

over

monitoring

-

recommended value: 4

[Supplement]

Torque

monitoring

is not carried out when “0” is set.

(6)

Display

The

torque

monitoring

process

is

displayed

on

the

following three screens: 2nd page

of

the

ACTUAL POSITION

screen,

the

MAIN

PROGRAM

(execution)

screen,

and the

MAIN

PROGRAM

(read)

screen. A sym bol “V” is indicated

above

the

LOAD DISPLAY

bar graph. This

is

the

maximum

load

torque.

AUTO OPERATION

TEST-1

.lilIN

0100 MA3

J5_

97/07/15

14:10:00

LOAD

DISPLAY

CTUAL POSITION

1m m

200

{%)

100

0.000

0.000

0.000

0.0000

X

T

s

Y

T65?T

TORQUE

MON

I

TOR

(110%)

Z

X

OK

B

Y

OKo

0

0

100

z

.0M

OK

H=

0 TOUCH

SENSOR

D=

0

TOUCH

PROBE

B

OK

CHECK

ROGRAH

ACTUAL

PART

BLOCK

SELECT

I

POSIT

I

PROGRAM

I

DATA

[EXTEND]

SEARCH

DATA

rFÿrr2iroiirTÿrFÿnnnfiÿiT~ÿ

2nd

Page of the

ACTUAL POSITION Screen



4202-E

E-11


I

AUTO OPERATION

A. MIN

0

MA3 J5_

97/07/15

14:10:00

*

CURE

NT MAIN

PROGRAM

*

ROGRAM

lm m

Y100

DIS

X 0.000

0.000

0.000

0.0000

Z10C

Y

xc

z

B

O

zc

>X100

Co

0

Y100 0

F

0.0

Z100

N

s

0

0 0.000

0.000

H=

TOROUE MON

I

TOR

(11

OX )

D= 0

LOAD

MAX

SPINDLE

LOAD

1

6554

T

V

z B

ACT POSIT

(WORK)

0.000 0.000

A-Mtd FCYCL

0.000 0.000

=PS

PROGRAM

ACTUAL

PART BLOCK

SELECT

I

POSIT.

I

PROGRAM

I

DATA

CHECK

mm

EARCH

DATA

MAIN

PROGRAM

(Read)

Screen

(The MAIN

PROGRAM

(execution)

looks as this

screen.)

When

torque

monitoring

is

started,

“TORQUE

MONITOR

(;['**%)”

is

displayed

on the screen.

(“> <*>]<” represents

the maximum

torque

load

ratio.)

When

the

spindle torque

rat io exceeds

the

maximum

torque

load ratio, the display

co lo r of

“TORQUE

MONITOR

(>M<*%)

is

changed

from

white to red.

(with

the monochrome screen

specification,

the brightness is

increased.)

The

maximum

torque

load

ra tio is

a

value which

is

obtained

by converting the

value set at

the tapping

torque parameter

on the basis of

the continuous

rating of the spindle drive motor.

For

the continuous rating of the spindle drive

motor,

refer

to the

final

specifications.

NC

optional parameter

(long

word)

No.

23

Continuous rating

of spindle drive

motor

Example:

When the spindle drive motor is a VAC

15/11

kW

(20/15 hp) (30 min/cont.)

motor, set

“11000”.

(11 kW

is 11000 W.)

[Supplement] 1

.

When the continuous

rating

of the spindle drive

motor

is no t set,

torque

monitoring

is

not

carried

out.

2.

Spindle

overload

monitoring

is

not carried

out while

torque

monitoring

is

being

executed

for

synchronized

tapping.

(This

does

not

apply

to the meter

relay

specification.)

Attachment

load

monitoring is carried out.



4202-E

E-12


(7)

System

Variables

(a)

Tapping

torque monitored

parameter

No.

[VTMNO]

-

Read and write

operations

are

possible.

-

Setting range

-

The

value

set at

“VTMNO”

is backed

up .

When a value is not

set,

the

value

previously

set

becomes

effective.

Initial

setting

is

“1 .

(b)

Tapping

torque

monitored

parameter

1

to

5

[VTMDT

(n)]

-

“n”

means

parameter

No. 1 to

5

-

Only

read

operation

is

possible.



4202-E E-13-R1

E. SYNCHRONIZED

TAPPING

FUNCTION

SECTION 6 PARAMETERS

The synchronized tapping

function

uses the fol lowing

parameters.

On this

screen,

parameters

related to the


function are all

displayed disregarding

of

the

type

of

parameters

-

NC

optional parameter

(bit),

NC

optional

parameter

(word),

and NC optional

parameter

(long word).

When

a

value is

se t

for the

parameters displayed

on this

screen,

the

set value is

reflected

to the

corresponding

NC

optional

parameter.

Similarly,

if

a

value

is se t for an NC

optional

parameter

related to

the

synchronized tapping function,

the

setting

is

reflected

to the

corresponding

parameter

on this screen.

I

PARAMETERW

|

97/07/15

14:10:00

*NC OPTIONAL

PARAMETER*

SP

I

NDLE

I.OKUMA VACJ

NO.

180000

I

SPINDLE

ORIENT ZERO

OFFSET

2

ZERO OFFSET

(SYNC.

TAP)

3

IN-POSITION CHECK

VALUE

(SYNC.

TAP)

4 SPINDLE RATED VALUE

(SYNC.

TAP)

5 NUMBER

OF

TORQUE

OVER

T

I

ME

(N

x°-01

s>

6

TORQUE

M O NITO R S T AR T

REVO.

RATION)

1 TORQUE

MONITOR

DELAY

TIME

(0.1s)

8 RETURN SPEED

OVERRIDE®

(SYNC.

TAP)

9

G84.G74

CONTROL

SELECTION(0:

FLOAT/I

:

SYNC.

)

¥

20

0

0

0

0

0

1

X

Y

z

AC T

POSIT

(WORK)

-0.001

-0,

001 -0.001

ITEMt ITEMi

[EXTEND]

EARCH

ET

nÿfFin(Tÿ iTÿrÿ inrF~6~)rF~7i fF i r )

(1 )

SPINDLE ORIENT ZERO OFFSET

(N C

optional

parameter

(long

word)

No.

19 )

Set

the offset amount for

spindle

orientation using

high-accuracy

VAC.

Setting

unit: VAC

command

unit

(1/1000

[°]

or

1/10000

[°])

Setting range:

O to 359999

(1/1000

[°])

O to 3599999

(1/1000

[°])

Initial

value:

0

(2)

ZERO

OFFSET

(N C

optional

parameter

( long word) No.

15)

Set the

machine

zero

for spindle orientation

which

is executed

using an

E

command.

Setting

unit:

VA C command

unit

(1/1000

[°] or

1/10000

[°])

Setting

range: 0

to 359999

(1/1000 [°])

Oto

3599999

(1/1000 [°])

With

a

conventional

spindle

orientation command

(R S command),

orientation

operation is

controlled

based

on

the

origin

of

an

encoder

as

usual.



4202-E E-14-R1

E. SYNCHRONIZED

TAPPING

FUNCTION

(3)

IN-POSITION CHECK VALUE

(N C optional

parameter

( long word)

No.

16)

Set the

spindle

in-position

check value to be

applied

to

synchronized tapping operation.

Setting

unit: VAC command unit

(1/1000

[°]

or

1/10000

[°])

Setting range:

1

to 359999

(1/1000

[°])

10 to 3599999

(1/1000

[°])

(4)

SPINDLE

RATED

VALUE

(NC

optional parameter

(long word) No.

23)

Setting

unit:

W (watt)

Setting range:

11

0

to

99999999

Initial value:

0

(5)

NUMBER

OF

TORQUE

OVER

TIME

(NC optional

parameter

(word)

No.

21)

Setting

unit: Times

Setting range:

0 to 32

Initial value: 0

Recommended

setting: 4

[times]

(6) TORQUE MONITOR START REVO. RATIO

(NC optional

parameter

(word)

No.

61)

Setting

unit:

%

Sett ing range:

Oto 100

Initial value: 0

Recommended setting: 90 [%]

(7)

TORQUE MONITOR

DELAY TIME

(NC

optional

parameter

(word) No. 62)

Setting

unit:

100 msec

Setting range:

Oto 1000

Initial

value: 0

Recommended

setting: 2 (200 [msec])

(8)

RETURN SPEED

OVERRIDE

(NC

optional parameter

(word)

No.

113)

Setting

unit:

%

Setting

range:

1

to 200

Initial value:

0

(treated

as

100

[%])



4202-E E-15


(9)

G84,

G74 CONTROL SELECTION

(NC optional

parameter

(bit)

No. 17,

bit

7)

Specify

whether G84 and

G74,

specified

in

a

program,

should be controlled

in

the float

tapping

mode or

the synchronized tapping

mode.

[0]

:

G84

and

G74

are

controlled in

the float

tapping

mode.

[1]: G84

an d

G74

are

controlled in

the

synchronized

tapping mode.



F. TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION



4202-E

F-1

F.

TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION

SECTION

1

OVERVIEW

1.

Overview

The

tools stored in the

magazine

can

be selected

by directly designating

tool numbers. The

command

format is “Txxx”.

T command

:

Standard

Option

The

T

command,

which

is

not

restricted by

the number of

toolpots in

the

magazine,

can manage

a lot of

tools

even if the

ATC

actually

used

has

less

magazine capacity.

1

-50

1

-300

Assign

a

tool number

—

to each tool.

Magazine

capacity:

10 too ls

Th e

total

number

of

tools used fo r cutting

the various

types

of workpieces is 300.

Correspondence

Table

Write

the

correspondence

between the tool number and the

pot

number on the screen when

tools

in

the

magazine

are to

be

changed

for

new

setup.

The

memory

of the

OSP can hold

the life

expectancy

data

of

up

to

300

tools.

Tool

selection

is

commanded by

tool

numbers.

Too

Ipot

Number

Tool

Number

°°oo

1

1

2

2

o

3 3

4

20

o

5 30

o

6

31

o

7

32

o

8 10 5

o

9

27 0

10

271



4202-E

F-2

F.


SECTION 2 DESCRIPTION

OF

MANAGEMENT FOR

EACH TOOL

NUMBER

1.

Tool

Offset

Number

The tool

offset

numbers are

normally

specified

in

a part

program

as

H

number or

D

number

directiy.

In

addition,

1st

offset number, 2nd offset number and 3rd offset number can be used for specification.

When the

tool offset

data is

considered

to be

particular

to

each

tool,

the

tool offset

number

is

determined

solely corresponding

to the tool to be used.

This

concept is

essential for

spare tool

changing.

Because

the

tool offset number

of a spare tool cannot

be

specified

in

a

part

program.

(1)

1st

Offset Number

Specify HA

or

DA

in the

part

program.

-

HA

substitutes for the conventional

tool

length

offset number.

-

DA

substitutes for the conventional cutter

radius

compensation

number.

When

specifying HA

or

D A, H

number or

D

number

will be

the same number

as

the tool number of

the

active tool.

(2)

2nd Offset Number

Specify HB

or

DB

in the

part

program.

-

HB

substitutes for the conventional tool

length

offset

number.

-

DB

substitutes

for

the conventional

cutter

radius

compensation

number.

When specifying

HB

or

DB, the

number

of offset

number

2

which has

setforthe

tool number

of

the

active tool

will

be

H

or

D number, respectively.

(3)

3rd

Offset

Number

Specify

HC or

DC

in

the

part

program.

-

HC substitutes

for the

conventional tool

length

offset number.

-

DC substitutes

for the

conventional cutter

radius

compensation

number.

When specifying

HC or

DC, the

number of offset number

3

which has set

for

the

tool

number of

the

active

tool

will

be

H

or

D

number,

respectively.



4202-E

F-3

F.


Example:

Offset Number

2

Offset Number 3oolpot Number

Tool

Number

1 1

201

211

2

2 202

212

In

this example,

the

tool in

the number

2

toolpot

is the spare tool for the

tool in the

number

1

toolpot.

With

the

sett ings above,

assume

that

commands

have

been

specified

as

follows:

G56

H1

(normal programming method)

G56

HA

G56

HB

G56

HC

In this case, the

numbers selected as tool

length

offset

numbers are

shown in

the table below.

H

Command

T1 (Commanded Tool) T2 (Spare Tool)

Number

1

Number

2

(Same

as the tool

number)

H1

HA Number

1

(Same

as the tool

number)

Number

2

(Same

as the tool

number)

HB

Number

20 1

(Specified

by

offset number 2)

Number

20 2

(Specified

by

offset number 2)

HC

Number

211

(Specified by

offset number

3)

Number 212

(Specified by

offset number

3)

Though the

description

about

the cutter radius

compensation

number is not given,

the

concept

is

quite

the same as the tool

length

offset number.

The tool

length

offset number

and

the

cutter

radius

compensation number

cannot

be

different. For

example, if

the tool

length

offset

numbers

are as

above, the

cutter radius compensation

numbers are

as

follows.

D Command T1

(Commanded

Tool)

T2

(Spare

Tool)

D1

Number

1

Number

2

DA

Number

1 Number

2

DB Number

20 1

Number

20 2

DC Number

211

Number 212



4202-E F-5

F.


4.

OK/NG

Evaluation

(optional)

Types

of

tool

defects are

as

follows:

(1)

Tool life

expiration

found by the tool

life

management

function

(2)

Tool

breakage

found

by

the

automatic tool

breakage

detection function

(3)

Tool

wear or tool overload found

by

the overload

monitoring function

(MOP)

(4)

Tool

defect

found

by

the

operator

When any

problem

is

fou

nd with a tool,

the

type

or cause of

the

problem will

be

displayed on the screen

and

whether or no t the

tool

should be

replaced

with

a

spare

too l and whether or

not

the

operation

should

be

stopped with

an alarm

will

be determined.

The level

of

tool defects is classified as follows and the class is

displayed

on the screen.

(1) OK.

(2)

NG1

(3)

NG 2

No

defect

Spare

tool

selection

will

not

be made until

operator

gives any

command.

Spare

tool selection

will

be made when the

same

T command is

given

next.

In

this case, the

operation

will

be

stopped

with

an alarm

if

the tool has no

spare

tool.

(4)

NG3

......ven

during cutting,

the

operation will

be

stopped

with an alarm immediately.

The defect level

depends

on the

type

of

problem

(tool

defect)

as shown in the following table.

Next Time

the Same T

Command

is Given

efect

Type

When the Defect is Found

Tool

life

expiration

When

MANAGE

MODE

is

03

or

06,

the level

is

NG 1.

When

MANAGE

MODE

is

03 or 06 ,

the

level is

NG1

.

When

MANAGE

MODE

is

01 or

04,

the leve l is NG2.

When

MANAGE

MODE

is

01 or

04,

the leve l is

NG3.

Tool

wear (MOP) NG2

NG 3

Tool overload

(MOP)

NG3 NG3

Tool

breakage

NG2 NG3

Evaluation

by

operator NG2 NG3

Note: When the

control

is

reset,

levelNG3

of

the

active

tool is

switched

to

level

NG2.



4202-E

F-7

F.


SECTION 3 CHANGEOVER

OF

SPARE TOOL

(OPTIONAL)

1

.

Selection

of

Spare

Tool

When the tool commanded

in

a

part

program

is

defective (NG2 or NG3), the

changeover

to the

spare

tool

in the

same

group

as the

commanded

tool

will be

made.

If

al l

the

tools in

the

same

group set

in

the magazine are

found to

be defective, the

operation

will

be

stopped

with an alarm at

the time the

commanded

tool is

set to the

spindle.

2.

Changeover

of

Tool

Offset Number

Designation

of the tool offset number

can

be done either

by specifying H number and D

number

directly

or

by

specifying

the

1st offset

number,

2nd

offset

number

and

the

3rd

offset

number.

Using the

former

method,

only

one

offset

number

is available for

the same tool when

the

changeover

to

the

spare

tool

is

made.

Using

the

latter

method, up

to three

offset

numbers

are

available even when the

changeover

to the

spare

tool is made.

Command

in

Part

Program

When

the

Tool

Specified

by

T

Command

(the

Commanded

Tool) is

Used

When

the

Spare

Tool is

Used

D1

-

D300

H1

-

H300

Offset number

specified

in

part

program 1st

offset

number

of

spare

tool

DA

HA

1st offset number of

commanded

tool 1st offset number of

spare

tool

2n d offset number of

commanded

tool 2nd

offset number

of

spareB

HB

tool

DC

HC

3rd

offset

number of

commanded

tool

3rd

offset

number

of

spare

tool

[Supplement]

1

.

Tools

inthe

same

group

will

be selected

in

the following

order;

(1)

When started from the initial condition

(when

ORG/SPR

is

not

designated)

(a)

The

tool commanded by

the part program

(b)

If

tool

noted

in (a)

is

not

usable,

the

first

usable

tool found

in

a

tool

number

search beginning

with tool

1

an d

conducted in ascending

order

(2)

When

a tool

was selected

before

(when

ORG/SPR

is designated)

(a)

The

tool

which

has

been

selected

(b) If

the tool of

(a)

is

not

usable,

the

tool commanded

by

the

part

program

(c) If

tool

noted

in

(b)

is not

usable,

the

first

usable tool

found

in

a tool

number

search

beginning

with

tool

1 and

conducted

in ascending

order



4202-E

F-8

F.


SECTION 4 ENTRY AND DISPLAY OF TOOL

MANAGEMENT

DATA

The

following

five

types

of display are

provided for the tool

management

function.

-

TOOL

LENGTH

OFFSET,

CUTTER

R

COMP

-

AT C

TOOL

SET

- TOOL MANAGEMENT

-

TOOL

GROUP

1.

Tool Length

Offset

and Cutter

Radius

Compensation

Setting

Procedure:

(1 )

Press

the TOOL

DATA

SET key.

This

displays

the TOOL

LENGTH OFFSET an d CUTTER

R

COMP

data in

the

screen.

TOOFOATA SE T

I

s.7,/07/15.1'1-10.-00

*

CUTTER R COMP

*

(D—

)

Tim

*

TOOL LENGTH

OFFSET

*

(H—

)

NO.

NO.

NO.

NO.

0.000

0.000

0.000

0.000

15

0.000

16

0.000

0.000

0.000

0.

000

0.

000

*

1

10.000

2

5.000

3

2.320

4

0.000

5 0.000

6 0.000

5.000

8

0.000

9

0.000

10 0.000

11

0.000

12

0.000

13 0.000

14

0.000

15

0.000

16

0.000

17

0.000

18

0.000

19

0.000

20

0.000

1

1.000 11

2

2.000

12

3 1.000

13

4

1.00Q_

14

*

5

rnn

6 0.

7

0.000

17

8

122.432 18

9 0.000

19

10 889.499

20

7

Z

Y

ACT POSIT

(WORK)

867.419

1000.013

-1102.580

=S 5.

=S

S.

=S

10

[EXTEND]

TE M

t

ITEM

A

AL

SEARCH

ET

ADD

gji(TT)rrTirFÿ(TTi(Tÿ(TÿrF~8')

(2)

When the data

is

to be set for the tools

of

tool No. 21 an d

larger, press

the

page key

until

the

required

tool number

is displayed.

MM

(3)

Locate

the

cursor

at the

data

column

of

the

required

tool number by pressing

the

cursor

keys.

®©

@@



4202-E F-9

F.


(4) Setting

(a) When the tool offset data is known:

Press function

ke y

[F1]

(SET)

and

key in the

tool offset data.

(b) When

the

tool offset data has been set and

the

change

amount

from the set

data

is known:

Press

function

ke y

[F2]

(ADD)

and

ke y in

the

change

amount.

(c) When the tool offset data is unknown

(only

for the

tool

length

offset

data):

Set the zero

offset

of

the

axis

along

which

the

cutting

tool is

infed

before

carrying

ou t

steps

(1)

through

(3).

Mount

the

tool

for which the

data

is to

be

set

in

the

spindle

and

manually align the tool

tip

with the

reference surface.

Carry

out

steps

(1),

(2) and (3).

Press

function

key

[F3]

(CAL) and ke y in the data,

which

consists

of

the axis

name,

the direction,

and

the

current

position as viewed

from

the

zero point.

[Supplement]

1. The axis name

represents

the axis

parallel

to the

axis

on which the tool rotates

(X-,

Y-

and Z-axis). The direction

is

“P ”

for the tool positive side of the workpiece,

and “N”

for

the negative

side.

The

entry

of the direction

may

be

omitted.

In

this

case,

the control

assumes “P”

direction.

(5) Press the

WRITE key.

WRITE

m



4202-E

F-1

0

F.


2.

ATC Tool

Set

Setting

Procedure:

(1)

Press

function ke y [F6] (ITEM

T)

or

[F7]

(ITEM ().

The

screen

will display

the

*ATC

TOOL

SET

(POT

REF)*

screen.

I

TOOL

DATA

SE T

N_

1

97/07/15

14:10:00

*

ATC TOOL

SE T

(POT REF)

*

PO T TOOL

NO. NO.

1

001

2

002

3 003

4

004

5

005

6 006

7

007

8 008

POT

TOOL

NO. NO.

ii on

12

012

13

013

14

014

15

015

16 016

17

017

18 018

19

019

20 NA

PO T TOOL POT TOOL

NO.

NO. NO. NO.

21 NA

22 022

23 023

24

024

25

025

26

026

27

027

28 02 8

29 029

30 030

ISPCY

POT

:ACT

TOOL

:NXT

TOOL

NA

020

007

:

MAGAZINE

10

9 009

10l02ll

ITEM

i

[EXTEND]

EARCH

ITEM

tET

rrT)fTÿrÿrFFr)rÿirÿ6iiTÿirF~r)

(2)

If

the toolpot

number for

which

the

tool number

is

to be set

is

larger than

“41”,

press

the

page

key

until the

required

pot

number is

displayed.

<

(3) Locate the cursor

at

the ATC

PO T NO.

for which,

the tool

number is to

be

set by using the

cursor keys.

©©

@@

(4)

Press function

key

[F1]

(SET)

and

ke y in

the tool number.

(5)

Press the WRITE

key.

WRITE



4202-E F-11-R1

F.


3. Tool

Management

Function

Setting Procedure:

(1)

Press

function

key

[F6]

(ITEM t)

or

[F7]

(ITEM 1) to display the

*TOOL

MANAGEMENT*

screen.

I

TOOL

DATA

SET

Jt 1

|

97/07/15

14:10:00

*

TOOL

MANAGEMENT

*

TOOL

PO T C OM P C OM P GNP

MANAGE

OK/NG

NO .

NO.

NO. 2 NO . 3 NO .

MODE

001

2 0

0

1 04 OK 100P

002

4

0

0

1

01

OK

1000:00

003L

6

0 0

2

03 OK 20000:00

004

9

0

0

2

06 OK

005

12

0

0

2

01 OK

006

14

0

0

1

01

OK

007L 19 0 0

0 00

OK

CRG*008

NA 1

4 5 01 OK 500:

00

009

NA

O O

0

00 OK

010 NA

0

O O 00 OK

SE T TIME

MIN:

S

LEFT TIME

MIN:

S

OP

250:00

214:00

10P 10P

’S

20:00

2:00

320:00

X

Y

Z

AC T

POSIT

(WORK)

867.419 1000.013 -1103.580

=

IF

=

IF

=

IF

[EXTEND]

TE M

t

ITEM

l

ET

SEARCH

CFT)

fFin

fF~n

m rim ri

rF~nm ri

(2)

When

the setting

is

required

for the tool with

the

tool

number

greater than “11

”, press

the page

key until the

required

tool number

is

displayed.

00,

(3)

Locate the cursor at the

data

column for which the data is to be

set.

©©

mm

(4)

After

pressing

function key

[F1]

(SET), key

in

the required

data.

Fo r the

following

data items, key

in

the numerical

values.

COMP

No .

2,

COMP NO.

3,

GRP

NO.,

MANAGE

MODE,

SET

TIME

and

LEFT TIME

Fo r the

following

data

items, ke y in

the

character

data.

ORG/SPR

and

OK/NG

Note

that numerical values

in

units

of seconds

cannot

be

keyed in

for

SET

TIME

and

LEFT TIME.



4202-E

F-1

2

F.


(5) Press the

WRITE

key.

WRITE

[Supplement]

When

the

data

in

the

ATC

POT

NO./TOOL

NO.

TABLE

has been

rewritten

after

changing

tools

in

the

magazine,

or the

group

registration

has been

changed,

the

designation

of the commanded tool

(ORG)

and

spare

tool

(SPR)

may be

changed.

Therefore, ke y in

the

correct

original

and

spare

status

for

individual

tools.

However,

If

an y

tool

may

be

selected

from the

designated tool group, then

the

relationship

of

the

ORG and SPR may not be

checked

and

rewriting

is

not required.

4.

Tool

Group

Setting

Procedure:

(1)


(EXTEND)

and

[F5]

(GROUP)

to

display

the

*TOOL

GROUP*

screen.

TOOL GROUP NO. 000TOOL DATA~SET

Ji.

1

97/07/15

14:10:00

POT

TOOL

OK /

NO. NO.

NG

021

NA

OK

022

NA

OK

023

NA OK

024

NA OK

025 NA

OK

026

NA

OK

027

NA

OK

028 NA

OK

029

NA

OK

030

NA

OK

PO T TOOL

OK /

NO. NO. NG

007L 18 OK

009

NA

OK

010 NA

OK

014

NA

OK

015

NA OK

016 NA

OK

017

NA OK

018

NA OK

019

NA

OK

050

NA OK

POT

TOOL

OK/

NO. NO.

NG

031

NA

OK

032

NA

OK

033

NA

OK

034

NA OK

035

NA

OK

036

NA

OK

037 NA

OK

038 NA OK

039

NA

OK

040

NA OK

POT

TOOL

OK/

NO. NO.

NG

041

NA

OK

042

NA

OK

043

NA

OK

044

NA

OK

045

NA

OK

046

NA

OK

047

NA

OK

048 NA OK

049

NA

OK

050

NA

OK

Z

Y

AC T

POSIT

(WORK)

367.419

1000.013 -1102.580

=IB

=S

ORG

=EX

=GR

BACKUP

[EXTEND]

ROUP

EAD PUNCH

rrrÿriÿnHrinÿnÿnHnrFÿrriri

(2) Enter

the

desired

group

number.

(3)

Press the

WRITE

key.

WRITE

(4)

Then

the tool numbers of the

specified

group

are

displayed.

When no tool

is

registered in

the

specified group,

the

display

will

not be

changed.

When the

number

of the tools

in

the

specified

group

exceeds the

number which ca n

be contained

in

one page,

press

the BS or the

WRITE key.

When the BS

key

is

pressed,

the

subsequent

page is

displayed.

When

the

WRITE

key

is

pressed, al l pages are displayed.



4202-E F-13

F.


SECTION 5

RESETTING

DEFECTIVE TOOL

DATA

When a tool is once

found

to be

defective

du e to

various causes

as

described in Section

2,

4.

“OK/NG

Evaluation”,

the

OK/NG

data

of the

tool remains NG until the

operator

rewrites the data to

OK.

When

the

cause

of

the

defect

is removed

or

the

tool

is

changed,

enter

the

data

OK. Other tool

management

data should a lso be

rewritten,

as needed.

Even if

there are

more

than

one

causes

for

the

defect, only one

cause

is

shown

on the

screen.

Thus, when

removing the cause

displayed

and entering the data

“OK”,

the other cause

will be

shown

on the screen

and

the data remains “NG”.

Only

after

all the

causes are

removed,

“OK”

is

shown

on

the screen.

Precautions

in

resetting

NG

data for each

cause are as

follows:

(1) Tool Life (LIFE)

When

the

lower

digit

of

the

TOOL

MANAGEMENT

mode data

is

1 or 4 and the

LEFT T IME

is

negative,

the

tool defect

data

will

be “NG2”. “LIFE” is

displayed

as the cause

on

the

screen.

Change

the

tool

with new

one

and

rewrite the tool life

data,

and

then

rewrite the

OK/NG

data

to

“OK”.

To usethe

current

tool

for a

while,

modify

the tool

management

mode data or

rewrite

the

LEFT

TIME

data

to be

positive, and

then rewrite the

OK/NG

data to “OK”.

(2)

Tool

Breakage (found

by the

automatic tool

breakage

detection function) (BREAK)

When

the toolbreakage is found

by

the

automatic

tool

breakage

detection function,

the

OK/NG

data

will be set

as

“NG2”.

“BREAK”

is

displayed

as

the cause.

Change

the

defective tool with new

one

and then

rewrite

the

OK/NG

data

to

“OK”.

(3)

Overload

(found

by

MOP) (OVLOAD)

When the MOP

sends the

overload alarm

signal,

the

OK/NG

data

will

be

“NG3” andthe NC

will

stop.

“OVLOAD” is

displayed as the cause on the

screen.

When

the NC RESET

button

is

pressed, “NG3”

will

change

to

“NG2”.

Examine the

cause

of overload and

take

the

required

measures such as

replacement

of

the

tool,

and

then

rewrite

the

OK/NG

data to “OK”.

(4)

Tool Wear

(found by MOP) (WEAR)

When

the

MOP

sends

the tool wear a larm signa l, the

OK/NG

data

will

be

“NG2”.

“WEAR”

is

displayed

as

the cause on the screen.

Examine the

causes

of the defect and take the

required

measures such as replacement of the

tool,

and

then rewrite the

OK/NG

data to

“OK”.

(5)

User

(judgement by

operator)

(USER)

When “NG”

is

entered

as

the

OK/NG

data from the operation panel,

the

OK/NG

data

will

be

“NG2”.

“USER”

is

displayed

as

the cause

on

the

screen.

After

taking

the

required

measures,

rewrite

the

OK/NG

data to “OK”.



4202-E

F-14

F.


SECTION 6 MANAGEMENT

OF

TOOLS FOR WHICH

ATC IS

NOT

USED

For

MDB

which is

not

equipped with

ATC,

and

for

large

diameter tools

and

universal attachments which

cannot

be stored

in

the ATC

magazine,

tool life

management

and automatic tool

length

offset are

possible.

The

tool

numbers

can be

designated by

either

using

a

program

or

setting

switches for

manual

tool

setting.

Fo r a

group

number used

by

the tool

management

function, always

set

“0”.

1.

Command

Format

TN

=

(>]<> <: 0 to the

number

of

tool offset

pairs)

Designate

the

tool number

for

the

next

tool.

The timing at

which the

set tool number

data is transferred

from the

next

tool

to

the

active tool:

(1)

Without ATC (MDB)

After

the completion of M06 (impossible

in

the manual

mode)

(2) Manual

Tool

Change for ATC Specification

After the completion

of M70

(3)

Attachment

for

which ATC

cannot

be Used

After

the

completion

of

M177



4202-E

F-15

F.


2.

Tool Data Setting

The tool number of the tool which

is

set

manually

can be

set

by

displaying

the AT C tool

number

setting

screen.

=5-**ÿ

[j]

(;F:<:

0

to

the

number of tool offset pairs)

L_

Designation

of

“manual

tool

setting”

-

With the no-ATC

specification

machine, sett ing

of the next

and

active tool numbers

is

also

possible.

-

When the

AT C

tool

is

set for the next or active

tool, an

alarm

(5343

Numerical

data) occurs if “,N” is

set.

-

If

“,N”

is

set with the tool number which is set

in

the

toolpot

-

toolnumber

correspondence table,

an alarm

(5343

Numerical

data)

occurs

if “,N” is

set.

-

The

timing

at which theset tool number data

is

transferred from

the

next tool tothe active tool

is

the same

as that

explained

in 1.

3.

Supplements

0)

When

a numerical

value outside

the

allowable range

is

designated

with

TN ,

an

alarm occurs.

2438

Data

word: TN

*> ;

Here,

represents

the

command value

in hexadecimal.

(2)

Selection of a

spare

tool

in

the

same

tool

group

is not

possible.

(3) When the

AT C

tool number

is

set for the next

or

active

tool,

an alarm occurs

if

a

TN

command

is

designated.

An

alarm

occurs

if

a

tool

number,

which is set

in the

toolpot

-

tool number correspondence

table,

is set with

a

TN

command.

(4)

With

the

ATC specification, a

T

command causes an alarm

if

the

TN

number

is

set for

the

next

tool.

(5)

(6) With

the ATC

specification,

an

M06

command causes an alarm if

the

TN

tool set for the

next or

active

tool.



4202-E G-1

G. TOOL

LIFE

MANAGEMENT FUNCTION

SECTION

1

OVERVIEW

The tool

life

management

function counts

and

totals

the

time

used

for

cutting

a

workpiece

in cutting

modes

(G01

,

G02, and

G03)

as the actual

cutting

time

or

counts the number

of

completed

workpieces

for each

cutting tool.

The

total

cutting

time

or

counted

number

is

compared

with

the

preset

tool

life

or

the

count

number

to determine the

serviceability

of

specific

cutting

tools.

For a

cutting

tool

whose

service life has

expired,

the

control

checks

whether

a spare tool

has been

registered for

it

and

if so ,

the

spare tool

is

automatically

selected when the

life-expired

tool is next

specified.

In

case no

spare

tool is

available,

the

cycle

stops

with

alarm display.

Tool life

expiration

during cutt ing cycle:

The

changeover

to

a

registered

spare

tool

is made

when the same

T

number

is next

commanded.

Number

of tools

Up

to a maximum of

300

too ls can

be

preset

based

on

tool

offset

pairs.

Presettable

tool l ife

0

through

32767 minutes

in

increments of one minute

Tool

length

offset

(H)

and

cutter

radius

compensation

(D)

codes

when

a

spare

tool is used

Fo r each

spare tool, up

to three

H (tool length offset)

and

D

(cutter

radius

compensation)

numbers

may

be

assigned.

Spare

tools

Spare

tools

in

the

same group

are selected

according

to

the tool

number; starting

from the smallest

in

ascending

order.

Note that the tool life

management

function is

a

part

of

the tool

management function,

also

refer

to

F.

“TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION”.



4202-E

G-2

G. TOOL

LIFE

MANAGEMENT FUNCTION

SECTION 2 ENTRY OF TOOL

LIFE

MANAGEMENT

DATA

The tool life

management

data

is

set

in

the

following sequence.

Setting

Procedure:

(1)

Set the tool number for a toolpot number.

(2)

Group

the tools.

(3)

Se t

the

management

mode.

(4)

Enter

the

tool life

data

-

SE T

TIME

an d

LEFT TIME.

When

the tool

life

is

counted

in

terms

of

“time”,

the tool

life

should

be set

in

minutes and

seconds,

and

when

it

is determined

by

the

“number

of

finished

workpieces”,

the tool life should

be set

as

the

number

of

workpieces that can be f inished before the tool life

expires.

(5)

When the second and the th ird

offset

data are to be

used,

set

the

offset

numbers

for

them

individually.

The command “TLFON”

programmed

after

the

above setting, starts

the

tool life

management.

The data

setting

procedure

for individual steps

(1

)

through

(4)

are explained in details. For step

(5),

refer

to

Part

I,

“Tool

Management

Function”

-

Enter toolnumbers

corresponding

to the

pot

number in the

ATC POT NO .

/TOOL

NO . TABLE since

the

tool

life is monitored for individual tools.



4202-E G-3

G. TOOL

LIFE

MANAGEMENT FUNCTION

An

example of a machine with 10-tool

capacity magazine

is

given

below.

Assign

a

tool

number to each

tool.

£=[t=lJ

The total number

of tools

used

for

cutting

the

various types

of

workpieces

is 300.

Magazine

capacity:

10 tools

Correspondence

Table

Write the

correspondence

between the

tool

number and the

pot

number

on

the screen when

tools in the

magazine are to

be

changed

for new

setup.

The

memory of the OSP can

hold

the

life

expectancy

data of

up

to

300

tools.

Tool selection

is

commanded

by

tool numbers.

Toolpot

Number

Tool Number

V

1 1

o

2 2

3

3

4

20

o

5

30

o

6

31

O

7

32

O

O

8 10 5

O

9

270

10

21



4202-E

G-4

G. TOOL

LIFE

MANAGEMENT FUNCTION

1

. Setting

Tool

No. for Pot No.

1-1 .

Setting

Tool No.

fo r Pot No.

Setting Procedure:

Example:

The procedure

to enter “21

at the Pot No.

of

“10”

(1)

Select the

TOOL DATA

SET mode

by pressing the

TOOL

DATA key.

lÿAUTO j

j ÿMDI

j

IÿANUAI j Aliij

jpAflMETfflj jzERQ

S T|ÿQÿ T J

jljac Manj

(2)

Press

function

key

[F6]

(ITEM

f)

or [F7]

(ITEM

|) until

the

*ATC

TOOL

SE T

(POT

REF)*

screen is

displayed.

I

TOOL

DATASET

N

1

197/07/15

14:10:00

*

ATC

TOOL

SE T

(POT REF)

*

P OT T OO L

NO. NO.

P OT T OO L

NO.

NO .

11

011

12

012

13

013

14

014

15

015

16 016

17

017

18 018

19

019

20

NA

POT TOOL POT

T00L

N0. NO .

NO.

NO .

21

NA

22 022

23 023

24

024

25 025

26

026

27

027

28 028

29 02 9

30

030

1 001

:SPCY PO T

:

ACT TOOL

:NXT TOOL

NA

2

002

3 003

4

004

5 005

6

006

7 007

8 008

02 0

007

:MAGAZINE

10

9

009

10l02i1

ITEM

I

[EXTEND]

ET

SEARCH

ITEM t

[F~1

)(F

2}(F~3J[F

<1

)PHTlPHn(T'TirF~Fl

(3) If

the

po t

number,

for

which the tool number

is

to be

set,

is

“41”

or

larger, press

the page

ke y

until the

required pot

number

is

displayed.

(4)

Locate

the

cursor

at

the

PO T NO.

1

0

using

the cursor

keys.

©©

@@



4202-E G-7

G. TOOL

LIFE

MANAGEMENT FUNCTION

(5)

Key in “1

”

through

the

keyboard.

0®@©

12 3

+

(6) Press the

WRITE

key.

WRITE

(7) On the

screen,

make sure that the

data

has been

correctly

entered.

(8)

Set

other

GRP

No., repeat ing

steps

(2 )

through

(7).



4202-E G-8

G. TOOL

LIFE

MANAGEMENT FUNCTION

2-2. Setting

Management

Mode

Example:

The

procedure

for

setting

MANAGEMENT mode

“1 ”

for

TOOL NO.

007

Setting

Procedure:

(1)

Locate

the

cursor

at the

MANAGE MODE

column

of

TOOL NO.

007

using

the

cursor

keys.

©©

©@l

(2)

Press

function

key

[F1]

(SET).

L

J

te m

j

ITETH

|

[EXTEND]

SEARCH]

ET

rFÿrnÿnÿrrÿfFÿrFÿrFrirrs)

79

(3)

Key

in

‘‘01

”

through

the

keyboard.

©®@©

©©©©

j©©@©

0

(4)

Press the

WRITE key.

WRITE

/©

(5)

On the

screen,

make sure that the data has been

correctly

entered.

(6)

Set

the

management

mode for

other

tools, repeating

steps (1) through

(5).



4202-E G-9

G. TOOL

LIFE

MANAGEMENT FUNCTION

Tool

management

mode

The tool

management

mode should be set

in

a

two-digit

number with the first

digit always

zero

(0).

The second

digit

sets

the following

management

modes.

Spare

Tool

Selection after

Tool

Life

Expiration

etermination

of

Life

Expiration

Not made

Tool life is determined

by the time

in

which the

cutting

has been fed

in

a

cutting

feedrate.

When the

same T command is

programmed

next.

1

Not

used (Do not set)

No

spare

tool

selection

is

made an d

the

tool whose life has

expired

is

used

when

it

is

programmed

again.

3

Tool life

is

determined

by the

number

of

drilled holes or other

count

data.

When

the same

T

command

is

programmed

next.

4

No t

used

(D o

not

set)

No

spare

tool selection is made and the

tool

whose life

has expired

is

used

when

it

is

programmed again.

6

[Supplement]

For tools on which tool life

management

control isnot

required,

set

“00”

asthe MANAGE

MODE data.



4202-E G-10

G. TOOL

LIFE

MANAGEMENT FUNCTION

2-3.

Setting

SET

TIME

and

LEFT TIME

Data

(1)

Setting

SET

TIME

Data

Example:

The

procedure

for

setting

“2000”

a t S ET

TIME

of TOOL

NO.

001

Setting

Procedure:

(a)

Locate the cursor at the SE T

TIME

data column of TOOL NO . 001

using

the cursor keys.

©©

©@l

(b)

Press function

key

[F1]

(SET).

L

J

TEm

|

ITEru

|

[EXTEND]

SEARCH]

ET

fF©T

fF~ÿ

[~F~3l f~F~4~)

f~F~5l l~F~6T

t~Fÿ7l

(~F~8l

79

(c) Ke y in

“2000”

through

the keyboard.

0®®0

00®®

£)®0

O0O

(d)

Press the

WRITE key.

WRITE

(e)

On the

screen,

make sure

that

the

data ha s been

correctly

entered.

(f)

Set

SET TIME

data for other tools,

repeating

steps

a)

through

e).

[Supplement] 1

.

When

the setting

of

MANAGE MODE is

01

through 03, the

data

may be

set in

units

of minutes. The data under the

heading “:SEC”

is

always

“00”.

2. When the tool life

is

managed by

the

machining

count

data, i.e.,

when the

MANAGE

MODE data

is

04

through

06,

the counted data

may

be set under the

heading

of

“MIN”.

The data below “:SEC”

will

be

“P ” in

this case.



4202-E G-12

G. TOOL

LIFE

MANAGEMENT FUNCTION

SECTION 3

COMMAND

FOR ACTIVATING

TOOL LIFE

MANAGEMENT

For

activating

the

tool

life

management

function,

the

command TLFON should be entered.

Once

executed,

the TLFON remains

effective even after

the control is reset or

power

supply

is

turned

off

and on. It is canceled only when the TLFOFF command is

executed.

TLFON

Tool

life

management

on

TLFOFF

: Tool life

management

off

The

procedures

for

turning

on and

off

the tool life

management

function

through

the

keyboard operation

is

explained

below.

Operation

Procedure:

(1)

Select the

MDI

OPERATION mode

by pressing

the

MDI key.

IÿAUTO

j

p

MDI

j

pmUAI jpr/mxj pMliEIERj

pR O

SElj j rOOL

PAJa| jta:

Manj

//

(2)

Key

in

“TLFON”

through the keyboard.

SSB

W~/

H

V\

(

D E

3®

G)@

o.

T

(3)

Press the WRITE key.

WHITE

(4)

Press the

CYCLE

START

button.



4202-E G-13

G. TOOL

LIFE

MANAGEMENT FUNCTION

[Supplement] 1

.

Fo r

tools

for which tool life

management

control

is

not required,

set

“00”

as

the

MANAGE

MODE

data.

2.

Fo r tools

for

which automatic

spare tool

selection is not

desired,

set

“0”

at the GRP

NO. data. With

this

setting, only

the tool

life

management

is

accomplished

and

the

T

command

calling

the tool whose life has

expired

sets the commanded tool in the

spindle.

The action that

follows

depends

on

the setting

of the

MANAGE DATA.

3 or 6

____

utting is continued.

1 or

4 ....

Alarm

occurs.

(Alarm message:

Active tool

NG3)

3.

When the tool life

management

is

carried out

in

terms of

a count

number,

the

command

TLCO

should

be used

in

addition to

the command TLFON. The manner

for

entering

the TLCO

command

is

explained

on

the

fol lowing page.

Operation

Procedure:

(a)

Press the

MDI key.

(b) Key-in

“TLCO

Qxxx”

through

the

keyboard.

Flere, “xxx”

indicates

the

number

to be deducted

from

the set count

data. I ts range is

from 0

to 999.

(c)

Press

the

WRITE key.

(d)

Press the

CYCLE START

button.

-

When

this

command

is

given

while

the

management

mode

of

the

tool

in

the

spindle

is

“count”,

the number

entered following

the

address character

Q is

deducted from the

LEFT TIME

data

of that tool.

-

In

case

no

number is

specified

following

“Q”,

then the data

is counted down

by

on e

(1).

-

The

TLCO

command is not a modal command. That

is,

the deduction

or

counting

down

is

made only

when

it

is

commanded.

The

explanations

of

the commands used in the tool

life

management

function,

such

as

TLFON,

TLFOFF

an d

TLCO, ha ve bee n given assuming the MDI mode

operation.

In

the automatic mode operation, these commands

may

be issued

in

the

same

manner.



4202-E G-14

G. TOOL

LIFE

MANAGEMENT FUNCTION

SECTION 4

RESETTING

TOOL

LIFE DATA

1.

For Usable Tools

Fo r

tools

whose

preset

tool life

has

expired

bu t the

operator

has judged

that

it

can

be

still

used for

cutting,

change

the

tool life data

using

the following

procedure.

Setting

Procedure:

(1)

Select the TOOL

DATA

SET mode

by pressing the

TOOL

DATA key.

(2)

Press function

key

[F6]

(ITEM f) or [F7]

(ITEM

|)

until the screen

displays

the

*TOOL

MANAGEMENT*

screen.

(3)

Following

the step

(2)

in 2-2-3,

enter

the expected

remaining

l ife as the

LEFT TIME

data.

(4)

Locate

the cursor

at

the

OK/NG

column

using

the

cursor

keys.

(5)

Press function

ke y [F1] (SET).

(6)

Ke y

in

“OK

through

the

keyboard.

(7)

Press the WRITE key.

(8)

On

the

screen,

make sure that the data ha s been

correctly

entered.

Example:

SET

TIME LEFT TIME

100:00 -5:28

If an

operator

has

judged

that the

tool

is

stil l usable

for additional 30

minutes,

the

setting should

be :

SET TIME LEFT TIME

100:00 30:00



4202-E

G-15

G. TOOL

LIFE

MANAGEMENT FUNCTION

2.

Changing

a

Life-expired

Tool with

New One

The

LEFT T IME

data

must be

reset

after

exchanging

the

life-expired

tool

with a

new

tool.

Follow the

procedure

below

for

resetting

the

data.

Setting

Procedure:

Set the tool length offset and cutter

radius compensation

data of the

new

tool first.

For

the

setting

procedure,

refer to Section 4-1. “Tool

Length

Offset and

Cutter

Radius

Compensation’’

in Section 1 .


(ITEM

t)

or

[F7] (ITEM

J,)

until the screen

displays the

*TOOL

MANAGEMENT:;;

screen.

(1)

(2)

Following

the steps

in

Section

2-2-3,

set the tool

life

data

in

terms of time or count number

depending on

the MANAGE MODE

setting at the

SE T

TIME

and

LEFT TIME

data.

In case

the SE T

TIME

data

is

the

same

as the

one previously entered, then

the data

only for the

LEFT TIME

should be

entered.

(3)

(4)

Locate the cursor to the

NG/OK

column

using

the

cursor

keys.

(5) Press function

ke y

[F1]

(SET).

(6)

Key

in

“OK”

through

the

keyboard.

(7) Press the

WRITE

key.

(8)

On

the

screen,

make

sure

that

the data has been entered correctly.

Example:

SE T

TIME LEFT TIM E

50:00

-3:14

In

case the SET

TIME

data

is

the same as the one

previously

set,

the

setting

should be:

SET

TIME LEFT

TIME

50:00 50:00

3.

Setting

LEFT TIME

Data

to the Same Value

as SET

TIME

Data

for

All

Tools

Setting Procedure:

(1)

Press

the

MDI key.

(2)

Enter the

command TLFR through

the

keyboard.

(3)

Press the

WRITE key.

(4)

Press

the

CYCLE START button.



4202-E G-16

G. TOOL

LIFE

MANAGEMENT FUNCTION

SECTION 5

PROGRAM

EXAMPLES

1. Tool

Life Management

by Tool

Used Time

Data

N1 TLFON;

T2

:

End

mill

T5

:

Drill

N2

N3 M6;

N4

NS GO X20 Y30

S200;

N6 G56

Z1S

H2;

N7

G1

G4 1

X40 D2

FIDO

H3;

Tools

programmed

within blocks between N1 and

N24

are

managed in

accordance

with

the

setting

done

in

the MANAGEMENT mode.

The

replacement

of

the

tool

having

been

used

to

its

life

occurs

when

that

tool

is

designated

after

the

tool

life

expiration.

:

:

N2 4 TLFOFF;

N25 M2;

With the

program example

givenabove,

thetool life

managementfunction

is called

up

and cancelled

by

the

programmed

commands.

The

commands

-

TLFON and

TLFOFF

-

can also be entered through the

keyboard. Once the tool

life

management

function is activated by the command

TLFON

either

programmed

or

entered through

the

keyboard, it

remains active until cancelled

by

the TLFOFF command.

Turning

off power or pressing

the

RESET

button does

not

change the tool l ife management

mode.

When the tool life of the T2

(end mill)

ha s

expired,

its

spare

tool

T3 2 is automatically

selected when the

tool

command

selecting the T2

is executed next.

At

the

same

time, the tool offset data is also

changed. In

this

program

offset data

at

address

#2

is

called

since

“G41

D2”

and “G56 H2”

are

programmed

while

the

programmed

tool is used for

cutting. Flowever,

after the replacementwith

the

spare

tool,

the

tool offset data

stored at the address identical to the tool number of the

spare

tool

will

be called.

T2 Selection

of

Spare

Tool

T3 2

Command

(programmed tool)

(spare

tool)

G56 H2

G41

D2

Offset

data

at addresses

H2

and

D2

are

called.

Offset data at addresses H32 and D32

are called.



4202-E G-1

7

G. TOOL

LIFE

MANAGEMENT FUNCTION

2.

Tool Life

Management

by Count

Data

of Machining

Cycles

COMMAND

N1 TLFON;

T2

:

End

mill

T7

:

Boring

bar

N2

M6 ;

3

N4

GO

X20

Y8 0

S300;

G56

Z-40

HA

M3;

G41

G1

X4 0 F200

DA;

Y-40;

N5

*

The numerical value

following

address

character

“Q”

indicates the unit amount for

countdown from the initial

setting

value.

It

can

be

set as

required.

Default of Q

data,

i.e,

when

only

the

'TLCO” is

programmed,

countdown from the

initial setting

value

is

made in

units

of

“1”.

Note that

when

the

TLCO”

command

is

not

programmed, countdown

is

not

made

even when the tool

life

management

is

in

the

LIFE

COUNT mode.

N7

N8

:

:

TLCO

Q4;*

G56

Z10

HA M3;

F150;

N13

N1 4

N15 G1

X80

Y-10;

16

N17

XO;

:

:

TLCO

Q7;*

30

M06;

31

:

:

Suppose

the initial

setting valuebe “100P”, the

initial

setting value

is

automatically deducted

to

96P

(1OOP

-

4P) by

the execution of the

sequence

N13 and then to 89P

(96P

-

7P) by

the execution of the sequence

N30.

The initial setting value is deducted

in

the

same manner

and

when

the remaining value becomes

“0”,

then

the

tool

life

of

that

tool isdetermined

to have

expired.

At

the nextT

command

calling

thattool,

its

spare

tool is

automatically

selected and

the

call

up

of

the corresponding

tool offset data also occurs.

It

is recommended to use the Q data identical tothe number of holes or workpieces. This

will give an

ideaof

approximate

tool life.



H.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL

MC

MULTI-PLANE APC

(FOR

MX

SERIES)



4202-E

H-2

H.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL MC MULTI-PLANE AP C

(FOR

MX

SERIES)

- The

circulating

station of the multi-planeAPC

section,

pallet

carry-in

from the

setup ST

toeach

ST,

pallet

carry-out

from each ST to the

setup

ST

can

be controlled

from the

operat ion panel

called

PPC

panel.

-

The

2-plane

circulating

APC section and

machining scheduling can

be controlled from the NC

operation

panel

of the machine.

-

The above

system

allows

for

long-time

continuous

processing

with

operator

or

without

operators

according

to

machining

schedules.



4202-E

H-3

H.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)


(FOR

MX

SERIES)

SECTION 2 PPC

CYCLE

OPERATION

PROCEDURES

Fo r

executing

PPC

cycle

operation on

the

system,

fol low the

procedures

shown below.

(1)

Create the

PPC

cycle

operation

machining program.

(Section 3.)

1

(2)

Assign

PP C

cycle

operation

machining

programs

to pallet

numbers.

(Section

7.)

I

(3)

Carry

in

and out

pallets

to and from each ST.

(Section

5

and 6.)

I

(4)

Edit

machining

schedules.

(Section

8.)

I

Start



4202-E

H-4

H.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)


(FOR

MX

SERIES)

SECTION 3 CREATING

THE

MACHINING

PROGRAM

FOR PPC

CYCLE

OPERATION

For PPC

cycle

operation,

the

user

must create two

kinds

of

dedicated

machining

programs.

-

Pallet

exchange machining

program

-

PPC

cycle

operation

machining

program

1. Creating

the Pallet

Exchange

Machining

Program

Create the

circulation

program

for

the

2-plane

circulating

APC on

the

machine

as

shown

below and

store

it

into

MD1:.

Filename: PPC9999.MIN

Contents:

0????

where

????

indicates

any

name.

2-plane

circulating

AP C

circulation

instruction

Program

end instruction

M160

M02

2.

Creating

the

PPC Cycle

Operation

Machining

Program

Create

the

PP C

cycle

operation machining program

as

shown

below

and

store it

into

MD1 :.

File

name:

PPC?????????????.

MIN

(?...

indicate

an y name.)

where ????

indicates

any

name.

ontents:

O????

[Process]

M02

Program end

instruction



4202-E

H-5

H.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL

MC

MULTI-PLANE AP C

(FOR

MX

SERIES)

SECTION

4 PPC PANEL OPERATION

The figure

below

shows

the PP C

panel. It

consists of

various switches

and

the

LCD

touch

panel.

pun

me

PALLET

IN

fePT

cVcLfe

PALLET

INP

No

PROCESSING

PROGRAM

PPC123456.MN

ERR

123.4

*ri

re t

P0001

1

Q

D

ns

WAITING SCHEDULE

PP C MODE

STOP

|

—

-

—

SCHEDULE

o

CONT

ONE

CYCLE

OFF

UTO

INTERRUFT

WAITING

cr*

EMPTY

PALLET

PPC CYCLE

START

N

o

DOOR

INTERLOCK

:

Select

Switch

O

:

Push

Switch

•

:

Emergency Stop

Switch

O

:

Lamp

O

RESTART EMG.

STOP

UT

o

Fig.

4-1

PP C

Panel



4202-E

H-7

H.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)


(FOR

MX

SERIES)

coco

1203

EES

FEED

MODE

ALM ERR

MANUAL

AXISSEL

KffHW

m

iimiin

MUIM

ITI.K

INV.

SHIFTER

OVERRIDE

t

IPAGEI

rmgq

f

[PAGEI

oooo

fcimrn

CnSW

ALM

ER R

MANUAL

D D E S

EL

ST N o. S

T

0

0

0

I

FASTEN

/

UNFASTEN

[MENU]

BOD

22

2B

ESI

HHHI91

IPlfRl

I

[PAGEI

WHHW MIMOIM

ANUAL

0000

ERRLM

M/C

PIN

SSt

PIN WSS2

PIN

M/C FT

HIFTER

M

FTTOT

21112

CSH

Fig. 4-2

Status Transition

on

the Touch Panel

(a) When the PPC power is turned off

The

pallet carry-in

screen

and carry-out

screen

are

displayed.

(b)

When

the

PPC

power

is turned

on

The

pallet

carry-in screen, pallet

carry out

screen,

an d

machining schedule

screen are

displayed.

(c)

When bit

5

of the NO

optional

parameter

bit No.

59

is ON

The

pallet carry-in

screen,

pallet

carry-out screen,

and

machining

schedule screen as well as the

manual

operation

screen are

displayed.



4202-E H-8

H.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)


(FOR

MX

SERIES)

1-2.

Pallet

Carry-in

Screen

Pistil

AIM

ERA

PALLET

IN Al

B1

D2

D3 D4

PALLET

IN

P No

P

B2

PROCESSING

PROGRAM

Cl

RR

12 3*.

PTl VT2

PALLET

IN

IRPT

CYCLE

PALLET

tN

P.

No

POOC

1

PROCESSING

PROGRAM

PPC1234S6

MIN

DS

D6

1

DBD

EI

E;

EJ

E4

E5

E6

L~

ZB E9

Ea

Eb

Ec

B3

DDD

Hi

EB

rw

A2

Fig.

4-3

Touch

Panel

Screen Configuration

Pallet Carry-in Screen

Table

4-1

Function

List

2

of the Pallet

Carry-in

Screen

Item Item Name

Function

Status

indications

Schedule mode status The status

changes

between AUTO,

IRPT,

and WAIT

depending

on

the mode selected with the

AUTO/I

RPT/WAIT

schedule select

rotary

switch.

D1

D2 APC

cycling

status

Displayed in reverse

video

during

APC

operation.

D3

Setup

station

proper

position

status

(PT1/PT2)

Displayed

in

reverse

video when

the

pallet

carried out

to

the setup

ST

is

at a

position

from

which the pallet

can

be carried

in.

When

the

setup

ST is 1

:

PT1

is

displayed in reverse

video.

Wp

ST is at

a

position

from

which the pallet

can

be carried in.

When

the

setup

ST is 1:

PT 1

is

displayed

in reverse video.

When

the

setup

ST

is 2: PT 1 an d

PT2

is

displayed in

reverse

video.

D4

D5

NC alarm status

Displayed

in reverse video when an NC alarm is

generated.

Se t error status

6 Displayed in

reverse video when a set error is

generated

on the

touch

panel

or an error is

generated

on the EC. The alarm can be

cleared with the clear

key.



4202-E H-9

H.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)


(FOR

MX

SERIES)

Table

4-2

Function List

2

of the Pallet Carry-in

Screen

Item Item Name Function

Input

keys

C1 MENU key Switches

to the

pallet carry-out

screen.

0

to 9,

Clear,

and

Return

keys

E1 Enters and

decides the

numeric value

indicating

the

pallet

number

to

carry-in

pallets.

The

Clear

key clears the

value to

“0000.”

to

Ec

Indications

Displays an

alarm or error comment

if an

NC alarm or a set error

occurs

on the PPC.

A1

Alarm

and error

comment

A2

Program

name

Displays

the

program

name of a

pallet

when a

pallet

number is

entered from the ten-key pa d

when

a

pallet

is carried in

from

the

setup

ST.

Program

name

(9

characters or

less):

PPC??????.

MIN

Program

name

(13

characters or

less):

PPC?????????

(MIN omitted)

Program name

(16

characters or

less):

????????????? (PPC/.MIN

omitted)

Only up

to 13 characters

can

be

displayed.

The

program name

is

not

displayed

when the PP C is off.

B1

Alarm and error

number

Displays the code of

an

error when

an


occurs

on the PPC.

NC alarm:

4

digits,

set

error:

2 digits

Carry-in

pallet

number

Displays the

pallet

number

entered from the ten-key

pad

when

a

pallet

is carried

in

from the

setup

ST .

B2

Displays

the processing order

of

a

pallet

after

a

pallet number is

entered

from the

ten-key

pad

when

a

pallet

is carr ied in

from the

setup

ST.

A

value of 0

is displayed

when the PP C

is

off.

B3 Processing

order



4202-E

H-11

H.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)


(FOR

MX

SERIES)

Table

4-4

Function List

2

of

the



Input

keys


to

the

machining

schedule

display

screen.

02 PAGE

key

Switches

the

next page o f

the

setup

SE T

pallet carry-out

screen.

After all

processed pallet

numbers are

displayed,

the screen

returns to

page

1

.

E1

0

to

9,

Clear,

and

Return

keys

Enters

and

decides

the

numeric

value

indicating

the

pallet

number

to

carry

out

pallets.

The Clear

key

clears

the

value to “0000”.

The

Clear

ke y clears

the value to

“0000.”

to

Ec

Indications

A1 Alarm

and

error

comment

Displays

an


if an NC

alarm

or a

set

error

occurs on

the PPC.

B1

Alarm

and error

number

Displays

the code of

an

erro r when an NC

alarm

or a set error

occurs

on

the PPC.

NC alarm:

4 digits,

set error:

2 digits

B4

Carry-out pallet

number

Displays the

pallet

number

entered

from

the ten-key pa d

when a

pallet

is carried out to

the setup ST.

F1

Processed

pallet

display

order

Displays

the

display

order of all

processed

pallet numbers as well

as

the

pallet

number. The number of

pairs

displayed

is the

same

as

of

the

number of

processed pallets.

A

value of 0

is displayed

when the

PP C is off.

to

F6

Processed

pallet

number

Displays

al l

processed pallet

numbers

in

order of

process

completion.

6

pairs

can be

displayed in

one

page.

(the

maximum

number

is

50

pallets.)

The number of

pages

varies

depending on

the

processed

pallet

number.

Processed

pallet

number:

up

to 6

. . .

Processed

pallet

number:

7

to

12

.. .

Processed

pallet

number:

13

to

1

8

Processed

pallet

number:

1

9

to

24

0000

is

displayed

when the PPC is off.

Fa

to

Ff

1-page

indication

2-page

indication

3-page

indication

4-page

indication



4202-E

H-12

H.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)


(FOR

MX

SERIES)

1-4.

Machining

Schedule

Display

Screen

This

screen

is

not

displayed

when

the

PPC

is

off.

ERR

1234

HBS3KQ83S

m

rra

AIM

ERR

MAC.PT

2

?90O0

S

P1000

8 P1200

C2

SCHEDULE

Al

111 Cl

. SCHEDULE

fen*

CYCLE

MAC.

rr

1

P7000

4 P9000

7

P1100

D21 D3

O'. D5

D6

MAC PT

c.2 P Gb

C5

P

Ge

G8

P Gh

MAC.PT

G3 P

Gc

Cb

P

G£

G9

P Gi

MAC

PT

3

P1000

6

P2000

MAC

PT

G'.

P Ga

G4

P

Gd

G7

P

Go

Pr»000

Fig.

4-5

Touch

Panel Screen

Configuration

-

Machining

Schedule

Display

Screen

Table

4-5

Function

List

1

of the

Machining

Schedule

Display Screen


Status

indications

D1

Schedule mode status The status changes

between AUTO,

IRPT,

an d

WAIT

depending

on

the mode selected

with

the

AUTO/IRPT/WAIT

schedule select

rotary

switch.

D2 APC

cycling

status


video

during

APC

operation.

Setup

station proper

position

status

(PT1/PT2)

D3

Displayed in

reverse video when the

pallet

carried

out

to the

setup

ST

is at

a

position

from which the

pallet

can

be carr ied

in.

When

the

setup

ST

is

1:

PT 1

is


video.

When the

setup ST is

2:

P T1 a nd P T2

is


video.

D4

D5

NC alarm status Displayed in reverse video when an NC alarm is

generated.

Se t error status

Displayed in

reverse video when a set

error is generated on

the

touch panel

or an error

is

generated

on the EC. The alarm can be

cleared with the Clear

key.

D6



4202-E H-13

H.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)


(FOR

MX

SERIES)

Table 4-6 Function List

2

of the

Machining

Schedule

Display

Screen


Input

keys


to

the manual

operation

screen.

02 PAGE

key

Switches to the next page of the

machining

schedule display

screen.

After al l

processed

pallet

numbers are

displayed,

the

screen

returns to the first

page.

Indications

A1

Alarm

and

error

comment

Displays an


if an

NO

alarm

or a

set

error

occurs on

the PPC.

B1

Alarm and

error

number

Displays the code

of an error

when

an

NC alarm or a set

error

occurs

on

the

PPC.

NC

alarm:

4

digits,

set

error:

2

digits

B4

Carry-out pallet

number

Displays the pallet

number

entered

from

the ten-key pa d

when

a

pallet

is carried

out

to

the setup ST.

G1 Displays

the

processing

order

of

ready

pallet

numbers as well as

pallet

numbers.

The number of p[airs

displayed

is the same

as

the

number

of

ready

pallets.

A

value of

0

is displayed


Ready

number

to

G9

Ga

Displays the processing

order

and

number of

ready

pallet

in the

NC

machining

schedule

in

a

list

table.

9

pairs

ca n be

displayed in

one

page.

(the

maximum number is

50

pallets.)

The number

of

pages

varies

depending

on

the ready pallet

number.

Pallet

number:

up

to

9

.

Pallet number:

10

to

18

Pallet number: 1

9

to

24

Ready

pallet

number

to

Gi

1-page

indication

2-page

indication

3-page

indication



4202-E H-14

H.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL

MC

MULTI-PLANE AP C

{FOR

MX

SERIES)

1-5.

Manual

Operation Screen

This

screen is

display 6. FEED

MODE

ICDSQI

AL M ERR

P\<.

MANUAL

AXIS

SEL

b

1

C2 Cl

RR 1234

FEED MODE

MANUAL

AXIS SEL

A

1

FEED MODE

DS

D6

X?

6

.K

iw.

y.2

xs

i

i:i:nl

PH

OI.

X3

y.4

SHIFTER

HIFTER

OVERRIDE

Xdc

nv.

I

KI:T.

VERRIDE

xf

8 X9 xba

Xc

nous

HI

l

1PAGE)

key

a

nm

ALM ERR.

ERR

12

34

V

\<

MANUAL

B1 C2 Cl

ANUAL

A1

D6S

El E2 E3

E4

E5 EG

BS

SEL.

ST No.

S T

0

0

0 I

FASTEN

/

UNFASTEN

SEL

ST

No

ST

FASTEN

/

UNFASTEN

Hh E7 E8 E9

g

INI.ros.

D

a

ES I

La

Eb

Ec

J.

[PACE]

key

i*\<

;i;

RR

12

34 C2 Cl

ANUAL MANUAL Al

B

1

ALM ERR

DS DS

WSS2

PIN

WSSI

PI N

Hi

Hj

SHIFTER

WSS2

PIN M/C PIN

SSI

PIN

MAC PIN

HK

HI

l

I Oil

Hm

Hn

l

I

M/C PT

/C

PT

HfFTER

r

Hd

HO

HP

e

l>\.|

KKT.

Fig.

4-6

Touch Panel

Screen

Configuration

Manual

Operation Screen



4202-E H-15

H.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)


(FOR

MX

SERIES)

Table

4-7

Function List 1 of the Manual Operation

Screen


Status

indications

D5

NC alarm status

Displayed

in reverse

video

when an NC alarm is

generated.

D6 Se t error status

Displayed in

reverse

video when a

set

error

is

generated

on

the

touch

panel

or an error is

generated

on the EC.

The

alarm can be

cleared with the Clear

key.

Input

keys

C1 MENU

key

Switches to the pallet

carry-in

screen.

C2 PAGE

key

Switches to the next page

of

the manual

operation

screen.

After all manual

operation

screens are

displayed,

the screen

returns to

the first page.

E1

0

to

9, Clear,

and

Return

keys

Enters

and

decides the numeric value when the

circulating station

is

circulated

to

the

fasten/unfasten

position of

the

selected

ST.

Th e

Clear

key clears

the

value

to

0000.”

to

Ec

Selects

the rotation

axis

or linear

axis for axis

feed of the

circulating

station.

X1

Axis select

key

(Rotation/linear)2

X3 Axis feed

ke y

(«-/-*)

Feeds the axis for axis feed of the

circulating

station. The

axis

moves while this

ke y is pressed

down.

4

Selects either manual feed or

pulse-handle

feed

for

axis feed of

the

circulating

station.

X5 Feed

select key

(Feed/PH)

6

X7

Interlock invalid

key

Invalidates interlocks

during

operation

of the

circulating

station.

This

ke y

is effective

while it

is

pressed

down.

X8

Fed override

key

(1/10/50/100)

Selects

the override value for

axis

feed of

the

circulating

station.

When

Feed”

is

selected

with

the feed select key

Fast feed speed

x

1%

10%

50%

100%

when PH”

is

selected with the feed select

key

Fast

feed

speed

x

1

pulse

10

pulse

50

pulse

50

pulse

to

Xb

Xc Shifter

key

(Advance/retract/up/d

own)

Selects

Advance,

Retract,

Up, or Down to run the shifter of the

circulating

station.

The

shifter

of

the circulating

stat ion on

the

APC

operates.

to

Xf



4202-E H-16

H.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)


(FOR

MX

SERIES)

Table 4-8 Function List

2

of the Manual Operation

Screen


Input

keys

Hg

Fasten/unfasten

position select

key

Moves the

circulating

station

to a

position

at which the

pallet

on the

sele

pallet

is

unfastened

and

also moves the

shifter.

h

Hi Setup ST1/setup

ST2/MC

pin

in/pin

out

select key

(IN

an d

OUT)

Inserts

or

removes

a pin to the

setup ST

or waiting ST on

the

machine.o

Hn

MC

carry-in/carry-out

select key (IN

and

OUT)

Carries in

or out

to the

waiting

ST on the machine.o

to

Hp

Indications

A1

Alarm and

error

comment

Displays

an alarm

or

error comment

if

an NC

alarm or a

set error

occurs

on

the

PPC.

Displays

the code of

an

erroerror

comment if an NC

alarm or a set

error

occurs

on

the

PPC.

NC

alarm:

4

digits,

set error:

2 digits

B1

Alarm

and error

number



4202-E

H-17

H.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)


(FOR

MX

SERIES)

PPC Mode

Switch

.

Three

PPC modes

are

available:

continuous,

one

cycle,

and

off. This

section describes these PPC

modes.

Continuous

Used to run the machine

continuously according

to

the

PPC schedule.

Used to

process

one

pallet

only

of a PPC schedule.

Used

to disable PPC schedules.

One

cycle

Off

-

If

the

operation

mode is

changed

to PPC ON

(continuous/one cycle)

or PPC OFF

by

the PP C MODE

switch on the PP C

panel, both the

PPC side

and NC

side are reset.

Schedule Switch.

The PPC

schedule

registration function

provides three

types of

schedules: automatic,

waiting,

and

interrupt. When pallets are carried

in,

the operator can

select either of these

types

with

this

schedule

switch to

register

various schedules for carried-in

pallets.

Automatic Schedule

-1.

Automatic

schedule

is normal

schedule.

At

pallet

carry-in, set

this

switch

to “Automatic” at

pallet

to

carry

in a

pallet,

and

the

pallet

is

added

to

the

pallet

registered

last

by

automatic schedule.

Set

the

PPC mode switch to “CONT.” or “One

cycle”

then

press

the “PPC CYCLE START

switch,

and the

machine

processes

pallets

according

to a

registered

schedule.

Waiting

Schedule

Waiting

schedule

is

used to

pallets

ready

for

processing

on the

pallet

station but

process

them later.

Set this switch to “WAITING” when

carrying in

a

pallet,

the

pallet

is

added to the

one

registered

last

by

waiting

schedule.

If

it

takes much time to

process

them and the operator

wants

to

execute

processing

at

night,

the operator

prepares pallets

on

the ST for processing and

registers

them

by

the

waiting

schedule

in advance. The

operator

sets the PPC mode switch to “CONT.”

and

presses the PPC

CYCLE

START

switch, and

the

machine

processes

those pallets

after all

pallets registered in the

automatic schedule

complete.

3-2.

Interrupt

Schedule

Interrupt

schedule

is

used

to

interrupt

any

registered

schedule

for

scheduling when urgent processing

is

required.

Set

this

switch to “INTERRUPT” when

carring in

a

pallet,

and the machine

registers i t as

the first on e

registered

by

the automatic

schedule,

unless

the

pallet

with

processing

order

1

is not processed

on the

machine

at

that t ime. At this time,

the

pallet

is

carried

into the

waiting

St.

If

pallets

are carried

in

cont iguously by

the

interrupt

schedule,

the

machine

stores

the

pallet

numbers

carried with

INTERRUPT

and

additionally

registers

them

sequentially.

If

the

operator

once

set

the

switch

to a position

other

than

INTERRUPT,

then

returns

to INTERRUPT,

a

pallet

is also

interrupted

to the

first

on e

registered by

the automatic

schedule.

Once

registered,

pallets are processed

in

the same

way

as pallets

registered

by the

automatic

schedule.

3-3.



4202-E H-18

H.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)


(FOR

MX

SERIES)

3-4. WAITING

SCHEDULE

STOP Switch

When

the

operator

sets this switch

to ON

during

continuous

operation in

PPC

continous

mode,

the

machine stops after

processing

the pallets

in

the automatic

schedule (pallets

with

schedule

attribute

[1]).

While

this

switch

is

OFF, the

machine starts processing

the pallets in the

waiting schedule

(pallets with

schedule

attribute

[0])

after

the

automatic

schedule completes.

While

this

switch

is

ON,

the

WAITING SCHEDULE STOP lamp

lights.

4.

EMPTY

PALLET Carry-in

Switch

Press

this

switch to carry

in

pallets

to

the

pallet

station

without registering

them to

the

PP C

schedule.

5. IN Switch

Press

this switch to

register in

pallets

to a PP C

schedule,

then

carriy

in

them

from

the setup

station to the

pallet

station.

6. OUT Switch

Press

this

switch

to

carry

out processed pallets

from

the

pallet

station to

the

setup

station.



4202-E

H-21

H.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)


(FOR

MX

SERIES)

SECTION 5 CARRYING

IN

PALLETS

-

Fo r

PP C cycle

operation,

the

operator

must

first

set a

workpiece

on a

pallet

and

place

the

pallet

in

a

station,

then

register

it in the

machining

schedule.

This

section

describes how to

carry pallets

for PPC

cycle operation.

-

When

the

PPC is

on,

the

operator

can

carry in pallets

by

three

machining

schedules

with

the

AUTO,

INTERRUPT,

and

WAITING schedule select

rotary

switch.

The operator

can also

carry in an

empty

pallet not registered in the machining schedule.

-

If

the operator

carries in

a

pallet

when

the PPC

is

off, the

pallet is

carried

but

not

registered in

the

machining schedule.

(It

is

the

same as

empty pallet carry-in

while the

PP C

is

on.)

-

Pallets

can

be carried

in

to

an

empty pallet

station

only in

each mode. The

pallet

station

used

is selected

automatically.

-

Carrying-in

of

pallets

is

possible

in

two

methods

-

inputting

a

pallet number

or

automatic

without

inputting

a pallet number.

When

carrying in

a

new

pallet or

changing

a pallet itself at the

setup

station,

input

a pallet number at the

PPC panel

and

press

the

IN

switch

on

the

same

panel.

On completion of pallet

carrying in

operation, the schedule is

registered

to the

machining

schedule and

the

PPC

panel

screen

changes

to

the

pallet

carry-out

screen.

When

carrying in

a

pallet, having

been carriedout

to

the

setup

station,

to

a

station

using

the

same

pallet

number, the

pallet

is

carried in to

a station

by simply

pressing the IN

switch since

the

pallet

number of

the

pallet

in

the station

remains

in

the PPC

panel.

In

this

case,

it

is

not

necessary

to

input a

pallet

number.

On

completion

of

pallet carrying in operation,

the

schedule is

registered

to

the

machining

schedule

and

the PPC

panel

screen

changes

to

the

pallet carry-out

screen.



4202-E

H-22

H.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)


(FOR

MX

SERIES)

1. Carry-in by the Automatic and

Waiting

Schedules

NO

9

NO . 10

NO .

II

NO. 12

Machine

PL

PL

L PL

NO.

R

-

IcJ.

IB

NO .

7

B B B

L

BIN

Circulation

jUalion

Wa n ST

B

NO

I

Inside

main

machine

PL

L

PL

Pl.

NO .

6

i

NC

NO.

5 NO .

4

NO. 3 NO.

2

Setup

ST

B

Work

Fig.

5-1

Pallet

Carry-in

-

Automatic

an d

Waiting

Schedules

(1) Set PPC

MODE to

CONT.

or ONE

CYCLE on

the

PPC

panel.

(See Fig.

4-1

.)

(2) Set

SCHEDULE

to

AUTO

or

WAITING on

the PP C

panel.

(See

Fig.

4-1.)

(3) If

the

pallet

carry-in

screen

is not

displayed, display

the

pallet

carry-in

screen

by

pressing the

[MENU]

key on

the touch panel screen of the PPC panel.

T

PALLET IN

AUTO CYCLE PT1 ?r:

PALLET IN P.

No

PROCESSING

PROGRAM

F7J2J

BB5M

0CO

ERR

LM

prrrn

DBD

nan

non

19

m

ITW

Fig.

5-2

Pallet Carry-in


Then

press a

numeric

key

to enter a

carry-in

pallet number,

and

the

entered

pallet

number is

displayed in

PALLET

IN P.

No.

Press

[Return],

and

the

processing

order

and

program name

of a

processing pallet

number are displayed.

If

more

than

one program name

is registered,

the one

registered first is

displayed.

(See Section 7.)

If

the

pallet

number

of

the

pallet

in the

setup

station is

the

same

as that carried

ou t

previously, pallet

number,

process,

and program

are

already displayed.

(4)

Press the IN switch

on the

PPC panel (see

Fig.

4-1), and

pallets

in the

setup

ST are carr ied

to

an

empty ST

(in

the order of

a,

b,

and

c

to ST

with

No.9 in Fig.

5-1).



4202-E H-23

H.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)


(FOR

MX

SERIES)

(5) When pallets are carried

in in

AUTO mode,

pallets are scheduled at the last of the automatic

schedule

(schedule

attribute

1) ;

and

when

in

WAITING

mode,

they are scheduled

at

the

last of

the

waiting

schedule

(schedule

attribute

0). (See

Section

8. )

(6)

After

carrying

in

of a

pallet,

the PPC

panel

screen

automatically

changes to the

pallet

carry-out

screen.

OOCO

IPHTW

«ÿ

PT1

PT2

ALM ERR

PALLET

IN

ALTO

CYCI.F.

PALLET

IN

P No

PROCESSING

PROGRAM

nTT*

PALLET

OUT

IRPT

CYCLE

_

PALLET

OU T

P.

No.

PHTH

1

P1000

3

P:IOOO

5 PSOOO

COO 3

ERR

TI

PT : ALM

pflTFI

DB

B

E

2 P2000

4

P4000

6 P6000

DOB

B E9

m

OP

IB

KB

Effl

Fig.

5-3 Screen Transfer

from

Pallet Carry-in Screen to Pallet Carry-out Screen



4202-E

H-24

H.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)


(FOR

MX

SERIES)

2.

Carry-in by the

Interrupt

Schedule

NO.

9

NO.

10

NO. II

NO.

12

Machine

PLL

PL

L

NO .

8

Mr

0

NO.

7

0

0

PLB

[ci

LB(b|

Circulation

station

Watt

ST

0

NO.

I

Inside

main

machine

PL

PL

PL

L

NO .

6

5:1

NC

NO.

5

NO-

4

NO . 3 NO

2

Setup ST

:

Work

Fig.

5-4

Pallet

Carry-in

-

Interrupt

Schedule

(1) Set PPC

MODE to

CONT.

or ONE

CYCLE on

the

PPC

panel.

(See Fig.

4-1

.)

(2) Set

SCHEDULE

to

IRPT.

(See

Fig.

4-1.)

(3) If

the

pallet

carry-in

screen

is not displayed,

display

the pallet carry-in

screen

by

pressing the

[MENU]

key on

the touch panel screen of the PPC panel.

I'Al.LLT

IN

HUT

CYCLE

PALLET IN P.

No.

PROCESSING

PR

OGHAM

F3OT

0000

PT1

PT 2 ERR

LM

WW

WM Kl

D

Dun

KH

n

m

Fig.

5-5

Pallet

Carry-in

Pallet

Carry-in

Screen

Then

press

a

numeric

key

to enter a

carry-in

pallet

number, and the

entered

pallet

number is

displayed

in

PALLET

IN

P.

No. Press

[Return],

an d

the

processing

order

an d

program

name

of

a

processing

pallet

number are

displayed.

If more than one

program name

is

registered,

the one

registered

first is

displayed. (See

Section

7.)

If the

pallet

number

of

the

pallet in

the

setup

station

is

the same as that carried

out

previously,

pallet

number,

process,

and

program

are

already displayed.



4202-E H-25

H.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)


(FOR

MX

SERIES)

Press the

IN

switch on

the

PPC panel (see

Fig.

4-1), and pallets

in

the

setup

ST are carried to

an empty

ST

(in

the

order

of [a], [b],

and [c ]

to ST with

No.1 in

Fig. 5-4).

If

a

pallet

is

already

set

on

the

waiting ST,

the machine

moves it

to another

empty pallet

and

carries

in

the

specified

pallet

to

the waiting

ST.

When a

pallet

is

carried in in

IRPT mode,

it is

scheduled

as

the

first

processing

order.

If

the

pallet

with the

first

processing

order is processed

at

that

time,

the

carried-in pallet

is

set

to the

second

processing

order.

When

pallets

are

carried

in contiguously in IRPT

mode, the

second

pallet

follows the

pallet

with

the

first

processing

order and

so on,

then carried

in

to an

empty

ST

(in

the order of [a], [b],

[d],

to the ST

with

No.9

in

Fig. 5-4).

After

carrying in

of

a

pallet, the

PPC

panel

screen

automatically changes

to the

pallet carry-out

screen.

(4)

(5)

(6)

ooco

rami

BTCT

PTl

PT2

ALM

ERR

PALLET

JN

AUTO

CYCLE

PALLETOUT

IRPT CYCLE

_

PALLET OUT P.No.

pffiETl

2 P2000

4 P4QOO

6 P6000

(iOOO

ER R

TL PT: ALM

nnn

n

B

D

m

Kina

n

EB DO

PALLET

IN

P

No

PROCESSING

PROGRAM

HOT

1 P1000

3

P3000

5 PS

000

D

DD

IB

B

Efl

Fig.

5-6 Screen Transfer

from


to Pallet

Carry-out Screen



4202-E H-26

H.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)


(FOR

MX

SERIES)

2-1.

Machining

Schedule

in

the Interrupt

Schedule

Mode

on

PPC

Panel

Fo r the

pallet

carried in

in

the

interrupt

mode,

scheduling

method differs

depending

on the

setting

for

optional parameter

(bit) No.

63, bi t

1 .

If

pallets are carried

in, in

the

order

of

pallet

Nos.

6, 7,8,

and

9 while the

setting

for

the bit above

is

“OFF”,

the schedule

of

these pallets is

registered as

No.

1

,

2,

3,

and

4

as shown

in

Fig.

5-7.

After

carrying in pallets

in the interrupt

mode,

return theschedule mode

on

the PPC

panel

to automatic.

If

the mode is

changed

back

to

interrupt

and pallets

are carried

in

again

in

the

interrupt mode,

carrying

in

of

pallet

in the

interrupt

mode

is

possible

for the

pallets

having been carr ied in in

the

interrupt

mode

previously.

If

the PPC

cycle

operation

is executed

with

the

mode

set in the

interrupt mode, machining is

not executed

for the

pallets

carried

in

in

the interrupt

mode. To

execute machining for these

pallets,

return

the

mode to

automatic.

PARAMETER SET

*

MACHINING

SCHEDULE

OF

PALLET

*

SCHEDULE

ATT

0:

WAIT

/

I;

AUTO

PAGE

I

MAC. -SCH. PN O

No. 1

No.

2

No.

3

P0006

P0007

P0008

1

1

1

No .

4

P0009

1

No .

5

No. 6

No.

7

No .

8

No. 9

No .

10

P0001

P0002

P0003

P****

P****

1

1

1

0

0

P:

0

X

Y

Z

ACT POSIT

(WORK)

-551.552 100.000

100.000

A-Mtd

=MV_7[RETURN)

SC H

ITEM

T

ITEM

4-

[EXTENDI

EL SEARCH

OVE ADD

CHC

i

gj i (TT)rrT)rFÿ(TTi(TÿrF~T)rF~Bi

Fig. 5-7

Machining

Schedule of Pallet Screen

1



4202-E

H-27

H.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)


(FOR

MX

SERIES)

If

pallets are carried

in, in

the order of palletNos.

6,

7,

8, and

9 while the

setting for

the bit above is

“ON”,

the

schedule

of these

pallets

is

registered

as

No.

4,

3,

2,

and 1 as shown

in Fig.

5-8.

Differing

from

the state of bit OFF,

machining

can

be continuously executed

even

if

the

mode selection at

the PP C

panel

is

interrupt.

PARAMETER

SET

*

MACHINING

SCHEDULE

OF PALLET

*

SCHEDULE

ATT

0: WAIT

/ I:

AUTO

PACE

I

MAC.

-SCH.

PNO.

No.

1

No. 2

No. 3

P0009

P0008

P0007

1

1

1

No.

4

P0006

1

No. 5

No. 6

No. 7

No.

8

No. 9

No.

10

P0001

P0002

P0003

P****

1

1

1

0

0

0

z

Y

AC T

POSIT

(WORK)

-551 .552 100 .000

100.000

A-Mtd

=MV_7[

RETURN]

SC H

ITEM

T

ITEM 4-

[EXTEND]

OV E

ADD DEL

SEARCH

CHG

nrTinrTirry)rFÿrTTinHnnÿiTiri

Fig.

5-8

Machining

Schedule of Pallet

Screen 2



4202-E H-28

H.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)


(FOR

MX

SERIES)

3. Carring in the

Empty

Pallet

NO.

9

NO .

10

NO .

II

NO.

12

Machine

i

PL

L PL

L

NO. 8

(c|

NO. 7

E3

0

L*|h

Circulation

station

Wail

ST

0

NO .

i

Inside main

machine

Q

PL

L PL

O.

6

Sll

NC

NO.

5 NO .

4

NO .

3 NO.

2

Setup

ST

:

Work

©O©

Fig.

5-9 Pallet Carry-in

Empty

Pallet Carry-in

(1)

Set PPC

MODE

to CONT. or ONE CYCLE on

the

PPC

panel.

(See

Fig. 4-1

.)

(2)

Schedules on the PP C

panel

are

independent

of

AUTO,

WAITING,

and INTERRUPT.

(See

Fig.

4-1.)

If

the

pallet

carry-in screen is

not

displayed,

display

the

pallet carry-in screen by

pressing

the

[MENU]

key

on the

touch panel screen

of the PPC

panel.

(3)

mmii

000

ITI

PT2

PALLITT

IN

IRPT

CYCLE

PALLET IN

P.

No

PROCESSING

PROGRAM

TT&?

ERR

LM

PETTH M l M l

Ml

E DBD

mm

ana

Q

nES

Fig.

5-10

Pallet

Carry-in

Pallet

Carry-in

Screen

Then

press

a

numeric

ke y

to enter a

carry-in

pallet

number,

and

the entered pallet

number is

displayed

in PALLET

IN

P. No.

Press [Return],

and

the

processing

order

and

program name of a

processing

pallet

number are

displayed. If

more

than

one program name

is registered,

the one

registered first

is

displayed.

(See

Section

7.)

If

the pallet number of the pallet in the

setup

station is the same

as

that carried out previously, pallet

number,

process, and

program

are

already

displayed.



4202-E H-29

H.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)


(FOR

MX

SERIES)

(4)

Press the

EMPTY PALLET

switch

on

the PP C panel (see

Fig.

4-1),

and

pallets

in the setup ST

are

carried to

an

empty

ST

(in

the

order

of [a],

[b],

and [c] to

ST with

No.9

in Fig. 5-9).

(5)

Pallets are not

registered

to schedules.

(6)

After carrying in

of

a

pallet, the PP C panel

screen automatically changes

to

the

pallet

carry-out

screen.

PALLET

IN

ALTO CYCLE

PALLET

IN

P

No

PROCESSING

PROGRAM

HCT

cooc

?T l

PT:1

PALLET OU T

IRPT

CYCLE

PALLET OUT

P.

No.

p

wfal

1 P1000

3

P3000

5

P5000

0000

ER R

LM

ERR

ALM

T1

PT2

DDD

DBD

2 P2000

4

P4000

6 P6000

BBD

O

KB

U35

DDD

n KB

CO

Fig. 5-11

Screen Transfer from

Pallet

Carry-in

Screen

to Pallet

Carry-out

Screen



4202-E H-30

H.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)


(FOR

MX

SERIES)

4.

Carry-in While the

PPC is Off

NO .

9

NO .

10

NO.

II

NO .

12

Machine

PL

PL

L PL

NO .

8

-Id-

El

NO .

7

0 0

:

PLBjbi

Ctrculalion

station

wait

ST

0

NO .

1

Inside

main machine

II? PL

PL;

L

NO .

6

t»

~[

NC

NO. 5 NO.

4

NO. 3

NO.

2

Setup

ST

:

Work

DO©

©©•

Fig.

5-12 Pallet Carry-in

Carry-in while the PPC is Off

(1)

Set PPC M ODE to OFF on the PP C

panel.

(See

Fig.

4-1.)

(2)

Schedules

on

the PP C

panel are independent of AUTO, WAITING,

AN D

INTERRUPT.

(See

Fig.

4-1.)

(3) If

the

pallet

carry-in screen

is not

displayed, display

the

pallet

carry-in

screen

by pressing

the

[MENU]

key on

the touch panel screen of the PPC

panel.

PALLET

IN

IKPT CYCLE

PALLET IN P No.

PROCESSING

PROGRAM

0000

FT1 PT2

ERR

LM

non

HDD

M l IB

IBB

Fig. 5-13 Pallet Carry-in


Then

press

a

numeric

ke y

to enter a

carry-in

pallet

number,

and the ente red

pallet

number is

displayed

in PALLET IN P.

N o. P ress

[Return],

While the PP C is

off,

the processing

order

an d

program name of a

processing

pallet

number are not

displayed.

(PROCESSING

is

0 an d

no

PROGRAM

is

displayed.)

If

the

pallet number

of

the

pallet

in

the

setup

station is the

same

as

that carried out

previously,

pallet

number,

process,

and

program

are

already displayed.



4202-E H-31

H.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)


(FOR

MX

SERIES)

(4)

Press the

IN

switch on

the

PPC panel (see

Fig.

4-1), and pallets

in

the

setup

ST are carried to

an empty

ST

(in

the

order

of [a], [b], and

[c ]

to ST with

No.

9

in

Fig.

5-12).

(5)

Pallets are not

registered

to schedules.

(6)

After carrying in

of

a

pallet, the PP C panel

screen automatically changes

to

the

pallet

carry-out

screen.

itTHTW

«nw

ALLET

IN

ALTO CYCLE

PALLET

IN

P

No

PROCESSING

PROGRAM

HCT

cooc

?T l

PT:1

PALLET OU T

IRPT

CYCLE

PALLET OUT

P.

No.

p

wfal

1 P1000

3

P3000

5 PS

000

0000

ER R

LM

ERR

ALM

T1

PT2

DDD

DBD

2 P2000

4

P4000

6 P6000

BBD

O

KB

U35

DDD

n KB

CO

Fig.

5-14

Screen

Transfer

from

Pallet

Carry-in

Screen

to Pallet Carry-out Screen



4202-E H-32

H.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)


(FOR

MX

SERIES)

SECTION 6 CARRYING

OUT

PALLETS

-

This

section describes

how

to

carry

out

processed pallets

from

each

ST

to

the

setup

ST.

-

While the PPC is

on ,

only

processed pallets and pallets carried into with

EMPTY

PALLET

can

be

carried

out.

-

While the PPC is

off,

OUT

is effective for

all

pallets

except for

the on e

in

process.

When scheduled

pallets

are carried

out,

their

processing

order

is

deleted.

-

Carrying-out

of

pallets is

possible in

two methods

inputting

a pallet number or automatic without

inputting

a

pallet

number.

When carrying

out a

specific pallet

to the

setup

station, input

the

pallet

number of the

pallet

to

be

carried

out an d press

the OUT switch on

the

PP C

panel.

On

completion

of

pallet

carrying

out

operation,

the PPC

panel

screen changes

to the

pallet

carry-in

screen

automatically.

To

carry

out a

processed pallet

to the

setup

station,

the

operation

is

possible

by simply pressing

theOUT

switch

on

the PPC panel.

In

this

operation,

the

pallet

having

the

smallest

pallet

number

among

the

processed

pallets

is

automatically

searched.

On completion

of pallet

carrying

out operation,

the

PP C

panel screen changes

to

the

pallet

carry-in

screen automatically.



4202-E H-33

H.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)


(FOR

MX

SERIES)

1

. Carry-out

while

the PPC

is

On

or

Off

NO .

9

NO 10

NO.

II

NO .

12

Machine

PL

PL

L

PL

NO . 8

[ • > -

0

NO.

7

0

0 0

LBib)

Circulation

station

Wan

ST

0

NO

I

Inside

main

machine

PL

I. PI PL

NO .

6

-

[<l

NC

NO

5

NO

4

NO 3 NO .

2

Setup

ST

:

Work

©o©

Fig.

6-1

Pallet

Carry-out

-

PP C

On/Off

(1)

When

the

PPC

is

on , set

the PPC

MODE on

the

PPC

panel

to CONT.

or ONE

CYCLE.

When

the

PPC

is off,

turn

the PPC MODE

on the

PP C

panel

off (See

Fig.

4-1

.)

(2)

Schedules

on

the

PP C

panel

are

independent

of

AUTO, WAITING,

or INTERRUPT.

(See Fig.

4-1.)

(3) If

the

pallet

carry-out

screen is

not

displayed, display

the

pallet

carry-out

screen by pressing the

[MENU]

ke y

on

the touch

panel

screen of

the

PPC

panel.

When

the

PPC

is

on ,

six

processed

pallet

numbers are

displayed.

To

display

more

pallets

or

processed

pallets,

press

the PAGE

key.

When the

PPC

is

off,

processed pallet

numbers are al l

displayed as

0000.

0000

iPTini MIHB

PT l

PT2

ALM ERR

PALLET

OUT

fRPT

CYCLE

PALLET

OU T

P.

No .

F®fl

2 P2000

4

P4000

6

P6000

1

P1000

3

P:JOOO

5

P5000

DDD

IQ

IBH

Fig.

6-2 Pallet Carry-out PP C Carry-out Screen

Then

press

a numeric

key

to

enter

a

carry-out

pallet

number,

and the

entered

pallet

number

is

displayed in PALLET

OUT

P. N o. P re ss

[Return],

If

the

pallet number of the

pallet

in

the setup

station

is

the same

as

that

carried out previously, pallet

number,

process,

and

program

are

already

displayed.



4202-E H-34

H. PP C

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL MC

MULTI

-PLAN

EAPC

(FOR

MX

SERIES)

(4)

Press

the

OUT

switch

on the PP C

panel (see

Fig.

4-1),

and

a

specified

pallet

is

carried

out to

the

setup

ST (in the order

of

[a], [b],

and

[c]

from the ST with No.

9

in Fig. 6-1).

(5)

After

carrying

out of a

pallet,

the PPC

panel

screen


to the

pallet carry-in

screen.

IBTOI

ALLET OU T

IRPT CYCLE

PALLET

OUT

P. No.

2 P2000

4

P4000

6 P6000

PALLET

IN

AUTO

CYCLE

PT1 PT::

PALLET IN

P

No

PROCESSING

PROGRAM

cooo000

ERR

LM

ALM

ERR

T1 PT2

P0EJ

DBD

DDD

PiOOO

3

PilOOO

5

PSOOO

BOD

nm

non

Dm

BO

Fig.

6-3

Screen Transfer

from

Pallet Carry-out Screen to Pallet Carry-in Screen



4202-E H-35

H.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)


(FOR

MX

SERIES)

2.

Automatic Carrying-out of Processed Pallet when Only

Two

Pallets

Are Used

When the

system

uses three or more

pallets,

the

pallet

placed in

the

waiting

station

is

automatically

carried

ou t to

the

setup

station since the

operation

to

change the

pallet

with the

on e

in

other stations

is

necessary.

However,

if

only

two

pallets

are

used, there

are

no

operations

to

change the

pallet

in

the waiting

station

with

the pallet in

other

station,

requiring

an

operator

to execute

pallet

carry-out

operation

each

time the

pallet

in

the

waiting station is

carried

ou t to

the setup

station.

To

facilitate the system operation

when

only

two

pallets

are used,

set

“ON” for


No.

63,

bit 0, which makes the

function

to

automatically

carry ou t

the

processed pallet to

the

setup

station

effective.

-

The

setting

for

optional parameter

(bit)

No .

63,

bit

0

determines whether

or

not this

specification

is

effective

(effective: 1,

ineffective:

0).

Default is “0”

(ineffective).

-

Operation

conditions:

Not

during

pallet

carrying-in

or

carrying-out

operation.

PPC

operation

error

not

displayed.

There

are

no second

and

later

machining

schedule.

There is no

pallet in

the

setup

station.

There is a

processed

pallet

in the

waiting

station.

The machine is not a

pallet

operation

disabled

state.

The

pallet

in

the

waiting

station is

automatically

carried out when

all

of the conditions above are satisfied.

Automatic

pallet

carrying-out

operation

from the

waiting

station is

completed

when the

pallet

is carried

out

to the

setup

station;

the

pallet carry-out

command

output

to the machine is turned off.

-

If there is

a

pallet

in

the

setup station,

the

system

operation stops

even after

the

completion

of

machining

in

the machine and automatic

carrying

ou t from

the

waiting

station

is not executed.

-

If the

next

machining

schedule

already

exists when

the machining starts in the

machine,

no

special

processing is

executed

since

the specification is “the

pallet

in

the

waiting stationis automatically

carried

out

hen the next pallet command

is

output”.

- The last processed

pallet

remains in

the machine

and is not

carried

out

automatically.

In

this

case,

the

operator

should carry

in

a

dummy

pallet into the

waiting

station, executes

M160,

then carries

out

the

pallet.



4202-E

H-36

H.

PP C (PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)

FO R

HORIZONTAL

MC

MULTI-PLANE

APC

(FOR

MX

SERIES)

SECTION

7 ASSIGNING

PPC CYCLE

OPERATION

MACHINING

PROGRAMS

TO

PALLET

NUMBERS

This section assigns pallets

to

PPC

cycle operation

machining

programs.

Once

assigned,

a

registered

machining

program

is

automatically

executed

when a

pallet number is

specified

in

a

schedule.

1.

Assigning

Procedures

Press the

[ITEM

t]

or

[ITEM

J,] key

on the

parameter set

mode

screen on the

NO operation

panel to

display

the screen

shown below.

I

PARAMETER~SET

97/07/15

14:10:00

*

REGISTRATION

PROGRAM OF

PALLET

*

PAGE

WORK SE T POSITION No.

1

2

3

4

5 6

7 8

9

10 11 12

111000000000

000011001001

0000001

10000

000000000110

00000000

0 0 0 0

0 0

000000000

000000000

000000000000

000000000000

X Y

Z

AC T POSIT

(WORK)

-551.552

100.000 100.000

A-Mtd

PS 071

NO.

NO.

PROGRAM

NAME

1 A100

2 BA10

3

CD12

4

IAB31

0 0 0 0

0 0 0

0

0

0 0

0

0 0

5

0

0

HXXXXMXKX

H*

7

»-X K X*'X

X -X X9BBE*

ÿ**ÿ *»*****ÿ**

10

=S AB31

ITEM

ITEM

i

[EXTEM)]

ET

nÿrrrirÿnÿnÿrrÿ

prying

Fig. 7-1

Registration

Program

of

Pallet

Screen

-

In

this

screen,

machining program

names

and

set

positions

of each

pallet on

the

Multi-plane AP C

can be

registered.

- For

pallet

number

up

to

50

pairs

can

be

set.

Pages ca n be

changed

by

pressing

the

PAGE

keys

(0)

©

nd

- Up to

10

pairs

of

machining

program names

can be

registered

for

one pallet .

-

Up

to

12

work

se t

positions can

be specified to

one

machining program.



4202-E H-37

H.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)


(FOR

MX

SERIES)

[Setting

the pallet number]

-

Entry

-

Setting

range

S_

[pallet number] [RETURN]

1 to

9000

Input to clear

al l the

registered

items.

[Setting

the

machining program

name]

-

Entry

S_

[machining

program

name

(set

the

“?????????????”

portion

in

the

“PPC

?????????????.MIN.”)]

[RETURN]

Up

to 10

pairs

of

machining

program names can

be registered

to on e

pallet.

Up

to 13

characters

(0

to

9/A

to

Z/-).

(The

first character must

be an

alphabet (A

to

Z).)

-

Setting range

“5241

program

name’’

Code: None

Cause:

Program

name

setting

was

incorrect.

-

Error

[Setting the work set

position]

SJ

or 0

[Return]

Up

to

12 work

set

positions

can be

specified

to one

machining program.

-

Entry

-

Setting

range

1

orO

Work

set position I Work scl position

2

Work set

position

3

Work set

position

4

Work

A 1

00

Work

None

ork

AI00

Work

A

100

L

Work set position 5

Work

set position

6 Work

set

position

7 Work

scl

position 8

Work BAIO

|

Work CDJ0

ork

BA 10

Work CD10

Work

set

position

9

Work

set position 10

Work

scl

position 1 1

Work set

position

12

Work BA 10

ork

BA

10

Work AB31

Work AB 3

1

Fig. 7-2

Work

Set Position

Diagram



4202-E H-38

H.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)


(FOR

MX

SERIES)

-

If one

machining

program

machines

one

pallet, set as shown below.

PARAMETER

SET

I

97/07/15

14:10:00

*

REGISTRATION

PROGRAM OF PALLET

*

PAGE1

WORK SET POSITION No .

1

2 3

4

5

6 7

8

9

10 11

12

1

00000000000

000000000000

0 0 0

0

0

0 0

0

0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0

0

0

0

0 0 0

0

oooooooooooo

000000000000

oooooooooooo

oooooooooooo

oooooooooooo

P0001

NO.

NO.

PROGRAM

NAME

1

A2356

2

3

0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0

0 0

4

5

6

7

*************

8

?

10

X Y

Z

AC T

POSIT

(WORK

-551.552

100.000

100.000

A-MId

=S

AB31

ITEM

l

[EXTEND]

TEM

t

ET

(TT>(TTirFTirÿr iÿ(T~r)(T'T)(TBi

Fig.

7-3 For One

Pallet,

One

Machining Program -

One

Machining



4202-E H-39

H.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)


(FOR

MX

SERIES)

SECTION 8 EDTING MACHINING

SCHEDULE

Fo r PPC

cycle

operation, pallets

are

scheduled

during

prior

carry-in

operation.

The

operator

can change the

processing

order of

the

pallets

on

the

Machining

schedule of

Pallet screen.

PARAMETER

SE T

I

97/07/15

*

PAGET

14:10:00

*

MACHINING

SCHEDULE

OF

PALLET

SCHEDULE ATT

0:WAIT/1

:AUT0

MAC.-SCH.

PNO.

NO .

1

P0002

P0005

P0004

1

NO .

2

1

NO . 3

1

NO. 4 P00C3

M

NO . 5

NO .

6

TOOT

P0106

P0102

pit

K

M

K

0

0

NO . 7

0

NO .

8

0

NO . 9 0

NO. 10

0

X

V

z

AC T

POSIT(WORK)

-551.552

100.000

100.000

A-Mtd

=S

AB31

SCH.

ITEM

t

[EXTEND]

OVE

AD D

DEL

SEARCH

ITEM

l

HG

Fig.

8-1

Machining


Press the [ITEMf]

or

[ITEM J,]

ke y in

parameter set mode to

display

the above screen.

This

screen is used to edit

machining

schedules of

each pallet

on

the multi-plane AP C

(move,

add, delete,

and schedule attribute

change).

The

processing

order can be

defined

in

the range from No.1 to

No.50.

To

change

the

page,

us e

the

PAGE

keys

(©)

and

(ÿ)

.

Data

on

this

screen can

also

be

registered by carry-in

operation

on

the PPC

panel.

(See

Section

5.)

Data

can

be set

on

this

screen

while the

PPC is on. If

the PPC

is

off, al l

pallet

numbers

are

displayed

as

and schedule attributes are

displayed

as

“0.”

When the PP C is

turned on,

the

screen

returns to the

previous state.

“****”



4202-E H-40

H.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)


(FOR

MX

SERIES)

(1)

Moving Machining Schedules

- The

operator

can move the

processing

order of

machining

schedules.

-

Move the

cursor to

a

line

containing

the

pallet whose

machining

schedule

is

to be

moved,

press

the

[MOVE] function

key.

Enter a required

processing

order

and

press [RETURN], The pallet number

moves

to

the line selected

for

the

new processing

order.

The schedule attribute

also moves accordingly

and the tab le

is

updated.

Moving

procedures

. . .

MV_[processing

order]

[RETURN]

Moving range

1

to

maximum stat ion

number

If

the

pallet

with

processing

order

1

is

in

process

on the

machine,

it cannot

be

moved to

processing

order

1.

If

a pallet

sharply

exceeds the

present

processing

order even if it

does

not

exceeds the

maximum station number, it

is

added after

the

maximum processing

order

set

at

present

and

no

blank

processing orders

are

generated.

“5286

Set condition error

Code

:1

The pallet

at

the

source cursor position

is

not

ready

for

machining.

(The

pallet

number at the source

cursor

position is

not

found.)

:2

Th e

same

pallet number

is

specified

as

the

source and

destination.

Error

:3

Th e

destination

pallet

is not

ready

for

processing.

(The pallet

number

at

the

destination

cursor

position

is

not

found.)

(2)

Adding Machining

Schedules

-

Machining

schedules can be added.

-

Move

the

cursor

to

a

line to which

a

machining

schedule is

to

be added

and

press

the

[ADD]

function

key.

Enter

a new

pallet

number

and

press [RETURN],

The

entered

pallet

number is

added

using

the

schedule attribute of

the

source l ine and the table is

updated.

Adding

procedure

NSJpallet

number]

[RETURN]

Addition

range

1

to maximum station number

Machining

schedules

can

be added

for

only

pallets

registered in

the

pallet

station

number/pallet number table.



4202-E

H-41

H.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)


(FOR

MX

SERIES)

“5286 Set

condition error”

Code

:

1 The

pallet

at the source cursor

position

is not

ready

for

machining.

(The pallet

number at the

source

cursor

position

is not

found.)

:2 The

pallet

number to be added

is

not found.

:3 The

operator

attempted

to

add

a

pallet

number

not

registered

in

the pallet station number/pallet number table.

:4

The

operator attempted to add a pallet number

whose

processing

number

is

already

set.

Error

(3) Searching for Machining

Schedules

-

The operator can search the

processing

order

of machining

schedules and move them

with

the

cursor.

-

Press

the [SEARCH] function and

enter a

processing

order to

be

searched.

The cursor

moves

to

the

line

containing

the entered

processing

order.

Search

procedure

order] [RETURN]

1

to maximum

processing

order

registered

“5286 Set

condition error”

Code

:1 The

pallet

at

the


is not ready

for

machining.

(The pallet

number at the source cursor position is not

found.)

Search

range

Error

(4) Deleting Machining

Schedules

-

Machining schedules

can

be deleted.

-

Move

the

cursor

to a line from which the

machining schedule

is to

be

deleted and

press

the

[DEL]

function.

The l ine selected with the cursor is

deleted

and

the

table

is

updated.

Delete

procedures

____

EL

[RETURN]

Delete

range 1

to maximum

processing

order

registered

If

the

pallet

with

processing

order

1

is

in process

on the

machine,

it

cannot be

deleted.

“5286

Set condition

error”

Code :1

The

pallet

at the source

cursor

position

is

not

ready

for

machining.

(The

pallet

number at

the source cursor

position

is

not

found.)

Error



4202-E

H-42

H.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)


(FOR

MX

SERIES)

(5)

Changing

the Schedule Attribute

- The schedule attribute

can

be selected from wait or automatic. The default is wait operation “0.”

-

Move the

cursor to the

processing

order whose

schedule

attribute is to be

changed

and press

the

[SCH.

CHG]

function.

When the schedule attribute

is “0,”

it

changes

to

“1 ;

and when

“1,”

it

changes

to

“0.”

Change procedures

. .

SCH [RETURN]

Change range

Oor

1

Fo r the

pallet

to be machined

by

wait operation, enter “0.”

Fo r

the pallet to be

machined

by automatic operation,

enter

“1

Changing

SCHEDULE

ATT

from

“0”

(WAIT)

to “1”

(AUTO),

the

processing

order moves after the last

pallet

with

SCHEDULE ATT

of

“1”

(AUTO).

Changing

SCHEDULE

ATT

from

“1”

(AUTO)

to

“0”

(WAIT),

the

processing

order moves

after the

last

pallet

with

SCHEDULE

ATT

of

“0”

(WAIT).

“5286

Set

condition

error

Code :1 The

pallet

at the source

cursor

position

isnot

ready

for

machining.

(The

pallet

number at

the source cursor

position

is not

found.)

Error



4202-E H-43

H.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)


(FOR

MX

SERIES)

SECTION 9 MACHINING

PROGRAM AND

SYSTEM

VARIABLES

1

.

VPLDT [1

]

to

VPLDT [12]/VPPCP

When two or

more

works are

placed

on

the

same

pallet,

the works

must

have

different

work numbers

depending

on the work

set position

on

the pallet

even

if

the works are the same.

This section

explains

howto run

the

system

effectively

for such condit ion.

When

setting

multiple

works

on

the setup

station

(works

may

not be

the same

and

up

to tenkinds of

works

can

be

handled),

set

the

mapping

of the

work set

positions

an d

machiniables VPLDT[1]

to

VPLDT[1

2] and

VPPCP

during machining,

so that the

information

is

available

for

machining programs.

Le t us u se a n

example

below.

[Pallet

number

No .

2]

Work sc i

position

I

Work set

position

2

Work se t position

3

Work

set position

4

Work A 100 Work

A)

00

Work None

ork

A100

Work set position

5

Work set position

6

Work set position 7 Work set posit ion 8

Work

CD

10ork

BA

10

Work

BA

10 Work CD10

Work set position 9

Work

set

position 10

Work

set position

1

1

Work set

position

12

Work

AB31

ork BA

10 Work

AB31

Work BA

10

Fig.

9-1 W ork

Set Position

Diagram

Assumethat there are

12

work set

positions

and the

operator

set

the

works

as

shown

in

the

figure

above.

(U p

to ten

different

kinds

of works

can

be

set.)



4202-E

H-44

H.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)


(FOR

MX

SERIES)

The

operator assigns

work set positions to

machining programs

for a pallet

in

advance.

PARAMETER

SE T

97/07/15

14:10:00

*

REGISTRATION PROGRAM

OF PALLET

*

PAGE1

WORK

SET

POSITION

No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8 9 10

11

12

111000000000

000011001001

0000001

10000

0000000001

1 0

000000000000

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0

0 0 0

000000000000

000000000000

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

000000000000

P0002

NO . PROGRAM

NAME

1

A100

2 BA10

3 CD10

_

,

4

[AB31

PNO.

5

6

8

9

10

X

Y

Z

ACT

POSIT(WORK)

-551.552

100.000

100.000

A-Mtd

=S AB31

[EXTEND]

TEM

ITEM

4

ET

(ÿ~T)

(~F~T1

fF~3l

fF~ÿ fFÿ

fF~6l

fF~7~)

fF~in

Fig.

9-2

Registration Program

of Pallet Screen

When

this

pallet

is carr ied into

the

machine,

the

NC

first selects a

program automatically,

then set

system

variables

as

shown

below.

VPLDT[1]=1

,

VPLDT[4]=0,

VPLDT[7]=0,

VPLDT[10]=0,

VPPCP=$007H

VPLDT[2]=1

,

VPLDT[5]=0,

VPLDT[8]=0,

VPLDT[11]=0,

VPLDT[3]=1

VPLDT[6]=0

VPLDT[9]=0

VPLDT[12]=0

The machining program

checks the value of

VPLDT[1]

to

VPLDT[12]

(1 orO) and

the NC machines

works

while

checking

whether a work with PPCA100.MIN is set

at

each work set position from

1

to

12.

The

machining

program

also

checks hexadecimal data of

VPPCP=$007H

and

the

NC

machines works

while

checking

whether a work with PPCA100.MIN is set

at

each work set position

from

1

to 12

in

the

same

way as VPLDT[1] to VPLDT[12].



4202-E H-45

H.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)


(FOR

MX

SERIES)

The figure below is

an

example

machining

program for

PPCA100.MIN.

(When VPLDT[1] to VPLDT[12] are used)

OAIOO

N001

IF

VPLDT

[

1

J

EQ

0]N002

G15H1

CALL OSUB1

N002 IF

[VPLDT [

2

]

EQ

0]K003

G15H2

CALL

OSUB1

N003

IF

[VPLDT

[3 ]

EQ

0]N004

G15H2

CALL OSUB1

Fig.

9-3

Machining Program

Example

1

Write

the

actual

machining

program

in

OSUB1 and write the main program to check whether

a

work

is set

in

each work set

position

and if the work

is set,

selects its coordinates.

After

PPCA100.MIN

completes,

the NO

automatically

selects

PPCBA10.MIN.

System

variables are

set

as shown

below.

VPLDT[2]=0,

VPLDT[5]=1,

VPLDT[8]=0,

VPLDT[11]=0,

VPLDT[1]=0,

VPLDT[4]=0,

VPLDT[7]=0,

VPLDT[10]=0,

VPPCP=$930H

The

process

after

this

is

the sam e as

for

PPCA100.MIN.

VPLDT[3]=0

VPLDT[6]=1

VPLDT[9]=1

VPLDT[12]=1



4202-E H-46

H.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)


(FOR

MX

SERIES)

2.

VPLNO

-

VPLNO indicates

the number

of

the

pallet

located

on

the machine table

at

present.

-

Use VPLNO to

change

the work coordinate

system

for each

pallet

when the

same

work is

placed

on

multiple pallets

or

a

different

origin

offset

is

used

for

each

pallet.

(Example)

Fo r

machining

works on

pallets 0001

and

0002,

us e work

coordinate

system

11

for the No.1

pallet

and

work

coordinate

system

12

for the

No.2

pallet.

oiooo

N001

IF

(VPLNO

EQ

1]N010

IF

(VPLNO

EQ

2

]

N020

GOTO NEND

N010

G15

HI

1

GOTO N100

N020 G15

H12

GOTO

N100

N100

[actual

machining

process]

NEND M0 2

Fig.

9-4

Machining Program

Example

3



4202-E

H-47

H.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)


(FOR

MX

SERIES)

SECTION 10 SETTING SYSTEM

MAINTENANCE

PARAMETERS

For PPC

cycle

operation,

the

operator

must

first

set

system

maintenance

parameters.

1. Setting

Data

on the

SETUP.

WAITING

ST/MAC.CIR

PNO. SET

Screen

On the SETUP.WAITING

ST/MAC.CIR

PNO. SET screen, waiting station

number,

setup

station position,

in-machine

pallet

number,

and

turntable

pallet

number can be

set.

This

parameter

screen is

used for

setting parameters

which

are necessary

for

adjusting

the

system during

installation.

Therefore,

this

parameter

setting

screen

is not open

to

users.

I

PARAMETER SET

I

97/07/15

14:10:00

*

SETUP/WAITING

STATION

NO.

*

ST-N0.

121

ET UP

ST

I

M/Cl

W A IT IN G S T

1

X

Z

AC T PO S

I

T

(WORK)

-551.552

100.000

100.000

A-Mtd

=S

12

ITEM

t

ITEM

i

[EXTEND]

ET

o

i

) (Fÿrÿ(Tÿ(TT)r r6 i rF-T)rF~r)

Fig.

10-1

Setup/Working Station

Number Screen

Set the number of the station used

as

the

setup

station

in

SE T

UP

ST1

.

Set the number of the station

used

as

the

waiting

stat ion of

the

machine

in

M/C1

WAITING

ST.

Set the number of the MAC-INT

(in-machine

pallet).

Set

the

number of

the

CIR.-ST

(turntable pallet).

[Setting

SETUP

ST

1,

M/C1

WAITING

ST,

M/C1

MAC-INT,

and

CIR.-ST]

An

attempt

was made to se t the

pallet

number assigned

to other stat ions to

the

MAC-INT (in-machine

pallet)

or CIR.-ST

(turntable pallet)

number.

S_

[ST number][RETURN]

1

to maximum

pallet

ST number

-

Entry

-

Setting range



4202-E H-48

H.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)


(FOR

MX

SERIES)

“5286 Se t

condition error”Error

Code

:

None

Reason

: An attempt

was madeto set the same number as the

setup

station

to the

waiting

station.

An

attempt

wa s

made to

set

the

same

number

as

the

waiting

station

to

the setup

station.

An

attempt

was made to set

the

pallet

number

assigned

to other

stations to the

MAC-INT

(in-machine

pallet)

or CIR.-ST

(turntable

pallet)

number.

2.

Setting

Data

on the

[Pallet

Station No.-Pallet

No.

Table

Screen]

PARAMETER SET

J.

97/07/15

14:10:00

*

PALLET

STATION NO .

-PALLET

NO. TABLE

ST-NO.

PAGE

ST-NO.

MS I

1

PNO.

PNO.

P0001

11

POOH

MC-No. PNO.

1 0001

PQ002

P0003

PQ004

P0005

P0006

P0007

P0008

PNONE

PNONE

WS1

12

PNONE

PNONE

PNONE

PNONE

PNONE

PNONE

PNONE

PNONE

PNONE

3

13

4

14

5 15

CIRCULATING

STATION

0010

15

7 17

e

18

9

19

10 20

X

Y

Z

ACT POSIT

(WORK)

-551.552

A-Mtd

100.000

100.000

ITEM

1

[EXTEND]

ET

ITEM

T

(Tji(Tÿ(Tÿ(TÿrFT)frÿfFÿrrr)

Fig.

10-2

Pallet Station No.-Pallet No. Table Screen

This

screen is used

to set

pallet

numbers

for

each

pallet station

on

the multi-plane

APC.

It

displays

pallet

numbers

on

the

stations of the

machine.

It also

displays

the

number

of

pallets placed on the

circulating

station.

The

data

restrictions

follow

the

multi-plane

APC

specification

and

the pallet

number

must not exceed the

maximum

number of

pallet

stations.



4202-E H-49

H.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)


(FOR

MX

SERIES)

(1 )

Setting

the Pallet Number

Setting

procedures

. .

S_

[pa llet number] [RETURN]

Setting range

0 to maximum station number

When

“0”

is

entered,

“None” is

displayed.

“5285 Set condition error”

Code

:1

An

attempt

was made

to

st

a

pallet to

the station

exceeding

the

maximum station

number.

:2

An

attempt

was

made to

register

a

pallet number

already

registered.

Error

(2)

Displaying

the MC

No.

-pallet

Number

Table

The screen

displays

the

pallet

number on the

waiting

station of

the machine.

(3) Displaying

the Number of

the Pallets on the Circulating Station

The screen displays

the

number

of

the

pallets

on

the circulating

station.

(4)

Displaying

the Attribute of the

Waiting

Station Pallets of the Machine

and

the

Setup

Station

Pallets

The screen displays attr ibute

MS1 next to the

waiting station

of the

machine

an d WS1 next to

the

setup

station number set

on

the

[setup

and waiting Station Number

screen]

in 2-1

.

This

allows the

operator

to se e

the

position of the

waiting

station

of the

machine

and the

setup station

at a

glance.

3. Communication Interface

between

the

Touch Panel

and NC

(RS232C Communication

Parameters)

(1 )

Baud Rate:

2400,

4800, 9600,

19200 bps

(2 ) Data

Bit

Length:

7

or 8 bits

(3)

Stop

Bit:

(4) Parity

Bit:

1

or

2

bits

Even, odd,

none

(5)

Flow

Control:

RS/CS

control,

XON/XOFF

control,

none



4202-E H-50

H.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)


(FOR

MX

SERIES)

SECTION 11

CHECKING THE

PPC

SYSTEM

CONDITION

The

screen

below

is

used

to

check the PPC

system

condition.

I

AUTO

OPERATION

I

97/07/15

14:10:00

PP C

SYSTEM CONDITIONHECK DATA

PAGE

24

ST-NO.

MAC-ST

CIR-ST

NO .

1

(WAIT)

PNO.

MAC.

-SCH

P0006

P0007

P0002

P0003

P0005

P0004

P0008

P0001

p*#**

P0106

P0102

P0103

M

0

1

NO. 2 4

NO .

3 2

3

O.

4

0

O. 5

NO . 6

5

NO .

7

NO.

8

6

NO .

9

F

D

O. 10

BLOCK

ROGRAM

ACTUAL

PART

SELECT| POSIT.

I

PROGRAM

CHECK

[EXTEND]

EARCH

]

ATC/APC

ATA DATA

nrrifÿinrrTi[TTÿrFir)PHnrrT)iTin

Fig.

11-1

PPC

System

Condition

Screen

Display

the above

screen

from the check

screen

in each

operation

mode

(automatic, MDI,

or

manual).

The

screen lists pallet numbers an d

processing

orders of the machine

station, circulating

station,

waiting

station,

and

other

stations.

Processing

orders:

Empty

pallet

Processing

order

Processing

completed

Processing

No

pallet

Use the

(SB)

or

([g)

PAGE

key to

display the

next

page.

Note that the lines

for

the

machine station

and

circulating

station

are

fixed.

0

1

to

F

M



4202-E H-52

H.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)


(FOR

MX

SERIES)

SECTION 13

ERRORS

DISPLAYED

ON

THE PPC

PANEL

If

the CLEAR

ke y

[C]

is pressed after

the

occurrence

of

an

alarm,

caused

by

the

operation

at

the PPC

panel,

the PPC is reset.

1.

Error at Carry-in

Operation

If the

operator

makes a mistake

during

carry-in

using

the touch panel, the

errors

listed

below may

occur.

These

errors

are

displayed

on the touch

panel.

Error

Number

Description

-

The specified pallet number

is

not

registered

on the

[Registration Program

of

Pallet] screen.

-

An

attempt

was

made to

perform carry-in

operation

on

a

screen

other than

the

carry-in

screen.

72

-

The specified pallet number is not

registered

on

the [Pallet station No./pallet

number

table]

screen.

-

The

specified

pallet

is

not found on

the

circulating

station.

-

The

specified pallet

exists on the machine

station.

80

-

The

machining program

name is not

registered

for

the

specified pallet

on the


of

Pallet]

screen.

81

2.

Errors

at

Carry-out Operation

If

the operator makes amistake

during

carry-out

using

the

touch panel. These

errors are

displayed

on

the

touch

panel.

Error Number

Description

72

-

The

specified pallet

number is

not registered on

the

[Registration Program of

Pallet] screen.

-

An

attempt was

made to perform carry-in

operation on

a

screen

other than

the pallet carry-in

screen.

80

-

The

specified pallet

number

is

not

registered

on the

[Pallet

Station

No./Pallet

No.Table]

screen.

-

The

pallet with the

specified pallet

number is not found

on

the

circulating

station.

-

The specified pallet exists on the machine

station.

-

The specified pallet is

ready

for

machining.

3



4202-E H-53

H.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)


(FOR

MX

SERIES)

3. Other

Errors

Error Number

Description

-

During the

execut ion of

carry-in

or

carry-out

operation,

the

pallet

number of

the pallet being carried

in

or

out

is changed

or

deleted on

the [Registration

Program of

Pallet] screen.

-

During the

execution of

machining,

the

pallet

number of

the objective

pallet

is

changed

or

deleted on the


of

Pallet] screen.

99



4202-E

H-54

H.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)


(FOR

MX

SERIES)

SECTION

14

GENERATED ALARMS

2374

No

pallet

program

In

the

pallet pool

line

control

(PPC),

an

error

has

occurred

during

selection of the

pallet

change program

(09999).

[Code]

1) X:

1->

The automatic

operation

mode

is

not selected.

2->

The command

buffer is not empty.

3->

An

error

occurred when

reading

the

main

program by

PD O

task.

2)

XYZZAABB:

X

=

1

>

Automatic

selection

alarm

BB:

bitO->The specified

schedule

program

file is not found.

bit1->The

specified

main

program

file

is

not found.

bit2->The

specified

subprogram

file is not

found.

bit3->The specified

program

is not found.

bit4->The

specified

subprogram

is not

found.

bit5->M02

or M03 is not

designated

before

the

end of

main program.

bit6->RTS

is

not

designated

before the end of

subprogram.

bit7->The

program is

too

large

to be

stored in the program

buffer.

AA :

bitO->The

number of

sequence names

in

the main program has exceeded 31.

bit1—

>A

sequence name consists of more than 5

characters including

N.

bit2 >The

CALL

statement

is not

followed by

a

subprogram

name.

bit3

>

A

subprogram

name

consists

of

more

than

5

characters

including

0.

bit4->The

program

name of G or

M

code

macro

ha s not been defined.

bit5->The number

of

subprograms

to be called has exceeded 63.

bit6ÿ>The

program has

a b lock o f more

than 156 characters.

bit7 >The

sum

of main file name

and extended

file

name has

exceeded 20

characters.

ZZ :

bitO->The

specified

main file

name

and extended file

name start

with numerals.

The device

name

is

specified

with more

than

3

letters or a colon is omitted

after

the device

name.

bit1

bit2->The

specified program name does not begin

with O.

bit3->The

specified program name contains non-alphanumeric characters.

bit4->The

program

name

is

specified with

more

than

5

characters

including

0.

bit5->More

than

16 options

are

specified.

bit6->The flag

of multivolume file

is

not included within a main

file

name of 8

characters.

bit7->The

program

selection

request

signal

is

designated during

execution of schedule

program.

Y

=

bitO->The

program selection

request

command is

designated during execution

of the main

program.

bit1->

Program selection

is

attempted

in an

invalid mode.

bit2->The

serial

number of

the

multi volume

file

has exceeded

99 .

bit3->

A

floppy is

designated

as

a device name.

X

=

2

Memory

defect

The

specified file

name

contains

*

or

?.



I.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL

MC MULTI-STATION

APC

(FOR

MC

SERIES)



4202-

E

1-1

-A1

I. PPC (PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)

FOR

HORIZONTAL MC MULTI-STATION AP C

(FOR

MC

SERIES)

SECTION

1

PREFACE

(1)

The

pallet pool

described in this

manual

consists

of the

multi-pallet

magazine

and the

setup

station where

workpieces

are

mounted onto and removed

from the

pallet.

(2)

The

pallet

pool line

control

(PPC)

operation panel

is installed

at

the

setup

station.

(3)

In this

system,

the

machining

sequence

is

determined by

the order the

workpieces

are mounted

onto

the

pallets

by

the

operator;

the

pallets

are

sequentially loaded

to the

machining

center

and

it

can

cut

workpieces

in succession

with

virtually

no

machine

stoppage

time.

(4)

Moreover,

the

machining sequence can be changed

fo r

workpieces

which

require

cutting

urgently

(urgent

workpiece).

(5)

This

example

is for a

12-pallet

magazine

with a

single

setup

station.

Machining

center

table

l

O

Pallet

pool

line

operation

panel

Setup station

0

:

represents

pallets.

Q

:

represents

carriers

without

pallets.



4202-E

I-2-A1

I. PPC (PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)

FOR

HORIZONTAL MC MULTI-STATION AP C

(FOR

MC

SERIES)

(a)

Each

carrier

is

assigned

with

unique number

(1

to

12

in

the

case of

1

2-pallet

pallet

magazine). The

pallets

also should be assigned

unique

numbers. Since the numbers

assigned

to

the

pallets

are

not

recognized by

the

system,

an

operator

should

judge

them.

The

operator

should also judge whether or not a

workpiece

is mounted on the

pallet

and

input

the

corresponding

data to the NC

through

the

PC C

(pallet

pool

line

control)

operation

panel.

(b)

Rotation of

the

pallet

unloaded to

the

setup

station is

carried

out

manually by the

operator.

However,

accurate detection

of the

pallet

position

at

the

setup

station is carried

out

by

limit

switches.

(c)

When

the

pallet

pool

l ine control is turned ON

(hereinafter

referred to as PPC

ON),

loading/unloading

of the

pallet

to and

from

the

machining

center

table is

determined

automatically by

the NC. That

is,

the order

in

which pallets

with

uncut

workpieces mounted on

them have been

loaded to the pallet

magazine is

stored

in

the NC

memory,

an d

the pallet is

selected

according

to that

order

for

cutting the

workpieces.

When

there

are

workpieces

that

require

cutting

urgently, the

operator

can

change

the

machining

sequence

data

stored in

the NC

memory

as

required.

When the PPC is ON, M60

an d

M101

-

M112

commands are

ignored by

the NC .

(d)

When

the

PPC is

turned OFF

(hereinafter

referred to

as

PP C

OFF),

loading/unloading

of the

pallets

to

an d

from the

machining

center table is

carried

ou t

according

to the commands

in

the

part

program

stored on

the NC tape.

That

is, loading/unloading

of the

pallets

to

an d from the

machining

center table

is carried out

by

conventional

M60

and

M101

-

M112

commands.



4202-E I-3-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL

MC MULTI-STATION APC

(FOR

MC

SERIES)

SECTION 2 PPC

CYCLE

OPERATION

PROCEDURES

Fo r

executing

PPC

cycle

operation on

the

system,

fol low the

procedures

shown below.

(1)

Create the

PPC

cycle

operation

machining program.

(Section 3.)

1

(2)

Assign

PP C

cycle

operation

machining

programs

to pallet

numbers.

(Section

7.)

I

(3)

Carry

in

and out

pallets

to and from each ST.

(Section

5

and 6.)

I

(4)

Edit

machining

schedules.

(Section

8.)

I

Start



4202-E

I-4-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL


(FOR

MC

SERIES)

SECTION 3 CREATING

THE

MACHINING

PROGRAM

FOR PPC

CYCLE

OPERATION

For PPC

cycle

operation,

the

user

must create two

kinds

of

dedicated

machining

programs.

-

Pallet

exchange machining

program

-

PPC

cycle

operation

machining

program

1. Creating

the Pallet

Exchange

Machining

Program

Create the

circulation

program

for

the

2-plane

circulating

APC on

the

machine

as

shown

below and

store

it

into

MD1:.

Filename: PPC9999.MIN

Contents:

0????

where

????

indicates

any

name.

2-plane

circulating

AP C

circulation

instruction

Program

end instruction

M160

M02

2.

Creating

the

PPC Cycle

Operation

Machining

Program

Create

the

PP C

cycle

operation machining program

as

shown

below

and

store it

into

MD1 :.

File

name:

PPC?????????????.

MIN

(?...

indicate

an y name.)

where ????

indicates

any

name.

ontents:

O????

[Process]

M02

Program end

instruction



4202-E I-5-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE POOL

LINE

CONTROL)

FOR

HORIZONTAL

MC

MULTI-STATION

AP C

(FOR

MC

SERIES)

SECTION

4 PPC PANEL OPERATION

The figure

below

shows

the PP C

panel. It

consists of

various switches

and

the

LCD

touch

panel.

pun

me

PALLET

IN

fePT

cVcLfe

PALLET

INP

No

PROCESSING

PROGRAM

PPC123456.MN

ERR

123.4

*ri

re t

P0001

1

Q

D

ns

WAITING SCHEDULE

PP C MODE

STOP

|

—

-

—

SCHEDULE

o

CONT

ONE

CYCLE

OFF

UTO

INTERRUFT

WAITING

cr*

EMPTY

PALLET

PPC CYCLE

START

N

o

DOOR

INTERLOCK

:

Select

Switch

O

:

Push

Switch

•

:

Emergency Stop

Switch

O

:

Lamp

O

RESTART EMG.

STOP

UT

o

Fig.

1-2

PP C

Panel



4202-E I-6-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE POOL

LINE

CONTROL)

FOR

HORIZONTAL

MC

MULTI-STATION

AP C

(FOR

MC

SERIES)

1. Touch

Panel

1-1.

Status

transition

using

the

MENU and PAGE

Keys

on

the

Touch Panel

Use the M ENU

key

to switch the mode between

pallet

carry-in, pallet carry-out,

machining

schedule

display,

and the

PAGE key

to

switch

the

page.

\n:\i

ALLET

IN

1RPT

CYCLE

PALLET

IN P

No

PROCESSING

PROGRAM

PPC1234S6

.MIN

0000

ALM ERR

T1

PT2

P0001

Cn

|MENU]

D

n

D

w i

ra

vm

0

IMENUI-

PAGE

I

MEM

I

MEM

ALLET

OUT

IRPT

CYCLE

PALLET

OUT P. No

P000I

0000

PALLET

OUT

IRPT

CYCLE

PALLET

OUT

P

No

P0001

8

P2000

10 P 4000

12

P6Q00

0000

ALM

ER R

ALM

ER R

T1

PT2

PT1

PT2

[PAGE1

1 P1000

3

P3000

2

P2000

4

P4000

7

P1000

9

P3000

O

KB EH

D D E S

P6000

11

PS00O

P5000

$

(MENU)

E

. SCHEDULE

IRPT

CYCLE

MAC

PT

1

P7000

4

P9000

7

P1100

IHCKlMKM

P

SCHEDULE

IRPT CYCLE

MAC

PT

p\<;

i:

I

MI:\I

000

PT1 PT2

MAC

PT

0000

ALM

ERR

MAC.

PT

ALM

ERR

MAC PT

PT 1 PT2

MAC PT

[PAGE

2

P8000

5

P1000

3 P100O

6

P2000

1

P7000

2

P8000

5

P1000

3 P1000

4

P9000

6

P2000

9

P5000PI

200

9 PS

300 7 PU0D

8 P I 200

0

|MENU|- -

as

RROR

SETUP STATIONCYCLE

00

00

MANUAL

PALLET

INDEX

PALLET

[MENU]

O

CYCLE COUNTER

0000

mm

Fig.

1-3

Status

Transition

on

the Touch

Panel



4202-E

I-7-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL


(FOR

MC

SERIES)

(a) When the PPC power is turned off

The pallet

carry-in screen

and

carry-out

screen

are

displayed.

(b) When the PPC power is

turned

on

The

pallet

carry-in

screen, pallet

carry-out

screen,

and

machining

schedule screen are

displayed.

(c)

When

bit

5 of

the

NC

optional parameter

bi t

No. 59

is

ON

The pallet

carry-in screen, pallet

carry-out

screen, and machining

schedule

screen

as

well

as

the

manual

operation

screen

are

displayed.

1-2. Pallet

Carry-in Screen

ALM

ERJt

PALLET

IN

A1

D1

D2

D3 D-1

PALLET

IN

P. No

P

B2

PROCESSING

PROGRAM

Cl

PALLET

IN

KPT

CYCLE

PALLET

IN

P.

NO .

POOC

1

PROCESSING

PROGRAM

PPC1234S6

MIM

ERR

i2 3-1

PT1 PT2

DS

D6

l

nun

El

E2

E3

E4 E5 E6

E-

E8 B9

Ea

Eb Ec

FO

HDD

El IB EH

A2

Fig.

1-4

Touch

Panel Screen

Configuration

-

Pallet

Carry-in

Screen

Table

1-1 Function

List

2

of the

Pallet

Carry-in

Screen

Item

Item Name Function

Status

indications

D1

Schedule

mode

status

The

status

changes

between

AUTO,

IRPT,

an d WAIT depending

on

the mode selected

with

the

AUTO/IRPT/WAIT

schedule select

rotary

switch.

D2

APC

cycling

status

Displayed in

reverse

video

during

APC

operation.

D3

Setup

station

proper

position

status

(PT1/PT2)

Displayed in

reverse

video when

the

pallet

carried out to the

setup

ST

is

at a posit ion from which

the

pallet

can be carried

in.

When the

setup ST is

1:

PT 1 is displayed

in

reverse

video.

Wp ST is at

a

position

from

which the

pallet

can be

carried

in.

When

the

setup

ST

is 1:

PT 1

is

displayed

in reverse

video.

When

the

setup

ST

is 2: PT 1 an d

PT2

is

displayed in

reverse

video.

D4

NC

alarm status

Displayed

in reverse video when an

NC

alarm is

generated.

5

D6

Set error status

Displayed

in reverse video when a set error is

generated

on the

touch

panel

or

an

error

is

generated

on the EC. The alarm can

be

cleared

with

the clear

key.



4202-E I-8-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL


(FOR

MC

SERIES)

Table

1-2

Function List

2

of the Pallet Carry-in

Screen


Input

keys


to the

pallet carry-out

screen.

0

to 9,

Clear,

and

Return

keys

E1 Enters and

decides the

numeric value

indicating

the

pallet

number

to

carry-in

pallets.

The

Clear

key clears the

value to

“0000.”

to

Ec

Indications

Displays an


if an


occurs

on the PPC.

A1

Alarm

and error

comment

A2

Program

name

Displays

the

program

name of a

pallet

when a

pallet

number is

entered from the ten-key pa d

when

a

pallet

is carried in

from

the

setup

ST.

Program

name

(9

characters or

less):

PPC??????.

MIN

Program

name

(13

characters or

less):

PPC?????????

(MIN omitted)

Program name

(16

characters or

less):

????????????? (PPC/.MIN

omitted)

Only up

to 13 characters

can

be

displayed.

The

program name

is

not

displayed

when the PP C is off.

B1

Alarm and error

number

Displays the code of

an

error when

an


occurs

on the PPC.

NC alarm:

4

digits,

set

error:

2 digits

Carry-in

pallet

number

Displays the

pallet

number

entered from the ten-key

pad

when

a

pallet

is carried

in

from the

setup

ST .

B2

Displays

the processing order

of

a

pallet

after

a

pallet number is

entered

from the

ten-key

pad

when

a

pallet

is carr ied in

from the

setup

ST.

A

value of 0

is displayed

when the PP C

is

off.

B3 Processing

order



4202-E I-9-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL


(FOR

MC

SERIES)

1-3.

Pallet

Carry-out

Screen

ERR1234

njaasnsHi

m

m

ALM

ERR:

C2 C l

D5 D6

El

E2

£3

E4

E5 E6

£7

EB

£9

Ea Eb Ec

A1

31

D2

D3

D4

PALLET

OUT

P

No P

B4

FI

P

Fa

F2 P

Pb

F3

P FC

F4 P

Fd

F4

P

Fe F$

?

Ft

PA1J.ET OUT

ALLET OUT

1KFT CYCCH

PALLET OUT

P.

No

P0001

2

P2000

4 P4C00

6

P6030

D1

1

P10D0

3

PlOOO

5

P5000

DDD

IB

rm

Fig.

1-5

Touch Panel Screen

Configuration

Pallet

Carry-out

Screen

Table

1-3

Function List

1

of

the Pallet

Carry-out

Screen

Item Item Name

Function

Status

indications

Schedule mode status The status

changes

between AUTO,

IRPT,

and WAIT

depending

on

the mode selected with the

AUTO/I

RPT/WAIT

schedule select

rotary

switch.

D1

D2 APC

cycling

status


video

during

APC

operation.

D3

Setup

station

proper

position

status

(PT1/PT2)

Displayed

in

reverse

video when

the

pallet

carried

in

to

the setup

ST

is

at a

position

from

which the pallet

can

be carried out.

When

the

setup

ST is 1

:

PT1

is


video.

When

the setup ST is

2:

PT 2 is displayed

in

reverse

video.

D4

D5 NC

alarm status

Displayed

in

reverse video when an

NC

alarm is

generated.

Se t error status6

Displayed in

reverse

video when

a set error is

generated on

the

touch

panel

or

an

error is

generated

on

the EC. The alarm

can be

cleared

with

the Clear

key.



4202-E I-10-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL


(FOR

MC

SERIES)

Table

1-4

Function List

2

of

the



Input

keys


to

the

machining

schedule

display

screen.

C2 PAGE

key

Switches

the

next page o f

the

setup

SE T

pallet carry-out

screen.

After all

processed pallet

numbers are

displayed,

the screen

returns to

page

1

.

E1

0

to

9,

Clear,

and

Return

keys

Enters

and

decides

the

numeric

value

indicating

the

pallet

number

to

carry

out

pallets.

The Clear

key

clears

the

value to “0000”.

The

Clear

ke y clears

the value to

“0000.”

to

Ec

Indications

A1 Alarm

and

error

comment

Displays

an


if an NC

alarm

or a

set

error

occurs on

the PPC.

B1

Alarm

and error

number

Displays

the code of

an

erro r when an NC

alarm

or a set error

occurs

on

the PPC.

NC alarm:

4 digits,

set error:

2 digits

B4

Carry-out pallet

number

Displays the

pallet

number

entered

from

the ten-key pa d

when a

pallet

is carried out to

the setup ST.

F1

Processed

pallet

display

order

Displays

the

display

order of all

processed

pallet numbers as well

as

the

pallet

number. The number of

pairs

displayed

is the

same

as

of

the

number of

processed pallets.

A

value of 0

is displayed

when the

PP C is off.

to

F6

Processed

pallet

number

Displays

al l

processed pallet

numbers

in

order of

process

completion.

6

pairs

can be

displayed in

one

page.

(the

maximum

number

is

50

pallets.)

The number of

pages

varies

depending on

the

processed

pallet

number.

Processed

pallet

number:

up

to 6

. . .

Processed

pallet

number:

7

to

12

.. .

Processed

pallet

number:

13

to

1

8

Processed

pallet

number:

1

9

to

24

0000

is

displayed


Fa

to

Ff

1-page

indication

2-page

indication

3-page

indication

4-page

indication



4202-E

I-12-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL


(FOR

MC

SERIES)

Table

1-6

Function List

2

of the

Machining

Schedule

Display

Screen


Input

keys


to

the manual

operation

screen.

C2 PAGE

key

Switches to the next page of the

machining

schedule display

screen.

After al l

processed

pallet

numbers are

displayed,

the

screen

returns to the first

page.

Indications

A1

Alarm

and

error

comment

Displays an


if an NC

alarm

or a

set

error

occurs on

the PPC.

B1

Alarm and

error

number

Displays the code

of an error

when

an

NC alarm or a set

error

occurs

on

the

PPC.

NC

alarm:

4

digits,

set

error:

2

digits

B4

Carry-out pallet

number

Displays the pallet

number

entered

from

the ten-key pa d

when

a

pallet

is carried

out

to

the setup ST.

G1 Displays

the

processing

order

of

ready

pallet

numbers as well as

pallet

numbers.

The number of p[airs

displayed

is the same

as

the

number

of

ready

pallets.

A

value of

0

is displayed


Ready

number

to

G9

Ga

Displays the processing

order

and

number of

ready

pallet

in the

NC

machining

schedule

in

a

list

table.

9

pairs

ca n be

displayed in

one

page.

(the

maximum number is

50

pallets.)

The number

of

pages

varies

depending

on

the ready pallet

number.

Pallet

number:

up

to

9

.

Pallet number:

10

to

18

Pallet number: 1

9

to

24

Ready

pallet

number

to

Gi

1-page

indication

2-page

indication

3-page

indication



4202-E I-13-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE POOL

LINE

CONTROL)

FOR

HORIZONTAL

MC

MULTI-STATION

AP C

(FOR

MC

SERIES)

1-5.

Manual

Operation Screen

This

screen is

display 6. FEED

MODE

SEIKO

u,

MANUAL

AXIS

SEL

Al til

c: ci

RR

1234

FEED

MODE

MANUAL

ALM

ER R

FELD MODE

D5 D6

XIS

SEL.

M

I.K

i\v.

X2

X5

X6

X7

I

l

II

OT.

X3

X4

HIFTER

SHIFTER

Xd

VERRIDE

Xc

IIV.

I RET.

VERRIDE

xf

8 X9 Xb

d

>.e

OWN

M)

J.

l

PAGE)

key

MANUAL

ERR

12

34

MANUAL

B

1

C2

Cl

l

ALM ERR

DS

S

£1 E2 E35

SEL

ST

No S

T

FASTEN

/

UNFASTEN

SEL. ST No

S T

0

0

0 I

FASTEN

/

UNFASTEN

E4 E5

EG

Hh

E7

Eg

E9

g

IM.

I

’CIS.

nnn

Ea Eb Ec

J-

[PAGE]

key

ER

R

1

2 3 4

r\<;i;

C2 Cl

ANUAL

MANUAL

Al

R2

ALM ERR

D5 D6

WSS2 PIN

WSSI

PI N

Hi Hj

SHIFTER

I

He

Hd

WSS2 PIN

MAT PINSSI PIN

M/C

PIN

Hk HI Hm

Hn

n

on

M/C

PT

/C

PTHIFTER

HO

HP

l> \ .

I

RET.

Fig.

1-7

Touch Panel

Screen

Configuration

Manual

Operation Screen



4202-E

I-14-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL


(FOR

MC

SERIES)

Table

1-7

Function List 1 of the Manual Operation

Screen


Status

indications

A1

Alarm/error

comment

Displays

the

alarm/error

comment

if NC error

or

PPC

setting

error

occurs.

A2

Alarm/error

No. Displays the

alarm/error

code

if

NC

error

or PP C setting

error

occurs.

Input keys

B1

Menu

key

Used to switch the

display

screen to the pallet load screen.

C1 Pallet Index “CW” Used to rotate the pallet magazine in the

forward

direction.

C2 Pallet Index “CCW” Used to rotate the

pallet

magazine in

the reverse direction.

D1

Pallet

“IN”

Used

to

load a pallet

from

the

loading

station.

D2

Pallet

“OUT” Used

to

unload

a

pallet

to

the

loading

station.

E1

Cycle Counter

Unloading:

0to4

Loading:

AtoE

F1 ILK

INU.

ke y

Disables interlocks.



4202-E I-15-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL


(FOR

MC

SERIES)

2.

PPC Mode

Switch

Three

PPC modes

are

available:

continuous,

one

cycle,

and

off. This

section describes these PPC

modes.

Continuous

Used to run the machine

continuously according

to

the

PPC schedule.

Used to

process

one

pallet

only

of a PPC schedule.

Used

to disable PPC schedules.

One

cycle

Off

-

If

the

operation

mode is

changed

to PPC ON

(continuous/one cycle)

or PPC OFF

by

the PP C MODE

switch on the PP C

panel, both the

PPC side

and NC

side are reset.

3. Schedule Switch

The PPC

schedule

registration function

provides three

types of

schedules: automatic,

waiting,

and

interrupt. When pallets are carried

in,

the operator can

select either of these

types

with

this

schedule

switch to

register

various schedules for carried-in

pallets.

3-1

.

Automatic Schedule

Automatic

schedule

is normal

schedule.

At

pallet

carry-in, set

this

switch

to “Automatic” at

pallet

to

carry

in a

pallet,

and

the

pallet

is

added

to

the

pallet

registered

last

by

automatic schedule.

Set

the

PPC mode switch to “CONT.” or “One

cycle”

then

press

the “PPC CYCLE START

switch,

and the

machine

processes

pallets

according

to a

registered

schedule.

3-2.

Waiting

Schedule

Waiting

schedule

is

used to

pallets

ready

for

processing

on the

pallet

station but

process

them later.

Set this switch to “WAITING” when

carrying in

a

pallet,

the

pallet

is

added to the

one

registered

last

by

waiting

schedule.

If

it

takes much time to

process

them and the operator

wants

to

execute

processing

at

night,

the operator

prepares pallets

on

the ST for processing and

registers

them

by

the

waiting

schedule

in advance. The

operator

sets the PPC mode switch to “CONT.”

and

presses the PPC

CYCLE

START

switch, and

the

machine

processes

those pallets

after all

pallets registered in the

automatic schedule

complete.



4202-E I-16-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL


(FOR

MC

SERIES)

3-3.

Interrupt

Schedule

Interrupt schedule is

used to interrupt any

registered

schedule for

scheduling

when urgent processing is

required.

Set this

switch

to

“INTERRUPT when

carring in

a pallet, and the machine

registers it

as

the

first

one

registered by

the automatic

schedule,

unless

the

pallet

with

processing

order

1

is

not

processed on

the

machine

at

that

time.

If

pallets are carried in contiguously

by

the

interrupt

schedule,

the machine

stores the

pallet

numbers

carried

with

INTERRUPT

and additionally registers them sequential ly. I f

the

operator

once set the switch

to a posit ion other than

INTERRUPT

then

returns

to

INTERRUPT,

a

pallet

is also

interrupted

to the f irst

on e

registered by the

automatic

schedule.

Once

registered,

pallets

are

processed in

the same

way as

pallets

registered by the

automatic

schedule.

3-4.

WAITING SCHEDULE STOP

Switch

When the

operator

sets

this switch

to ON

during continuous

operation

in

PPC

continous

mode,

the

machine

stops

after

processing

the

pallets

in

the

automatic

schedule

(pallets

with schedule attribute

[1]).

While this switch is

OFF,

the machine starts processing the

pallets

in the waiting schedule

(pallets

with

schedule

attribute [0])

after

the

automatic

schedule

completes.

While

this

switch

is

ON,

the

WAITING

SCHEDULE

STOP lamp

lights.

4.

EMPTY PALLET Carry-in

Switch

Press

this

switch to carry

in

pallets to the pallet station without registering

them

to

the

PP C schedule.

5.

IN Switch

Press this switch to

register

in

pallets

to a PPC

schedule,

then

carriy

in them from the

setup

station to the

pallet

station.

6.

OUT Switch

Press this switch to carry

out

processed pallets

from the

pallet

station to the

setup

station.

7.

PPC

CYCLE

START

Switch/CYCLE

START

Switch

Th is switch is used

to

automatically

select

a

registered machining program and

start

NC according

to a

PPC schedule.



4202-E

I-17-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL


(FOR

MC

SERIES)

7-1 .

PPC CYCLE

START

Switch on the

PPC

Panel and

the

CYCLE

START

Switch on

the

Machine

Operation

Panel

in

the PPC

ON

(CONT,

ONE

CYCLE)

State

Table 1-8

In

the PPC ON

(CONT,

ONE

CYCLE)

State

Program

Start during

Previous

Program

Selection

PPC

Operation

Start

Cycle Start

after Slide

Cycle

Start

during Single

Block

Stop

Cycle

Start

after

MOO/M0

1old

PC

CYCLE

START

O

X

X

X X

CYCLE

START

O

o

o

x

O:

Can be used

x

: Cannot be used

-

PPC

operation (continuous,

one

cycle)

is

possible only by

pressing

the PP C CYCLE

START

switch.

-

If the

CYCLE

START

switch

is

pressed,

the

following

alarm occurs.

4282

PPC cycle

can’t

start

-

Once the PP C

operation

(continuous, one cycle)

ha s

started,

restart after slide hold

by

the

pressing

of

the SLIDE HOLD

switch, by the

execution of the

single

block function or

M00/M01

command is

possible

only by

using

the CYCLE

START switch. Restart

after

NC

reset is

also possible

by using

the

CYCLE

START switch.

- The PPC

CYCLE START

switch is

inoperative and ignored

if

itis

pressed. Alarm does not occur

even if

it

is

pressed.

- Since

the selection

of

a

machining

program

is

managed

by the

PP C function,

the

program

having

been

selected

at

the time

the PPC is

switched

off cannot be selected.

-

If the

NC is reset or NC mode is

reset,

PP C is

not

reset

although

the execution of NC

program stops.



4202-E I-18-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL


(FOR

MC

SERIES)

7-2.

PPC CYCLE

START

Switch on the

PPC

Panel and

the

CYCLE

START

Switch on

the

Machine

Operation

Panel

in

the PPC OFF

State

Table

1

-9

In

the PPC OFF Sta te

Program

Start during

Previous

Program

Selection

PPC

Operation

Start

Cycle Start

after

Slide

Cycle

Start

during Single

Block

Stop

Cycle

Start

after

MOO/M0

1

old

PC CYCLE

START

X

X

X

X X

CYCLE

START

O O o o

O:

Can be used

x

:

Cannot be used

-

In the

P PC O FF

state,

normal NC

operation is

executed

since the PPC function is shut off.

-

The

PPC

CYCLE

START switch is

inoperative

and

ignored

if it is

pressed.

Alarm does not occur

even if

it

is pressed.

-

After

the

slide

hold (SLIDE HOLD switch,

single

block

function,

M00/M01

command) or

NC

reset,

operation

can

be

restarted

by

pressing

the

CYCLE START switch.

-

Selection of

a machining program is

made as

in normalNC

operation; the

program selected previously

is

selected.

8.

EMG.

STOP

Switch

This switch is

used

to

stop the

machine

at

emergency.

9.

RESTART

Switch

This switch is

used when the

AP C

is

paused.



4202-E I-19-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL


(FOR

MC

SERIES)

SECTION 5 CARRYING

IN

PALLETS

-

Fo r

PP C cycle

operation,

the

operator

must

first

set a

workpiece

on a

pallet

and

place

the

pallet

in

a

station,

then

register

it in the

machining

schedule.

This

section

describes how to

carry pallets

for PPC

cycle operation.

-

When

the

PPC is

on,

the

operator

can

carry in pallets

by

three

machining

schedules

with

the

AUTO,

INTERRUPT,

and

WAITING schedule select

rotary

switch.

The operator

can also

carry in an

empty

pallet not registered in the machining schedule.

-

If

the operator

carries in

a

pallet

when

the PPC

is

off, the

pallet is

carried

but

not

registered in

the

machining schedule.

(It

is

the

same as

empty pallet carry-in

while the

PP C

is

on.)

-

Carrying-in

of

pallets is possible

in

two methods

-

inputting


inputting

a pallet

number.

When

carrying

in

a

new

pallet or

changing

a pallet

itself

at

the setup

station,

input

a pallet number at the

PPC panel

and

press

the

IN

switch

on

the same

panel.

On

completion of pallet

carrying in

operation, the schedule is

registered

to the

machining

schedule and

the PP C

panel

screen

changes

to

the pallet

carry-out

screen.

When

carrying in

a

pallet,

having

been

carried

out

to the setup

station,

to

a

station

using

the

same pallet

number, the

pallet

is

carried in to

a station

by simply

pressing the IN

switch since

the

pallet

number of

the

pallet

in

the station

remains

in

the PPC

panel.

In

this

case,

it

is

not

necessary

to

input a

pallet

number.

On

completion

of

pallet carrying

in

operation,

the

schedule

is

registered

to the

machining

schedule

and

the PP C

panel

screen

changes

to the

pallet carry-out

screen.



4202-E I-20-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL


(FOR

MC

SERIES)

1. Carry-in by the Automatic and

Waiting

Schedules

Machining

center

table

l

O

Pallet

pool

line operation

panel

Setup

station

0

:

represents pallets.

Q

:

represents

carriers

without

pallets.

Fig.

1-1

Pallet Carry-in

Automatic and

Waiting

Schedules

(1)

Set PPC

MODE to

CONT. or

ONE

CYCLE on

the

PPC

panel.

(See Fig. 4-1

.)

(2)

Set SCHEDULE to AUTO or WAITING

on

the PPC

panel.

(See

Fig. 4-1

.)



4202-E

1-21

-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL


(FOR

MC

SERIES)

(3) If

the

pallet

carry-in screen

is

not

displayed, display

the pallet

carry-in screen by pressing

the

[MENU] ke y on

the touch

panel

screen

of the PPC

panel.

PALLET

IN

AUTO CYCLE

PT1 PT: :

PALLET

IN

P

No

PROCESSING

PROGRAM

COCO

Al.M

ERR

r-QUJ

nan

n

K3

B

B

BO

19

KB

CO

Fig.

1-2

Pallet

Carry-in

Pallet

Carry-in

Screen

Then

press

a

numeric key

to enter a

carry-in

pallet

number,

and

the entered pallet

number is

displayed in PALLET IN

P.

No.

Press

[Return],

and

the processing

order

and

program name of a

processing

pallet

number

are

displayed.

If more than

on e

program

name

is registered,

the one

registered first is displayed. (See

Section

7.)

If

the pallet number

of

the

pallet

in

the

setup station

is

the

same

as

that carried

out

previously, pallet

number,

process, and

program

are

already

displayed.

(4)

Press the

IN

switch

on the

PPC panel (see

Fig.

4-1), and pallet

in

the

setup

ST is loaded to the

magazine.

(5) When

pallets

are carried

in

in AUTO mode, pallets are

scheduled at

the

last of the automatic

schedule

(schedule

attribute 1) ; and when

in

WAITING

mode, they

are scheduled

at

the last

of

the

waiting

schedule

(schedule

attribute

0).

(See

Section

8. )

(6) After carrying

in

of

a

pallet,

the PPC

panel

screen


to the

pallet

carry-out

screen.

ooco

IBWTW

MUW

PT l

PT2

ALM ERR

onaii

ALLET

IN

ALTO

CYCLE

PALLET

IN P

No

PROCESSING

PROGRAM

HS3T

GOOO

PALLET

OUT

IRPT CYCLE

PALLET

OUT

P. No.

pfTTTI

1

P1000

3

P:IOOO

5

PI.000

ALM

ER R

Tl FTP

pflrn

DBD

BOB

BBB

n

n

BO

2 P2000

4

P4000

6

P6000

BBB

n

Q

PW

Fig.

1-3

Screen Transfer from Pallet

Carry-in

Screen to Pallet

Carry-out

Screen



4202-E

I-22-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL


(FOR

MC

SERIES)

2.

Carry-in by the

Interrupt

Schedule

Machining

center

table

l

O

Pallet

pool

line operation

panel

Setup

station

0

:

represents pallets.

Q

:

represents

carriers

without

pallets.

Fig.

1-4

Pallet

Carry-in

Interrupt

Schedule

(1)

Set PPC

MODE to

CONT. or

ONE

CYCLE on

the

PPC

panel.

(See Fig. 4-1

.)

(2)

Set SCHEDULE to

IR PT. (S ee

Fig.

4-1

.)



4202-E I-23-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL


(FOR

MC

SERIES)

(3) If

the

pallet

carry-in screen

is

not

displayed, display

the pallet


the

[MENU] ke y on

the touch

panel

screen

of the PPC

panel.

1‘Al.LkT IN

IRPT

CYCLE

PALLET

IN

P.

No .

PROCESSING

PROGRAM

{522X035253

0000

FT l PT2

ALM

ERR

KB KI

MI

D

Dim

D

D CD

Fig.

1-5 Pallet Carry-in

-

Pallet

Carry-in

Screen

Then

press

a

numeric

key

to

enter a

carry-in pallet

number, and

the

entered

pallet

number is

displayed in PALLET IN P.

N o. Press

[Return],

and the

processing

order

and

program

name

of

a

processing pallet

number are

displayed.

If

more than one

program

name is

registered,

the

on e

registered

first

is

displayed. (See

Section

7.)

If

the

pallet

number

of

the

pallet

in

the

setup

station

is

the

same

as

that carried

out

previously, pallet

number,

process,

and

program

are

already

displayed.

(4)

Press the

IN

switch

on

the PPC

panel

(see

Fig.

4-1),

and

pallet

in the

setup

ST

is loaded

to the

magazine.

(5)

When

a

pallet

is carr ied in

in

IRPT

mode, it

is

scheduled as the f irst processing order. If the

pallet

with the first

processing

order

is

processed

at

that

time,

the carried-in

pallet

is

set to

the

second

processing order.

(6)

After

carrying in

of

a

pallet,

the PPC

panel

screen


to the

pallet

carry-out

screen.

PICT

oooo

pnnM

Ml PT2

ALM

ER R

PALLET

IN

ALTO

CYCLE

PALLET

IN

P

No

PROCESSING

PROGRAM

rni

PALLET OU T

IRPT CYCLE

PALLET

OU T

P NO .

pfflTW

2

P2000

«

P4000

6

R6000

0

000

ALM

ERR

T1

T

n

EIEI

m

a

1 P1000

3

P3000

5 PS

000

DEIO

m

E3

CO

ana

m

ra

nm

Fig.

1-6 Screen Transfer

from Pallet Carry-in

Screen to Pallet

Carry-out

Screen



4202-E

I-24-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL


(FOR

MC

SERIES)

2-1.

Machining

Schedule

in

the Interrupt

Schedule

Mode

on

PPC

Panel

Fo r the

pallet

carried in

in

the

interrupt

mode,

scheduling

method differs

depending

on the

setting

for

optional parameter

(bit) No.

63, bi t

1 .

If

pallets are carried

in, in

the

order

of

pallet

Nos.

6, 7,8,

and

9 while the

setting

for

the bit above

is

“OFF”,

the schedule

of

these pallets is

registered as

No.

1

,

2,

3,

and

4

as shown

in

Fig.

5-7.

After

carrying in pallets

in the interrupt

mode,

return theschedule mode

on

the PPC

panel

to automatic.

If

the mode is

changed

back

to

interrupt

and pallets

are carried

in

again

in

the

interrupt mode,

carrying

in

of

pallet

in the

interrupt

mode

is

possible

for the

pallets

having been carr ied in in

the

interrupt

mode

previously.

If

the PPC

cycle

operation

is executed

with

the

mode

set in the

interrupt mode, machining is

not executed

for the

pallets

carried

in

in

the interrupt

mode. To

execute machining for these

pallets,

return

the

mode to

automatic.

PARAMETER SET

*

MACHINING

SCHEDULE

OF

PALLET

*

SCHEDULE

ATT

0:

WAIT

/

I;

AUTO

PAGE

I

MAC. -SCH. PN O

No. 1

No.

2

No.

3

P0006

P0007

P0008

1

1

1

No .

4

P0009

1

No .

5

No. 6

No.

7

No .

8

No. 9

No .

10

P0001

P0002

P0003

P****

P****

1

1

1

0

0

P:

0

X

Y

Z

ACT POSIT

(WORK)

-551.552 100.000

100.000

A-Mtd

=MV_7[RETURN)

SC H

ITEM

T

ITEM

4-

[EXTENDI

EL SEARCH

OVE ADD

CHC

i

gji(TT)rrT)rFTÿ(TTi(TÿrF~T)rF~Bi

Fig.

1-7 Machining


1



4202-E I-25-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL


(FOR

MC

SERIES)

If

pallets are carried

in, in

the order of palletNos.

6,

7,

8, and

9 while the

setting for

the bit above is

“ON”,

the

schedule

of these

pallets

is

registered

as

No.

4,

3,

2,

and 1 as shown

in Fig.

5-8.

Differing

from

the state of bit OFF,

machining

can

be continuously executed

even

if

the

mode selection at

the PP C

panel

is

interrupt.

PARAMETER

SET

*

MACHINING

SCHEDULE

OF PALLET

*

SCHEDULE

ATT

0: WAIT

/ I:

AUTO

PACE

I

MAC.

-SCH.

PNO.

No.

1

No. 2

No. 3

P0009

P0008

P0007

1

1

1

No.

4

P0006

1

No. 5

No. 6

No. 7

No.

8

No. 9

No.

10

P0001

P0002

P0003

P****

1

1

1

0

0

0

z

Y

AC T

POSIT

(WORK)

-551 .552 100 .000

100.000

A-Mtd

=MV_7[

RETURN]

SC H

ITEM

T

ITEM 4-

[EXTEND]

OV E

ADD DEL

SEARCH

CHG

(TTifTTirrT)rFÿfTTÿrFT)rÿT)rF~s~)

Fig.

1-8

Machining

Schedule of Pallet

Screen 2



4202-E I-26-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL


(FOR

MC

SERIES)

3. Carring in the

Empty

Pallet

Machining

center

table

l

O

Pallet

pool

line operation

panel

Setup

station

0

:

represents pallets.

Q

:

represents

carriers

without

pallets.

Fig.

1-9 Pallet Carry-in

Empty Pallet Carry-in

(1)

Set PPC

MODE

to CONT. or

ONE

CYCLE on

the

PPC

panel.

(See Fig. 4-1

.)

(2)

Schedules on

the PPC

panel

are

independent

of

AUTO,

WAITING,

and INTERRUPT.

(See

Fig.

4-1.)



4202-E

I-27-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL


(FOR

MC

SERIES)

(3) If

the

pallet

carry-in screen

is

not

displayed, display

the pallet


the

[MENU] ke y on

the touch

panel

screen

of the PPC

panel.

Milkutl

ALLITT IN

IRPT

CYCLE

PALLET IN

P.

No

PROCESSING

PROGRAM

OOOQ

ITl

PT2

ERR

LM

H<M«H

KB

KB

HDSD

nnn

U

Dl

IW B

Fig. 1-10 Pallet Carry-in

-

Pallet

Carry-in Screen

Then

press

a numeric

key

to enter a

carry-in pallet

number,

and

the

entered

pallet

number

is

displayed

in

PALLET IN P. No.

Press

[Return],

and the

processing

order an d

program name

of a

processing

pallet number

are

displayed.

If more

than on e

program

name is

registered,

the

on e

registered

first is

displayed. (See

Section

7.)

If

the

pallet

number

of

the

pallet

in

the

setup

station

is

the

same

as

that carried

out

previously, pallet

number,

process,

and

program

are

already displayed.

(4)

Press the

EMPTY

PALLET

switch

on

the PP C

panel

(see Fig.

4-1), an d pallets

in

the

setup

ST

are

carried to

an

empty

ST.

(5)

Pallets are not

registered

to schedules.

(6)

After

carrying in

of a

pallet,

the

PPC

panel

screen

automatically

changes

to the

pallet carry-out

screen.

ooco

BLITHB

MIHJ

PT1

PT2

ALM

ERR

PALLET

IN

AUTO

CYCLE

PALLET IN

P

No

PROCESSING

PROGRAM

PALLET

OUT

IRPT CYCLE

PALLET

OU T

P.

No.

pflHJ

2 P2000

4

P4000

6 P6000

MOO

ALM

ER R

TI

PT:I

nan

nan

nnn

m

QI

mo

1 P1000

3

P3000

5 PS 000

nnn

n

D E33

Fig.

1-11

Screen

Transfer

from Pallet

Carry-in

Screen to

Pallet

Carry-out

Screen



4202-E I-28-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL


(FOR

MC

SERIES)

4.

Carry-in While the

PPC is Off

Machining

center

table

l

O

Pallet

pool

line operation

panel

Setup

station

0

:

represents pallets.

Q

:

represents

carriers

without

pallets.

Fig. 1

-12 Pallet Carry-in

Carry-in while

the PPC is Off

(1)

Set PPC

MODE

to OFF

on

the PPC

panel. (See

Fig.

4-1

.)

(2)

Schedules on

the PPC

panel

are

independent

of

AUTO,

WAITING,

AN D

INTERRUPT.

(See

Fig.

4-1.)



4202-E I-29-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL


(FOR

MC

SERIES)

(3) If

the

pallet

carry-in screen

is

not

displayed, display

the pallet


the

[MENU] ke y on

the touch

panel

screen

of the PPC

panel.

MULT

ALLET

IN

IRPT

CYCLE

PALLET

IN P. No.

PROCESSING

PROGRAM

0000

PT1

PT 2

ER R

LM

DBD

DDD

M l

IB

IBB

Fig.

1-13 Pallet

Carry-in

- Pallet

Carry-in

Screen

Then

press

a

numeric

key

to

enter a

carry-in pallet

number, and

the

entered

pallet

number is

displayed in PALLET

IN

P.

N o. P ress

[Return],

While the PPC

is

off,

the

processing

order

an d

program

name

of a

processing

pallet

number are not

displayed. (PROCESSING

is

0

and no PROGRAM is

displayed.)

If

the

pallet

number

of

the

pallet

in

the

setup

station

is

the

same

as

that carried

out

previously, pallet

number,

process,

and

program

are

already

displayed.

(4)

Press the

IN

switch

on

the PPC

panel

(see

Fig.

4-1),

and

pallet

in the

setup

ST

is loaded

to the

magazine.

(5)

Pallets

are not

registered

to schedules.

(6)

After carrying

in

of

a

pallet,

the

PP C

panel

screen

automatically

changes

to the

pallet

carry-out

screen.

coco

iPTHW

PTPB

PT l

PT2

ALM

ERR

MIHBU

ALLET

IN

ALTO

CYCLE

PALLET

OUT

IRPT

CYCLE

_

PALLET

OUT

P No .

pfTffl

1

P1000

3

P:IOOO

5 PS

000

(2000

ERR

TL PT: ALM

P2U]

DBD

ALLET

IN

P No

PROCESSING

PROGRAM

HOT

E

2

P2000

4

P40O0

6 P6000

DDD

D E9

CO

DDD

n

O

EH

Fig.

1-14 Screen

Transfer

from Pallet Carry-in Screen to Pallet Carry-out Screen



4202-E I-30-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL


(FOR

MC

SERIES)

SECTION 6 CARRYING

OUT

PALLETS

-

This

section describes

how

to

carry

out

processed pallets

from

each

ST

to

the

setup

ST.

-

While the PPC is

on ,

only

processed pallets and pallets carried into with

EMPTY

PALLET

can

be

carried

out.

-

While the PPC is

off,

OUT

is effective for

all

pallets

except for

the on e

in

process.

When scheduled

pallets

are carried

out,

their

processing

order

is

deleted.

-

Carrying-out

of

pallets is

possible in

two methods

inputting


inputting

a

pallet

number.

When carrying

out a

specific pallet

to the

setup

station, input

the

pallet

number of the

pallet

to

be

carried

out an d press

the OUT switch on

the

PP C

panel.

On

completion

of

pallet

carrying

out

operation,

the PPC

panel

screen changes

to the

pallet

carry-in

screen

automatically.

To

carry

out a

processed pallet

to the

setup

station,

the

operation

is

possible

by simply pressing

theOUT

switch

on

the PPC panel.

In

this

operation,

the

pallet

having

the

smallest

pallet

number

among

the

processed

pallets

is

automatically

searched.

On completion

of pallet

carrying

out operation,

the

PP C

panel screen changes

to

the

pallet

carry-in

screen automatically.



4202-E

1-31

-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL


(FOR

MC

SERIES)

5. Carry-out

while

the PPC

is

On

or

Off

Machining

center

table

l

O

Pallet

pool

line operation

panel

Setup

station

0

:

represents pallets.

Q

:

represents

carriers

without

pallets.

Fig. 1

-1 Pallet Carry-out

PP C

On/Off

(1)

When

the

PPC

is

on,

set

the

PPC MODE on

the

PPC

panel

to

CONT. or

ONE CYCLE.

When

the

PPC

is

off,

turn

the

PPC MODE

on

the PPC

panel

off

(See Fig.

4-1.)

(2)

Schedules on

the PPC

panel

are

independent

of

AUTO,

WAITING,

or INTERRUPT.

(See

Fig.

4-1.)



4202-E I-32-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL


(FOR

MC

SERIES)

(3) If

the

pallet

carry-out

screen is

not

displayed, display

the

pallet

carry-out

screen by pressing

the

[MENU] ke y on

the touch

panel

screen

of the PPC

panel.

When the

PPC

is

on ,

six

processed

pallet

numbers are

displayed.

To

display more

pallets

or

processed

pallets,

press

the PAGE

key.

When the PPC is

off,

processed pallet

numbers

are

al l

displayed

as

0000.

oooo

KQB3I

PT1

PT2 ALM

ER R

PALLET

OUT

IRPT

CYCLE

PALLET

OU T

P

No

rffTO

1

P1000

2 P2000

4 P4000

€

P6000

UDD

Ml

m

fW\

3 P:IOOO

5 P5000

Fig.

1-2 Pallet Carry-out PP C Carry-out Screen

Then

press

a

numeric

key

to

enter

a

carry-out

pallet

number,

and the entered

pallet

number

is

displayed in PALLET

OUT

P. No.

Press

[Return],

If

the pallet number of the

pallet

in

the

setup

station

is

the same as that carried

out

previously,

pallet

number,

process,

and

program

are

already displayed.

(4)

Press the OUT switch on the PPC

panel

(see

Fig.

4-1),

and

a

specified pallet is carried ou t to

the

setup

ST.

(5)

After carrying

out

of a

pallet,

the PPC

panel

screen


to the

pallet

carry-in

screen.

oooo

nrTHi

P333

PTl

PT2

ALM

ERR

PALLET

OUT

IRPT

CYCLE

PALLET OUT

P.

No .

pffTO

1 P1000

3

P3000

5

PSCOO

PALLET

JN

ALTO

CYCLE

?T1

PT 2

PALLET IN

P. No

PROCESSING

PROGRAM

(222

COO

3

ALM

ERR

DHD

PEHJ

DOD

nan

n

w i i?w

2 P2000

nan

P4000

19 19

DO

P6000

Fig.

1-3 Screen Transfer

from

Pallet

Carry-out

Screen

to

Pallet Carry-in

Screen



4202-E I-33-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL

LINE

CONTROL)

FO R

HORIZONTAL

MC MULTI-STATION

AP C

(FOR

MC

SERIES)

SECTION

7

ASSIGNING

PPC CYCLE

OPERATION

MACHINING PROGRAMS

TO

PALLET

NUMBERS

This section

assigns pallets to PPC

cycle

operation

machining

programs. Once

assigned,

a

registered

machining program

is

automatically

executed

when

a

pallet

number

is

specified

in

a schedule.

1.

Assigning Procedures

Press the

[ITEMf] or

[ITEM],]

ke y

on

the

parameter

set mode

screen on

the

NC operation

panel to

display

the screen

shown below.

I

PARAMETER

~SEf

97/07/15

1

4

:

1

0

:

00

*

REGISTRATION

PROGRAM OF PALLET

«

PAGE

WORK SE T POSITION No.

1

2

3

4

5 6

7

8

9 10 11 12

11100000000

0

00001

1001001

0000001

10000

000000000110

0 0 0

0 0 0

P0001

N0.

NO .

PROGRAM

NAME

1

A100

2 5A10

3

CD10

_

4

IAB31

000000000

0 0

0

0 0 0

7

0 0

000000000000

000000000000

000000000000

ooooooooo

0

0

ACT

POSIT

(WORK)

-551ÿ552

100.000

100.000

A-Mtd

Y

Z

=S AB31

ITEM

t

ITEM

1

[EXTEND]

SET

nÿfÿTT(Tÿ(TÿrFÿrrÿrrrirrei

Fig. 1-1

Registration

Program

of

Pallet Screen

- In

this

screen, machining

program

names

and

set positions of

each pallet on

the

multi-station

AP C can

be

registered.

-

Fo r

pallet

number

up to 50

pairs can

be set. Pages

can

be

changed by

pressing

the PAGE

keys

(SB)

®

•

nd

-

Up

to

10

pairs

of

machining

program

names

can

be

registered

for

on e

pallet

- Up to 12 work

set

positions can

be

specified to

one machining

program.



4202-E I-34-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL LINE

CONTROL)

FOR

HORIZONTAL MC

MULTI-STATION APC

(FOR

MC

SERIES)

[Setting

the pallet number]

-

Entry

-

Setting

range

S_


1 to

9000

Input to clear

al l the

registered

items.

[Setting

the

machining program

name]

-

Entry

S_

[machining

program

name

(set

the

“?????????????”

portion

in

the

“PPC

?????????????.

MIN.”)]

[RETURN]

Up

to 10

pairs

of

machining

program names can

be registered

to on e

pallet.

Up

to 13

characters

(0

to

9/A

to

Z/-).

(The

first character must

be an

alphabet (A

to

Z).)

-

Setting range

“5241

program

name”

Code: None

Cause:

Program

name

setting

was

incorrect.

-

Error

[Setting the work set

position]

SJ

or 0

[Return]

Up

to

12 work

set

positions

can be

specified

to one

machining program.

-

Entry

-

Setting

range

1

orO

Work

set position I Work scl position

2

Work set

position

3

Work set

position

4

Work

A 1

00

Work

None

ork

AI00

Work

A

100

L

Work set position 5

Work

set position

6 Work

set

position

7 Work

scl

position 8

Work BAIO

|

Work CDJ0

ork

BA 10

Work CD10

Work

set

position

9

Work

set position 10

Work

scl position

1 1

Work set

position

12

Work BA 10

ork

BA

10

Work AB31

Work AB 3

1

Fig. 1-2

Work

Set Position

Diagram



4202-E I-35-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL


(FOR

MC

SERIES)

-

If one

machining

program

machines

one

pallet, set as shown below.

PARAMETER

SET

I

97/07/15

14:10:00

*

REGISTRATION

PROGRAM OF PALLET

*

PAGE1

WORK SET POSITION No .

1

2 3

4

5

6 7

8

9

10 11

12

1

00000000000

000000000000

0 0 0

0

0

0 0

0

0 0 0 0

oooooooooooo

000000000000

oooooooooooo

oooooooooooo

oooooooooooo

oooooooooooo

oooooooooooo

P0001

NO.

NO.

PROGRAM

NAME

1

A2356

2

3

4

5

6

7

*************

8

?

10

X Y

Z

AC T

POSIT

(WORK

-551.552

100.000

100.000

A-M1d

=S

AB31

ITEM

l

[EXTEND]

TEM

t

ET

Fig.

1-3 For One

Pallet,

One

Machining Program

- One

Machining



4202-E I-36-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL


(FOR

MC

SERIES)

SECTION 8 EDTING MACHINING

SCHEDULE

Fo r PPC

cycle

operation, pallets

are

scheduled

during

prior

carry-in

operation.

The

operator

can change the

processing

order of

the

pallets

on

the

Machining

schedule of

Pallet screen.

PARAMETER

SE T

I

97/07/15

*

PAGET

14:10:00

*

MACHINING

SCHEDULE

OF

PALLET

SCHEDULE ATT

0:WAIT/1

:AUT0

MAC.-SCH.

PNO.

NO .

1

P0002

P0005

P0004

1

NO .

2

1

NO . 3

1

NO. 4 P00C3

M

NO . 5

NO .

6

TOOT

P0106

P0102

pit

K

M

K

0

0

NO . 7

0

NO .

8

0

NO . 9 0

NO. 10

0

X

V

z

AC T

POSIT(WORK)

-551.552

100.000

100.000

A-Mtd

=S

AB31

SCH.

ITEM

t

[EXTEND]

OVE

AD D

DEL

SEARCH

ITEM

l

HG

irÿfTÿ(Tÿrÿrr~5)rF~ÿirÿTirFsi

Fig.

1

-1 Machining


Press

the

[ITEMf]

or [ITEM

J,]

ke y

in parameter

set

mode to

display

the above

screen.

This

screen

is

usedto edit

machining

schedules of

each

pallet on

the

multi-station AP C (move,

add,delete,

and schedule attribute

change).

The

processing

order can be defined

in

the

range

from No.1 to

No.50.

To

change

the

page,

us e the PAGE

keys

(SB)

and

(ÿ)

.

Data

on

this

screen can

also

be

registered by carry-in

operation

on

the PPC

panel.

(See

Section

5.)

Data

can

be set

on

this

screen while

the

PPC is on. If

the

PPC is

off, al l

pallet

numbers

are

displayed

as

and schedule attributes

are

displayed

as

“0.”

When

the

PP C

is

turned

on,

the

screen

returns to

the

previous

state.

“****”



4202-E I-37-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL


(FOR

MC

SERIES)

(1)

Moving Machining Schedules

- The

operator

can move the

processing

order of

machining

schedules.

-

Move the

cursor to

a

line

containing

the

pallet whose

machining

schedule

is

to be

moved,

press

the

[MOVE] function

key.

Enter a required

processing

order

and

press [RETURN], The pallet number

moves

to

the line selected

for

the

new processing

order.


also moves accordingly

and the tab le

is

updated.

Moving

procedures

. . .

MV_[processing

order]

[RETURN]

Moving range

1

to

maximum stat ion

number

If

the

pallet

with

processing

order

1

is

in

process

on the

machine,

it cannot

be

moved to

processing

order

1.

If

a pallet

sharply

exceeds the

present

processing

order even if it

does

not

exceeds the

maximum station number, it

is

added after

the

maximum processing

order

set

at

present

and

no

blank

processing orders

are

generated.

“5286

Set condition error

Code

:1

The pallet

at

the


is

not

ready

for

machining.

(The

pallet

number at the source

cursor

position is

not

found.)

:2

Th e

same

pallet number

is

specified

as

the

source and

destination.

Error

:3

Th e

destination

pallet

is not

ready

for

processing.

(The pallet

number

at

the

destination

cursor

position

is not

found.)

(2)

Adding Machining

Schedules

-

Machining

schedules can be added.

-

Move

the

cursor

to

a

line to which

a

machining

schedule is

to

be added

and

press

the

[ADD]

function

key.

Enter a

new

pallet

number

and

press [RETURN],

The

entered

pallet

number is

added

using

the

schedule attribute of

the

source l ine and the table is

updated.

Adding

procedure

NSJpallet

number]

[RETURN]

Addition

range

1

to maximum station number

Machining

schedules

can

be added

for

only

pallets

registered in

the

pallet

station

number/pallet number table.

“5286 Set condition error

Code

:

1 The pallet at the source cursor position is not

ready

for

machining.

(The pallet number at

the source

cursor position is not found.)

:2 The pallet number to be added

is

not found.

:3 The operator attempted to

add

a pallet number not

registered

in

the

pallet

station

number/pallet

number table.

A

The

operator attempted

to

add

a

pallet

number

whose

processing

number

is

already

set.

Error



4202-E I-38-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL


(FOR

MC

SERIES)

(3)

Searching for Machining

Schedules

- The

operator

can search the

processing

order of

machining

schedules and move them with the cursor.

- Press

the

[SEARCH] function and

enter a

processing

order to be searched.

The

cursor moves

to

the

line

containing

the entered

processing

order.

Search procedure

....

FJprocessing

order] [RETURN]

Search range

Error

1

to

maximum

processing

order registered

‘‘5286

Set

condition error’’

Code

:1

The pallet at the source

cursor position

is not

ready

for

machining.

(The pallet

number at the

source cursor

position

is

not

found.)

(4)

Deleting Machining

Schedules

-

Machining

schedules can be deleted.

- Move

the

cursor to a

line from

which

the

machining

schedule is to be

deleted and press

the

[DEL]

function.

The

line selected

with

the

cursor

is

deleted and

the

table

is

updated.

Delete

procedures

____

EL

[RETURN]

Delete range 1

to maximum

processing

order

registered

If the pallet with

processing

order 1 is

in

process on the

machine,

it cannot be

deleted.

“5286

Set

condition error’’

Code :

1

The

pallet

at the

source

cursor

position

is not ready for

machining.

(The

pallet number at the source cursor

position

is

not found.)

Error

(5)

Changing the Schedule

Attribute

-


can

be selected from wait or automatic. The

default

is wait

operation

“0.”

-

Move the

cursor to the

processing

order whose

schedule

attribute is to be

changed

and

press

the

[SCH.

CHG]

function. When the schedule

attribute

is “0,”

it changes

to “1”; an d

when

“1,”

it changes

to “0.”

Change

procedures

. .

SCH

[RETURN]

Change range 0

or

1

Fo r the

pallet

to be

machined

by

wait

operation,

enter “0.”

For the

pallet to

be

machined

by

automatic operation, enter

“1 .’’

Changing

SCHEDULE

ATT

from

“0”

(WAIT)

to

“1”

(AUTO),

the

processing

order

moves after

the last

pallet with

SCHEDULE

ATT

of

“1”

(AUTO).

Changing SCHEDULE ATT from

“1”

(AUTO)

to “0”

(WAIT),

the processing

order

moves

after

the last pallet with SCHEDULE

ATT

of

“0” (WAIT).

“5286

Set condition error’’

Code

:1

The

pallet

at the

source cursor

position

is no t

ready

for

machining.

(The

pallet

number at the

source cursor

position

is

not

found.)

Error



4202-E I-39-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL


(FOR

MC

SERIES)

SECTION 9 MACHINING

PROGRAM AND

SYSTEM

VARIABLES

1

.

VPLDT [1

]

to

VPLDT [12]/VPPCP

When two or

more

works are

placed

on

the

same

pallet,

the works

must

have

different

work numbers

depending

on the work

set position

on

the pallet

even

if

the works are the same.

This section

explains

howto run

the

system

effectively

for such condit ion.

When

setting

multiple

works

on

the setup

station

(works

may

not be

the same

and

up

to tenkinds of

works

can

be

handled),

set

the

mapping

of the

work set

positions

an d

machiniables VPLDT[1]

to

VPLDT[1

2] and

VPPCP

during machining,

so that the

information

is

available

for

machining programs.

Le t us u se a n

example

below.

[Pallet

number

No .

2]

Work sc i

position

I

Work set

position

2

Work se t position

3

Work

set position

4

Work A 100 Work

A)

00

Work None

ork

A100

Work set position

5

Work set position

6

Work set position 7 Work set posit ion 8

Work

CD

10ork

BA

10

Work

BA

10 Work CD10

Work set position 9

Work

set

position 10

Work

set position

1

1

Work set

position

12

Work

AB31

ork BA

10 Work

AB31

Work BA

10

Fig.

1-1

Work

Set Position

Diagram

Assumethat there are

12

work set

positions

and the

operator

set

the

works

as

shown

in

the

figure

above.

(U p

to ten

different

kinds

of works

can

be

set.)



4202-E I-40-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL


(FOR

MC

SERIES)

The

operator assigns

work set positions to

machining programs

for a pallet

in

advance.

PARAMETER

SE T

97/07/15

14:10:00

*

REGISTRATION PROGRAM

OF

PALLET

*

PAGE1

P0002 WORK

SET

POSITION

No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8 9 10

11

12

111000000000

000011001001

0000001

10000

0000000001

1 0

000000000000

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0

0 0 0

000000000000

000000000000

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

000000000000

PNO.

NO . PROGRAM

NAME

1

A100

2 BA10

3 CD10

_

4

[AB31

5

6

8

9

10

X

Y

Z

ACT

POSIT(WORK)

-551.552

100.000

100.000

A-Mtd

=S AB31

[EXTEND]

TEM

ITEM

4

ET

Fig.

1-2 Registration Program

of Pallet Screen

When

this

pallet

is carr ied into

the

machine,

the

NC

first

selects

a

program automatically,

then set

system

variables

as

shown

below.

VPLDT[1]=1,

VPLDT[4]=0,

VPLDT[7]=0,

VPLDT[10]=0,

VPPCP=$007H

VPLDT[2]=1

,

VPLDT[5]=0,

VPLDT[8]=0,

VPLDT[11]=0,

VPLDT[3]=1

VPLDT[6]=0

VPLDT[9]=0

VPLDT[12]=0

The machining program

checks

the

value of

VPLDT[1]

to

VPLDT[12]

(1 orO) and

the NC

machines works

while

checking

whether a work with PPCA100.MIN is

set at

each work set position from

1

to

12.

The

machining

program

also

checks hexadecimal data of

VPPCP=$007H

and

the

NC machines

works

while

checking

whether

a

work

with

PPCA100.MIN

is set

at

each

work

set position from

1

to

12 in

the

same

way as VPLDT[1] to VPLDT[12],



4202-E

I-41-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL


(FOR

MC

SERIES)

The figure below is

an

example

machining

program for

PPCA100.MIN.

(When VPLDT[1] to VPLDT[12] are used)

OAIOO

N001

IF

VPLDT

[

1

J

EQ

0]N002

G15H1

CALL OSUB1

N002 IF

[VPLDT [

2

]

EQ

0]K003

G15H2

CALL

OSUB1

N003

IF

[VPLDT

[3 ]

EQ

0]N004

G15H2

CALL OSUB1

Fig. 1-3

Machining Program

Example

1

Write

the

actual

machining

program

in

OSUB1 and write the main program to check whether

a

work

is set

in

each work set

position

and if the work

is set,

selects its coordinates.

After

PPCA100.MIN

completes,

the NC

automatically

selects

PPCBA10.MIN.

System

variables are

set

as shown

below.

VPLDT[2]=0,

VPLDT[5]=1,

VPLDT[8]=0,

VPLDT[11]=0,

VPLDT[1]=0,

VPLDT[4]=0,

VPLDT[7]=0,

VPLDT[10]=0,

VPPCP=$930H

The

process

after

this

is

the sam e as

for

PPCA100.MIN.

VPLDT[3]=0

VPLDT[6]=1

VPLDT[9]=1

VPLDT[12]=1



4202-E

I-42-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL


(FOR

MC

SERIES)

2.

VPLNO

-

VPLNO indicates

the number

of

the

pallet

located

on

the machine table

at

present.

-

Use VPLNO to

change

the work coordinate

system

for each

pallet

when the

same

work is

placed

on

multiple pallets

or

a

different

origin

offset

is

used

for

each

pallet.

(Example)

Fo r

machining

works on

pallets 0001

and

0002,

us e work

coordinate

system

11

for the No.1

pallet

and

work

coordinate

system

12

for the

No.2

pallet.

oiooo

N001

IF

(VPLNO

EQ

1]N010

IF

(VPLNO

EQ

2

]

N020

GOTO NEND

N010

G15

HI

1

GOTO N100

N020 G15

H12

GOTO

N100

N100

[actual

machining

process]

NEND M0 2

Fig.

1-4

Machining Program

Example

3



4202-E I-43-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL


(FOR

MC

SERIES)

SECTION 10 SETTING SYSTEM

MAINTENANCE

PARAMETERS

For PPC

cycle

operation,

the

operator

must

first

set

system

maintenance

parameters.

1. Setting

Data on the

SETUP,

MAC-INT.

PNO.

SET

Screen

On

the

SETUP,

MAC-INT

PNO.

SE T

screen,

only the

pallet

number of the

pallet

in the machine

can

be

set. This

parameter

screen is

used

for

setting

parameters

which

are necessary fo r adjusting

the

system

during

installation.

Therefore,

this

parameter

setting screen

is

not

open

to users.

PARAMETER

SET

97/07/15

14:10:00

MAC-

1

NT.

PNO. SET*

P-ITEM

PNO.

M/C1

MAC-INT.

0001

X

Y

Z

ACT

POSIT

(WORK)

-551.552

A-Mtd

-551.552

-551.552

[EXTEND]

TEM

t

ITEM]

ET

o

i

) (Fÿrÿ(Tÿ(TT)r r6 i rF-T)rF~r)

Fig. 1-1 SETUP,

MAC-INT. PNO.

SET Screen

Set

the number

of

the MAC-INT

(in-machine

pallet).

[Setting

M/C1

MAC-INT.]

An

attempt

was

made to set

the

pallet

number

assigned

to

other stations

to the

MAC-INT

(in-machine

pallet)

or

CIR.-ST

(turntable pallet)

number.

S_

[ST

number][RETURN]

Entry

-

Setting

range

. 1

to maximum

pallet ST number

.

“5286

Set

condition error”

Code

:

None

Reason

: An

attempt

was made to set

the

pallet

number

assigned

to other

stations to the MAC-INT

(in-machine pallet)

or CIR.-ST

(turntable

pallet)

number.

-

Error



4202-E

I-44-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL


(FOR

MC

SERIES)

2.

Setting

Data

on

the

PALLET

CARRIER

NO.-PALLET

NO.

TABLE

Screen

I

PARAMETER SE T

97/07/15

14:10:00

ABLE*

PALLET

CARRIER

NO .

-PALLET

NO .

T.

RAGE1

CL-NO. PNO.

P0001

P0002

P0003

P0004

P0005

5 P0006

6 P0007

P0008

8

P

NONE

P

NONE

CL-NO. PNO.

10

P NONE

P

NONE

P NONE

13

P

NONE

14

P NONE

15

P

NONE

16 P NONE

17

P

NONE

P

NONE

19

P

NONE

MC-NO.

PNO.S1

1 00011

1

12

3

4

7

18

9

X

Z

AC T

POSIT

(WORK)

-551.552

-551.552

-551.552

A-Mtd

[EXTEND]

TEM

T

ITEM

i

ET

rF~Tl

(T~F)

fF~1T)

fF~6~)

(~F~7ÿ (T~1T)

Fig.

1-2

PALLET

CARRIER NO.-PALLET NO.

TABLE

Screen

This

screen is used to set

pallet

numbers

for

each

pallet

carrier on

the multi-station

APC.

The data restrictions follow the multi-station APC

specification

and

the

pallet

number must

not

exceed

the maximum number of

pallet

stations.

(1) Setting

the

Pallet

Number

Setting

procedures

. .

S_


Setting

range

0

to

maximum

station number

When “0”

is

entered,

“None”

is

displayed.

“5285 Set condition error”

Code

:1

An

attempt

was made tost a

pallet

to

the

station

exceeding

the

maximum

station

number.

:2

An

attempt

was

made

to

register

a

pallet

number already

registered.

(2)

Displaying

the MC No.

-pallet

Number Table

The screen displays the

pallet

number of the

pallet

in the machine.

Error

(3)

Displaying

the Attribute of the

Setup

Station

Pallet

Attributes MS 1

and

WS1 are

displayed

to

the

side of

the

machine’s

standby

station number

and

the

setup

station

number,

respectively, which

are set

at

the

PALLET

CARRIER NO.

-PALLET

NO .

TABLE

screen. This

facilitates checking

of thestation

position

of the machine’s

standby

station

and

the

setup

station.



4202-E I-45-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL


(FOR

MC

SERIES)

3. Communication Interface between the Touch Panel and NC

(RS232C

Communication

Parameters)

(1)

Baud Rate:

2400,

4800,

9600,

19200

bps

(2)

Data

Bit Length:

(3) Stop

Bit:

(4)

Parity Bit:

(5)

Flow

Control:

7

or

8

bits

1

or

2 bits

Even,

odd,

none

RS/CS

control,

XON/XOFF

control,

none



4202-E I-46-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE POOL

LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL MC

MULTI-STATION

APC

(FOR

MC

SERIES)

SECTION 11

CHECKING THE

PPC

SYSTEM

CONDITION

The

screen

below

is

used

to

check the PPC

system

condition.

I

AUTO

OPERATION

N

1

97/07/15

14:10:00

CHECK

DATA


CL-NO.

MAC_ST

P0001

SE T

UP

ST P0002

P0003

P0004

P0005

p***»

p****

p***»

p***»

p»***

p****

p****

PNO.

MAC SCH.

U

2

3

O.

1

NO.

2

F

5

O. 3

NO. 4

*

O. 5

*

O. 6

*

O.

7

*

O.

8

*

O. 9

*

O. 10

CHECK

ROGRAM ACTUAL

PART

SELECT

POSIT.

PROGRAM

BLOCK

[EXTEND]

EARCH

ATC/APC

AT A

DATA

nrrifÿinrrT)[TTÿrFir)rFinrrT)iTin

Fig.

1-1

PPC

System

Condition Screen

Display the

above

screen

from

the check

screen in

each

operation

mode

(automatic,

MDI, or

manual).

The screen lists the pallet numbers of the

pallets

at the

machine,

setup station and other

stations,

an d the

processing

order of them.

Processing

orders: 0

Empty

pallet

Processing

order

Processing completed

Processing

No pallet

Use

the

(0)

or

(Eg)

PAGE

key to

display

the next

page.

Note that the lines

for

the machine and

setup

station

are

fixed.

1 to

F

M

*



4202-E

I-47-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL


(FOR

MC

SERIES)

SECTION 12 EXCHANGING PALLETS

WITH

THE PPC

FUNCTION

OFF

This fu

notion

allows

the

pallet

i

n

the mach

ine

to

be

changed

with the

specified pallet

without

using

the

PPC

function when

adjusting

the multi-station

APC,

etc.

-

Format

M

Code

Description

M101

The

pallet

in the machine

is

changed

with the

pallet

of carrier No.

1.

M102 The pallet in the machine is changed

with

the pallet of

carrier No.

2.

M103

The

pallet

in the machine

is changed

with the

pallet

of

carrier

No.

3.

M104

The

pallet in

the machine is

changed

with the

pallet

of

carrier

No.

4.

M105 The

pallet in the machine

is

changed

with the

pallet

of carrier No. 5.

M106

The

pallet

in the machine

is changed

with

the

pallet

of

carrier

No.

6.

M107

The

pallet in

the machine

is changed

with the

pallet

of

carrier No. 7.

M108 The

pallet in

the

machine

is

changed

with the

pallet

of carrier No. 8.

M109 The

pallet

in the machine

is changed

with

the

pallet of

carrier No. 9.

M110

The

pallet in

the

machine is

changed

with the

pallet

of

carrier No.

10.

M1

11

Th e pallet in

the machine is

changed

with the

pallet

of carrier No.

11 .

M112

The

pallet

in the machine is

changed

with

the

pallet of

carrier No.

12.

-

Description of operation

The

specified

pallet

is

loaded

to

the machine

disregarding

whether

or

not

a

pallet

actually

exists

in the

machine.



4202-E I-48-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL


(FOR

MC

SERIES)

SECTION 13 DNC-B AND DNC-DT OPERATION

Parameter Setting

Screen.

Designation

of

the

device

where

a

machining

program is stored

is made

possible

at the

PPC

SYSTEM

CONDITION

screen.

Default device name

is

When

designating

a device

name, if only

[SET]

is pressed

(S_)

or

if

“*”

is set

(S_*),

device

name is

regarded

as “MD1:”.

Devices other

than “MD1 are

indicated

below.

DNC-B

specification

DNC:

DNC-DT

specification

TCA:

(TC:)

to TCH:

An

error

occurs

if

a

device

name

not indicated

above

is

specified.

5261

Device

name

I

AUTO

OPERAT ION

J

1

97/07/15

14:10:00

PPC SYSTEM

CONDITION

HECK DATA

PAGE

1

CL-NO.

MAC_ST

SET

JP_ST

PNO. MAC

SCH.

M

0001

P0002

P0003

90004

P0005

p****

p***»

p****

p****

p*#**

p«***

2

3

O.

1

F

O.

2

5

O.

3

*

O.

A

*

O.

5

*

O.

6

*

O.

7

*

O.

8

*

O.

9

*

O. 10

CHECK

ROGRAM

ACTUAL

PART

SELECT POSIT.

PROGRAM

BLOCK

[EXTEND]

EARCH

ATC/APC

DATA

AT A

(? T1

fp~F)

fT~rn fF~in

(T~el

(T~7H(TTBI



4202-E I-49-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL


(FOR

MC

SERIES)

2.

DNC-B

Operation

from the

PPC

-

PPC mode ON

By the

PPC

cycle

start

operation,

machining programs registered by

pallets

are

selected and executed

according

to the machining

schedule

by

pallets.

(If

the

PPCmode

switch

is

in

the

“Continuous”

position,

machining

is

performed

continuously

for

multiple

pallets, and

if

it is

in

the

“One

cycle”

position,

the

program

is

executed

only

for

one

pallet.)

In

the

state the DNC-B

operation

is not

possible

(DNC-B operation

not

ON,

buffer

operation not

ON), if

the device

of the

machining program to

be

selected

and executed

is

“DNC:”, an alarm

occurs.

2375 Alarm

B No

user

program

1

8000000

The following

alarm

occurs if

the

machining

program

to be

selected is

not

in

the specified device at

the

cycle

start of

PPC.

2375

Alarm B

No user

program

10000002

If

the

setting

for communication

parameter

“N C

program

transfer

method”

is “A ”

(no

file nam e

designation),

the

alarm

indicated below occurs and

the

machining

program

in

device

“DNC:”

is

neither

selected nor executed.

2375

Alarm B No

user

program

1

8000000

Execution

of a

program

by normal program selection and

NC

cycle

start

is not

possible.

If this

is

attempted,

the

following

alarm

occurs

at

the

cycle

start

of

the

NC.

4282 Alarm

B

PP C

cycle

can’t start

If

the

NC is reset

during

DNC-B mode

operation,

cycle

start of the NC starts communication

again

and

the

registered

program

is selected and executed.

-

PPC mode OFF

The program

selected

at

the


screen is

not

selected and executed by

the

PPC

cycle

start

operation.

The program selected in normal

program

selection

operation

is executed

by

the

cycle

start of

the

NC.



4202-E I-50-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL


(FOR

MC

SERIES)

3. DNC-DT

Operation

from

the

PPC

-

PPC mode ON

By the

PPC

cycle

start

operation,

machining programs registered by

pallets

are


according

to the machining

schedule

by

pallets.

(If

the

PPCmode

switch is

in

the

“Continuous”

position,

machining

is

performed

continuously

for

multiple

pallets, and

if

it

is

in

the

“One

cycle”

position, the program is

executed

only

for

one

pallet.)

In

the

state the DNC-DT operation

is

not

possible

(TCP/IP communication

not

ON), if the device of the

machining program

to be selected and

executed is

“TCA:

(TC:)

-

TCH:”,

an

alarm

occurs.

2375

Alarm B No

user

program

1

8000000

The following

alarm

occurs if

the

machining

program

to be

selected is

not

in

the specified device at

the

cycle

start of

PPC.

2375

Alarm B

No user

program

10000002

(if

device

name

is

MD1

:)

2531

Alarm

B

DNC-DT

Program select

80000084

(if device

name

is TCA:

(TC:)

-

TCH:)

Execution of

a

program by normal program selection

an d NC

cycle

start is not

possible.

If

this is

attempted,

the following

alarm

occurs at

the

cycle

start of

the

NC.

4282

Alarm

B

PPC

cycle

can’t

start

-

PPC mode OFF

The

program

selected

at the

PP C

SYSTEM CONDITION screen is

not


by

the

PPC

cycle

start

operation.

The program selected in

normal

program selection

operation

is executed by

the cycle

start of

the NC.



4202-E

1-51

-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL


(FOR

MC

SERIES)

SECTION

14

ERRORS DISPLAYED

ON THE

PPC

PANEL

If the CLEAR key

[C]

is

pressed

after the occurrence

of

an

alarm,

caused by the

operation

at

the

PPC

panel,

the PPC is reset.

1.

Error

at Carry-in

Operation

If

the

operator

makes

a

mistake

during

carry-in

using

the

touch

panel, the

errors

listed

below

may occur.

These

errors

are

displayed

on

the touch panel.

Error Number Description

-

The

specified pallet

number

is

not

registered

on

the


of

Pallet]

screen.

-

An

attempt

wa s

made to

perform

carry-in

operation

on

a

screen

other

than

the

carry-in

screen.

72

-

The specified pallet number

is

not

registered

on the

PALLET CARRIER

NO.-PALLET NO.

TABLE

screen.

80

-

The specified pallet exists

on the

machine station.

- The machining program name

is not

registered

fo r the

specified pallet

on the

[Registration

Program

of Pallet] screen.

81

2.

Errors

at Carry-out

Operation

If

the

operator

makes amistake during

carry-out

using the touch panel. These

errors are

displayed

on

the

touch

panel.

Error Number Description

-

The

specified pallet

number

is

not

registered

on

the


of

Pallet]

screen.

-

An

attempt

was made to

perform

carry-in

operation

on

a

screen other

than

the

pallet

carry-in

screen.

72

-

The

specified pallet

number

is

not registered

on

the PALLET

CARRIER

NO.-PALLET NO.

TABLE

screen.

-

The

specified pallet

exists

on the

machine station.

80

-

The

specified pallet

is

ready

for machining.

3



4202-E I-52-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL


(FOR

MC

SERIES)

3. Other

Errors

Error Number

Description

-

Error

No. 99 is displayed in the following cases.

In

principle, error

No.

99

is

displayed

if

the

target

pallet of attempted

operation

or

processing is

not

registered

on the


of

Pallet]

screen.

1 .

After

pallet

loading/unloading

operation, error

No .

99 is

displayed

when

the

target

pallet

is not

registered on the [Registration Program

of

Pallet]

screen.

Check if the

target pallet

is

registered

on

the


of

Pallet]

screen.

2.

Error

No.

99

is

displayed if

the

pallet, in

the

machine,

assigned

with

processing

order

“1”,

is

not

registered

on

the


of

Pallet]

screen.

Check if the

target

pallet

is registered

on

the [Registration

Program

of

Pallet]

screen.

3.

When a

machining program

is

executed,

the

status

of the

pallet

of

processing

order “1 ” is

updated

to

“F” (machining

finished)

after the

execution of

M02

(program end

processing).

If

the status of

this

pallet

is

already “F”,

the target

pallet

is not

registered

on

the [Registration

Program

of

Pallet]

screen, or the device

name

or program

name

of the

completed

program

does

not

exist

in

the

target

pallet, error No. 99

is

displayed.

Display the

PPC SYSTEM CONDITION screen and check the

processing

order of the

target

if it

is

already

“F”.

Check

if

the

target

pallet

is

registered on

the

[Registration Program of

Pallet]

screen.

4.

Error

No.

99 is

displayed if

the pallet

of

processing

order

“F

(machining

completed

pallet)

(on

the PP C

SYSTEM

CONDITION

screen)

is

not

registered on the


of

Pallet]

screen.

Check

if

the

target

pallet

is

registered

on the


of

Pallet] screen.

5.

When ON is

set

for bit 0

of NC


No.

63

to select

automatic

unloading,

the

pallet

in

the

waiting

station is

automatically

unloaded to the

setup

station

if

the

next

schedule does

not

exist. Error

No. 99 is

displayed if

the pallet

in

the

waiting

station is not

registered

on

the


of

Pallet]

screen.

Check

if the

target pallet

is registered

on

the

[Registration

Program

of

Pallet]

screen.

99



4202-E I-53-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL


(FOR

MC

SERIES)

4.

APC

Interlock

Error

If

APC

operation

is

disabled due to interlock

or other

reasons,

the

following

error number

is

displayed

on

the touch

panel.

Error Number

Description

-

The

specified pallet

does

not

exist in

any

station.

1

02

-

There is

no

empty station where a pallet can be placed.

-

After the

interruption

of

pallet

loading/unloading sequence, the specified

restart command

differs

f rom the

previous

command.

3

-

At the

start of

pallet

loading/unloading

sequence,

necessary

conditions

are

not

satisfied.

4

-

In

pallet

loading/unloading

operation

at the

setup

station,

interlock function

of

the

setup

stat ion is activated.

(Setup

station

door

closed,

setup

station at the

correct

position)

05

-

In

pallet

loading/unloading

operation

at

the

waiting

station,

the

loading/unloading

enabled command is

not

output

from

the

APC.

6

-

Manual operat ion is

disabled

due to

interlock.

7



4202-E I-54-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL


(FOR

MC

SERIES)

SECTION

15

GENERATED ALARMS

2374

No

pallet

program

In

the

pallet pool

line

control

(PPC),

an

error

has

occurred

during

selection of the

pallet

change program

(09999).

[Code]

1) X:

1->

The automatic

operation

mode

is

not selected.

2->

The command

buffer is not empty.

3->

An

error

occurred when

reading

the

main

program by

PD O

task.

2)

XYZZAABB:

X

=

1

>

Automatic

selection

alarm

BB:

bitO->The specified

schedule

program

file is not found.

bit1->The

specified

main

program

file

is

not found.

bit2->The

specified

subprogram

file is not

found.

bit3->The specified

program

is not found.

bit4->The

specified

subprogram

is not

found.

bit5->M02

or M03 is not

designated

before

the

end of

main program.

bit6->RTS

is

not

designated

before the end of

subprogram.

bit7->The

program is

too

large

to be

stored in the program

buffer.

AA :

bitO->The

number of

sequence names

in

the main program has exceeded 31.

bit1—

>A

sequence name consists of more than 5

characters including

N.

bit2 >The

CALL

statement

is not

followed by

a

subprogram

name.

bit3

>

A

subprogram

name

consists

of

more

than

5

characters

including

0.

bit4->The

program

name of G or

M

code

macro

ha s not been defined.

bit5->The number

of

subprograms

to be called has exceeded 63.

bit6ÿ>The

program has

a b lock o f more

than 156 characters.

bit7 >The

sum

of main file name

and extended

file

name has

exceeded 20

characters.

ZZ :

bitO->The

specified

main file

name

and extended file

name start

with numerals.

The device

name

is

specified

with more

than

3

letters or a colon is omitted

after

the device

name.

bit1

bit2->The

specified program name does not begin

with O.

bit3->The

specified program name contains non-alphanumeric characters.

bit4->The

program

name

is

specified with

more

than

5

characters

including

0.

bit5->More

than

16 options

are

specified.

bit6->The flag

of multivolume file

is

not included within a main

file

name of 8

characters.

bit7->The

program

selection

request

signal

is

designated during

execution of schedule

program.

Y

=

bitO->The

program selection

request

command is

designated during execution

of the main

program.

bit1->

Program selection

is

attempted

in an

invalid mode.

bit2->The

serial

number of

the

multi volume

file

has exceeded

99 .

bit3->

A

floppy is

designated

as

a device name.

X

=

2

Memory

defect

The

specified file

name

contains

*

or

?.



4202-E I-55-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL


(FOR

MC

SERIES)

[Probable

Faulty

Locations]

The pallet

change program

(09999)

is not stored

in

the

memory.

[Measures to Take]

Check

if

there is the

program

(09999)

in

the file

of PPC*.

MIN

in

the

memory

(MD1

:).

No

user

program

In

the

pallet

pool

l ine control

(PPC),

an

error occurred

during machining program

selection.

[Code]

Refer to Alarm No.

2374.

[Probable

Faulty

Locations]

Program

name

set

at the PP C

is

not found

in

the bubble

memory.

[Measures

to Take]

Using the

OPERATION GUIDE

function in

the

EDIT

AUX.

mode operation,

check whether

the program

number to

be selected

is

registered

in

the

memory

(MD1:).

2375

2470

DATA

word:’NP’

The NP command value

for

specifying

the

next

pallet

is

other than

1

to

14.

[Code]

Alarm-caused

NP

command value

in

hexadecimal

2555

’NP’

Command

is

invalidity

In

PP C

specification

time,

a next

palette

order was ordered

at

the

time

of PPC

entering.

[Index]

None

[Character-string] None

[Code]

None

[Probable Faulty Locations]

In

PPC

specification

time,

a next

palette

order was

ordered

at

the

time

of PP C

entering.

[Measures

to

Take]

Program

turne into

a

regular

order.



4202-E I-56-A1

I.

PPC

(PALLETE

POOL LINE

CONTROL)

FOR HORIZONTAL


(FOR

MC

SERIES)

4279 PP C communication error

An

error occurred

in

communication between

new PP C

and touch panel via RS232C.

[Index]

None

[Character-string]

None

[Code] None

4282 PP C cycle can’t start

[Index] None

[Character-string]

None

[Code] None

[Probable

Faulty

Locations]

In order at times

to

perform

PP C cyclic

start

PPC ON (continuation/1

cycle),

NC

starting

button

by

a

machine

type

panel

was

pushed.

[Measures

to

Take]

When at

times

PP C

cyclic

start

is

performed

PPC

ON

(continuation/1

cycle), at

PPC

cyclic

starting

button

by

PPC

panel

push.



J.

SPINDLE THERMAL DEVIATION

COMPENSATION SYSTEM

v2

(FOR

STANDARD AND ATTACHMENT

MOUNTABLE

SPINDLES)



4202-

E J-1-A1

J SPINDLE

THERMAL

DEVIATION COMPENSATION SYSTEM

v2

(FOR

STANDARD

AND


SPINDLES)

SECTION

1

OUTLINE

The

system

is

largely

classified into

the

following

two

categories:

System

I

The

system

used for

machining

centers not

equipped

with

attachments

and

spindlehead

swivel specification

System

II

The

system

used for machining

centers equipped with attachments

and

spindlehead

swivel

specification

Each

system

provides

the

following

functions.

System

I

(The

system

used for

machining

centers not equipped with attachments an d

spindle

head

swivel mechanism)

(1)

The

temperature

sensors mounted on themachine detect

temperature

change caused by

high-speed spindle

rotation.

The

function

automatically

compensates for

the

error

caused by

thermal

deviation

in three directions (X,

Y, Z)

according

to

the detected thermal deviation.

(2)

Spindle thermal deviation

compensation

function for

the

machine equipped with the variable

pre-load mechanism for the spindle

bearings

The function reduces

positional

deviation

caused by changes in bearing

pre-load.

(3) Spindle

protective monitoring

function

The function to

stop

the

spindle

before the

bearings

are seized

causing

spindle

lock

by

monitoring

the

spindle

temperature

(4)

Compensation

data check function

The

function to disable

outputting of abnormal

compensation

data,

provided as

measures for

malfunctions

of

temperature

sensors

an d

other

troubles.

System

II (The

system

used for

machining

centers

equipped

with attachments and

spindlehead swivel

specification)

(1) The temperature sensors mounted

on

the machine detect

temperature change

caused

by

high-speed

spindle rotation. The function

automatically compensates

for the error caused

by

thermal

deviation in three

directions

(X,

Y,

Z)

according

to

the

detected thermal deviation.

(2)

Spindle protective

monitoring

function

The function to

stop

the

spindle

before the

bearings

are seized

causing

spindle

lock

by monitoring

the

spindle temperature

(3)

Compensation

data check function

The function

to disable

outputting

of abnormal

compensation

data,

provided

as measures

for

malfunctions

of temperature

sensors

and

other troubles.

(4)

Attachment

adaptive

function

The

function

to make

compensation

taking

into

account

attachment

type

and index

ang le by

automatically

recognizing

them.

Note: Usable

functions

automatically

become valid

according

to the machine

configuration.

The thermal deviation

compensation

function

v2

is

provided

as

System

I

and

System

II

as

indicated above

and the available

system

is

automatically

selected

depending on

whether or not the

attachment (swivel

head)

specification

is

supported.

Accordingly,

explanation

is

given

for these

two

systems

independently.

Pleaseread theexplanation

of

the

relevant

system.



4202-E

J-2-A1

J SPINDLE

THERMAL

DEVIATION COMPENSATION SYSTEM v2

(FOR

STANDARD

AND


SPINDLES)

SECTION 2 COMPENSATION SYSTEM

CONFIGURATION

Fig.

2-1

shows an example

of

system

configuration.

Spindlehead

a Temperature

sensors

TM P

board

Thermal

deviation

compensation

processing

Temperature

measuring

instrument

zn

NC unit: OSP-U100M

Fig. 2-1 System Configuration

In

this system, the temperature sensors

mounted in

the

spindlehead

measure

the

temperatures. The

temperature

data issent to

theTMP

board

in

the NC unit.

Then,

the NC

processes

the

temperature

data to

calculate

compensation amounts.

These

compensation

amounts

are

added to

the

readings

of

position

encoders. Thus, the

system

compensates positioning

errors

caused

by

thermal deviation.



4202-E J-3-A1

J SPINDLE

THERMAL


(FOR

STANDARD

AND


SPINDLES)

SECTION 3 SYSTEM

I

Screen for Checking

Thermal Deviation

Compensation

Data.

AUTO

OPERATION

THERMAL

COMP.

MONITOR

PAGE

46

100

OVERALL

VALUE

X

In

HECK DATA

A/D

SAMPLING

A/D

AVE

TIMES

SENSOR

TEMPARATURE

Y Z

0.000.000 0.000

HOT SENSOR

(NO. )

ESTIMATE

X

AXIS

1

20

COMP.

0.001

0.002

0.000

0.000

0.000

0.000

0.001

0.002

0.000

0.001

0.002

0.000

0.000

0. 000

0.000

0.001

0.002

0.000

0.000

41.6

2

5.9

3

6.2

29.5

Y

AXIS

1

21.3

2

OVER

(-)

OVER

(-)

OVER(-)

3

Z

AXIS

1

2

3

ROTARY

DEV.

PROGRAM

ACTUAL

PART BLOCK

SELECT

POSIT.

FROGRAH

DATA SEARCH

CHECK

DATA

[EXTEND:

1-1.

A/D

SAMPLING

Intervals for measuring

temperature

by the sensors connected to the TM P

board.

The

setting

is fixed

at

100

msec.

1-2.

A/D

AVE

TIMES

The number of data

pieces used

to calculate the

average temperature.

Displayed here is the value

set

at

AVERAGING

TIMES

on the

thermal

deviation compensation

parameter

screen.

1-3. TEMPERATURE

Measured temperatures are listed

according

to

the

sensor channel

numbers.

1-4.

ESTIMATE

Compensation

amounts

calculated

from the

temperature

data.

1-5. COMP.

Thermal deviation compensation amounts

sent to the

servo

processor.

When YES is

set

at

TRAVERSE

X

(Y, Z)

on the thermal deviation

compensation

parameter

screen,

the

compensation amounts

are sent

at the time of

rapid

traverse or

cutting

feed

in

A UT O or

MDI mode

or at intervals of

thermal deviation

compensation

(10

seconds).

1-6. OVERALL

VALUE

Compensation

amount

currently

added to each

axis

position.



4202-

E J-4-A1

J SPINDLE

THERMAL


(FOR

STANDARD

AND


SPINDLES)

AXIS

(Thermal Deviation)

1/2/3

-7.

These represent

the

compensation

measures to be used for

compensating

for deviation

on the

individual

axes

and

designation

is

possible

for

up

to

3

kinds.

1-8.

ROTARY DEV.

This

represents

deviation to

reduce the influence

of

positional changes

(spindle deviation) when

spindle

bearing

pre-load changes

(for the

spindle equipped

with

pre-loading position

variable

bearings)

and

that

of tool

edge

positional

deviation due

to rotation.

This

compensation

amount is

added

to OVERALL

VALUE

Z.



4202-E J-5-A1

J SPINDLE

THERMAL


(FOR

STANDARD

AND


SPINDLES)

2.

Alarm

Message

<

Alarm P

>

AD P

START818

An

alarm

occurred

while

the

AD

conversion

processor

board was initial ized after

power

ON.

[Index]

None


[Code]

X

X=1:

Synchronous counter value

remains

1

.

X=2:

A

system

alarm occurred when the

synchronous

counter

value was 1

.

X=3:

Synchronous

counter

value remains

3.

X=4: A

system

alarm

occurred when the

synchronous

counter

value

was

3.

[Probable

Faulty

Locations]

TM P

board

(Thermal deviation AD

conversion processor

board)

[Measures

to Take]

Replace the TM P board.

[Remark]

If

a

TM P board

is not

connected,

this alarmdoesnot

occur

but theNC entersthe halt state due to access

to

the

shared RAM

of

TM P

and restart

is disabled.

<

Alarm-A

>

Thermal deviation

compensation

Temperature

rise calculated based

on the

axis deviation amounts of the individual axes exceeded the

temperature

limits set

for them.

[Index] None

[Character-string]

None

[Code]

XY

X=1:

Temperature

r ise exceeded the limit.

Y=1: X-axis

thermal

deviation 1

Y=2: X-axis thermal deviation 2

Y=3:

X-axis thermal deviation

3

Y=4:

Y-axis

thermal

deviation

1

Y=5:

Y-axis

thermal

deviation

2

Y=6:

Y-axis

thermal

deviation 3

Y=7: Z-axis thermal deviation 1

Y=8:

Z-axis thermal

deviation

2

Y=9:

Z-axis

thermal deviation

3

Y=A: Deviation

of

attachment

spindle

[Probable

Faulty

Locations]

1)

Abnormal

TMP,

or

the

machine

is

generating

abnormal heat.

2)

The

limit

value set for

the

parameter

of

the corresponding

channel is too

small,

or

the

machine

1307



4202-E J-6-A1

J SPINDLE

THERMAL


(FOR

STANDARD

AND


SPINDLES)

<Alarm

D

>

AD P

ERROR261

An abnormality

occurred

in the

AD conversion processor board and

operation

check counter does not

increase

its

value.

Sampling is

impossible.

[Index]

None

[Character-string]

None

[Code]

None

[Probable

Faulty

Locations]

TMP

board

(Thermal

deviation

AD

conversion

processor

board)

[Measures to

Take]

Replace

the TM P

board.

Thermal deviation

compensation

Compensation

is

impossible

since

the

temperature

data

input through

the

TMP

board is abnormal.

This

is the alarm related to the thermal deviation

compensation

function.

[Index]

None

[Character-string]

None

[Code] XY

X

=

1

:

Abnormal

temperature

data

was

sent

from

TMP.

Y

=

Sensor CH

2:

Temperature

rise has exceeded

the

limit value.

3:

The estimated

temperature

has

exceeded

the conversion

table

covering

range.

X

=2,

3

Y= 1

:

X-axis

thermal

deviation

1

Y=

2:

X-axis

thermal deviation

2

Y=

3: X-axis thermal deviation 3

Y=

4: Y-axis

thermal

deviation

1

Y= 5:

Y-axis thermal deviation

2

Y=

6:

Y-axis

thermal deviation

3

Y= 7: Z-axis thermal deviation 1

Y= 8:

Z-axis thermal deviation 2

Y= 9:

Z-axis thermal deviation

3

4: The overall

compensation amount of

the

corresponding

axis

ha s

exceeded the limit.

Y=

1: X-axis

Y=

2:

Y-axis

Y=

3:

Z-axis

4275

[Probable

Faulty

Locations]

X= 1 TM P

is

faulty

or the

machine is

generating

abnormal heat.

2

A

small value

is

set

as

a limit

at

the thermal deviation

compensation parameter

of the problem

channel,

or the

machine

is

generating

abnormal heat.

3

The

estimated

temperature

causing the relevant deviation exceeds

the

compensation

data

setting range.

(The machine is

generating

abnormal

heat.)

4

The overall

compensation

amount of the

corresponding

axis has exceeded the limit.

(The

machine

is

generating abnormal heat.)

[Measures

to

Take]

Set a

large limit value at the thermal


parameter. Or,

remove the cause

of

abnormal heat

in

the

machine.



4202-E

J-7-A1

J SPINDLE

THERMAL


(FOR

STANDARD

AND


SPINDLES)

[Related

Specifications]

Thermal deviation

compensation

Thermistor error284

[Index]

None


[Code]

Sensor

CH

[Probable

Faulty

Locations]

1)

The corresponding

temperature

sensor is malfunctioning

or its

wiring

is broken.

2)

The

TM P

is

faulty.

[Measures

to Take]

1)

Check

if

the corresponding

temperature

sensor is mounted

correctly.

2)

Replace

the

temperature

sensor.

[Others]

-

The

compensation

amount becomes

“0 ”

for deviation

which

is detected

by

a

malfunctioning sensor.

-

Fo r

sensor

channels

7

and

8

used for

the

attachment

specification,

this alarm

does

not occur.



4202-E J-8-A1

J SPINDLE

THERMAL


(FOR

STANDARD

AND


SPINDLES)

3.

Precaution

Regarding

Thermal

Deviation

Compensation

Parameters

NOTICE

: The thermal deviation compensation

parameters

described

on

the following

pages

have

already

been

set

at

Okuma. Do

not

change

these

parameters.

Change of

these

parameters

may

disable normal compensation.

If

you

change

the

parameters

by

mistake, immediately turn off

the

power

and

then

turn

it on .

The

previous parameter

data remains effective unless yo u press the BACKUP

key

after

parameter

change.

3-1

.

Screen Transition

*1

Thermal Deviation

Comp.

Parameter

Screen

1 Page

1

Thermal

Deviation

Comp.

Parameter

Screen

2 Page

1

age

backward|page

forward

Thermal

Deviation

Comp.

Parameter

Screen

1

Page

2

Page

forward

Page

backward

7:

ITEM

F7:

ITEM

Page

backwardjpage

forward

Thermal Deviation

Comp. Parameter

Screen

2

Page

2

F6:

ITEM

F6:

ITEM

Thermal Deviation

Comp.

Parameter

Screen

1 Page

3

F6:

ITEM F7 : ITEM

*2

*2

Thermal Deviation

Comp.

Parameter Screen

3,

.

Conversion

Table

5

Thermal

Deviation

Comp.

Parameter

Screen

3,

Conversion

Table

1

7: ITEM

Page forward

1

F6 :

|TEM

Page

backward

Max. 4

pages

Page forward

1

Page

backward

Max.

4

pages

*1

Each time [F5]

(AXIS CHANGE)

is

pressed,

the

displayed

axis data

changes

in the

following

order:

X Y

Z

X...

*2 There are

five

conversion

tables

(TABLE

1

to

5),

which

are

switched

in

turn

by

depression

of an

ITEM

key.



4202-E J-9-A1

J

SPINDLE THERMAL

DEVIATION

COMPENSATION SYSTEM v2

(FOR STANDARD

AN D

ATTACHMENT

MOUNTABLE

SPINDLES)

4. Thermal Deviation

Comp.

Common

Parameter Screen

1 (Page 1)

PARAMBTER

SET

*

THERMAL DEVIATION

COMP.

COMMON

PARAMETER

*

NO.

O.

YES

11.

TEMP SAMPLING

YES

12.

AVERAGING TIMES

YES 13. TRAVERSE

(X)

NO 14.

TRAVERSE

(Y)

YES

15.

TRAVERSE

(Z)

NO

16.

M

CODE COMP.

NO

17.

NO 18.

NO 19.

NO

20.

1.

COMPENSATION

SW

2. SENSOR

CHI

100

20

3.

CH2

YE S

CH3

.

YE S

CH4 YES.

YES

H5.

CH6

.

8.

CH7

CE8

.

10.

SCREEN SWITCH

X

Y

Z

AC T

POSIT

(MC)

0.000

0.000

0.000

ITEM

t ITEMI

EXTEND

ET ADD

SE L

t

p

IMP 2i rmi

F

YI

i

rmnÿrrn

(Tin

Asshown

in

the

table

below,

theparameter data is set

by

use

of the corresponding

valid

command.

For

the

SEL command,

pressing the function

ke y (SEL)

alternates YES and NO.

Parameter Valid

Command

Default

Min.

Value Max. Value Setting Unit

COMPENSATION

SW

SENSOR

CH 1

to

CH8

SCREEN SWITCH

TEMP

SAMPLING

AVERAGING TIMES

TRAVERSE (X)

TRAVERSE

(Y)

TRAVERSE

(Z)

M

CODE COMR

SE L

YES YES,

NO

YES,

NO

YES,

NO

1

ms

1 (time)

YES,

NO

YES,

NO

YES, NO

YES,

NO

SE L

*3

SE L

YE S

SET,

AD D

SET,

AD D

11

00 1000

255

0

1

SEL YES

SEL YES

SE L YE S

SE L YES

*3 The

sensor

channels to be used depend on the machine type and the maximum spindle speed.



4202-E J-10-A1

J SPINDLE

THERMAL


(FOR

STANDARD

AND


SPINDLES)

4-1

. COMPENSATION SW

(No.1)

Turns

on

or off the thermal deviation

compensation

function.

Set

this

parameter

to “NO

before setting

parameters

for individual

compensation

amounts.

4-2.

SENSOR

(CH1

to

CH8)

(No.2

to

9)

These

parameters

select

the

temperature

sensor numbers to be used.

Only the

sensors

set

at

YES

can

be used as the hot

temperature

input channel or base

temperature

input

channel. (For details,

refer

to the

descriptions

in

7-1 and 7-2.)

If NO is

set at

the sensor which has been selected as

a

ho t

temperature

or base

temperature input

channel,

the

following

error occurs:

5286

Set

condition error

YE S : Th e sensor is usable.

NO

:

The sensor is

not

usable.

Setting

Example:

MX-45VA

with Max.

Spindle Speed 12,000

min-1

Sensor No. Sensor

Position

CH 1 Near spindle

bearings

CH2 Near

integral

motor

CH3 Not

used

*5

CH 4 Next

to

the oil temp,

regulator

sensor

(reference position)

CH5

Not set *6

CH 6

Not set

CH 7

Not set

CH8 Not set

*5

“Not used”

means

that the

sensor

becomes usable if connected with the

TMP

board.

*6 “Not

set”

means that the

sensor

becomes usable

by

use o f

TMP

board that can

handle

eight

channels. Th e normal TM P board is

designed

to communicate with

four

channels;

the board

for

eight

channels is selected

as

necessary.

4-3.

SCREEN SWITCH

(No.

10)

Determines whether to display or not the

thermal

deviation

compensation parameter

screens

(conversion tables).

NO :

Parameter

screens

are not

displayed.

YE S

:

Parameter screens are

displayed.

4-4. TEMP

SAMPLING (No.1

1

)

Sets the intervals

at

which the

TMP

board

measures temperature.



4202-E

J-11-A1

J SPINDLE

THERMAL


(FOR

STANDARD

AND


SPINDLES)

4-5. AVERAGING

TIMES

(No.

12)

Determines the number

of

temperature

data

pieces

to

be collected

and

averaged.

4-6. TRAVERSE

(X), (Y), (Z) (No.1

3

to 1

5)


compensation

data

in

the

servo processor

is

updated

at

the

time

of

X-

(Y-

or

Z-)

axis

movement

in AUTO

or

MDI

mode or at intervals

(10 seconds)

for

compensating

thermal deviation.

This parameter

chooses

the

update

timing.

YE S

:

The

compensation

amount

is

updated

when

X-(Y-

or

Z-) axis

is

moved

(by

rapid

traverse or

cutting

feed)

in

AUTO

or

MDI

mode.

NO : The

compensation amount

is

updated

every

10 seconds (thermal


interval).

4-7.

M

CODE

COMP.

(NO.16)

This

parameter

makes

“M297”

code valid. This code

specifies updating

of

the

thermal deviation

compensation

amount to be sent to

the

servo

processor

even

during machining

that is not

associated

with axis movements.

M297 updates

the

compensation

amount

only

when

the setting

for No.

13/14/15

‘‘TRAVERSE

(X)/(Y)/(Z)” is

“YES” with the

setting

for this

parameter

“YES”.

If the

setting

for this

parameter

is

“NO”,

compensation

amount is not

updated

even

if

M297

is

specified.

YES : Updating

of

the

compensation

amount,

specified

by

M297,

is valid.

NO

:

Updating

of

the compensation

amount,

specified

by

M297, is invalid.



4202-E

J-12-A1

J

SPINDLE THERMAL DEVIATION COMPENSATION SYSTEM v2

(FOR STANDARD

AN D

ATTACHMENT

MOUNTABLE

SPINDLES)


Comp.

Common

Parameter Screen

1 (Page

2)

PARAMETER

SET

*

THERMAL

DEVIATION

COMP.

COMMON PARAMETER

*

1. QUIT

VALUE

2. ROTARY

FACTOR

1

3. ROTARY

FACTOR

2

4.

PROCESS SWITCH

5.

COMPENSATE

SE C

6.

JUDGING

TIMING

7.

SIDE

STEPS

(X)3

8. SIDE STEPS

(Y)3

9.

SIDE STEPS

(Z)1

10.

SIDE STEPS

(Z)2

11. SIDE STEPS

(Z)3

0.05

0.0

0.0

50 0

10

5

0

0

0

0

0

X Y

Z

ACT

POSIT

(MC)

0.000

0.000

0.000

SEL

ITEM

T

ITEM

4-

EXTEND

ET ADD

rrr i rKÿrFÿfFÿ(TTinr6~irF~nr?~6T

As

shown

in

the table

below,

the parameter data

is

set

by

use

of

the

corresponding

valid command.

Parameter

Valid

Command Default

Min.

Value

Max. Value

Setting

Unit

QUIT

VALUE

ROTARY FACTOR

1

ROTARY

FACTOR

2

PROCESS SWITCH

COMPENSATE

SEC

JUDGING TIMING

SIDE STEPS

(X)3

SIDE

STEPS (Y)3

SIDE

STEPS

(Z)1

SIDE

STEPS

(Z)2

SIDE STEPS

(Z)3

SET,

AD D

SET, AD D

SET,

AD D

SET,

AD D

SET,

AD D

SET,

AD D

SET,

AD D

SET,

AD D

SET,

AD D

SET,

AD D

SET, AD D

0.05 0.00 1.00

0.01

O -20.0

-20.0

20.00

20.00

0.1

0

0.1

1 min-1

1 (sec)

1 (time)

1 (time)

1

(time)

1 (time)

1

(time)

1 (time)

0

00 10000

10

10

600

5 1

5

O

0

4

O 0 4

O

0

4

O

0

4

O 0 4



4202-E J-13-A1

J SPINDLE

THERMAL


(FOR

STANDARD

AND


SPINDLES)

5-1.

QUIT

VALUE

(No.1)

In

the transient state where the

spindle

speed changes

continuously

for

a short

time,

the function

calculation

occurs

to absorb

the

difference between

temperature

rise and

the

estimated

temperature.

This

parameter

determines

when to

stop

this

function calculation.

5-2. ROTARY FACTOR (No.2 ,

3)

Centrifugal

force

changes the spindle

overall

length,

and

hence the

tool

edge position.

This parameter

is the coefficient

used to

compensate

this deviation

(of

the tool

edge position)

calculated

by

the formula

below:

Deviation of tool

edge

position

=

rotary

factor 1

+

{rotary

factor

2

(spindle

speed/10000)}

Where, rotary

factor 1 is

the

intercept

of

centrifugal

deviation and

rotary

factor

2

is

the centrifugal

deviation

rate.

If

the calculated deviation

is smaller

than

0,

no

compensation is

performed.

5-3.

PROCESS

SWITCH

(No.4)

This

parameter

sets

the speed

change range.

Based on this

range,

the NC

recognizes

a

change in

the

spindle speed.

If

the

spindle speed

largely

exceeds this

range, the

system

starts function calculation

in

the transient

state.

5-4.

COMPENSATE SEC

(No.5)

This

parameter

set the interval at which the NC calculates the thermal

compensation

amounts (and

executes

compensation).

5-5. JUDGING TIMING

(No.6)

This

parameter

is

the

number

of

compensation

intervals used

after

the spindle speed change

until

an

appropriate

time constant ratio

is

finally decided.

If

the set

value

is

smaller

than the number set at SLIDE

STEPS described

below,

the following

alarm

occurs: 5286 Se t condition error

5-6. SIDE STEPS

(X3) (Y3,

Z1,

Z2,

Z3)

(No. 7

to

11)

This

parameter

is the

number

of

times

the thermal deviation

compensation amount

is calculated with

the filter coefficient fixed at

“1”

at the

beginning

of

calculation

process

in the

transient

state. This

parameter

is

used

to reduce

delays in

the

response

from the

temperature

sensor.

If the

set value

is larger

than the number set at JUDGING TIMING described

above, the

following

alarm

occurs:

5286

Set condition error



4202-E

J-14-A1

J SPINDLE

THERMAL


(FOR

STANDARD

AND


SPINDLES)

Thermal

Deviation

Comp.

Common

Parameter Screen

1

(Page 3)

.

PARAMETER

SET

*

THERMAL

DEVIATION

COMP.

COMMON PARAMETER

*

12.

OVERALL

LIMIT

(X)

13. OVERALL

LIMIT

(Y)

14.

OVERALL LIMIT

(Z)

15 ,

ROTARY

DEV.

LIMIT

16.

ROTARY

DEV.

FACTOR

1

17.

ROTARY DEV. FACTOR

2

18.

ROTARY

DEV.

FACTOR

3

19.

ROTARY DEV.

FACTOR

4

20. ROTARY

DEV.

FACTOR

5

999

999

999

0.000

0.000

0.000

0.000

0.000

0.

000

Y

z

AC T POSIT

(MC)

0.000

.000

0.000

ITEMt

ITEM

4

EXTEND

ET

ADD

SE L

IF

i

)frÿrFÿfFÿ(T~5irF~6irÿTirF~e' i

As shown

in

the table

below,

the parameter

data

is

set

by

use of

the

corresponding

valid command.

Valid Command

Default

Setting

Unit

arameter

Min. Value

Max. Value

OVERALL

LIMIT

(X)

OVERALL

LIMIT

(Y)

OVERALL

LIMIT

(Z)

ROTARY

DEV.

LIMIT

ROTARY DEV

FACTOR

1

ROTARY

DEV.

FACTOR

2

ROTARY

DEV.

FACTOR 3

ROTARY

DEV.

FACTOR

4

ROTARY

DEV.

FACTOR

5

SET,

AD D

SET,

AD D

SET, AD D

SET,

ADD

SET,

AD D

SET, AD D

SET, AD D

SET,

AD D

SET, AD D

999 0

9999

9999

9999

1

[Am

1

[im

1

[im

0.001

mm

0.001

0.001

0.001

0.001

0.001

999

0

999 0

0.000

0.000

0.000

0.000

0.000

0.000

-1

.000

-15.000

0.000

0.000

-15.000

-15.000

1.000

15.000

30.000

30.000

15.000

15.000

OVERALL

LIMIT

(X), (Y),

(Z)

(NO.

12

to

14)

This

parameter

sets the

limit

value of

the compensation amount for

the

corresponding

axis.

If

the overall

compensation

amount

including

the

deviation of

tool

edge

position

exceeds

the set

limit

value,

the overall

compensation

amount is

replaced

with

the

limit

value

set for

this

parameter.

The set

value is treated

in

an absolute value.

If

this

replacement

occurs,

the following alarm

occurs: Alarm

D

4275

Thermal deviation

compensation.

ROTARY

DEV. LIMIT

(NO. 15)

This

parameter

sets the maximum

(minimum)

value of

rotary

deviation

compensation

amount.

If

the

rotary

deviation compensation amount

exceeds

the set limit

value,

the rotation deviation

compensation

amount

is

replaced

with the

value set for this

parameter.

ROTARY

DEV. FACTOR

1

,

2,

3,

4

(NO.

16 to

19)

These are

factors

used to calculate

rotary

deviation amount.

ROTARY DEV.

FACTOR 5

(NO.

20)

This is

a

factor

used

to

calculate

rotary

deviation

amount.

6-1.

6-2.

6-3.

6-4.



4202-E J-15-A1

J


(FOR STANDARD

AN D

ATTACHMENT

MOUNTABLE

SPINDLES)

7.

Thermal Deviation

Compensation

Parameter Screen

2 (Page 1)

PARAMETER

SET

*

THERMAL

DEVIATION

COMP.

PARAMETER X

*

BLOCK]

BLOCK 2

BLOCK

3

1.

HO T SENSOR

2.

BASE

TMP SENSOR

3.

TMP ZERO ADJUST

4

CONVERSION

TABLE

5

CORRECT

FACTOR

6.

TM P

TIME

CONST

7.

FIXED

TIME

CONST

8.

TEMP

RISE

LIMIT

1

2

3

4

4

4

0. 0

0.

0

0.0

3

3 3

0.

0

0. 0

0.

0

100

100

100

-1

-1

-1

20.0 20.

0

20.0

X

V Z

ACT POSIT

(MC)

0.000

0.000

0. 000

AXIS

SE L

CHANGE

ITEM

T

ITEM

4-

EXTEND

ET

ADD

As

shown

in

the table

below,

the parameter data

is

set

by

use


valid

command.

Parameter

Valid

Command Default

Min.

Value

Max. Value

Setting

Unit

HOT SENSOR CH

BASE

TEMP

SENSOR CH

TM P ZERO

ADJUST

CONVERSION

TABLE

CORRECT

FACTOR

TMP TIME

CONST

FIXED

TIME

CONST

TEMP

RISE

LIMIT

SET,

AD D

SET, AD D

SET,

AD D

SET,

AD D

SET,

AD D

SET,

AD D

SET,

AD D

SET,

AD D

CH

No.

CH

No.

0.1

'C

Number

O

0 8

0

0 8

O

-9.9 9.9

1

5

-2.0 2.0

0.1

1

(sec)

0

5000

99999

-1 1

0.1

°c

0.0 0.0 90.0



4202-E

J-17-A1

J


(FOR STANDARD

AN D

ATTACHMENT

MOUNTABLE

SPINDLES)


Compensation

Parameter Screen

2 (Page

2)

PARAMETER

SE T

*

THERMAL

DEVIATION

COMP.

PARAMETER

X

*

BLOCK

1

BLOCK

2

BL0CK3

1.2 0.0

.0

.

RISE

PARAMETER

1

10.

RISE PARAMETER

2

11.

RISE BASE

MIN

12.

DROP

PARAMETER

1

13.

DROP

PARAMETER

2

14.

DROP

BASE

MIN

15.

QUIT

FACTER 1

15.

QUIT

FACTER

2

17. STOP

RATIO

3

2

1. 2

.2

2.1

1.5

.

5

2.0

10

0

5

2.5

.2. 2

0. 500 0. 25 0

. 500

0.8

.8

0.8

10.0

.0

40.0

V

2

AC T

POSIT

(MC)

0.000

0.000

.000

AXIS

CHANGE

ITEM

t

ITEM

4-

EXTEND

ET ADD

SE L

A s show n

in the table below,

each

of

the parameter data

is

set

by

use

of

the

corresponding

valid

commands.

Parameter

Valid

Command

Default

Min.

Value Max. Value Setting Unit

RISE

PARAMETER 1

RISE

PARAMETER 2

RISE

BASE MIN

DROP

PARAMETER 1

DROP

PARAMETER

2

DROP BASE

MIN

QUIT

FACTOR

1

QUIT

FACTOR

2

STOP

RATIO

SET,

AD D

SET,

AD D

SET, AD D

SET,

AD D

SET,

AD D

SET, AD D

SET, AD D

SET,

AD D

SET, AD D

0.0 0 30.0 0.1

0

0 10000

1

0.0

0.0 30.0 0.1

0.1.0

0.0

30.0

0 0 10000 1

0.0 0.0 30.0

0.1

0

0.000

1.000 0.001

0.0

0.0 5.0 0.1

0.0 0.0 999.9

0.1



4202-E J-18-A1

J SPINDLE

THERMAL


(FOR

STANDARD

AND


SPINDLES)

8-1

. RISE

PARAMETER 1

,

RISE

PARAMETER 2,

RISE

BASE

MIN

(No.

9 to

11)

These

are

the

coefficients

used to determine the

appropriate

time

constant

ratio for

temperature

rise.

DROP

PARAMETER

1,

DROP

PARAMETER

2,

DROP BASE

MIN

(No.12to

14)

These are the

coefficients

used

to

determine the appropriate time

constant

ratio for temperature drop.

8-2.

8-3.

QUIT FACTOR

1

,

QUIT

FACTOR

2

(No.

15,

16)

These

are the coefficients

used to calculate the value for

stopping

calculation of the filter coefficient.

If

the

filter coefficient becomes smaller than the value calculated f rom these

values,

the

system stops

calculating

the

change

of

filter coefficient.

8-4.

STOP

RATIO (NO.

1

7)

This

is

a

factor

used

to

determine the

appropriate

time

constant

ratio for

stopping

the

spindle.



4202-E J-19-A1

J

SPINDLE THERMAL

DEVIATION

COMPENSATION SYSTEM v2

(FOR STANDARD

AN D

ATTACHMENT

MOUNTABLE

SPINDLES)

9.

Thermal Deviation

Compensation

Parameter Screen 3

(Page 1)

PARAMETER

SE T

*

THERMAL

DEVIATION

COMP.

PARAMETER

*

CONVERSION

TABLE

1

-3. -2. -1.4.

-0.

0.

1.

.

9

-9999

.9 .9 .9

.

9

-9999

.

9

-9999

.9

.8

.8 .8

.8

.8

.8 .8

.7 .7 .7

7 .

7

.7

.8

.6 .85

.

6

.

6

.6

.8

.5

.

5

.

5

,5

.

5

.5

.

5

.4

,4

.4 .4

.4

.4 . 4

.3 .33

.

3

.

3

.3

.

3

.2 . 2

.

2 .

2

. 2

.2

.

2

. 1 . 1 .

1

.1

.1 .1

.1

.0 .0 .0

.0

.0

.0

.0

X Y

Z

0.000

0.000

0.

000

CT POSIT

(MC)

ITEM

t

ITEM;

EXTEND

ET ADD

SE L

(TTÿrrÿ(T~j) (ÿTn(Tÿ(TÿrFÿrrr i

As

shown

in

the table

below,

the parameter data

is

set

by

use


valid

command.

Valid

Command

Default

Setting

Unit

arameter

Min.

Value

Max.

Value

Thermal deviation com¬

pensation

amount

SET, AD D

0 9999 9999 pm

9-1 . Thermal

Deviation

Compensation

Amount

The table

shows the

thermal deviation amounts corresponding

to

the

estimated

temperatures

calculated from the measured

temperatures.

The deviation

amounts

are set

in

increments

of 0.1°C

(1

.8°F) within the

range

from

—

4.9°C

to

40.0°C

(23.2°F

104.0°F). The data of an individual table covers seven

pages.



4202-E J-20-A1

J SPINDLE

THERMAL


(FOR

STANDARD

AND


SPINDLES)

SECTION 4 SYSTEM II

Screen for Checking

Thermal Deviation

Compensation

Data.

AUTO

OPERATION

THERMAL

COMP.

MONITOR

PAGE 46

100

OVERALL

VALUE X

lmm

HECK

DATA

A/D

SAMPLING

A/D

AVE

TIMES

SENSOR

TEMPARATURE

V

z

0. 000

0 . 0 00

HOT

SENSOR

(NO.

)

ESTIMATE

X AXIS

1

0.000

COMP.

0.

000

0.

000

-0.

010

-0.025

-0.053

-0.027

-0.011

-0.015

-0.010

-0.010

-0. 005

20

0.000

0.000

-0.010

-0.025

-0.053

-0.027

-0.011

-0.015

-0.010

41.5

2

5.9

3

6.

2

Y

AXIS

1

9.5

2

1.

3

OVER(-)

OVER(-)

OVER(-)

3

Z

AXIS

1

2

3

ROTARY

DEV.

AT.

SPNDL

-0.005

PROGRAM

ACTUAL

PART

BLOCK

SELECT

POSIT. FROGRAM LATA

SEARCH

CHECK

DATA

[EXTEND:

rrÿrr2 irrr iiTÿrr~ÿrF ~6 'i rrÿ-)rrB~ i

1-1.

A/D

SAMPLING

Intervals for measuring

temperature

by the sensors connected to the TM P

board.

The

setting

is fixed

at

100

msec.

1-2.

A/D

AVE

TIMES

The number of data

pieces used

to calculate the

average temperature.

Displayed here is the value

set

at

AVERAGING

TIMES

on the

thermal


parameter

screen.

1-3. TEMPERATURE

Measured temperatures are listed

according

to

the

sensor channel

numbers.

1-4.

ESTIMATE

Compensation

amounts

calculated

from the

temperature

data.

1-5. COMP.

Thermal deviation compensation amounts

sent to the

servo

processor.

When YES is

set

at

TRAVERSE

X

(Y, Z)

on the thermal deviation

compensation

parameter

screen,

the

compensation amounts

are sent

at the time of

rapid

traverse or

cutting

feed

in

A UT O or

MDI mode

or at intervals of

thermal deviation

compensation

(10

seconds).

Note: Since

compensation

amount is calculated

taking

into account the attachment index

angle,

compensation

amount

of

an axis not

moving

may

be

updated.



4202-E

J-21-A1

J SPINDLE

THERMAL


(FOR

STANDARD

AND


SPINDLES)

1-6. OVERALL

VALUE

Compensation

amount

currently

added

to each

axis

position.

Note: Since compensation amount is calculated

taking

into account

the attachment

index angle, the

total of compensation

amounts

of

AXIS 1, AXIS

2

and AXIS

3

may

not be equal

to

the

OVERALL

VALUE

of

the

corresponding

axis.

1-7.

AXIS

(Thermal Deviation)

1/2/3

These

represent

the

compensation

measures

to

be

used for

compensating

for dev ia tion on the

individual axes and designation is possible for

up

to 3 kinds.

1-8.

ROTARY DEV.

This

represents the deviation

used

to

reduce

the influence of

positional

deviation of

a tool (tool edge

position

deviation) and the

compensation

amount for this deviation is

added

to OVERALL VALUE

Z.

1-9.

AT.

SPNDL

This

corresponds

to

the deviation of

an

attachment

spindle

for

the

machining

center

equipped

with

an

attachment.



4202-E

J-22-A1

J SPINDLE

THERMAL


(FOR

STANDARD

AND


SPINDLES)

2.

Alarm

Message

<

Alarm P

>

AD P

START818

An

alarm

occurred

while

the

AD

conversion

processor

board was initial ized after

power

ON.

[Index]

None


[Code]

X

X=1:

Synchronous counter value

remains

1

.

X=2:

A

system

alarm occurred when the

synchronous

counter

value was 1

.

X=3:

Synchronous

counter

value remains

3.

X=4: A

system

alarm

occurred when the

synchronous

counter

value

was

3.

[Probable

Faulty

Locations]

TM P

board

(Thermal deviation AD

conversion processor

board)

[Measures

to Take]

Replace the TM P board.

[Remark]

If

a

TM P board

is not

connected,

this alarmdoesnot

occur

but theNC entersthe halt state due to access

to

the

shared RAM

of

TM P

and restart

is disabled.

<

Alarm-A

>

Thermal deviation

compensation

Temperature

rise calculated based

on the

axis deviation amounts of the individual axes exceeded the

temperature limits

set

for

them.

[Index] None

[Character-string]

None

[Code]

XY

X=1:

Temperature

rise exceeded the limit.

Y=1:

X-axis thermal deviation 1

Y=2:

X-axis thermal

deviation

2

Y=3:

X-axis

thermal deviation 3

Y=4:

Y-axis

thermal deviation 1

Y=5:

Y-axis

thermal deviation

2

Y=6:

Y-axis

thermal deviation 3

Y=7: Z-axis thermal

deviation

1

Y=8: Z-axis thermal deviation

2

Y=9: Z-axis thermal

deviation

3

Y=A:

Deviation of

attachment

spindle

[Probable Faulty Locations]

1)

Abnormal

TMP,

or the

machine

is

generating

abnormal

heat.

2) The limit

value

set

for

the

parameter

of the

corresponding

channel is too

small,

or

the

machine

1307



4202-E J-23-A1

J SPINDLE

THERMAL


(FOR

STANDARD

AND


SPINDLES)

<Alarm

D

>

AD P

ERROR261

An abnormality

occurred

in the

AD conversion processor board and

operation

check counter does not

increase

its

value. The MOP-TOOL

function

does not

operate

(aborting

feedrate override

control).

[Index]

None

[Character-string]

None

[Code] None

[Probable

Faulty Locations]

TMP

board

(Thermal

deviation AD

conversion

processor

board)

[Measures to

Take]

Replace

the

TM P

board.

Thermal deviation

compensation

Compensation is

impossible since the

temperature

data

input through

the

TMP

board is abnormal.

4275

This

is

the

alarm related to

the

thermal deviation

compensation

function.

[Index]

None

[Character-string]

None

[Code] XY

X

=

1

:

Abnormal

temperature

data was sent

from

TMP.

Y

=

Sensor CH

2:

Temperature

rise has exceeded

the

limit value.

3:

The estimated

temperature

has

exceeded

the conversion

table

covering

range.

X

=2,

3

Y=

1

:


1

Y=

2:


2

Y=

3:


3

Y=

4: Y-axis

thermal

deviation

1

Y= 5:

Y-axis thermal deviation

2

Y=

6:

Y-axis

thermal deviation

3

Y= 7: Z-axis thermal deviation 1

Y= 8:

Z-axis thermal deviation 2

Y= 9:

Z-axis thermal deviation

3

4: The overall

compensation amount of

the

corresponding

axis has exceeded the limit.

Y=

1: X-axis

Y=

2: Y-axis

Y=

3:

Z-axis

[Probable

Faulty

Locations]

X=

1 TM P

is faulty

or

the

machine is

generating

abnormal heat.

2 A

small value

is set as a limit at the

thermal deviation compensation parameter of

the

problem

channel,

or the machine

is

generating

abnormal heat.

3

The

estimated

temperature

causing the relevant deviation exceeds

the

compensation data

setting

range.

(The

machine

is

generating

abnormal

heat.)

4

The overall

compensation amount

of

the corresponding

axis has

exceeded the limit.

(The

machine

is

generating abnormal heat.)

[Measures

to

Take]

Set a

large l imit value

at

the thermal

deviation compensation parameter.

Or,remove the cause

of

abnormal heat

in

the machine.



4202-E

J-24-A1

J SPINDLE

THERMAL


(FOR

STANDARD

AND


SPINDLES)

[Related

Specifications]

Thermal deviation

compensation

Thermistor error284

[Index]

None


[Code]

Sensor

CH

[Probable

Faulty

Locations]

1)

The corresponding

temperature

sensor is malfunctioning

or its

wiring

is broken.

2)

The

TM P

is

faulty.

[Measures

to Take]

1)

Check

if

the corresponding

temperature

sensor is mounted

correctly.

2)

Replace

the

temperature

sensor.

[Others]

-

The

compensation

amount becomes

“0 ”

for deviation

which

is detected

by

a

malfunctioning sensor.

-

Fo r

sensor

channels

7

and

8

used for

the

attachment

specification,

this alarm

does

not occur.



4202-E J-25-A1

J SPINDLE

THERMAL


(FOR

STANDARD

AND


SPINDLES)

3.

Precaution

Regarding

Thermal

Deviation

Compensation

Parameters

NOTICE

: The thermal deviation compensation

parameters

described

on

the following

pages

have

already

been

set

at

Okuma. Do

not

change

these

parameters.

Change of

these

parameters

may

disable normal compensation.

If

you

change

the

parameters

by

mistake, immediately turn off

the

power

and

then

turn

it on .

The

previous parameter

data remains effective unless yo u press the BACKUP

key

after

parameter

change.



4202-E J-26-A1

J


(FOR STANDARD

AN D

ATTACHMENT

MOUNTABLE

SPINDLES)

3-1

. Screen

Transition

*1

Thermal Deviation

Comp.

Parameter

Screen

1 Page 1

Thermal Deviation

Comp. Parameter

Screen 2

Page

1

age

backward|page

forward

Thermal Deviation

Comp. Parameter

Screen

1 Page

2

Page

forward

Page

backward

7:

ITEM F7: ITEM

Page

backwardjpage

forward Thermal Deviation

Comp.

Parameter

Screen

2 Page

2

F6: ITEM F6: ITEM

Thermal

Deviation

Comp.

Parameter

Screen 1

Page

3

F6:

ITEM

F7:

ITEM

*2

Thermal

Deviation

Comp.

Parameter

Screen 3

Page 1

hermal Deviation

Comp.

Parameter

Screen

4 Page

1

Page

backward|

Page

forward

F7:

ITEM

/ Thermal

Deviationÿ-v

;

f

Comp. Parameter

j

\Screen

3

Page 2

;

Page

backward |

Page

forward

>

Page forward

Page backward

F6:

ITEM

Thermal Deviation

Comp.

Parameter

Screen

4 Page

2

Thermal

Deviation

Comp.

Parameter

Screen 3

Page

3

F6 :

ITEM F7:

ITEM

V

*2

*3

Thermal Deviation Comp.

Parameter Screen 3,

Conversion Table

1

Thermal Deviation

Comp.

Parameter Screen

3,

.

Conversion

Table

5

F7:

ITEM

Page

forward

1

F6:

|TEM

Page

backward

Max.

4

pages

Page

forward

1

Page

backward

Max.

4

pages



4202-E

J-27-A1

J SPINDLE

THERMAL


(FOR

STANDARD

AND


SPINDLES)

*1

Eachtime [F5]

(AXIS CHANGE)

is pressed, the

displayed

axis

data changes in

the

following

order:

X-> Y->

Z->

X...

*2

Each time

[F5] (AT.

CHANGE) is

pressed, the attachment number

changes in

the

following

order:

1

->

2->

...

10->

1 ...

*3

There

are five conversion

tables

(TABLE 1

to 5), which are

switched in

turn

by

depression

of an

ITEM

key.

4.

Thermal

Deviation

Comp.

Common

Parameter Screen

1

(Page

1)

PARAMETER

SE T

*

THERMAL

DEVIATION

COMP.

COMMON PARAMETER

NO.

O.

YES

11.

TEMP SAMPLING

YES

12.

AVERAGING TIMES

YES

13.

TRAVERSE

(X>

NO

14.

TRAVERSE

(Y)

YES

15.

TRAVERSE

<Z)

NO

16.

M

CODE COMP.

NO 17.

YES

18.

YES

19.

NO

20.

1.

COMPENSATION

SN

2.

SENSOR

CHI

100

20

3.

CH2

YES

CH3 YES.

CH4

YE S

.

YES

. CH5

CH6

.

8.

CH7

CHS

.

10.

SCREEN

SNITCH

X Y Z

AC T

POSIT

(MC)

0.000

0.000

0.000

SET

ADD

SE L

ITEM

t

ITEMJ,

EXTEND

gjifÿrrr)nÿnÿrF-6ir?-TifF-r)

As shown in

the table

below,

the

parameter

data

is

set

by use

of the

corresponding

validcommand. Fo r the

SEL

command, pressing the function ke y (SEL)

alternates YES

and NO.

Parameter Valid

Command Default

Min.

Value Max.

Value

Setting

Unit

COMPENSATION SW

SENSOR CH1 to CH8

SCREEN

SWITCH

TEMP

SAMPLING

AVERAGING TIMES

TRAVERSE

(X)

TRAVERSE

(Y)

TRAVERSE

(Z)

M

CODE COMP

SE L

YES YES,

NO

YES,

NO

YES,

NO

1

ms

1

(time)

YES,

NO

YES,

NO

YES, NO

YES,

NO

SE L *3

SEL

YE S

SET,

ADD

SET,

ADD

100

11

1000

20 1

255

SEL YE S

SE L

YES

SEL

YE S

SE L YES

*3

The

sensor

channels

to be

used

depend on the machine type and

the

maximum

spindle speed.



4202-E J-28-A1

J SPINDLE

THERMAL


(FOR

STANDARD

AND


SPINDLES)

4-1

. COMPENSATION SW

(No.1)

Turns

on

or off the thermal deviation

compensation

function.

Set

this

parameter

to “NO

before setting

parameters

for individual

compensation

amounts.

4-2.

SENSOR

(CH1

to

CH8)

(No.2

to

9)

These

parameters

select

the

temperature

sensor numbers to be used.

Only the

sensors

set

at

YES

can

be used as the hot

temperature

input channel or base

temperature

input

channel. (For details,

refer

to the

descriptions

in

7-1 and 7-2.)

If NO is

set at

the sensor which has been selected as

a

ho t

temperature

or base

temperature input

channel,

the

following

error occurs:

5286

Set

condition error

YE S : Th e sensor is usable.

NO

:

The sensor is

not

usable.

Setting

Example:

For

MCR-B2, MCR-A,

etc.

Sensor No. Sensor

Position

CH 1 Coolant

IN

CH2 Coolant OUT

CH3 At the

top

of the ram

CH 4

Not

used

CH5 Not used

CH6 Reference

point

of

the

column

CH 7

Attachment

bearing *1

CH 8

Spare

for attachment

bearing *1

*1

Channels 7 and

8

are used for attachment

bearings.

4-3.

SCREEN SWITCH

(No.

10)

Determines whether to

display

or

not the

thermal deviation compensation parameter

screens

(conversion tables).

NO

:

Parameter screens are not

displayed.

YES

:

Parameter

screens

are

displayed.

4-4. TEMP

SAMPLING

(No.11)

Sets

the intervals at which

the

TMP

board measures

temperature.

4-5. AVERAGING TIMES

(No.12)

Determines the number of

temperature

data

pieces

to be collected and

averaged.



4202-E J-29-A1

J SPINDLE

THERMAL


(FOR

STANDARD

AND


SPINDLES)

4-6. TRAVERSE

(X), (Y), (Z)

(No.

13

to

15)


compensation

data

in the

servo

processor is

updated

at

the time of

X-

(Y-

or

Z-)

axis movement

in

AUTO or

MDI

mode or at

intervals

(10

seconds)

for

compensating

thermal

deviation.

This

parameter

chooses the

update

timing.

YES : The

compensation

amount is

updated

when

X-(Y-

or

Z-)

axis

is moved

(by

rapid

traverse

or

cutting

feed) in

AUTO or

MDI

mode.

NO

:

The

compensation

amount

is updated

every

10

seconds

(thermal

deviation

compensation

interval).

4-7.

M

CODE

COMP.

(NO.16)

This

parameter

m akes “M 297” code valid. T his code

specifies

updating

of the thermal deviation

compensation

amount to

be

sent to the servo

processor

even during machining

that is no t

associated

with axis movements.

M297 updates

the

compensation

amount

only

w hen the setting

for

No .

13/14/15

“TRAVERSE

(X)/(Y)/(Z)”

is

“YES” with

the setting

for

this

parameter

“YES”.

YE S

:

Updating of the

compensation

amount,

specified

by

M297, is

valid.

NO : Updating

of the

compensation amount, specified

by

M297,

is invalid.

Note: If

the

setting

for

this

parameter

is “NO”,

compensation

amount is not

updatedevenifM297

is

specified.



4202-E J-30-A1

J


(FOR STANDARD

AN D

ATTACHMENT

MOUNTABLE

SPINDLES)


Comp.

Common

Parameter Screen

1 (Page

2)

PARAMETER

SE T

*

THERMAL

DEVIATION

COMP.

COMMON

PARAMETER

*

0.

50

.

QUIT

VALUE

2.

PROCESS

SWITCH

3.

COMPENSATE

SEC

L JUDGING

TIMING

5. SIDE

STEPS

(Z)l

6. SIDE STEPS

(Z)2

50 0

10

5

0

0

Y

Z

0.

000

CT POSIT

(MC)

0.000

0.000

ITEM

t

ITEM

|

EXTEND

ET

ADD

SE L

As

shown

in

the table

below,

the parameter data

is

set

by

use

of

the

corresponding

valid command.

Parameter

Valid

Command Default

Min.

Value

Max. Value

Setting

Unit

QUIT

VALUE

PROCESS SWITCH

COMPENSATE

SE C

JUDGING TIMING

SIDE

STEPS

(Z)2

SIDE

STEPS

(Z)3

SET,

AD D

SET, AD D

SET,

AD D

SET,

AD D

SET,

AD D

SET,

AD D

0.05 0.00 1.00

0.01

1 min-1

1

(sec)

1 (time)

1

(time)

1 (time)

500 0

10000

10

10

600

1

5

O 0 4

O

0

4



4202-E J-31-A1

J SPINDLE

THERMAL


(FOR

STANDARD

AND


SPINDLES)

5-1.

QUIT

VALUE

(No.1)

In

the transient state where the

spindle

speed changes

continuously

for

a short

time,

the function

calculation

occurs

to absorb

the

difference between

temperature

rise and

the

estimated

temperature.

This

parameter

determines

when to

stop

this

function calculation.

5-2.

PROCESS SWITCH (No.2)

This parameter

sets

the speed

change

range.

Based

on

this

range,

the NC

recognizes

a

change

in the

spindle speed.

If

the

spindle

speed largely

exceeds this range,

the

system

starts

function calculation in

the transient

state.

5-3. COMPENSATE SEC

(No.3)

This

parameter

set the interval

at

which the NC calculates the thermal

compensation

amounts (and

executes

compensation).

5-4.

JUDGING TIMING

(No.4)

This

parameter

is the number

of

compensation

intervals used after the

spindle speed change

until an

appropriate

time

constant

ratio is

finally

decided.

If

the set

value

is

smaller than the number set at SLIDE

STEPS described

below,

the following

alarm

occurs:

5286 Set condition error

5-5. SIDE STEPS

(Z1 , Z2)

(No.

5 to

6)

This

parameter

is

the number of times the thermal


amount

is

calculated

with

the filter

coefficient

fixed at

“1”

at the

beginning

of calculation

process

in

the transient state.

This

parameter

is

used

to reduce

delays

in the

response

from the temperature

sensor.

If

the

set value

is

larger

than the number

set at

JUDGING TIMING described

above,

the

following alarm

occurs:

5286

Set

condition error



4202-E J-32-A1

J SPINDLE

THERMAL


(FOR

STANDARD

AND


SPINDLES)

6.

Thermal

Deviation

Comp.

Common

Parameter Screen

1

(Page 3)

PARAMETER SET

*

THERMAL

DEVIATION COMP.

COMMON PARAMETER

*

7. OVERALL LIMIT

(X)

8. OVERALL

LIMIT

(Y)

9.

OVERALL

LIMIT

(Z)

999

999

999

Y

Z

ACT POSIT

(MC)

0.000

0.000

0. 000

ITEM

t

ITEM EXTEND

ET

ADD

SE L

[TÿfTÿrrT)(TÿrrTirF~6~irp~TirF~ei

As shown

in

the table

below,

the

parameter

data

is

set

by

use

of

the

corresponding

valid command.

Parameter Valid Command Default

Min.

Value Max. Value

Setting

Unit

OVERALL

LIMIT

(X)

OVERALL

LIMIT

(Y)

OVERALL

LIMIT

(Z)

SET,

AD D

SET,

ADD

SET,

ADD

999 0 9999

9999

9999

1

1

|.im

1

pm

999

0

999

0

OVERALL

LIMIT (X), (Y),

(Z)

(NO.

7 to

9)

-1.

This

parameter

sets the limit value of the

compensation

amount for the

corresponding

axis.

If

the overall

compensation

amount

including

the

deviation

of tool edge

position

exceeds

the set

limit

value,

the overall

compensation

amount

is

replaced

with the

limit

value

set

for

this

parameter.

The

set

value is

treated as an

absolute

value.

If

this

replacement occurs,

the

following alarm occurs:

Alarm

D

4275

Thermal

deviation compensation.



4202-E J-33-A1

J


(FOR STANDARD

AN D

ATTACHMENT

MOUNTABLE

SPINDLES)

7.

Thermal Deviation

Compensation

Parameter Screen

2 (Page 1)

PARAMETER

SET

*

THERMAL

DEVIATION

COMP.

PARAMETER X

*

BLOCK]

BLOCK

2

1.

HO T SENSOR

2.

BASE

TMP SENSOR

3.

TMP ZERO ADJUST

4

CONVERSION

TABLE

5

CORRECT

FACTOR

6.

TM P

TIME

CONST

7.

FIXED

TIME

CONST

8.

TEMP

RISE

LIMIT

1

2

4

4

0. 0

0.0

3

3

0.0 0.0

100

100

-1

-1

20.0

20.0

X

Y

Z

ACT POSIT

(MC)

0.000 0.000

0.

000

AXIS

SE L

CHANGE

ITEM

T

ITEM

4-

EXTEND

ET

ADD

(TTÿrrrirrTiiTÿrrÿrFÿrFTirrB'i

As

shown

in

the table

below,

the parameter data

is

set

by

use


valid

command.

Parameter

Valid

Command Default

Min.

Value

Max. Value

Setting

Unit

HOT SENSOR CH

BASE

TEMP

SENSOR CH

TM P

ZERO

ADJUST

CONVERSION

TABLE

CORRECT

FACTOR

TMP TIME

CONST

FIXED TIME

CONST

TEMP

RISE

LIMIT

SET,

AD D

SET, AD D

SET,

AD D

SET,

AD D

SET,

AD D

SET,

AD D

SET,

AD D

SET,

AD D

CH

No.

CH

No.

0.1 'C

Number

O

0 8

0

0 8

0.0

-9.9

9.9

1

5

0.0

-2.0 2.0 0.1

1

(sec)

0

5000

99999

-1 1

0.1 c

0.0

0.0 90.0



4202-E J-34-A1

J SPINDLE

THERMAL


(FOR

STANDARD

AND


SPINDLES)

HOT

SENSOR

(No.1)-1.

These are the

temperature

sensor

(channel)

numbers used to

measure

the

temperature

of the heat

generating

part

selected for

compensation

of

thermal

deviation.

Setting

a channel number of unusable sensor

(a

sensor set at

NO)

results in

the following alarm:

5286

Se t

condition

error

7-2.

BASE

TEMP

SENSOR (No.2)

These

are

the

temperature

sensor (channel) numbers used to

measure

the base

temperature.

The

base temperature is used

to

calculate the

compensating

amount of

the thermal deviation. Setting

a

channel number of unusable sensor

(a

sensor set at

NO)

results

in

the

following

alarm:

5286

Condition

setting

error

7-3.

TMP ZERO

ADJUST

(No.3)

The

temperature

shift amount for

zeroing

the

temperature

rise (temperature

in

the heat

generating part

minus

base temperature).

Set the amount so that the

temperature

rise

is

0

when no heat is

generated

(spindle

is not

rotating).

CONVERSION TABLE (No.4)

-4.

The number of temperature-deviat ion conversion table

used

to determine the thermal deviation

compensation

amount. There are

five

tables

numbered

from

1 to

5.

CORRECT

FACTOR

(No.5)

This is

the coefficient for

adjusting

an

inclination of the conversion

table.

If

0 is set,

thermal

compensation

becomes

invalid.

7-5.

7-6.

TMP

TIME

CONST

(No.6)

This is

a

coefficient used to calculate the filter

time

constant as

a

part

of calculation of thermaldeviation

compensation

amounts.

FIXED

TIME

CONST

(No.7)

-7.

This

is

a filter time constant used when the

compensation

amount is

calculated withouttime-variation of

the filter coefficient.

7-8. TEMP RISE

LIMIT

(No.8)

If the temperature exceeds this

parameter

data,

an alarm A occurs.



4202-E J-35-A1

J


(FOR STANDARD

AN D

ATTACHMENT

MOUNTABLE

SPINDLES)


Compensation

Parameter Screen

2 (Page

2)

PARAMETER

SE T

*

THERMAL

DEVIATION

COMP.

PARAMETER

X

*

BLOCK

1

BLOCK

2

i.

0

1. 2

. RISE

PARAMETER

1

10. RISE

PARAMETER

2

11.

RISE BASE

MI N

12.

DROP

PARAMETER

1

13. DROP

PARAMETER

2

14.

DROP

BASE MIN

15.

QUIT

FACTER

1

16.

QUIT

FACTER

2

17.

STOP RATIO

5

2

2.2

2.1

2.0

.

5

5

0

1.2

.

2

0. 500

. 50 0

0.8

.8

40.0.0

1

Y

AC T

POSIT

(MC)

0.000

.000

.000

AXIS

SE L

CHANGE

ITEM

T

ITEM

\

EXTEND

ET

ADD

rÿ(Tÿrr3ifrrn(T3i(TÿrFÿ-irr6T

A s show n

in the table below, each of

the parameter data

is

set

by

use

of

the

corresponding

valid

commands.

Parameter

Valid

Command Default

Min.

Value

Max.

Value

Setting

Unit

RISE

PARAMETER 1

RISE

PARAMETER 2

RISE

BASE MIN

DROP

PARAMETER 1

DROP

PARAMETER 2

DROP

BASE

MIN

QUIT

FACTOR

1

QUIT

FACTOR

2

STOP

RATIO

SET,

AD D

SET,

AD D

SET,

AD D

SET,

AD D

SET,

AD D

SET,

AD D

SET,

AD D

SET,

AD D

SET,

AD D

0.0 0 30.0 0.1

0

10000

1

0.0

0.0 30.0 0.1

0.1

.0

0.0

30.0

0 0 10000 1

0.0 0.0 30.0

0.1

0

0.000 1.000 0.001

0.0

0.0 5.0 0.1

0.0 0.0 999.9

0.1



4202-E J-36-A1

J SPINDLE

THERMAL


(FOR

STANDARD

AND


SPINDLES)

8-1

. RISE

PARAMETER 1

,

RISE

PARAMETER 2,

RISE

BASE

MIN

(No.

9 to

11)

These

are

the

coefficients

used to determine the

appropriate

time

constant

ratio for

temperature

rise.

DROP

PARAMETER

1,

DROP

PARAMETER

2,

DROP BASE

MIN

(No.12to

14)

These are the

coefficients

used

to

determine the appropriate time

constant

ratio for temperature drop.

8-2.

8-3.

QUIT FACTOR

1

,

QUIT

FACTOR

2

(No.

15,

16)

These

are the coefficients

used to calculate the value for

stopping

calculation of the filter coefficient.

If

the

filter coefficient becomes smaller than the value calculated f rom these

values,

the

system stops

calculating

the

change

of

filter coefficient.

8-4.

STOP

RATIO (NO.

1

7)

This

is

a

factor

used

to

determine the

appropriate

time

constant

ratio for

stopping

the

spindle.



4202-E J-37-A1

J SPINDLE

THERMAL


(FOR

STANDARD

AND


SPINDLES)

9. Thermal

Deviation

Compensation

AT.

Parameter Screen 3

(Page

1)

PARAMETER

SET

*

THERMAL

DEVIATION

COMP.

AT .

PARAMETER 1

*

X

AXIS

Y

AXIS

Z AXIS AT.

SPNDL

1 1

1

1.

HOT

SENSOR

2.

BASE

TMP

SENSOR

3.TMP

ZERO

ADJUST

4. CONVERSION

TABLE

5.

CORRECT FACTOR

6.

TMP

TIME CONST

7. FIXED TIME

CONST

8.

TEMP

RISE

LIMIT

1

4

4

i

0.0

0.0

0.0

.0

1

3

3

1. 0

.0

1.0

.0

200

20 0

00

100

-1

-1 -1

1

50.0

0.

0 50.

0

0.0

Z

Y

0.000

CT POSIT

(MC) 0.000

.000

AXIS

CHANGE

ITEMt

ITEM

i

EXTEND

ET

ADD

SE L

(TTi r rÿrrÿrrTn(T3i rFÿ i rFÿnrFÿ i

*1 The THERMAL DEVIATION COMP. AT.

PARAMETER

screens are provided toset

parameters

related to deviation of individual

axes (X/Y/Z AXIS

3)

and the attachment

spindle

deviation that

will

differ

by attachments.

*2

Each

time

[F5]

(CHANGE)

is pressed,

the attachment

number

changes

in

the

following order:

1

->

2

->

...

10

->

1

....

Th e present

attachment number can be found from the number

displayed

in

the

screen title.

For details of the

parameters,

refer

to

7,

“Thermal Deviation

Compensation

Parameter Screen

2

(Page 1)”.



4202-E J-38-A1

J


(FOR STANDARD

AN D

ATTACHMENT

MOUNTABLE

SPINDLES)


Compensation

AT.

Parameter Screen 3

(Page

2)

PARAMETER

SE T

*

THERMAL

DEVIATION

COMP.

AT . PARAMETER

1

*

X

AXIS

Y

AXIS

Z

AXIS

AT .

SPNDL

4.0

4.0

.0

4.0

.RISE

PARAMETER

1

10. RISE

PARAMETER 2

11.

RISE

BASE

MIN

12. DROP PARAMETER

1

13.

DROP PARAMETER

2

14.

DROP

BASE

MI N

15.

QUIT FACTER

1

16.

QUIT

FACTER

2

17. STOP

RATIO

1000 1000

000

1000

2.0 2.0

.0 2.0

4.0

.0 4.0

.0

1000

000

1000

000

2.0

.0

2.0

.0

0. 750

0.750 0. 750 0.750

0. 3

0.3

0.

3

.3

1.0

1.0

1.0

.0

Y l

ACT

POSIT

(MC)

0.000

0.000

.000

AXIS

CHANGE

ITEM

t

ITEM

I

EXTEND

ET ADD

SE L

[

P

IMF

2)(

F

3

) j

F

For

details of

the

parameters,

refer

to

8,

“Thermal

Deviation

Compensation

Parameter

Screen

2

(Page

2)”.



4202-E J-39-A1

J SPINDLE

THERMAL


(FOR

STANDARD

AND


SPINDLES)

11

.

Thermal

Deviation

Compensation

AT.

Parameter Screen 3

(Page 3)

PARAMETER

SET

*

THERMAL DEVIATION

COMP.

AT. PARAMETER 1

*

X

AXIS Y AXIS

Z

AXIS

AT . SPNDL

4

4

8. SIDE

STEPS

19 .

ROTARY

FACTOR

1

20.

ROTARY

FACTOR

2

4

4

10.

0

10.0

Y

z

0.000

0.000

CT POSIT

(MC)

0.000

AXIS

CHANGE ITEM

t

ITEM

I

EXTEND

ET

ADD

SE L

(Tÿrrÿrrr i rrTn(TÿiT~6~irFÿ-i rF~ri

As shown

in

the table

below,

the

parameter data

is

set

by

use

of the

corresponding

valid command.

Parameter

Valid

Command

Default

Min.

Value Max. Value Setting

Unit

SIDE STEPS

ROTARY

FACTOR

1

ROTARY

FACTOR

2

SET, ADD

SET, AD D

SET,

AD D

1 (time)

0

4

0

-20.0

-20.0

20.0 0.1

0

20.0

0.1

11-1.

SIDE STEPS (X3, Y3,

Z3,

AT.

SPNDL) (NO.

18)

This parameter

is

the

number of times

the

thermal deviation

compensation

amount is calculated with

the filter

coefficient fixed at

“1”

at

the

beginning

of

calculation

process

in

the

transient state.

This

parameter

is used

to

reduce delays in the

response

from

the

temperature

sensor.

If the

set

value

is

larger

than

the number

set

at JUDGINGTIMING described

above,

the

following

alarm

occurs:

5286

Se t condition

error

11-2.

ROTARY FACTOR

1

,

2

(AT.

SPNDL) (NO.

19,

20)

This parameter is

the

coefficient used

to

compensate

for

deviation (tool

edge

position deviation)

caused

by

the

phenomenon

that the entire

spindle

length

varies due to

centrifugal

force.

The

parameter

should

be

set

only

for

AT.

SPDL

in

the

THERMAL

DEVIATION COMP.

AT.

PARAMETER

screens.

The

formula used

to

calculate the

tool

edge position

deviation

is

indicated below.

Compensation

is

not

executed if

“tool edge

position

deviation

<

0”.

Tool

edge

position

deviation

-

ROTARY FACTOR

2

+

{ROTARY

FACTOR

1

x (Spindle

speed

/

1000)}



4202-E J-40-A1

J SPINDLE

THERMAL


(FOR

STANDARD

AND


SPINDLES)

12.

Thermal

Deviation

AT-No. and

AT-PARAM.

No.

Screen

4

(Page 1)

PARAMETER

SET

*

THERMAL

DEVIATION

AT-NO. & AT-PARAM.

NO.*

AT.PARAM.

NO.

B

AXIS

ANG.

C

AXIS

ANG.

AT .

NO.

90

-1

-1

-1

-1

0

0

0c

0

0

0

0

0

0

Y

Z

0.000

.000

CT

POSIT

(MC)

0. 00 0

CHANGE

ITEMt

ITEM

4

EXTEND

ET

ADD

SE L

rp~TTfF~in(T~T)rFTH(TÿrF~irirF~Ti(Tir)

This

screen is

used

to define the

correspondence

between

the

attachment numbers and the attachment

parameter

screen number

(THERMAL

DEVIATION COMP.

AT.

PARAMETER).

As shown in the table below, the

parameter

data is set by use of the

corresponding

valid command.

Parameter Valid Command Default

Min.

Value Max. Value

Setting

Unit

AT. PARAM.

NO.

B

AXIS

ANG.

C AXIS ANG.

SET, ADD

SET, ADD

SET,

AD D

0 0 10

1

0

-1

359

1

0

-1

359

1

12-1. AT.PARAM. NO.

This

parameter

sets

the THERMAL

DEVIATION COMP.

AT. PARAMETER screen

number used

for the

individual attachments.

12-2. BAXIS

ANG.,

C AX IS

ANG.

These

parameter set

the

attachment

angle.

Usually,

“

-

T

is set for C

AXIS

ANG. For

B

AXIS

ANG.,

a fixed

angle

should be set

if

an

angular

attachment is

used, or

1” if

a universal

attachment

is used.

When

“

- 1 is

set,

at tachment index

angle

is

automatically

calculated.



4202-E

J-41-A1

J


(FOR STANDARD

AN D

ATTACHMENT

MOUNTABLE

SPINDLES)

13.

Thermal Deviation

Compensation

Parameter Screen

5 (Page 1)

PARAMETER

SET

*

THERMAL

DEVIATION

COMP.

PARAMETER

*

CONVERSION

TABLE 1

1.

0.

0.

2.

-1.

3.

4.

.9 -9999

.9 -9999 .9

9

9 -9999 .9

.9

.8 .8

.8

8

.

8

8

8

.6

7 .7

7

.7

7

7

.6

.6

6

6

.6

6

6

.5

5

.5

5

.

5

55

.4

.4

4

.4

4

4

4

.3

.

3

3

3 .

3

3

3

.

2

2

.2

2

. 2

2

2

.1

. 1

1

1

. 1

1

1

.0

0

.0

0

.0

0

0

Y l

0.000

.

oco

0.000

CT

POSIT

(MC)

CHANGE

ITEM

T

ITEM

4-

EXTEND

ET ADD SE L

[

p

T){F

2)(

F

3

) j

F

As

shown

in

the table

below,

the

parameter

data is set

by

use

of

the

corresponding

valid

command.

Parameter

Valid Command

Default

Min.

Value

Max.

Value

Setting

Unit

Thermal

deviation com¬

pensation

amount

SET,

AD D 0

9999 9999

|im

13-1.

Thermal Deviation

Compensation

Amount

T he table

shows

the thermal

deviation

amounts

corresponding to

the estimated temperatures

calculated

from the

measured

temperatures.

The deviation amounts

are set

in

increments of 0.1°C

(1

,8°C)

within the

range

from

-4-.9°C to

40.0°C

(23.2°F

to

104.0°F).

The data

of

an individual

table

covers

seven

pages.



K.

READ/WRITE

AND

GET/PUT

FUNCTIONS

(WITH

FILE

INPUT/OUTPUT

FUNCTION)



4202-E

K-1

K.

READ/WRITE

AN D

GET/PUT

FUNCTIONS

(WITH

FILE

INPUT/OUTPUT

FUNCTION)

SECTION

1

GENERAL

Through

the communications of data

(input:

numeric data only,

output:

numeric or character data)

with

an

external

device, the

function

allows

the setting of variables

(common, local,

and system

variables) by

the

host

computer,

the output

of

data

to

a

printer,

etc.

The

file input/output

function reads a data f ile from a sector device

(MD1

,

FDO, FD1

,

FD2,

FD3), writes

arbitrary

data (result of

calculation,

alphabet, etc.) to a

file,

and

creates

a

new

file.

Up to two

files

can be read and

writing

is

possible

to

one

file.



4202-E K-3

K.

READ/WRITE

AN D

GET/PUT

FUNCTIONS

(WITH

FILE

INPUT/OUTPUT

FUNCTION)

SECTION 3 FUNCTION

I

1.

READ

Function

The read function receives data from an

external device

through

the

RS232C

interface and

stores

the data

to the read

area

(max.

160

characters).

Format:

[

READ

n]

RS232C interface channel number

:

CNO: (TT:)

CN1

CN2

CN3

CN4

Note

1:

Only a

sequence

number

(NOOO)

may

be

specified

before

the READ command.

2: During

the

execution of the READ

command,

do not

execute

the

LISTOUTPUT

command,

the

PUNCH

command,

or othersimilarcommands using the same

RS322C

interface channel.

3:

if

the

NO

is

reset during

the

execution of the READ

command,

it

is necessary to

execute

the

READ commandagain

to

end the data receiveprocessingnormally or reset the

NC

again

after

the

elapse

of the time set for the no-response timer

(NC optional

parameter

(word) No. 34, No.

35 , No .

36,

No .

37, No.

38).

4:

An

alarm

occurs

if the

receive

data exceeds

1

60

characters.

5:

Executionof the READ commandand

print-out

of

the gauging data cannot be executedat the

same

time.

2.

WRITE

Function

The write function sends the data from the write area (max.

1

60

characters)

to an external device

through

the

RS232C

interface.

Format:

[

WRITE n]

RS232C

interface channel number:

0 CNO:

(TT:)

CN1

CN2

CN3

CN4



4202-E K-5

K.

READ/WRITE

AN D

GET/PUT

FUNCTIONS

(WITH

FILE

INPUT/OUTPUT

FUNCTION)

Note

5:

An

alarm

occurs

if

there is a format

error

(more than

one

decimal

point,

other than 0 to

9,

more

than

10

digits) in

the

numeric data to

be

read.

4.

PUT Function

The

put

function

stores

numeric

data

or

character-string

to

the write area where

the

data

is

output

to

an

external

device by the WRITE

command.

Format:

[PUT s, I ]

s:

Output element

For

an

output

element,

common

variables,

system

variables,

local

variables,

and

character-string

enclosed

by

quotation

marks

(max.

16

characters:

’ABC’) can be

used.

I:

Number of

output digits

<lf output

element

is

designated>

Specify

the number of

digits

the numeric data

(includes

decimal

point

and sign)

or

“EMPTY”

data

to

be

output

to the

write

area

in

an

unsigned

integer,

(max.

1

0

digits,

1

0

digits

if

omitted)

<lf

output

element is not

designated>

Specify

the

number

of

space

codes

to be

output

in an unsigned integer,

(max.

160

characters)

Note

1:

The

data of the output element

specified

for <s>

is first converted into

the

real or

integer,

according to

the

specified output element type,

then

to the JIS8

code.

After that

the

character

code

is

written to the

write

area

by

the

number

of

digits specified

for

</>.

Conversion of data

according

to the

type

of

specified

output

element:

-

If common or local variable is an

output

variable

Converted into real

-

If common

or

local

variable is an

input

variable

Converted

into integer

-

If

system

variable is

specified

Converted into integer according to

the

attribute of

the variable

2:

If the

output

element is a

character-string

enclosed

by

quotation

marks,

the

character-string

is

converted

into the

JIS8

or

ISO

code to be

output.

Example:

PUT ’ABCDEFGHT ABCDEFGHI

-

Quotation

marks enclosing the

character-string

must be

in

the same block.

Specification

of

them in

multiple

blocks is not

permitted.

-

A character-string may

contain

up

to

16

characters.

- When a

quotation mark

is

used in

a

character-string,

enter two

quotation

marks.

Example:

PUT

’95’

’95

PUT

T’M’

I’M



4202-E

K-6

K.

READ/WRITE

AN D

GET/PUT

FUNCTIONS

(WITH

FILE

INPUT/OUTPUT

FUNCTION)

- It is possible to use a lower case character codes

by

entering a circumflex

accent

C) at the

beginning of

the

character-string enclosed by quotation

marks.

Example:

PUT 'ABCD1234’ abcd1234

Note 3: Character-string

type

hexadecimal

canbe

designated

using

a

hexadecimal character-string

(0

to 9,

A

to

F)

and

a

dollar

symbol

($)

preceding

the

character-string.

Example:

PUT

$616263

abc



4202-E

K-7

K.

READ/WRITE

AN D

GET/PUT

FUNCTIONS

(WITH

FILE

INPUT/OUTPUT

FUNCTION)

SECTION 4 FUNCTION

II (FILE

INPUT/OUTPUT

FUNCTION)

1. FOPENA

(FOPENB)

Function

The

FOPENA (FOPENB) function

opens

read-in file

A

(file

B)

in

a sector

device.

Input

the

device name and

the

file name of

the

read-in

f ile following

a command.

It is

possible

to open

both

read-in file

A

and

read-in

file

B

at

the same

time.

Format:

[

FOPENA (FOPENB)

_device-name:file-name.extension

]

Note

1:

Only

a

sequence

number

(NOOO)

maybe

specified

before

the

FOPENA

(FOPENB)

command,

2:

Effective

devices are

MD1,

FDO, FD1,

FD2,

and

FD3.

3: If a device

name

is

omitted,

MD1

is assumed.

4:

File name and extension cannot be omitted.

5:

An

alarm

occurs

if

a

non-existent

file is

specified.

6:

When

a

floppy

disk is

used,

only

the

disk

formatted to

the

OSP

format can be

used.

2.

FWRITC Function

The FWRITC funct ion

opens

write-in file

C.

Input

the

device name and the file

name

of

the write-in file following

the

command.

Format:

[ FWRITC

_device-name:file-name.extension

]

Note

1: Only

a

sequence

number

(NOOO)

may

be

specified

before

the FWRITC

command.

2:

Effective

devices are MD1,

FDO, FD1,

FD2, and

FD3.

3:

If

a device

name

is omitted,

MD1

is assumed.

4:

File

name

and extension cannotbe omitted.

5:

An

alarm occurs

if

an existent file is

specified.

6:

When

a

floppy

disk is

used,

only the disk formatted to

the

OSP

format can be used.

Option

function:

“;A”

Specifies

the

append

mode.

Format:

[

FWRITC _device-name:file-name.extension;A

]

Note

1: Only

a

sequence

number

(NOOO)

may

be

specified

before

the

FWRITC command.



4202-E

K-8

K.

READ/WRITE

AN D

GET/PUT

FUNCTIONS

(WITH

FILE

INPUT/OUTPUT

FUNCTION)

Note

2:

Effective devices are

MD1,

FDO,

FD1, FD2,

and

FD3.

3:

If a device

name is

omitted, MD1

is assumed.

4:

File name and

extension cannot

be omitted.

5:

An

alarm

occurs

if

an

existent

file

is

specified.

6:

When a

floppy

disk is

used,

only the disk

formatted

to

the OSP format can

be

used.

3.

READ

Function

The read

function

sends

the

data

from

read-in

file

A

or B

which has

been

opened

by

the

execution of

the

FOPENA

(B)

command

to

the

read

area

(max.

1

60

characters) in

unit

of lines.

At each

execution

of the

READ

command,

data is sent

by

one

line.

In

the

read

area,

the data is

processed by

the GET command

explained

below.

Format:

[

READ n ]

n:

Designation

of the file where the data is sent to

the read

area.

A . . .

One

line of data is read

from

read-in

file

A

B . . .

One

line

of data is

read

from

read-in

file

B

Note 1:

Only

a

sequence number

(NOOO)

may be

specified

before the

READ

command.

2: If one

line of data which is read from a file exceeds

160

characters,

execution of the

READ

commandends after

sending

160

characters

of

the

data. In

the next execution

of

the

READ

command,

the data

is

sent

from the

remaining

data.

3:

Only

one

read

area exists.

The

existing

data

in

the

read

area

is

destroyedby

theexecution of

the

READ

command.

4.

WRITE

Function

The write function sends

(writes)

the

data in the

write

area (max. 1

60

characters) to the write-in file

C

which

is

opened by

the

execution

of the FWRITC command.

A

carriage return code

($0A)

is

appended

to the end

of

the data.

At each

execution of the

WRITE

command,

on e

line

of

data is written.

In the write area, the data is

written

by the

PUT

command

explained

below.

Format:

[

WRITE

C

]

Note 1: Only

a sequence number

(NOG

O)

may be

specifiedbefore

the

WRITE

command.

2:

Although

the

write/read

area

has the

capacity

to store

the

data

of

up to 160 characters,

it is

recommended

to

limit the

number

of

characters

at 64

characters to give

better

visibility.

3:

One line

means

a

unit of

data delimited

by

a carriage return code ($0A).

4:

The

read

(write)

pointer

is

zero

cleared

at

the

execution

of

the READ

(WRITE)

command.



4202-E

K-9

K.

READ/WRITE

AN D

GET/PUT

FUNCTIONS

(WITH

FILE

INPUT/OUTPUT

FUNCTION)

5.

GET Function

The

ge t

function fetches the numeric data stored in the read area

by

the

execution

of

the

READ

command

and

sets it to the

specified

variable.

The

function

provided by

the GET

command

is the same as that

explained

in

Section

3, 3.

‘‘GET Function”.

6. PUT

Function

The

put

function

stores the

numeric

data

and

character-string

to

the

write area where data is

output to an

external

device

by

the WRITE command.

The

function

provided

by

the

GET command

is

the

same as that

explained

in

Section 3, 4.

‘‘PUT

Function”.

In

this

case,

however,

the

following

NOTICE

must

be taken into consideration.

NOTICE

:

a

code

not

shown in the ASCII code table

is used, it

will

cause the

file

to

be

destroyed,

displayed

data to be

destroyed,

and

other

troubles.

Therefore,

do not

use

such codes.

7.

CLOSE

Function

The close funct ion closes f iles

which

have been

opened

by

the

execution of

the

FOPENA,

FOPENB,

or

FWRITC

command.

Format:

[ CLOSE n ]

n:

Designation

of

the

file

to be closed.

A

Read-in

file

A

is closed.

B

Read-in

file

B

is

closed.

C Read-in file C

is

closed.

NOTICE

: (1)

Unless

the f ile

is

closed,

it is

not

possible

to open

other f ile

using

the

same

command

which

was

used to

open

the

file.

(2)

Fo r a

write-in

file,

a

file

cannot

be created unless the

CLOSE

command is executed.

8.

Supplements

- The

gauging

data

print-out

(PRINT command)

is not

executed

during

the execution

of

the

functions

indicated above.

-

Even

if

an

attempt

is

made to execute

any

function

explained above while

a

file

is

operated

in

such as

program

operation,

the

function

cannot be executed unti l the

access

to other

file

is

completed.

-

The

functions

indicated

above can

be

executed

during return

search.

-

If

the

reset key

is

pressed

during

the

execution any

of the functions

indicated

above,

execution of the

reset

function

is

suspended

until

the

file

access

is

completed.

Accordingly,

there

will be

a

delay

before

the

NC is reset.



4202-E K-10-R1

K.

READ/WRITE

AN D

GET/PUT

FUNCTIONS

(WITH

FILE

INPUT/OUTPUT

FUNCTION)

SECTION 5

EXAMPLE PROGRAM

I

1. Data

Input

Using

READ

and

GET Commands

<Data

to

be

sent>

1

5

10

15

20 25

30

TOOL OFFSET=1

100.000, 2

200.000

(d)

L(e)J

J

a) (b)

<Analytic program>

N1

READ0

N2 GET, 12

N3

GET

VC1,

1

N4

GET,1

N5

GE T V TOFH [VC1] 7

N6 GET,

1

N7

GET

VC2,

1

N8

GET,1

N9

GET

VTOFH

[VC2] 7

<Result of execution

on analytic

program>

VC1=1

VC2=2

VTOFH

[1]=1

00.000

VTOFH

[2]=200.000

Stores the

data sent

through

CN0:

to the

read area.

Skips

message

(a)

of

1

2

characters.

Sets

the

13th

character

(b)

to common variable VC1

.

Skips

the 14th character.

Sets data

(c)

to tool length offset No.

1

.

Skips

the

22nd

character.

Sets the

23rd

character

to

common

variable VC2.

Skips

the 24th character.

Sets

data

(e)

to

tool

length

offset

No.

2.



4202-E

K-11

K.

READ/WRITE

AN D

GET/PUT

FUNCTIONS

(WITH

FILE

INPUT/OUTPUT

FUNCTION)

2.

Data

Output

Using

PUT

and

WRITE

Commands

<

Registration

data>

VC1=1

VC2=2

VTOFD

[1]=10.000

VTOFD [2]=20.000

<Created program>

N14

P UT C UTT ER RADIUS’

N15

PUT ’COMP’

N16

PUT $0D0A

N17

PUT VC1,

1

N18

PUT,

1

N19 PU T

VTOFD

[VC1],

6 ..

N20 PUT

N21PUTVC2,

1

N22

PUT,

1

N23 PU T VTOFD

[VC2],

6

..

N24

PUT $0D0A

N25

WRITE

0

<

Sent

data

>

Writes the t it le line

Writes the

title

line

Writes

the carriage

return

code.

Writes the cutter radius compensation No . 1

.

Writes one space.

Writes the data of cutter radius

compensation

No.

1.

Writes the delimiter

code

Writes the

cutter

radius

compensation

No.

2.

Writes

one space.

Writes the data of cutter radius

compensation

No.

2.

Writes the carriage

return

code.

Outputs

the

data

in

the write area to

CNO:

1

5

10

15

20

25 30

CUTTER RADIUS COMP

1

10.000,

2

20.000



4202-

E

K-12

K.

READ/WRITE

AN D

GET/PUT

FUNCTIONS

(WITH

FILE

INPUT/OUTPUT

FUNCTION)

SECTION 6

EXAMPLE PROGRAM

II

(FILE

INPUT/OUTPUT

FUNCTION)

1.

Data

Input

by

FOPNEA(B),

READ,

and GET

Commands

<Contents

of

read file A>

1

5 10 15 20 25 30

TOOL OFFSET=1

100.000, 2

200.000

L

(c)

J

(d)

L

(e)

J

a) (b)

cContents of

read file

B>

1

5

10

15

20 25 30

TOOL

OFFSET=3 300.000,

4

400.000

L

(h)

J

(i)

L

(j)

J

9

(g)

<Analytic

program>

N01

FOPENA

MD1

:R1.MIN

N02

FOPENA

MD1:R2.MIN

N03

READ

A

N04

GET, 12

N05 GET

VC1,

1

N06

GET,

1

N0 7 GET

VTOFH

[VC1],

7

.

N08

GET, 1

N09 GET

VC2,

1

N10

GET, 1

N11 GET

VTOFH [VC2],

7 .

N12 REA D B

N13

GET,

12

N14

GET VC3, 1

N15

GET,

1

N16

GET

VTOFH

[VC3],

7 .

N17

GET,

1

N18GETVC4,

1

N19

GET,

1

N20

GET

VTOFH [VC4],

7 .

N21

CLOSE

A

N22

CLOSE

B

MINOpens

read-in

file

A “R1 .MIN in MD1

.

Opens

read-in

file

B

“R2.MIN” in

MD1 .

Stores

one l ine

of

data, in

read-in

file A,

to read

area.

Skips

message

(a)

of

12

characters.

Sets

the 13th character

(b)

to common variable VC1

.

Skips

the

1

4th

character.

Sets

data

(c)

to tool

length

offset

No .

1 .

Skips

the 22nd character.

Sets the

23rd character to common variable

VC2.

Skips

the

24th

character.

Sets data

(e)

to tool

length

offset

No. 2.

Stores

one line of

data, in

read-in file

B,

to

read

area.

Skips

message

(f)

of

1

2

characters.

Sets

the 1

3th

character

(g)

to common variable

VC3.

Skips

the 14th character.

Sets

data

(h) to tool

length

offset

No. 3.

Skips

the

22nd character.

Sets

the 23rd

character to common variable

VC4.

Skips

the 24th character.

Sets

data (j) to

tool

length offset

No.

4.

Closes

read-in

file

A “R1.MIN”.

Closes

read-in file

B “R2.MIN”.



4202-E K -13

K.

READ/WRITE

AN D

GET/PUT

FUNCTIONS

(WITH

FILE

INPUT/OUTPUT

FUNCTION)

<Result of execution on

analytic

program>

VC1=1

VC2=2

VTOFH

[1]=1

00.000

VTOFH

[2]=200.000

VC

1=3

VC2=4

VTOFH

[3] =300.000

VTOFH

[4]

=400.000

2.

Data Output by

FWRITC,

PUT,

and

WRITE

Commands

Registration

data>

VC1=1

VC2=2

VTOFD

[1]=10.000

VTOFD

[2]

=20.000

cCreated

program>

N30

FWRITC FD0:T.MIN

...

N31 PUT CUTTER RADIUS’

N32

PUT

COMP’

N33

WRITE

C

N34

PUT

VC 1, 1

N35

PUT,

1

N36

PUT

VTOFD

[VC1],

6

. .

N37

PUT

N38BPUT

VC2,

1

N39

PUT, 1

N40

PUT

VTOFD

[VC2],

6

. .

N41

WRITE

C

N42

CLOSE

C

<Sent data>

Opens

the

write file

C

“T.MIN’’

in

FD0.

Writes the

title

line

Writes the

title

line

Sends

the

contents

in

the

write

area to

write-file

C.

Writes the

cutter

radius

compensation

No.

1

.

Writes

one

space.

Writes the data

of

cutter

radius

compensation

No . 1

.

Writes the delimiter code

Writes the

cutter

radius

compensation

No .

2.

Writes

one

space.

Writes

the

data of cutter radius

compensation No . 2.

Sends the contents

in

the write area to

write-file

C.

Closes the write file

C

“T.MIN”.

1

5 10 15 20 25 30

CUTTER RADIUS COMP

1 10.000, 2

20.000



4202-

E

K-15

K.

READ/WRITE

AN D

GET/PUT

FUNCTIONS

(WITH

FILE

INPUT/OUTPUT

FUNCTION)

2.

NC

Optional

Parameter

(Bit)

Initial

Setting

Value

No. bit

Contents Set

1 SetO

There

is

a

tape

delimiting

code. NULL

3 0

Note: The

“%”

code

is “$25”

(JIS

8

code) or

“$A5”

(JIS

7

code).

Initial

Setting

Value

No. bit

Contents

Set 1

SetO

Stop bit

of

CNO:

2

bit

1

bit

0

Ready signal

of

CNO:

Internal

READY

External

READY

1 1

Parity check of CNO: Checked Not 0

checked

3

Parity

of

CNO:

Even

Odd

0

8

8-bit JIS of CNO:

There

is There is 0

not

5

DC code control of

CNO:

There is There is

0

not

DC

code

control

type

2

of CNO:

Executed Not

0

executed

7

Stop

bit of CN1:

1

bit

2

bit 0

Ready signal

of

CN1:

Internal

READY

External

READY

1

Parity

check of

CN1:

Checked Not 0

checked

3

Parity

of CN1:

Even

Odd

0

13

8-bit JIS of CN1:

There

is

There

is 0

not

5

DC code control of C N1: There is There

is

0

not

DC

code control

type 2

of

CN 1:

Executed Not 0

executed

7

Note

1:

With

this

specification,

iftheJIS

7

code is

selected

fordata

transmission,

it

isprocessed

as

the ISO code.

2: If the

setting

is

changedfor these

parameters,

new

settingbecomes

valid

when thepower

is

turned

on

after

it

is

turned

off

once.



4202-E K -16

K.

READ/WRITE

AN D

GET/PUT

FUNCTIONS

(WITH

FILE

INPUT/OUTPUT

FUNCTION)

Initial

Setting

Value

No. bit Contents

Set

1

SetO

Stop bit

of CN2:

1

bit

2

bit 0

Ready signal

of CN2:

Internal

READY

External

READY

1

1

Parity

check

of

CN2:

Checked No t 0

checked

Parity

of

CN2:

Even

Odd

0

14

8-bit JIS of CN2:

There is There

is 0

not

DC

code control

of

CN2: There

is

There

is

0

not

DC code control

type 2

of CN2: Executed Not 0

executed

7

Stop

bit of

CN3:

1

bit

2

bi t

0

Ready signal

of

CN3:

Internal

READY

External

READY

1 1

Parity

check of

CN3: Checked

Not 0

checked

Parity

of CN3: Even Odd 0

21

8-bit

JIS of

CN3:

There

is

There

is 0

not

DC code

control of

CN3:

There

is

There

is

0

not

DC

control type

2

of

CN3:

Executed Not 0

executed

7

Stop

bit of CN4:

1

bit

2

bi t

0

Internal

READY

Ready

signal

of CN4:

External

READY

1

1

Parity

check of

CN4: Checked

Not 0

checked

Parity

of CN4: Even

Odd

0

22

8-bit

JIS of CN4: There

is

There is 0

not

DC

code control of

CN4:

There is There is

0

not

DC code

control

type

2

of CN4: Executed Not

0

executed

7

Note: If

the

setting

is

changed

for these

parameters,

new

setting

becomes

valid

when the

power

is turned

on

after

it

is

turnedoff

once,



4202-

E K-1 7

K.

READ/WRITE

AN D

GET/PUT

FUNCTIONS

(WITH

FILE

INPUT/OUTPUT

FUNCTION)

SECTION 8 ALARM

<Alarm

B>

2493

Read/write

buffer

over

In

execution

of

READ/WRITE

command,

data to be handled exceeds 16 0

bytes.

[Code]

1-> In

execution of

READ command

2

>

In

execution of

WRITE command

Read/write

device NO.494

A

wrong

device number was

specified

for

executing

READ/WRITE

command.

[Code]

The

device

name

was not

specified

with

a

number.

2—

>

The

specified

device

number

is other

than

0 to

4.

2495

Read/write

data

The

READ/WRITE

command has

wrong

data.

[Code]

1->

Parity

error

occurred

in

data reading.

2—

>

The

WRITE

data contains a transfer end code.

2496

Get/put

buffer over

In

execution of

GET/PUT

command,

the number of data is too small o r too

large.

[Code]

1-> In

execution

of GET

command,

the number of received data is

larger

than the number of readout

pointers.

2- >

In

execution of

PUT

command,the

data size exceeds 160

bytes.

2497

Get/put

number of

figure

In

execution of

GET/PUT

command,

the number of

digits

was

wrongly

specified.

[Code]

1->

In

execution of

GE T

command

2—

>

In

execution of PU T command

2498 Get/put

variable

In

execution of

GET/PUT

command,

the data

includes

improper

elements.

[Code] XYY

X:

1->

In

execution of GET command

2- > In

execution of

PUT command



4202-

E

K-18

K.

READ/WRITE

AN D

GET/PUT

FUNCTIONS

(WITH

FILE

INPUT/OUTPUT

FUNCTION)

GET numeric data

During execution of GET

command,

an error

was

found

in

numerical data.

[Code]

1->

Elements other

than number

or

space were found.

2—

>

Tw o or more decimal points were found.

3-> A figure

with 10

or

more

digits

was found.

2499

2500

READ

communication error

An

error

occurred during

data

reception.

[Character-string]

Error number

(4

digits)

[Code] Status code detected

on

occurrence of the error

2501

WRITE

communication error

An

error

occurred

during

data

transmission.

[Character-string]

Error

number (4 digits)

[Code]

Status

code

detected

on

occurrence

of the error

2502

Read/write

no function

The

READ/WRITE

command

specification (user

task

2)

is

not

provided.

2503

Get/put

no

function

The

GET/PUT

command

specification(user

task

2)

is not

provided.

251

7

Read/write

No

empty

SAT

A

file cannot be created

using

FWRITC or

WRITE

C command because

the output

device does not have

enough

free area.

[Code]

Generated error No.

in

hexadecimal

251

8

Read/write

File

open

This alarm occurs

in

file

operation

using

FOPENA/B

or FWRITC command.

[Code]

1->

FOPENA/B

was

used

to

open

two

or

more files.

2- >

FWRITC was used to

open

two

or

more

files.

3-> The

writing

file

already

exists.

4—

>

The

reading

file is not

found.

5->

READ

command

was

given

without

opening

a

file.

6->

WRITE

command was

given

without

opening a

file.

7—

>

File

closing failed.

8->

The

file

close command is

normally

specified.

9—

>

File

attribute

error: the

reading file

is not a

sequential

one.

4 digits

(or

3

digits)—

>

generated

error

number in

decimal



4202-

E

K-19

K.

READ/WRITE

AN D

GET/PUT

FUNCTIONS

(WITH

FILE

INPUT/OUTPUT

FUNCTION)

Unusable

PRINT

request

A

PRINT command was given

during

activation of

READ/WRITE

or

GET/PUT

function.

[Measures to Take]

Do not issue

any

PRINT

command

during

activation of

READ/WRITE

or

GET/PUT

function.

2519

Expression:

syntax

Syntax

error of

expression

[Code]

1

>

Calculation of

subscript expression

is

intended within

calculation

of

subscript expression.

2—

>

No left bracket

“[” at the beginning

of

the

subscript

expression

3

>

More than three subscript expressions

4-> The number

of

the left bracket

“[”

and

that of

the

right

bracket “]” do

not

match.

5—

>

The

number of operands

and

their

handling

elements do

not

match.

6-> The sequence terminates within the

expression.

7—

>

There are more than one solution.

[Probable

Faulty Locations]

Program

error

Program

Example:

VC 1

=

VGCOD [VC[10*2]]]

Delete on e

“]” symbol.

[Measures

to

Take]

Correct the

program.

2206



4202-E K-20-R1

K.

READ/WRITE

AN D

GET/PUT

FUNCTIONS

(WITH

FILE

INPUT/OUTPUT

FUNCTION)

SECTION 9

APPENDIX

Conversion to lower case characters

using

a circumflex accent

( ),

00

0

1

23456789ABCDEF

(SP)

0

@

P

~

p

1

A

Q

a

q

”

2

B

R

b

r

#

3

C S

c

s

$

4

D

T

d t

%

5

E

U

e

u

&

6

F V f

v

’

7

G

W

g

w

(

8

H

X h x

)

9

I Y i

y

J

Z

j

z

K

[

k

(

,

<

L

¥

1

I

-

=

M

]

m

}

.

>

N

*

/

? 0

_

o

(DEL)

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

*

:

B

C

D

(SO)

n

(SI)

Table 9-1

ASCII Code

Table



L.

Hi-CUT



4202-E

L-1

L. Hi-CUT

SECTION

1

OVERVIEW OF

Hi-CUT

In

the

“Hi-Cut”

control

mode,

feedrates

are controlled

during

cutting

corners

and

arcs

meeting

the

shape

of

them to shorten

cutting

time while

maintaining

high

shape

accuracy.



4202-E

L-2

L. Hi-CUT

SECTION 2 Hi-CUT CONTROL FUNCTION

(1)

By designating

the

upper

limit

of

the

cutting

feedrate, which is

determined

according

to

cutting

conditions (workpiece

material,

tool

type, spindle speed,

etc.),

the

maximum

value of

feedrate

is

clamped

at

this

upper

limit.

Therefore,

automatic

feedrate control

which

meets

the

cutting

conditions

is

enabled.

(2) Furthermore,

the

Hi-Cut

control

function

“automatically

determines

the optimum

servo

control

parameters

best fitting to cutting’’

based on

the upper

limit

of feedrate

which

is determined

according

to the

cutting

conditions.

Therefore, high-speed, high-accuracy machining

is

always

possible

regardless

of

cutting

conditions.

(3)

Because

automatic

cutting

feedrate control

in

the Hi-Cut control function

is

carried out while

actual tool

position

is

monitored, machining accuracy is

consistently

high.

1.

Designating

Hi-Cut Control Mode

To turn

on

the Hi-Cut control

function, designate

the

“Hi-CUT

CONTROL ON .

(1)

Se t

the

following parameters

according

to

the

type

of

machining:

(a)

MAXIMUM

FEEDRATE

(b)

WORK TOLERANCE

(2) Designation

of the Hi-Cut

control

mode

is

made

in

the

following

two

methods:

(a) Parameter

setting

(b)

Program

command

(3) The

Hi-Cut

control is effective

only

to

the cutting

feed commands

in

the

“ feed per minutes”

mode

programmed in

the Hi-Cut

control

mode. In

other

words,

the

Hi-Cut control

is

not

effective

to the

rapid

feed commands and

the

feed/rev.

commands

programmed in

the Hi-Cut

control mode.

(4)

Th e

Hi-Cut

control mode

assumes

the machines

having

three basic control

axes,

X,

Y,

and

Z.

Therefore,

it is

not valid for

an

additional

axis

such

as

U, V, W,

A, B,

an d C.

2.

Hi-Cut

Control Parameters

(1)

MAXIMUM

FEEDRATE

(a)

Feedrate

upper limit

sets

the maximum

value

of feedrate

which is

applicable

when

cutting

is

carried out

using

the Hi-Cut control.

Feedrate

upper limit

=

Maximum value

of feedrate command

(b)

Because the

Hi-Cut

control

function

determines automatically the

optimum

servo

control

parameters

using the

feedrate upper limit

value,

consistently

high

accuracy

with

high speed is

guaranteed

for

any

type

of

machining.

Therefore,

if

the maximum feedrate

changes

due to the

change in

the

type

of

machining, it is

recommended to

change

the

setting

for

this

parameter.

(c)

The maximum value

of

feedrate

designated

in

“per

minute” mode is limited

by

this value.



4202-E

L-3

L. Hi-CUT

(2) WORK TOLERANCE

(a) This

parameter

sets the allowable

machining

error when

the

workpiece is machined

using

the

Hi

-Cut control

function.

Tolerance

=

Allowable

machining

error

By sett ing

this

parameter,

the

workpiece

is

finished

within

allowable

error.

(b) Because

the

Hi-Cut

control function controls

cutting

feedrate based on

the

set

tolerance,

it

is

recommended to

se t a

large

value

within allowable error

so that a workpiece

is machined

by

high feedrates.

Du e

to

the

control

characteristic

that diameter reduction

in

arc cutt ing and dulling

at corners

will

become greater

as

higher

feedrate is

used, although

smaller tolerance

reduces

error,

feedrate

is

lowered at the

same elongating

total

cutting

time.

When

cutting

free-formed

curve, which

is approximated with minute motion blocks of line and arc

command

(programmed

shape):

(1)

(c)

In

this

case,

actual

cutting error

is determined

by

the

following

factors:

Error between the

original

surface and the surface

approximated

using

line

segments

-

Machining

toleranc

____

rror between

programmed

shape

and tool

paths

Tool

shape

error

If the

relationship

between the

program

tolerance and

machining

tolerance is

Program

tolerance

<

Machining

tolerance

actual

cutting

error is

as

indicated below.

Allowable

machining

error

>

Actual

machining

error

=

Machining

tolerance

+

Tool

shape error

If

the tool shape

error

is small and

can

be

neglected, designation

of

the

machining

tolerance

as

in

expression

(1),

actual

machining

error is within allowable

machining

error.

However,

if

precise

setting is necessary, the

tolerance must be set as indicated

below.

Tolerance

(machining tolerance)

=

Allowable

machining

error

-

Tool

shape

error

If

the

relationship

as indicated

in

expression

(2)

is not

satisfied, i.e., if the program

tolerance is

greater

than

the

machining tolerance,

actual

machining

error

is

generally

expressed

with

the

following formula.

Allowable

machining

error

>

Actual

machining

error

=

Program

tolerance

+

Tool

shape

error

From

this,

it will

be understood

that

if

the

program

tolerance is

greater

than the allowable

machining

error,

actual

machining

error is

always

greater than

the allowable

machining

error

even

if

the

machining

error

is

set

to a small value.

Therefore,

to machine a

workpiece

within the allowable

machining

error,

it

is

necessary

to set a

smaller value to the

program

tolerance than the allowable

machining

error. To obtain smooth

surface,

setting

of further smaller program tolerance is necessary. From this

point

of

view,

the

program tolerance

should be set to meet

the

following.

Program

tolerance

<

1/2

x

(Allowable machining error)

-

Program

tolerance

(2)

That

is,

Program

tolerance

<

1/2

x

(Machining tolerance)



4202-E

L-4

L. Hi-CUT

3. Hi-Cut

Control

Mode Designation

(1)

Hi-Cut Control Mode

Designation

by Parameters

Operation:

(a)

Select

the

parameter setting

mode.

(b)

Display

the Hi-CUT CONTROL PARAMETER

setting

screen

by pressing

function

ke y

[F6]

(ITEMf)

or

[F7]

(ITEM

J,

).

(c)

Place the

cursor

at the

required

data column

of

theparameter

for which the

setting

is to

be

changed by using

the cursor control keys.

(§)

,

({£)

(d)

Set

the data for the

parameter

after pressing function key

[F1]

(SET) or

function

key

[F2]

(ADD).

1) Function

key

[F1]

(SET)

After

pressing

[F1],

input the required data.

2)

Function

key

[F2]

(ADD)

After

pressing

[F2],

input

an increment

value

in

reference to the

currently

set

data.

The

unit

for

setting conforms to the

unit

designated

for data setting.

I

PARAMATER

97/07/15

14:10:00

*

Hi-CUT

CONTROL PARAMETER

*

1mm

1

Hi-CUT CONTROL MODE

2 MAXIMUM

FEEDRATE

3

WORK TOLERANCE

6000.000

0.050

X Y

Z

ACT POSIT

CMC)

i°s«r

0.000 0.000

ITEM

t

ITEM

l

[EXTEND]

ET

ADD

rrrÿfFÿrrTi(TTÿ(Tÿrÿ~6irF~7if?~B~)

1.

Hi-CUT CONTROL

[1]

:

Hi-Cut

control

mode

ON

[0]

:

Hi-Cut control

mode OFF

The data

set

below is

effective

when the

Hi-Cut

control mode is

on,

that is

setting

for

Hi-CUT

CONTROL

is

“1”.

2.

MAXIMUM FEEDRATE

Set the

upper

limit of the feedrate which is applied

in

the Hi-Cut control mode.



4202-E L-5

L. Hi-CUT

3.

WORK TOLERANCE

Set

the

tolerance which is applied

in


Setting

of a value smaller than 0.003

mm

is

not allowed.

(2)

Hi-Cut Control

Mode

Designat ion by Program

To

conduct the Hi-Cut control for

only

a

required

part

in

the

program

or

to

change

the

Hi-Cut control

parameter

setting

according to

the part

to be machined, the Hi-Cut control mode

designation

in

a

program

is convenient.

(a)

To carry

out or

cancel the

Hi-Cut

control mode, designate the

following

G codes.

G187F

E

Hi-Cut control mode

ON

Hi-Cut

control mode

OFF

(Cancellation of G187)

186

Follow the

program

unit

system

for the

unit

of

command

(b) Designate

the G187 and G186

blocks

at

the

beginning

and at the end of

blocks

for which

the

Hi-Cut

control

mode is

required.

These

G

codes

must

be designated

in

individual

blocks and

other commands

must

not be

written

in

the same

block.

(c)

When the Hi-Cut

control

mode

called by

the programmed G

code

is

ON, the

Hi-Cut

control

mode designated

by

the

setting

of

the

parameter

becomes

al l ineffective.

(d)

When the Hi-Cut control mode

called by

the

programmed

G

code

is

OFF,

i.e.,

after the

designation

of

G186

or

resetting the

control,

the

Hi-Cut

control

mode

ON/OFF

status

is

determined

by

the

setting

of

the

parameter.

(e)

Designate the

following

address characters and data words

following

the

G187

code.

Although

they

can

de

designated

in

any

order,

both

E

and

F

commands must

always

be

designated.

1)

F

(maximum

feedrate)

Designate

the upper limit feedrate applied

in


An F

command

in

the G1

87

block does not

specify

a linear

cutting

feedrate.

Designate

the

actual

feedrate in

a block other than the

G187

block.

If

no

F

command is

designated

in

the

G187

block,

an

alarm

occurs

and the

following message

is

displayed

on

the

screen.

Alarm message:

2243

Dataword:

F’

2) E (work tolerance)

Designate

the

machining

tolerance

amount

used in

the

Hi-Cut

control mode.

If

no

E

command

is

designated in

the

G187

block,

an

alarm occurs

and

the

following

message

is

displayed

on

the

screen.

Alarm

message:

2388

Data

word:

‘E’

Designation

of

a

value smaller than 0.003 mm for this parameter is

ignored

and

is

replaced with

0.003

mm

automatically.



4202-E

L-6/E

L. Hi-CUT

4.

Hi-Cut

Control Guide

In

the Check

Data pages accessible

in

the automatic

operation

mode,

the

Hi-CUT GUIDE

page

is

contained.

Using

this

display

page,

the Hi-Cut control

setting

and state

can

be monitored.

To

display

the Hi-CUT GUIDE

page,

follow the

any

of the

procedure

indicated below:

(1)

After

pressing

function

key

[F7]

(CHECK

DATA),

press

the

PAGE

ke y

repeatedly

until

the

Hi-CUT GUIDE

page

is

displayed.

(2)

Press function

key

[F5] (SEARCH)

and

the

WRITE

key

to

display

the CHECK

DATA

DIRECTORY page. Using this page, key in the

number

corresponding

to

the

Hi-CUT GUIDE

page to

directly

display

the

required

page.

0100

N2148

ii

AUTO

OPERATION

TEST.

MIN

I

97/07/15

14:10:00

*

Hi-CUT

GUIDE

*

PAGE

78

1mm

Hi-CUT

CONTROL

NONE EXECUTE

PROGRAM

G

1

8

7

PARAMETER

Hi-CUT CONTROL

MAXIMUM

FEEDRATE

WORK

TOLERANCE

CONDITION

EXIST

6000.000

0.050

F

E

ACTUAL PART

BLOCK

POSIT.

PROGRAM

DATA

CHECK

SEARCH

ATC/APC

DATA

PROGRAM

SELECT

[EXTEND]

(Tji(Tÿ(Tÿ(TÿrFT)frÿfFÿrrr)

1.

Hi-CUT CONTROL

NONE EXECUTE Indicates that the Hi-Cut control

is

not effective.

EXECUTE

2.

PROGRAM, PARAMETER

Indicates

which of the

settings

is effective to activate

the Hi-Cut

control;

currently

used

setting

is

indicated by

the

reverse

display.

3.

G187

Hi-CUT

CONTROL

Indicates the current tolerance mode

on/off

state.

OFF The

Hi-Cut control

mode

is off.

Indicates that the Hi-Cut cont rol is effective.

Okuma Manuals 391

Documents

Transcript of Okuma Manuals 391